352 353 452 453 PDF

SERVICE HANDBOOK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO350/450
e-STUDIO352/452
e-STUDIO353/453
Model: DP-3520/3540/4520/4540
Publish Date: November 2003
File No. SHE030005S0
R03092141302-TTEC
Ver19_2008-07
Trademarks
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.

The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other
Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
iCLASS is a trademark of HID Corporation.
MIFARE is a trademark of Royal Philips Electronics.
Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.
08/04
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION

AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation / Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions
as indicated below.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 83kg (182.98 lb.): e-STUDIO350/450 /
86kg (189.59 lb.): e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 therefore pay fullattention when handling it.
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment.
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/13.2A, 115V or 127V / 12A, 220-240V or 240V /
8A for its power source.
The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.
Select a suitable place for installation.
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.
Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) in the rear.
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
07/11
2) Service of Machines
- Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the
damp heater and their periphery.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, IH control circuit,
high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and
power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the
electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the machines with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.
- Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.
- Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.
Avoid direct exposure to the beam.Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path
of the laser beam.Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more.
A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
3) Main Service Parts for Safety
- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for
instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the
parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the
power cord during service, Hot area, Laser warning label etc. to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.
5) Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing
materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6) When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless
otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble
small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong
places.
7) Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
8) Precautions Against Static Electricity
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and
make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
07/06
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
06/09
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO350/450
1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES .................................. 1-1

1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453...................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 System List .......................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................... 1-10
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1

2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-13
2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-22
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-25
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)................................................... 2-27
2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)..................................... 2-34
2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-42
2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-45
2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450) ........................................................... 2-46
2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................. 2-64
2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450).................................................................. 2-82
2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................................................. 2-144
2.2.9 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-243
2.2.10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
(e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................................................................. 2-251
2.2.11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................................................... 2-258
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-7
3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-12
3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21
3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-21
3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-22
3.3.4 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-23
3.3.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-23
3.3.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-24
3.3.7 Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 > .............................. 3-24
3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-25
3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-25
3.4.2 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-25
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-26
3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-26
3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-27
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
CONTENTS
1
05/12
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-28

3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-28
Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer .......................................................................... 3-29
3.6.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-29
3.6.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-38
Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-40
3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-45
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-48
3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-48
Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-49
3.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap .............................................................................................. 3-49
Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015).................................................................................. 3-52
3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-52
3.10.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-57
3.10.3 Adjustment of skew ................................................................................................ 3-59
3.10.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-60
3.10.5 Adjustment of aligning ............................................................................................ 3-61
3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing ........................................................................ 3-62
3.10.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-63
3.10.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-65
3.10.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ......................................................... 3-66
3.10.10Adjustment of tray volume ..................................................................................... 3-67
Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-68
3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-68
3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-73
3.11.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-75
3.11.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-78
3.11.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-79
3.11.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-81
3.11.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-82
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-83
3.12.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-83
3.12.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-85
3.12.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-86
3.12.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-87
3.12.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-89
3.12.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-90
3.12.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-92
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)....................................................................... 3-93
3.13.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)...................................................... 3-93
3.13.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................ 3-94
3.13.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................ 3-96
3.13.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) .......................... 3-98
3.13.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................... 3-99
3.13.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-100
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101).............................................................................. 3-101
3.14.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position .......................................................................... 3-101
3.14.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................. 3-103
3.14.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings ................................................................. 3-105
3.14.4 Stopping Position Adjustment (MJ-6101:Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-107
Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .................................................................................. 3-109
Adjustment of Dogleg ...................................................................................................... 3-111
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1

4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
CONTENTS
2
06/01
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-6
General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance Performed Every 120,000 Output
Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)) ..... 4-7
Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-8
Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353)
and 75,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)............................................................ 4-9
Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10
PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-29
Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-30
Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-31
Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-32
4.9.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-32
4.9.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-33
4.9.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade...................................................... 4-34
4.9.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-34
4.9.5 Checking and replacing the cleaning roller ............................................................ 4-35
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-14
5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-21
5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-26
5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-32
5.1.6 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-56
5.1.7 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-57
5.1.8 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-63
5.1.9 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-65
5.1.10 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-69
5.1.11 RADF related service call (MR-3015)..................................................................... 5-70
5.1.12 RADF related service call (MR-3018)..................................................................... 5-71
5.1.13 Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018) ................................................... 5-71
5.1.14 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-72
5.1.15 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-91
5.1.16 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-94
5.1.17 Image control related service call ......................................................................... 5-108
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-109
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-131
5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-131
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-134
5.3.3 Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed ............................. 5-136
5.3.4 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-136
5.3.5 Replacing or clearing NVRAM.............................................................................. 5-139
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................... 6-3
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-5
6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) .......................................................................... 6-11
6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) .............................. 6-20
6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................... 6-34
6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ........................................................................... 6-36
6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-50
6.2.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-52
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
CONTENTS
3
07/06
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450) ................ 6-66
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450).................................. 6-79
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................... 6-91
Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.1 e-STUDIO350/450................................................................................................ 6-115
6.6.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................. 6-116
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4
8.
REMOTE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11
8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.2 Setting (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.3 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................ 8-18
8.2.4 Setting (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ..................................................................... 8-23
8.2.5 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .................................................. 8-29
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .......... 9-1

10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1

DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)...................................................................... Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450) ....................................................................... Appendix
DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO352/452)...................................................................... Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/452) ....................................................................... Appendix
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
CONTENTS
4
05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1.1
Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO450/452/453 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO350/
352/353 and e-STUDIO450/452/453.
Copy process
Type
Original table
Accepted originals
Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)

Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large
capacity feeder (LCF) are installed)
Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled.
Carbon paper are not acceptable either.
Maximum size: A3/LD
Single - sided originals
Double - sided originals
MR-3015
50 to 127 g/m2
(13 lb. Bond to 34 lb. Bond)
50 to 105 g/m2
(13 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
MR-3018
35 to 157 g/m2
50 to 157 g/m2
(9.3 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover) (13 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover)
Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353
Paper size
A4, LT, B5
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG
A3, LD
Drawer
35
25
21
18
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
35
18
25
18
21
18
18
18
PFP
LCF
35
25
35
-
21
18
PFP
LCF
45
28
45
-
24
21
e-STUDIO450/452/453
Paper size
A4, LT, B5
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG
A3, LD
*
*
*
Drawer
45
28
24
21
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
40
21
28
21
24
21
21
21
means Not acceptable.

The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.
When the RADF is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions:
Original/Mode:
Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected.
Number of sheets:
35[45] or more.
Paper feeding:
LCF
Reproduction ratio: 100%
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-1
07/11
System copy speed

Sec.
Copy mode
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
Single-sided originals
Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
Single-sided copies
e-STUDIO350/352/353
20.85
57.95
91.20
27.42
62.18
97.55
55.47
126.21
196.93
48.22
117.44
184.96
e-STUDIO450/452/453
17.49
46.68
73.50
25.71
57.41
89.03
54.68
118.07
181.36
48.20
102.18
155.06
*
*
*
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original
are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the left table is selected. The period of time from
pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured
value.
Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode.
Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off.
Finisher is not installed.
Copy paper
Drawer
Size
Weight
Special
paper
ADU
PFP
A3 to A5-R
LD to ST-R
LCF
Bypass copy
A4, LT
A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R
(Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.)
g/m2
64 to 105
17 to 28 lb.
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 to 55
lb.(Continuous feeding)
50 to 209 g/m2, 13 to 55 lb.
(Single paper feeding)
Tracing paper, labels,
OHP film (thickness: 80m
or thicker)
Remarks
These special paper

recommended
by Toshiba Tec
y First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352/353: Approx. 3.9sec. or less

e-STUDIO450/452/453: Approx. 3.9sec. or less
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
y Warming-up time .................. Approx. 20 seconds (temperature: 20C)
y Multiple copying.................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
y Reproduction ratio ................ Actual ratio: 1000.5%
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
(25 to 200% when using RADF)
y Resolution/Gradation............ Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi
Gradation: 256 steps
y Eliminated portion................. Leading edges: 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (print)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-2
07/11
y Paper feeding ....................... Automatic feeding:

Standard drawers2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550
sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
PFPOption (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to
550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
LCFOption (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64
to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
Bypass feeding:
(Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22
lb.))
y Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)
.................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less)
y Automatic duplexing unit ...... Stackless, Switchback type
y Toner supply ......................... Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method
y Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
y Weight .................................. 83 kg, 183 lb. (e-STUDIO350/450)
86 kg, 189.59 lb. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
y Power requirements ............. AC 110 V (10%) / 13.2 A, 115 V (10%) or 127 V (10%) / 12 A
220-240 V (10%) or 240 V (10%) / 8 A
y Power consumption.............. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment.
y Total counter......................... Electronical counter
y Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below
W660 x D718 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO350/450)
W660 x D758 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
y When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
D
45
Fig. 1-1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-3
07/11
1.2
Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction
Operators manual
Operator's manual pocket
Power cable
Warranty sheet
Setup report
PM sticker
Drum (installed inside of the equipment)
Toner bag
Toner cartridge
Developer material
Operation panel stopper
Blind seal
Rubber plug
CD-ROM
Platen cover
1 set
4 pcs. (except for MJD)
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc. (for NAD)
1 set (for NAD and MJD)
1 pc. (for MJD)
1 pc. (for MJD)
1 pc.
1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD)
1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD)
1 pc.
1 pcs
4 pcs.
4 pcs.
1 pc. (for CND)
Machine version
NAD:
North America
MJD:
Europe
AUD:
Australia
ASD:
Central and South America / Hong Kong / Asia
TWD:
Taiwan
SAD
Saudi Arabia
JPD:
Japan
CND:
China
ASU:
Asia
KRD:
Korea
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-4
05/11
1.3
1.3.1
Options
1
e-STUDIO350/450
Platen cover
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer module
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Finisher (Hanging type)
Finisher (Console type)
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type)
Hole punch unit
Staple cartridge
Bridge kit
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Key Copy Counter
Work Tray
Damp Heater
Fax Board
2nd Line for Fax Board
Wireless LAN Adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer Kit
Printer/Scanner Kit
Scanner upgrade Kit
Desk
Data overwrite kit
*
1) N: North America
E: Europe
KA-3511PC/PC-C
MR-3015
MY-1021/-C
KD-1011/-C
KD-1012 A4/LT/A4-C
MJ-1022/-C
MJ-1023/-C
MJ-1024/-C
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S *1
STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
KN-3520/-C
MJ-5004/-C
MJ-5005/-C
MU-8, MU-10
KK-3511
MF-3520 U/E
GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/TW/C/AS
GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C
GN-1010
GO-1030
GP-1030
GM-1010
GM-2010
GM-3010
MH-1700
GP-1050
F: France
S: Sweden
Notes:
1. The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or
MJ-1024).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-5
05/11
1.3.2
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Platen cover
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer module
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Finisher (Hanging type) : e-STUDIO352 only
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type)
Hole punch unit (for MJ-1101)
Hole punch unit (for MJ-1023/1024)
Staple cartridge
Bridge kit
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Work Tray
Damp Heater
Fax Board
2nd Line for Fax Board
Printer Kit
Printer/Scanner Kit
Scanner Kit
Printer ELK
Printer/Scanner ELK
Scanner ELK
Memory
Scrambler board
Wireless LAN module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
Data overwrite kit
PCI slot
Desk
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (HID iClass)
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (MIFARE)
Harness kit for coin controller
KA-3511PC
MR-3018
MY-1021/-C
KD-1011/-C
KD-1012 LT/A4/A4-C
MJ-1022/-C
MJ-1101
MJ-1023/-C
MJ-1024/-C
MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024)
KN-3520/-C
MJ-5004/-C
MJ-5005/-C
KK-3511
MF-3520 U/E
GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW/KR
GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW
GM-1060/1061
GM-2060/2061
GM-4060
GM-1120
GM-2120
GM-4120
GC-1230
GP-1040
GN-1041
GN-2010
GN-3010
GP-1060
GO-1060
MH-1700
KP-2004
KP-2005
GQ-1020
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-6
08/04
Notes:
1. The bridge kit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023/1024
or MJ-1101).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023/1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/
F/S). The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/
F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040).
4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and
Bluetooth module (GN-2010).
5. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the Bluetooth module (GN-2010) are
installed, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
6. The Printer kit (GM-1060) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060) does not have a function for printing an XPS file.
7. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer kit (GM-1061) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM2061), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.
8. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer ELK (GM-1120) or Printer/Scanner ELK
(GM-2120), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1-7
07/11
1.4
Supplies
Drum
Toner bag
Toner cartridge
Developer
*
*
2) N: Asia
3) T: Taiwan
OD-3500
PS-TB3520 /E/N *2
PS-ZT3520 /T/D/C/E *3 (e-STUDIO350/352/450/452)
PS-ZT3520C *3, PS-ZT4520 /E *3 (e-STUDIO353/453)
D-3500
E: Europe
D: Asia
NONE: North America

C: China
E: Europe
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
NONE: North America
1-8
07/11
1-9
05/11
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-600
Finisher
(Console saddle
stitcher type)
MJ-1024
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000
2nd Line for

FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU/TW/C
FAX Board
GD-1150
NA/AU/EU/
TW/C/AS
Drawer Module
MY-1021
PCI Slot
GO-1030
Offset Tray
MJ-5005
Job Separator
MJ-5004
Scrambler
Board
GP-1030
Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Bridge Kit
KN-3520
Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011
Wireless LAN
Adapter
GN-1010
Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover
KA-3511
Desk
MH-1700
Scanner
Upgrade Kit
GM-3010
Printer/
Scanner Kit
GM-2010
Printer Kit
GM-1010
Data overwrite kit

GP-1050
Damp Heater
MF-3520 U/E
Key Copy Counter

MU-8, MU-10
Work Tray
KK-3511
1.5.1
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600
Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF)
MR-3015
1.5
System List
e-STUDIO350/450
1
Fig. 1-2
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1 - 10
08/04
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1101
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2400
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-600
Finisher
(Console saddle
stitcher type)
MJ-1024
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600
Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022
Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
2nd Line for

FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU-N/TW/C
FAX Board
GD-1200
NA/EU/AU/AS/
C/TW/KR
Drawer Module
MY-1021
Scrambler
Board
GP-1040
Offset Tray
MJ-5005
Job Separator
MJ-5004
Bridge Kit
KN-3520
Damp Heater
MF-3520 U/E
Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011
PCI Slot
GO-1060
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF)
MR-3018
Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover
KA-3511
Desk
MH-1700
Memory
GC-1230
Data
Overwrite Kit
GP-1060
Printer/
Scanner Kit.ELK
GM-2060/2061
GM-2120
Scanner Kit.ELK
GM-4060
GM-4120
Printer Kit.ELK
GM-1060/1061
GM-1120
Antenna
GN-3010
Bluetooth
Module
GN-2010
Wireless LAN
Module
GN-1041
Work Tray
KK-3511
e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2005
e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2004
1.5.2
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Fig. 1-3
2.
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1
Error Code List
One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button
and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the CLEAR PAPER or CALLSERVICE symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code
E010
Classification
Paper exit jam
E020
E030
Other paper jam
E061
E062
E063
E064
E065
E090
E110
E120
E130
E140
E150
Paper misfeeding
Contents
Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be
printed cannot be prepared.
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU does not reach the registration sensor during
duplex printing.
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray
does not reach the registration sensor.
Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed
sensor.
Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed
sensor.
PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.
Troubleshooting
P. 5-1
P. 5-1
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-3
P. 5-14
P. 5-15
P. 5-16
P. 5-17
P. 5-18
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2-1
06/06
Error code
E160
Classification
Paper misfeeding
E190
E200
Paper transport jam
E210
E220
E300
E310
E320
E330
E340
E350
E360
E3C0
E3D0
Contents
Troubleshooting
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching

the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not
reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer
feed sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper
drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the
upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the
lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-19
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-20
P. 5-3
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-5
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-5
P. 5-6
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
2-2
Error code
Classification
E3E0
Paper transport jam
E400
Cover open jam
E410
E420
E430
E440
E450
E480
E490
E491
E510
Paper transport jam

(ADU section)
E520
E550
Other paper jam
E711
RADF jam
E712
E713
E714
E721
E722
E723
Contents
Troubleshooting
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower

drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the
lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the
LCF feed sensor.
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover
has opened during printing.
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened
during printing.
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has
opened during printing.
The ADU has opened during printing.
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened
during printing.
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has
opened during printing.
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened
during printing.
Job separator cover open jam: The job separator
cover has opened during printing.
Offset tray cover open jam: The offset tray cover
has opened during printing.
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.
Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The
paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).
Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The
original fed from the original feeding tray does not
reach the original length sensor.
Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach
the registration sensor.
Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing
edge of the original does not pass the original
length sensor after its leading edge has reached
this sensor.
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning):
The original which passed the read sensor does not
reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the
scanning section to exit section.
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor
does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.
P. 5-5
P. 5-21
P. 5-21
P. 5-22
P. 5-22
P. 5-23
P. 5-23
P. 5-24
P. 5-24
P. 5-25
P. 5-7
P. 5-8
P. 5-9
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-27
P. 5-27
P. 5-27
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2-3
Error code
E724
Classification
RADF jam
E725
E726
E731
E741
E742
E743
E860
E870
E910
Finisher jam (Bridge

unit)
E920
E930
E940
E950
Job separator jam
E951
E960
Offset tray jam
E961
Contents
Troubleshooting
Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing

edge of the original does not pass the registration
sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives
the transport/exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting
position.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of
the original does not pass the reversal sensor after
its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during
reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original
does not reach the reverse sensor when original is
fed from the reverse section.
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse
feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the
original is exited from the reverse section.
Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has
opened during RADF operation.
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF
operation.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The
paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor-1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit
transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-1.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge
unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-2.
Jam not reaching the job separator transport
switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the job separator transport
switch.
Stop jam at the job separator transport switch: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport switch.
Jam not reaching the offset tray transport switch:
The paper has passed through the exit sensor does
not reach the offset tray transport switch.
Stop jam at the offset tray transport switch: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset
tray transport switch.
P. 5-28
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-28
P. 5-28
P. 5-29
P. 5-29
P. 5-30
P. 5-30
P. 5-30
P. 5-31
P. 5-32
P. 5-32
P. 5-32
P. 5-32
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
2-4
06/01
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E9F0
Finisher jam (Puncher

unit)
P. 5-50
EA10
Finisher jam (Finisher

unit)
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.

[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has
passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101]
Paper transport stop jam:
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or
processing tray sensor. [MJ-1023/1024]
(3) The paper which has passed through the inlet
sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ1101]
Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ1101]
Power-ON jam:
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON.
[MJ-1023/1024]
EA20
EA21
EA30
EA31
EA32
EA40
EA50
EA60
EA70
EA80
EA90
EAA0
Finisher jam (Saddle

stitcher unit)
Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper

which has passed through the inlet sensor does not
reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101]
Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining
on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON.
[MJ-1101]
Door open jam:
(1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022]
(2) The upper/front cover of the finisher unit or the
upper/front door of the puncher unit has opened
during printing. [MJ-1023/1024]
(3) The front cover or stationary tray cover is
opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101]
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.[MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101]
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/
1024/1101]
Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack
tray. [MJ-1022]
Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit
belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1024]
Door open jam: The delivery cover or the inlet cover
has opened during printing [MJ-1024].
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor,
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-33
P. 5-35
P. 5-36
P. 5-37
P. 5-38
P. 5-38
P. 5-39
P. 5-42
P. 5-44
P. 5-45
P. 5-47
P. 5-47
P. 5-48
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2-5
06/01
Error code
EAB0
Classification
Finisher jam (Saddle
stitcher unit)
EAC0
EAD0
Other paper jam
EAE0
Finisher jam
EAF0
Finisher jam (Finisher

unit)
EB30
Finisher jam
EB50
Paper transport jam
EB60
ED10
Finisher
(Puncher unit)
ED11
ED12
Finisher
ED13
ED14
ED15
ED16
Contents
Troubleshooting
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed

through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024]
Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached
the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024]
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has
not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board
at the end of printing.
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been
interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher.
Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which
passed through the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022]
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).
Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position
detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101
is installed)]
P. 5-48
Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at

the home position. [MJ-1101]
Front alignment plate home position error: The front
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the
home position. [MJ-1101]
Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-53
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-49
P. 5-51
P. 5-51
P. 5-46
P. 5-51
P. 5-11
P. 5-13
P. 5-52
P. 5-52
P. 5-53
P. 5-54
P. 5-54
P. 5-55
2-6
07/11
2.1.2
Service call
Error code
C010
C040
Classification
Drive system related
service call
Paper feeding system
related service call
C130
C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1B0
C260
Scanning system
C270
C280
C410
C440
Fuser unit related service call
Contents
Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not
rotating normally.
PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from
any drawer except the PFP)
Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer
tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the upper drawer)
Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer
tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is
fed from any drawer except the lower drawer)
PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper
drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP
upper drawer)
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower
drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP
lower drawer)
LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is
not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally.
(the case that paper can be fed from any drawer
except the LCF)
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF)
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
(white reference) is not detected when power is
turned ON.
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not shift from its home position in a specified period
of time.
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not reach to its home position in a specified period
of time.
Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON:
Abnormality of service call the thermistor is
detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified
period of time after power is turned ON.
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The
temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the
range of control (in this case, the main switch turns
OFF automatically) or does not even reach the
range.
Troubleshooting
P. 5-56
P. 5-57
2
P. 5-58
P. 5-58
P. 5-59
P. 5-59
P. 5-60
P. 5-61
P. 5-62
P. 5-63
P. 5-64
P. 5-64
P. 5-65
P. 5-66
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2-7
Error code
Classification
C450
C470
C480
C490
C550
(C780)
C570
C580
C730
C740
C810
C820
C830
C940
C970
CA10
CA20
CB00
CB01
CB10
CB11
CB12
Contents
Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality

of the thermistor is detected during printing.
IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality:
The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit
normally, or the input voltage is too high/low.
Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT
rises abnormally.
IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality
is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/
shorted.
Optional communicaRADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred
tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner.
Communication error between Engine-CPU and
IPC board
Communication error between IPC board and finisher
RADF related
EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialservice call
ized normally when performing the code 05-356.
Reverse sensor adjustment error
Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally.
Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor
cannot be adjusted normally when performing the
code 05-356.
Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally
when performing the code 05-356.
Circuit related service Engine-CPU abnormality
call
High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of
Process related service call
the main charger is detected.
Laser optical unit
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor
is not rotating normally.
H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board
cannot detect laser beams.
Finisher related
Finisher not connected: The finisher is not conservice call
nected.
Finisher communication error: Communication error
has occurred between the equipment and finisher.
Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray
guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer
roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Troubleshooting
P. 5-66
P. 5-67
P. 5-68
P. 5-68
P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-91
P. 5-91
P. 5-71
P. 5-71
P. 5-72
P. 5-72
P. 5-72
2-8
06/06
Error code
CB20
CB30
CB31
CB40
CB50
CB51
CB60
CB80
CB81
CB90
CBA0
CBB0
CBC0
CBD0
CBE0
Classification
Finisher related
service call
Contents
Troubleshooting
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022]
Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable
tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is
Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor
does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101]
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is not rotating or the front alignment
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024]
Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101]
Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101]
Stapler unit shift motor abnormality: The stapler unit
shift motor is not rotating or the stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024/1101]
Backup RAM data abnormality:
(1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller board is detected when the power is turned
on. [MJ-1023/1024]
(2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch driver
board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
RAM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value
on finisher controller PC board is detected when the
power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum
value on finisher controller PC board is detected
when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is
not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.
[MJ-1024]
P. 5-72
P. 5-73
2
P. 5-74
P. 5-74
P. 5-75
P. 5-75
P. 5-76
P. 5-76
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-78
P. 5-78
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2-9
06/01
Error code
CBF0
Classification
Finisher related
service call
CC00
CC10
CC20
CC30
CC31
CC40
CC41
CC50
CC51
CC52
CC60
CC61
CC71
CC72
Contents
Troubleshooting
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper

positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position
sensor is disconnected. [MJ- 1024]
Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed,
inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover
switch is open. [MJ-1024]
Communication error between finisher and saddle
stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller board and saddle stitcher controller board
[MJ-1023/1024]
Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt
is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is
not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-78
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/
1024]
Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The
paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is
not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ6004 is installed)]
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality:
Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or
puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when
MJ-6101 is installed)
Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew
adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not
shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/
1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
Punch motor (M3) home position detection error:
Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-80
P. 5-81
P. 5-81
P. 5-82
P. 5-82
P. 5-82
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
2 - 10
06/01
Error code
CC80
Classification
Finisher related
service call
CC90
CCA0
CCB0
CCD0
CCE0
CCF0
CDE0
CDF0
Offset tray related service call
CE00
Finisher related service call
CE50
Image control related

service call
CF10
F070
Communication
Other service call
F090
F091
F092
F100
F101
F102
F103
Contents
Troubleshooting
Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment

motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging
motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1023/1024]
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not
rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101]
Initialization error of the offset tray: The home position of the separator cannot be detected when the
power is turned ON.
Communication error between finisher unit and
puncher unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC
board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range.
P. 5-85
Undefined error code processing: If the engine of

the equipment judges that a code (command) other
than the defined error codes is sent from the finisher, it regards this as a CF10 error.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
Communication module SRAM writing failure.
[MJ-1101]
Communication error between System-CPU and
Engine-CPU
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally.
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be
detected.
HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be
performed in the specified period of time.
P. 5-86
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-89
P. 5-91
P. 5-89
P. 5-108
P. 5-90
P. 5-69
P. 5-91
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 11
07/06
Error code
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F110
F111
F120
Classification
Other service call
Communication
Other service call
F130
F200
Contents
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data
of HDD.
HDD other error
Point and Print partition damage
/SHR partition damage
/SHA partition damage
Communication error between System-CPU and
Scanner-CPU
Scanner response abnormality
Database abnormality: Database is not operating
normally.
Invalid MAC address
Data overwrite Kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Troubleshooting
P. 5-92
P. 5-92
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
2 - 12
05/11
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error

(When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/
4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code
1C10
1C11
1C12
1C13
1C14
1C15
1C20
1C21
1C22
1C30
1C31
1C32
1C33
1C40
1C60
1C61
1C62
1C63
1C64
1C65
1C66
1C67
1C68
1C69
1C6A
1C6B
1C6C
1C6D
1C70
1C71
1C72
1C80
1C81
1C82
1CC0
1CC1
Classification
Troubleshooting
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-94
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-94
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
System access abnormality

Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity
System management module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
HDD full failure during processing
Address Book reading failure
Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error
Terminal mail address error
Destination mail address error
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Job canceling
Power failure
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-95
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-95
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 13
07/11
2) RFC related error

Error code
2500
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Syntax error, command unrecognized
2501
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
2503
Bad sequence of commands
2504
2550
Command parameter not implemented

Mailbox unavailable
2551
User not local
2552
Insufficient system storage
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Contents
HOST NAME error (RFC: 500)
(RFC: 500)
(RFC: 500)
HOST NAME error (RFC: 501)
(RFC: 501)
(RFC: 501)
(RFC: 503)
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 504)
(RFC: 550)
(RFC: 551)
Terminal/Destination mail address
error
(RFC: 552)
(RFC: 553)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Troubleshooting
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97
2 - 14
07/11
3) Electronic Filing related error

Error code
2B10
2B11
2B20
2B21
2B30
2B31
2B32
2B50
2B51
2B60
2B70
2B71
2B80
2B90
2BA0
2BA1
2BB0
2BB1
2BC0
2BC1
2BD0
2BE0
2BF0
2BF1
2BF2
There was no applicable job.
Contents
No applicable job error in job control

module
Job status failed.
JOB status abnormality
Failed to access file.
File library function error
Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity
imum size
Insufficient disk space.
Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition
Failed to access Electronic Filing.
Status of specified Electronic Filing
or folder is undefined or being created/deleted
Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure:
ment.
Specified document can not be
printed because of clients access
(being edited, etc.).
Failed to process image.
Image library error
Failed to process print image.
List library error
The folder was renamed. A folder of A folder with the same name exists in
the same name already existed.
the box.
The document was renamed. A doc- A document with the same name
ument of the same name already
exists in the box or folder.
existed.
Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days
exist
Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /SHR partition is
nearly full.
nearly full (90%).
Insufficient Memory.
Insufficient memory capacity
Invalid Box password specified.
Invalid Box password
Incorrect paper size
A Paper size not supported in the
Electronic Filing function is being
selected.
Job canceled
Job canceling
Power failure occurred
Power failure
System fatal error.
Fatal failure occurred
Failed to acquire resource.
System management module
resource acquiring failure
Power failure occurred during e-FilPower failure occurred during restoring restoring.
ing of Electronic Filing
Failed to get machine parameter.
Machine parameter reading failure
Maximum number of page range is
Exceeding maximum number of
reached.
pages
Maximum number of document
Exceeding maximum number of docrange is reached.
uments
Maximum number of folder range is
Exceeding maximum number of foldreached.
ers
Troubleshooting
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
-
P. 5-98
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 15
07/11
4) E-mail related error

Error code
2C10
2C11
2C12
2C13
2C14
2C15
Illegal Job status
2C20
Not enough memory

Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
Message size exceeded limit or maximum size
Illegal Job status
2C21
Illegal Job status
2C22
Illegal Job status
2C30
2C31
2C32
2C33
Failed to create directory

Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
2C40
2C43
2C44
Failed to convert image file format

Encryption error. Failed to create file.
Creating the image file was not permitted.
Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space.
Failed to read AddressBook
Not enough memory
Invalid Domain Address
Invalid Domain Address
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Invalid address specified in From:
field
Invalid address specified in To: field
2C60
2C61
2C62
2C63
2C64
2C65
2C66
2C67
2C68
2C69
2C6A
2C6B
2C6C
2C6D
2C70
2C71
2C72
2C80
2C81
2CC0
2CC1
Contents
Troubleshooting
P. 5-100
Insufficient memory
Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
System management module access

abnormality
P. 5-100

File access failure
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100
P. 5-100

Encryption error
Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-100
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
Address Book reading failure

Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
P. 5-101
P. 5-100
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-102
Destination mail address error (No

RFC error)
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
P. 5-102
NIC system error

SMTP service is not available
Failed SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP Authentication
Failed
Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Failed to process received Fax job
Process failure of FAX job received
Job canceled
Job canceling
Power failure
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-100
P. 5-101
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
2 - 16
07/11
5) File sharing related error

2D20
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
There are too many documents in the
folder. Failed in creating new document.
Illegal Job status
2D21
Illegal Job status
2D22
Illegal Job status
2D30
2D31
2D32
2D33
2D40
2D43
2D44
Failed to create directory

Failed to delete file
Failed to convert image file format
Encryption error. Failed to create file.
Creating the image file was not permitted.
Failed to copy file
Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path
Specified network path is invalid. Check
destination path
Logon to file server failed. Check username and password
There are too many documents in the
folder. Failed in creating new document.
Failed to process your Job. Insufficient
disk space.
FTP service is not available
File Sharing service is not available
Expired scan documents deleted from
share folder.
Expired Sent Fax documents deleted
from shared folder.
Expired Received Fax documents
deleted from shared folder.
Scanned documents in shared folder
deleted upon users request.
Sent Fax Documents in shared folder
deleted upon users request.
Received Fax Documents in shared
folder deleted upon users request.
Failed to delete file.
Failed to acquire resource.
The HDD is running out of capacity for
the shared folder.
Job canceled
Error code
2D10
2D11
2D12
2D13
2D14
2D15
2D60
2D61
2D62
2D63
2D64
2D65
2D66
2D67
2D68
2DA0
2DA1
2DA2
2DA3
2DA4
2DA5
2DA6
2DA7
2DA8
2DC0
2DC1
Contents
Troubleshooting

Insufficient memory
Invalid parameter
Exceeding document number
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
System management module

access abnormality
File access failure
Encryption error
Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
File library access abnormality

Invalid parameter
File server connection error
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-104
Invalid network path
P. 5-104
Login failure
P. 5-104
Exceeding documents in folder:

Creating new document is failed.
P. 5-104
FTP service not available

File sharing service not available
Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly.
Periodical deletion of transmitted
FAX documents completed properly.
Periodical deletion of received FAX
documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of transmitted FAX
Manual deletion of received FAX
Resource acquiring failure
Hard disk space in /SHA partition is
nearly full (90%).
Job canceling
Power failure
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-104
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 17
07/11
6) E-mail reception related error

Error code
3A10
3A11
3A12
3A20
3A21
3A22
3A30
3A40
3A50
3A51
3A52
3A60
3A61
3A62
3A70
3A80
3A81
3A82
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail.
received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
received mail. This mail could not be
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail.
the received mail. This mail has been
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Whole partial mails were not reached
by time-out.
Partial Mail Error has been detected
in the received mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail.
this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator.
this mail. This mail could not be
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail.
in this mail. This mail could not be
in this mail. This mail could not be
Receiving partial mail was aborted
since the partial mail setting has
been changed to Disable.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled.
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Contents
E-mail MIME error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
E-mail analysis error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Partial mail time-out error
P. 5-105
Partial mail related error
P. 5-105
Insufficient HDD capacity error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Warning of partial mail interruption
P. 5-105
Partial mail reception setting OFF
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 18
07/11
Error code
3B10
3B11
3B12
3B20
3B21
3B22
3B30
3B31
3B32
3B40
3B41
3B42
3C10
3C11
3C12
3C13
3C20
3C21
3C22
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
detected in the received mail. This
administrator.
administrator.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
in the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Compression Error has been
administrator.
administrator.
Contents
E-mail format error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
2
Content-Type error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Charset error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
E-mail decode error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
TIFF analysis error
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
TIFF compression error
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 19
Error code
3C30
3C31
3C32
3C40
3C41
3C42
3C50
3C51
3C52
3C60
3C61
3C62
3C70
3D10
3D20
3D30
3E10
3E20
3E30
3E40
Tiff Resolution Error has been
administrator.
administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
administrator.
administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has been
administrator.
administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
administrator.
administrator.
Power Failure has been occurred in
E-mail receiving.
SMTP Destination Error has been
mail was deleted.
Offramp Destination limitation Error
has been detected in the received
mail.
Fax Board Error has been occurred
POP3 Connection Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has
been occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error has been occurred
POP3 Login Error occurred in
received mail.
Contents
TIFF resolution error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
TIFF paper size error
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Offramp destination error
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Offramp security error
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Power failure error
P. 5-106
Destination address error
P. 5-106
Offramp destination limitation error
P. 5-106
FAX board error
P. 5-106
POP3 server connection error
P. 5-107
POP3 server connection time-out

error
POP3 login error
P. 5-107
POP3 login method error
P. 5-107
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
P. 5-107
2 - 20
05/11
Error code
3F00
3F10
3F20
3F30
3F40
File I/O Error has been occurred in
this mail. The mail could not be
received until File I/O is recovered.
Contents
File I/O error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 21
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen
Error code
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
A221
A222
A290
A291
A292
Contents
No Printer Kit / Printer Kit function disabled: The Printer Kit (GM-1010) or the
Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2010) is not installed. Or network printing of an XPS
file is performed without the Expansion Memory (GC-1230), or network printing is performed after the termination of a trial period.
HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Troubleshooting
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-107
P. 5-108
P. 5-108
P. 5-108
P. 5-108
P. 5-108
2 - 22
07/11
<<Error history: e-STUDIO350/450>>

In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
03 07 26 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
Error code
YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
MMM
NNN
O
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer6: Unused
7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP
B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused
M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
2: Black
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 23
06/06
<<Error history: e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>>

In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
99999999
03 07 26 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
Error code
Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
MMM
NNN
O
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP
B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused
M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
2: Black
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 24
07/11
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode
Control panel
check mode
For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
Contents
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all
the LCD pixels blink.
For exit
[POWER]
OFF/ON
Test mode
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
[0]+[4]+
[POWER]
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
[9]+[START]+
[POWER]
[6]+[START]+
[POWER]
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]
Checks the status of input/output signals.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
Test print mode

Adjustment
mode
Setting mode
List print mode
PM support
mode
Firmware
update mode
Outputs the test patterns.

Adjusts various items.
Sets various items.
Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and
08, PM support mode and pixel counter.
Clears each counter.
Performs updating of the system firmware.
Display
100% C A4
TEST MODE
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
100% A A4
TEST MODE
100% D
TEST MODE
100% UA A4
LIST PRINT
100% K
TEST MODE
-
Notes:
1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be
sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular code.
<Operation procedure>
Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1]
[POWER]
LED lit/
LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
Test mode (03): Refer to

P. 2-27 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)" and
P. 2-42 "2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03)".
Test print mode (04): Refer to P. 2-45 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)"
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to

P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
P. 2-64 "2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 25
07/11
Setting mode (08): Refer to

P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)"
P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER]
[START]
(Code)
[Digital keys]
101: Adjustment mode (05)
Key in the first
102: Setting mode (08)
code to be printed
[START]
[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed
[START]
List starts to
be printed
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history
PM support mode (6S):
[6][START]
[POWER]
(Code)
1: Auto-toner adjustment
2: PM Support Screen
[START]
(Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 6.FIRMWARE UPDATING

[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1]
Warming up
Control panel
check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4]
Test print
mode
[0][5]
Adjustment
mode
[0][8]
Setting
mode
[9][START]
List print
mode
[6][START]
PM support
mode
[8][9]
Firmware
update mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes

Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 26
07/11
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
2
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 27
05/12
[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF)

Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch
Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
B
C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
F
G
H
PFP upper drawer feed sensor

PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom
position
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
C
D
E
LCF drawer detection switch
F
G
H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B
C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
PFP lower drawer feed sensor

PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F
G
H
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
e.g.
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
2 - 28
05/12
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[5]
LCF end fence home position sensor
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C
D
E
LCF standby side empty sensor

LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor
[6]
[7]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor

LCF feed side empty sensor
G
H
Upper drawer empty sensor

Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
[8]
G
H
Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Toner bag full
Upper drawer feed sensor

Toner bag full detection sensor-1
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
-
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
Lower drawer feed sensor

Lower drawer empty sensor
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor-3
Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is
installed)
Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When
bridge unit is installed)
Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
e.g.
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Toner bag not
full
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Paper full
Paper not full
Separetor at
home position
Cover opened
Other than
home position
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 29
05/11
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A
B
C
D
Upper drawer detection switch
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Lower drawer detection switch
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-
e.g.
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
-
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3
0
1
1
1
0
1
Bypass paper width sensor

2
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Paper-width size
0
1
1
1
0
1
A3/LD
A4-R/LT-R
A5-R/ST-R
Card size
B4-R/LG
B5-R
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 30
05/11
[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON)

Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
[3]
24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Toner cartridge switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Destination detection
A
B
C
Side cover opening/closing switch

Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Fuser unit connection
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is

installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F
G
[4]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Other than
SAD
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Toner bag full
e.g.
Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
SAD
Fuser unit
installed
No paper
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Toner bag not
full
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full
No paper
Paper not full

Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Normal
No paper
Paper present
Abnormal
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 31
05/11
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
RADF connection
Platen sensor
Carriage home position sensor
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
A
B
C
D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected
Platen cove
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
RADF tray sensor
RADF empty sensor
C
D
E
RADF jam access cover switch

RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF exit sensor
RADF reverse sensor
RADF read sensor
RADF registration sensor
Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
A
B
C
D
E
RADF original length sensor
RADF original width sensor-1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
e.g.
Not connected
Platen cove
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
2 - 32
05/11
Digital
key
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Button
Items to check
D
E
F
G
H
A
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1

Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2010))
Connectable
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1010))
Connectable
Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3010))
Connectable
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices
Connectable
e.g.
B
C
[9]
[0]
E
F
G
H
e.g.
Refer to table 2
Refer to table 2
Refer to table 2
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
-
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment

Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1
Bridge unit
Normal display
Job Separator
Highlighting display
Offset Tray
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 33
05/11
2.2.2
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Fig. 2-3 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 34
07/11
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch
Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
B
C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
F
G
H

PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom
position
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
C
D
E
LCF drawer detection switch
F
G
H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B
C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D
E

PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F
G
H
e.g.
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 35
05/11
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[5]
LCF end fence home position sensor
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C
D
E
LCF standby side empty sensor

LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor
[6]
[7]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor

LCF feed side empty sensor
G
H
Upper drawer empty sensor

Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
[8]
G
H
Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Toner bag full

No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
-
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position

Lower drawer empty sensor
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is
installed)
Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When
bridge unit is installed)
Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
e.g.
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Toner bag not
full
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Paper full
Paper not full
Separetor at
home position
Cover opened
Other than
home position
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
2 - 36
05/11
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A
B
C
D
Upper drawer detection switch
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Lower drawer detection switch
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-
e.g.
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
-
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3
0
1
1
1
0
1
Bypass paper width sensor

2
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Paper-width size
0
1
1
1
0
1
A3/LD
A4-R/LT-R
A5-R/ST-R
Card size
B4-R/LG
B5-R
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 37
05/11
[FAX] button: ON/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
[3]
24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Toner cartridge switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Destination detection
A
B
C
Side cover opening/closing switch

Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Fuser unit connection

installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F
G
[4]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Other than
SAD
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Toner bag full
e.g.
Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
SAD
Fuser unit
installed
No paper
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Toner bag not
full
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full
No paper
Paper not full

Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Normal
No paper
Paper present
Abnormal
2 - 38
05/11
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
RADF connection
Platen sensor
Carriage home position sensor
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
[6]
[7]
A
B
C
D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected
Platen cove
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
[RADF] Original tray sensor
[RADF] Original empty sensor
C
D
E
[RADF] Jam access cover sensor

[RADF] RADF opening/closing sensor
[RADF] Original exit/reverse sensor
[RADF] Original intermediate transport sensor
[RADF] Read sensor
[RADF] Original registration sensor
D
E
[RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID0S)

(Refer to table3)
(Refer to table3)
(Refer to table3)
[RADF] Original length detection sensor
Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
OFF (H)
[RADF] Original width detection sensor-1
[RADF] Original width detection sensor-2
B
C
[8]
e.g.
Not connected
Platen cove
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
ON (L)
OFF (H)
ON (L)
OFF (H)
ON (L)
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
-
No original
No original
No original
-
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 39
08/04
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
[9]
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
[0]
e.g.
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2

1
2
3
-
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment

Bridge unit
Normal display
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Table 3. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width).
Original tray width sensor
TWID2S
TWID1S
TWID0S
H
H
H
Paper width size

(LT series)
Paper width size

(A4 series)
LD/LT
A3/A4
B5-R
ST-R
A5-R
LD/LT
A3/A4
8.5" x 8.5" / LT-R / LG /

13" LG
A4-R/FOLIO
COMPUTER
B4/B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 40
08/04
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: ON)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[0]
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060)) Connected
Connectable
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1060)) Connected
Connectable
Dongle (for Scanner kit (GM-4060)) Connected
Connectable
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices Connected

Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1)
-
Connectable
E
F
G
H
Acceptable
-
e.g.
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not acceptable
-
*1
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used
with this code.
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise
this code cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
storage device.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 41
05/11
2.2.3
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
Procedure 1
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
Operation
ON
[START]
Stop
code
[START]
Operation
OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
(Code)
Operation
One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
ON
[START]
Operation
OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]
Code
101
102
103
108
109
110
118
120
121
122
177
201
202
203
204
205
206
(Code)
[START]
[POWER] OFF
Function
Code
151
Main motor ON (operational without
developer unit)
Toner motor ON (normal rotation)
152
Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi)
153
Registration clutch ON
158
PFP motor ON
159
ADU motor ON
160
Laser ON
168
Exit motor ON (normal rotation)
170
Exit motor ON (reverse rotation)
171
LCF motor ON
172
Offset Tray motor ON (reciprocating movement)
Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF
Transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Function
Code No.101 function OFF
Procedure
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 42
05/12
Code
Function
Procedure
207
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
208
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
209
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
210
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
217
Sub-separation fan ON/OFF
218
Key copy counter count up
222
ADU clutch ON/OFF
225
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
226
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
228
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
232
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
234
Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF
235
Discharge LED ON/OFF
236
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (low speed)
237
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (high speed)
238
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
241
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
242
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
243
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
248
Developer bias [+DC] ON/OFF
249
Developer bias [-DC] ON/OFF
252
Main charger ON/OFF
253
Separation bias ON/OFF
255
Transfer guide bias ON/OFF
256
Transfer transformer ON/OFF
261
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the
[ZOOM] button
264
SLG board cooling fan 1 ON/OFF
265
SLG board cooling fan 2 ON/OFF
267
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF
268
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
269
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
271
LCF tray-up motor (up/down)
278
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
280
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
281
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) : MR-3015

RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) : MR-3018
282
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) : MR-3015

RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) : MR-3018
283
RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
284
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) : MR-3015

RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) : MR-3018
285
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) : MR-3015

RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) : MR-3018
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 43
08/04
Code
Function
Procedure
289
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (high speed)
290
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (low speed)
294
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF : MR-3015

RADF gate solenoid ON/OFF : MR-3018
295
Power OFF mode (for 200 V series)
297
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
410
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
411
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
412
Middle fan ON/OFF (high speed)
413
Middle fan ON/OFF (low speed)
432
Developer drive clutch ON/OFF
461
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
462
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
463
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (low speed)
464
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (high speed)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 44
08/04
2.2.4
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
[0][4]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
Continuous
Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
111
Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
113
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
142
Grid pattern
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 45
05/12
2.2.5
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test
copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Value
displayed
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[CANCEL]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
([FAX] )
[INTERRUPT] (Test copy)
value
(Stores
in RAM )
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 46
05/12
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
Value
displayed
[START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[UP]
or
or
[DOWN]
[INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
in RAM
Automatic
adjustment
Manual
adjustment
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)

Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code
Remarks
Grid pattern
Refer to P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 47
04/05
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205
210
Developer
Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Scanner
306
Scanner
308
Scanner
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>

Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
17
Automatic adjustment of
ALL
As the value increases,
auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output
heater ON)
increases correspondingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment
was started and is
automatically set in the
range of 2.35 to 2.45V.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit is
not installed. (P. 3-1)
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
128
M
Corrects the control
3
sensor (Fuser heater ON)
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
sensor setup in 05-200.
not installed.
3
Developer bias DC outputALL
189
M
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
154
M
3
ingly. Remove the
put adjustment
<0-255>
developer unit and
M
3
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
115
install the adjustment
output adjustment/Center
<0-255>
jig to make adjustvalue
ment. However, the
Separation transformer AC
ALL
166
M
3
adjustment jig is not
<0-255>
necessary to adjust the
value
developer bias DC.(P.
3-29)
Laser power adjustment
ALL
121
M
When the value
3
<0-255>
increases, the laser
output increases correspondingly.
Image location adjustment
ALL
128
SYS When the value
1
of secondary scanning
<92-164>
increases by 1, the
direction (scanner section)
image shifts by approx.
0.137mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
1
ALL
145
SYS
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
of primary scanning direcimage shifts by approx.
tion (scanner section)
0.0846mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Distortion mode
ALL
Moves carriages to the
6
adjusting position. (P.
3-12)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 48
05/12
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
354
RADF
355

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Reproduction ratio adjustALL
128
SYS
<0-255>
ment of secondary scanning direction
(scanner section)
Adjustment of
RADF paper
alignment
for singlesidedoriginal
for doublesidedoriginal
RADF sensor and
EEPROM initialization
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
SYS
356
RADF
357
RADF
Fine adjustment of RADF

transport speed
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation

adjustment
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
359
Scanner
Carriage position adjustment during scanning from

RADF
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
365
RADF
RADF leading edge position

adjustment
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
366
for single
sided original
for double
sided original
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio in
the secondary scanning direction (vertical
to paper feeding direction) increases by
approx. 0.223%.
When the value
increases by 1, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.5mm.
Performs the adjustment and initialization
when the RADF board
or RADF sensor is
replaced.
When the value
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio of
the secondary scanning direction when
using the RADF
0.1%.
When the value
increases by 1, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846mm.
When the value
increases by 1, the
carriage position when
using the RADF shifts
by approx. 0.1 mm
toward the original
feeding side.
When the value
increases by 1, the
copied image of original fed from the RADF
shifts toward the trailing
edge of paper by
approx. 0.1mm.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
6
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 49
05/10
Code
Classification
367
RADF
368
Laser
401
Laser
405
410
Laser
411
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425
430
Image
431
Image

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current
adjustment (Minimum)
width of RADF original
guide by keying in this
code with the guide set
at the minimum width.
Perform this adjustment when the RADF
board or volume is
replaced, or when the
code (05-356) is performed.
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current
adjustment (Maximum)
width of RADF original
guide by keying in this
code with the guide set
at the maximum width.
Perform this adjustment when the RADF
board or volume is
replaced, or when the
code (05-356) is performed.
1
PRT
133
M
When the value
Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255>
increases by 1, the
nal motor rotation speed
(adjustment of primary
PPC
129
M
primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255>
tion increases by
duction ratio)
approx. 0.07%.
(approx. 0.1mm/step)
Adjustment of primary
M
When the value
PPC
128
1
scanning laser writing start
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
position.
writing start position
PRT
128
M
shifts to the front side
<0-255>
by approx. 0.0423mm.
1
Adjustment of secondary
PPC/
138
M
When the value
scanning direction reproPRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of
FAX
139
M
ment of main motor speed)
secondary scanning
<0-255>
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
Fine adjustment of exit
PPC/
107
M
When the value
1
motor speed
PRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
rotation becomes faster
FAX
121
M
by approx. 0.05%.
<0-255>
1
Top margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
When the value
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
edge of the paper)
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
Left margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
1
0.0423mm.
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 50
05/11
Code
Classification
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
440
Laser
441
442
443
444
445

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Right margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
(blank area at the trailing
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
PPC/
EUR: 48
PRT
UC:24
edge of the paper)/
JPN: 24
Reverse side at duplexing
Others:
48
<0-255>
PPC/
12
M
PRT
<0-255>
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
PRT
24
M
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
PRT
0
M
<0-255>
feeding direction)
PRT
0
M
<0-255>
feeding direction)
PRT
0
M
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
ALL
7
M
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-15>
secondary
scanning
Lower
ALL
24
M
laser writing
drawer
<0-40>
start position
Bypass
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
LCF
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
PFP
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
Duplex
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
Procedur
e
1
1
4
1
1
1
When the value
increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
leading edge of the
paper by approx.
0.2mm.
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 51
Code
448-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
448-1
448-2
449-0
Paper
feeding
449-1
449-2
450-0
Paper
feeding
450-1
450-2
452-0
Paper
feeding
452-1
452-2
455-0
Paper
feeding
455-1
455-2
457
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP upper
size 1
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
10
M
amount
size
<0-63>
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Upper drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
ALL
12
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
10
M
(Lower drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
20
M
amount
size
<0-63>
ALL
20
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
30
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning amount
ALL
8
M
adjustment at the registra<0-63>
tion section (LCF / Plain
paper)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 52
Code
458-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
458-1
458-2
460-0
Paper
feeding
460-1
460-2
461-0
Paper
feeding
461-1
461-2
462-0
Paper
feeding
462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0
Paper
feeding
463-1
463-2
466-0
466-1
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
25
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
26
M
amount
size
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
ALL
17
M
Short
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
Post
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
card
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
143
M
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
paper pushing amount /
M
Post card
ALL
173
Bypass feed<0-255>
ing
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 1
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 2
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 3
<0-255>
OHP film
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
* Postcard is supported only for JPN
model.
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases by 1, the
driving speed of bypass
feed roller increases by
approx. 0.2 ms when
the paper transport is
started from the registration section.
* Post card is supported only for JPN
model.
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 53
Code
Classification
467
Paper
feeding
468-0
Finisher
468-1
468-2
469-0
Paper
feeding
469-1

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of paper pushALL
128
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
ing amount/Duplex feeding (short size)
driving speed of ADU
transport roller
0.2 ms when the paper
transport is started
from the registration
section.
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by 1, the
ment of bindbinding/folding position
ing position/
B4
ALL
0
M
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
page by 0.25 mm.
tion
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Upper
drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper
feeding
470-1
470-2
471-0
471-1
471-2
Paper
feeding
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(Lower drawer
/ Thick paper
1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(PFP upper
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
Thick
Paper 1
Long
size
Thick
Paper 1
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 1
Short
size
Thick
Paper 2
Long
size
Thick
Paper 2
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 2
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
<-14-14>
20
<0-63>
When the value

increases by "1", the
aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
1
4
4
4
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
22
<0-63>
ALL
19
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 54
Code
472-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
472-1
472-2
473
Paper
feeding
474-0
Paper
feeding
474-1
474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1
497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503
504
505
506
507
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
22
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
19
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
8
M
tion section (LCF / Thick
paper 1)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
24
M
amount
size
<0-63>
ALL
24
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
33
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
128
M
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-255>
drawer sideways deviaLower
ALL
128
M
tion
drawer
<0-255>
PFP upper
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
PFP lower
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
LCF
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
Bypass
ALL
128
M
feeding
<0-255>
M
ALL
148
Adjustment of Long size
<0-255>
primary scanning laser
ALL
148
M
Short
writing start
<0-255>
size(A4/LT
position at
or smaller)
duplex feeding
Density
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
adjustment
<0-255>
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS
ment of man<0-255>
ual density
Text
PPC
128
SYS
/Center value
<0-255>
Text/Photo PPC
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustPhoto
PPC
20
SYS
ment of man<0-255>
ual density
Text
PPC
20
SYS
/Light step
<0-255>
value
Contents
When the value
aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value

increases by 1, the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value

increases by 1, the
mm.
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
4
4
1
1
1
When the value

increases, the image of
the light steps
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 55
05/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514
515
532
Image
533
534
570
571
572
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
Density
UC: 20
adjustment
JPN : 30
Fine adjust<0-255>
ment of manual density
Photo
PPC
EUR: 24 SYS
/Dark step
UC: 24
value
JPN: 24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
UC: 20
JPN: 27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
128
SYS
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
SYS
<0-255>
tion / Background peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS
adjustment
<0-255>
Text
PPC
64
SYS
<0-255>
EUR: 12 SYS
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
When the value
the dark steps
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
When the value

increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
When the value

increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
1
1
1
Sets whether the values of the background

peak and text peak are
fixed or not. Ones
place is an adjustment
for automatic density
and tens place is for
manual density.Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values. The values of
the background peak
and text peak affect the
reproduction of the
background density
and text density
respectively.
Background peak Text
peak
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied
2 - 56
04/10
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
620
Image
621
622
653
Image
654
Image
655

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Gamma data
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS Ones place:
<0-99>
0:Equivalent to the set
slope adjustment
value 5
Photo
PPC
0
SYS
1
1 to 9: Select the slope
<0-99>
of Gamma curve
Text
PPC
0
SYS
1
(The larger the
<0-99>
value is, the larger
the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
of low density (The
smaller the value is,
the darker the background becomes.)
00: Use default value
1
Sharpness
Text/Photo PPC
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-99>
becomes sharper.
When the value
Photo
PPC
2
SYS decreases, the image
1
becomes softer. The
<0-99>
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
1
Text
PPC
EUR: 45 SYS becomes.Ones place:
Fixed value (05-620 is
UC: 45
1, 05-621 is 2, 05JPN: 45
622 is 5) Tens place:
<0-99>
Sharpness intensity (0:
Use default value, 1-9:
Filter intensity)
1
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
208
SYS Adjusts the level of the
smudged/faint
<0-255>
smudged/faint
text
text.With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
Adjustment of
SYS Adjustment of the
PS
PRT
5
1
smudged/faint
<0-9>
smudged/faint
text
PCL
PRT
5
SYS text.With decreasing
1
the value, the faint text
<0-9>
is suppressed, and with
increasing it, the
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 57
Code
Classification
672-0
Image
672-1
672-2
672-3
672-4
676-0
Image
676-1
676-2
676-3
676-4
693
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of Normal
PRT
0
M
<0-10>
printer image
density
PRT
4
M
<0-10>
PRT
5
M
<0-10>
PRT
6
M
<0-10>
PRT
10
M
<0-10>
Toner
PRT
0
M
saving
<0-10>
PRT
4
M
<0-10>
PRT
5
M
<0-10>
PRT
6
M
<0-10>
PRT
10
M
<0-10>
EUR: 12 SYS
tion on origiUC: 12
JPN: 22
nal set on the
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
694
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
695
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Center
value
FAX
120
<0-255>
SYS
701
Light step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
700
Image
Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Adjustment of the
image density.With
decreasing the value,
the text becomes
lighter.
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

fixed or not. Ones
manual density. Once
they are fixed, the
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
the center step
becomes lighter.
When the value
light side becomes
lighter.
When the value
dark side becomes
darker.
2 - 58
Code
Classification
710
Image
714
715
Image
719
720
Image
724
725
Image
729
825
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Density
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
ual density/
<0-255>
Center value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
FAX
20
SYS
ual density/
<0-255>
Light step
value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
FAX
20
SYS
ual density/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of auto- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
matic density
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo
tion on original manually
set on the
original glass
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
When the value

the center step
becomes darker.
When the value

the light steps
becomes lighter.
When the value

the dark steps
becomes darker.
When the value

becomes darker.
1
fixed or not. Ones
they are fixed, the
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 59
Code
Classification
830
Image
831
832
835
Image
836

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
<11-14,
tion on original set on the
21-24,
RADF
31-34,
41-44>
Text
SCN
12
SYS
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>

tion / Background peak
Text
adjustment
837
845
Image
846
847
850
Image
851
852
855
Image
856
857
860
861
862
Image
SCN
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
adjustment/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of automatic density
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
48
<0-255>
48
<0-255>
40
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets whether the value
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. Ones place is
an adjustment for
automatic density and
tens place is for manual density. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
brightened.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
When the value

the center step
becomes darker.
SYS
When the value

the light steps
becomes lighter.
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value

the dark steps
becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value

becomes darker.
1
1
1
2 - 60
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
justment(Text/
Photo)
40% or
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
2
SYS
justment(Text) tion ratio
<0-99>
40% or
smaller
2
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
2
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
81% or
larger
5
SYS
justtion ratio
<0-99>
ment(Photo)
40% or
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
Custom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correcMode 1
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Contents
When the value
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
less the moire
becomes.
Ones place: Fixed
value (05-865 is 1,
05-866 is 2, 05-867 is
5) Tens place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use
default value, 1-9: Filter
intensity)
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Set whether the values

or not. One's place is
an adjustment for
ten's place is for manual density. Once they
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 61
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Range correcCustom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
Mode 1
UC: 12
JPN: 22
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Custom
PPC
12
SYS
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Range correction Background peak

adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
Adjustment of
smudged/faint
text
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
40
<0-255>
64
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
1
<0-99>
EUR: 45
UC: 45
JPN: 45
<0-99>
2
<0-99>
208
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Set whether the values
an adjustment for
ten's place is for manual density. Once they
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
brightened.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
When the value

becomes sharper.
When the value
becomes softer. The
less the moire
becomes.
One's place: Fixed
value (05-922 is "1",
05-923 is "5", 05-924 is
"2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use
intensity)
Adjustment of the
smudged/faint text.
With increasing the
decreasing it, the
1
1
2 - 62
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935
936
937
Image
938
939
940
Image
941
942
943
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Density
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Light step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Dark step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "autoMode 2
<0-255>
matic density"
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
0
SYS
Gamma data
Mode 1
<0-99>
slope adjustment
944
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
945
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial

number) entry
ALL
SYS
976
Maintenance
Contents
When the value
the center step
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value

the "light" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value

the "Dark" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value

becomes darker.
1
1
1
Ones place:
value 5
of Gammacurve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
value 5
of low density (The
darker the background
becomes.)
When this adjustment
is performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also performed automatically
(10 digits)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 63
04/05
2.2.6
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test
copy)
[INTERRUPT]
[CANCEL]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Value
displayed
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[CANCEL]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
([FAX] )
[INTERRUPT] (Test copy)
value
(Stores
in RAM )
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 64
07/11
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
Value
displayed
[START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[UP]
or
or
[DOWN]
[INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
in RAM
Automatic
adjustment
Manual
adjustment
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)

Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code
Remarks
Grid pattern
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 65
05/12
Notes:
2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205
210
Developer
Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Scanner
306
Scanner
308
Scanner
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
17
ALL
auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output
heater ON)
increases correspondingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment
was started and is
automatically set in the
range of 2.35 to 2.45V.
not installed. (P. 3-1)
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
128
M
Corrects the control
3
sensor (Fuser heater ON)
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
sensor setup in 05-200.
not installed.
3
Developer bias DC outputALL
189
M
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
154
M
3
ingly. Remove the
put adjustment
<0-255>
developer unit and
M
3
Transfer transformer DC
ALL
115
install the adjustment
<0-255>
jig to make adjustvalue
ment. However, the
Separation transformer AC
ALL
166
M
3
adjustment jig is not
<0-255>
necessary to adjust the
value
developer bias DC.(P.
3-29)
Laser power adjustment
ALL
121
M
When the value
3
<0-255>
increases, the laser
output increases correspondingly.
ALL
128
SYS When the value
1
of secondary scanning
<92-164>
increases by 1, the
direction (scanner section)
image shifts by approx.
0.137mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
1
ALL
145
SYS
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
of primary scanning direcimage shifts by approx.
tion (scanner section)
0.0846mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Distortion mode
ALL
Moves carriages to the
6
adjusting position. (P.
3-12)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 66
07/11
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
350
Scanner
351
354
RADF
355
357
RADF
358
RADF
359
Scanner
365
RADF
366
401
405
Laser

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Reproduction ratio adjustALL
128
SYS When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
ment of secondary scanning direction
reproduction ratio in
(scanner section)
the secondary scanning direction (vertical
to paper feeding direction) increases by
approx. 0.223%.
Shading posi- Original
ALL
128
SYS 0.1369 mm/step
1
tion adjustglass
<118ment
138>
RADF
ALL
128
SYS
1
<118138>
1
ALL
10
SYS When the value
Adjustment of for single<0-20>
increases by 1, the
sidedorigiRADF paper
aligning amount
nal
alignment
for doubleALL
10
SYS increases by approx.
1
0.5mm.
sidedorigi<0-20>
nal
1
Fine adjustment of RADF
ALL
50
SYS When the value
transport speed
<0-100>
increases by 1, the
the secondary scanning direction when
using the RADF
0.1%.
1
RADF sideways deviation
ALL
128
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846mm.
1
Carriage position adjustALL
128
SYS When the value
ment during scanning from
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
RADF
carriage position when
using the RADF shifts
by approx. 0.1 mm
toward the original
feeding side.
1
RADF leadfor single
ALL
50
SYS When the value
ing edge posi- sided orig<0-100>
increases by 1, the
tion
inal
copied image of origiadjustment
ALL
50
SYS nal fed from the RADF
1
for double
shifts toward the trailing
<0-100>
sided origedge of paper by
inal
approx. 0.1mm.
1
PRT
133
M
When the value
Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255>
increases by 1, the
nal motor rotation speed
(adjustment of primary
M
PPC
129
primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255>
tion increases by
duction ratio)
approx. 0.07%.
(approx. 0.1mm/step)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 67
07/11
Code
Classification
410
Laser
411
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425
430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of primary
PPC
128
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
scanning laser writing start
position.
writing start position
PRT
128
M
shifts to the front side
<0-255>
by approx. 0.0423mm.
Adjustment of secondary
PPC/
138
M
When the value
scanning direction reproPRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of
FAX
139
M
ment of main motor speed)
secondary scanning
<0-255>
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
Fine adjustment of exit
PPC/
107
M
When the value
motor speed
PRT
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
rotation becomes faster
FAX
121
M
by approx. 0.05%.
<0-255>
PPC
0
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
blank area becomes
edge of the paper)
wider by approx.
PPC
0
M
0.0423mm.
<0-255>
feeding direction)
PPC
0
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
feeding direction)
0.0423 mm.
PPC
0
M
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
PPC/
EUR: 48
PRT
UC:24
edge of the paper)/
JPN: 24
Reverse side at duplexing
Others:
48
<0-255>
PPC/
12
M
PRT
<0-255>
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
PRT
24
M
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
PRT
0
<0-255>
feeding direction)
M
PRT
0
<0-255>
feeding direction)
M
PRT
0
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2 - 68
07/11
Code
Classification
440
Laser
441
442

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
7
M
When the value
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-15>
increases by 1, the
secondary
scanning
Lower
ALL
24
M
leading edge of the
laser writing
drawer
<0-40>
paper by approx.
start position
Bypass
ALL
8
M
0.2mm.
feeding
<0-15>
443
LCF
ALL
444
PFP
ALL
445
Duplex
feeding
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size 1
ALL
448-0
Paper
feeding
448-1
448-2
449-0
Paper
feeding
449-1
449-2
450-0
Paper
feeding
450-1
450-2
452-0
Paper
feeding
452-1
452-2
455-0
Paper
feeding
455-1
455-2
457
Paper
feeding
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(PFP upper
drawer / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
size
amount
the registrasize
tion section
Short
(PFP lower
size
drawer / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
size
amount
the registrasize
tion section
Short
(Upper drawer size
/ Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long
size
amount
the registrasize
tion section
Short
(Lower drawer size
/ Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long
amount
size
the registrasize
tion section
Short
(Duplex feed- size
ing / Plain
paper)
adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Plain
paper)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
Procedur
e
1
1
1
8
<0-15>
8
<0-15>
8
<0-15>
10
<0-63>
10
<0-63>
8
<0-63>
10
<0-63>
10
<0-63>
8
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
12
<0-63>
10
<0-63>
10
<0-63>
20
<0-63>
20
<0-63>
30
<0-63>
8
<0-63>
M
M
M
When the value

increases by 1, the
aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 69
07/11
Code
458-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
458-1
458-2
460-0
Paper
feeding
460-1
460-2
461-0
Paper
feeding
461-1
461-2
462-0
Paper
feeding
462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0
Paper
feeding
463-1
463-2
466-0
466-1
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
26
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
increases by 1, the
amount
aligning amount
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short
ALL
25
M
<Paper length>
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
Long size:
ing/Plain
330 mm or longer
paper)
Middle size:
Paper aligning Long
ALL
26
M
220 mm to 329 mm
amount
size
<0-63>
Short size:
ALL
26
M
219 mm or shorter
the registrasize
<0-63>
* Postcard is suption section
Short
ALL
26
M
ported only for JPN
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
model.
ing/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
ALL
17
M
Short
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
Post
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
card
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
143
M
When the value
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
paper pushdriving speed of bypass
ing amount /
M
Post card
ALL
173
feed roller increases by
Bypass feed<0-255>
approx. 0.2 ms when
ing
Thick
ALL
143
M
the paper transport is
paper 1
<0-255>
started from the regisThick
ALL
143
M
tration section.
paper 2
<0-255>
* Post card is supThick
ALL
143
M
ported only for JPN
paper 3
<0-255>
model.
OHP film
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 70
07/11
Code
467
468-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
Finisher
468-1
468-2
469-0
Paper
feeding
469-1

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of paper pushALL
128
M
When the value
<0-255>
increases by 1, the
ing amount/Duplex feeding (short size)
driving speed of ADU
transport roller
0.2 ms when the paper
transport is started
from the registration
section.
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by 1, the
ment of bindbinding/folding position
ing position/
B4
ALL
0
M
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
page by 0.25 mm.
tion
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(Upper
drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper
feeding
470-1
470-2
471-0
471-1
471-2
Paper
feeding
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(Lower drawer
/ Thick paper
1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(PFP upper
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
Thick
Paper 1
Long
size
Thick
Paper 1
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 1
Short
size
Thick
Paper 2
Long
size
Thick
Paper 2
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 2
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
<-14-14>
20
<0-63>
When the value

aligning amount
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
1
4
4
4
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
ALL
22
<0-63>
ALL
19
<0-63>
ALL
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 71
07/11
Code
472-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
472-1
472-2
473
Paper
feeding
474-0
Paper
feeding
474-1
474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
When the value
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
aligning amount
ALL
22
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
0.8 mm.
tion section
Short
ALL
19
M
<Paper length>
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
Long size:
drawer / Thick
330 mm or longer
paper 1)
Middle size:
ALL
8
M
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
tion section (LCF / Thick
219 mm or shorter
paper 1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
(Duplex feeding / Thick
paper 1)
Adjustment of
drawer sideways deviation
497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503
504
505
506
507
Image
Adjustment of
primary scanning laser
writing start
position at
duplex feeding
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density
/Center value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density
/Light step
value
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
PFP upper
drawer
PFP lower
drawer
LCF
ALL
Bypass
feeding
Long size
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
Short
size(A4/LT
or smaller)
ALL
Photo
PPC
Text/Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
Text/Photo
PPC
Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
4
4
4
24
<0-63>
24
<0-63>
33
<0-63>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
M
M
When the value

increases by 1, the
mm.
4
4
4
M
M
SYS
SYS
When the value

increases by 1, the
mm.
When the value
the center step
becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
4
1
1
1
When the value

the light steps
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
2 - 72
07/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514
515
532
Image
533
534
570

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 20 SYS When the value
Density
UC: 20
adjustment
JPN : 30
the dark steps
Fine adjust<0-255>
becomes darker.
ment of manual density
Photo
PPC
EUR: 24 SYS
/Dark step
UC: 24
value
JPN: 24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
UC: 20
JPN: 27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
128
SYS becomes darker.
ment of auto<0-255>
matic density Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
40
SYS When the value
<0-255>
increases, the backtion / Background peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS ground becomes more
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>
Text
Image

set on the
original glass
PPC
PPC
571
Photo
PPC
572
Text
PPC
64
<0-255>
EUR: 12
UC: 12
JPN: 22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

fixed or not. Ones
manual density.Once
they are fixed, the
values. The values of
the background peak
and text peak affect the
reproduction of the
background density
and text density
respectively.
Background peak Text
peak
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 73
07/11
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
596-0
Image
596-1
Image
596-2
Image
597-0
Image
597-1
Image
597-2
Image
598-0
Image
598-1
Image
598-2
Image
599-0
Image
599-1
Image
599-2
Image
620
Image

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Gamma data
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS Ones place:
<0-99>
0:Equivalent to the set
slope adjustment
value 5
Photo
PPC
0
SYS
1
<0-99>
of Gamma curve
Text
PPC
0
SYS
1
(The larger the
<0-99>
value is, the larger
the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
value 5
of low density (The
smaller the value is,
the darker the background becomes.)
4
Low
PRT
128
SYS When the value
Gamma baldensity
<0-255>
increases, the density
ance adjustment
Medium
PRT
128
SYS in the target area
4
becomes higher.
(PS/Photo)
density
<0-255>
High
PRT
128
SYS
4
density
<0-255>
4
Low
PRT
128
SYS When the value
Gamma balance adjustdensity
<0-255>
ment
Medium
PRT
128
SYS in the target area
4
becomes higher.
(PS/Text)
density
<0-255>
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Text/Photo
PPC
621
Photo
PPC
2
<0-99>
SYS
622
Text
PPC
EUR: 45
UC: 45
JPN: 45
<0-99>
SYS
Gamma balance adjustment

(PCL/Photo)
Adjustment of
gamma balance
(PCL/Detail)
Sharpness
adjustment
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
1
<0-99>
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
When the value
in the target area
becomes higher.
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
4
When the value

in the target area
becomes higher.
SYS
SYS
4
4
4
When the value

becomes sharper.
When the value
becomes softer. The
less the moire
becomes.Ones place:
Fixed value (05-620 is
1, 05-621 is 2, 05622 is 5) Tens place:
Sharpness intensity (0:
Use default value, 1-9:
Filter intensity)
2 - 74
07/11
Code
Classification
648
Image
654
Image
655
672-0
Image
672-1
672-2

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
208
SYS Adjusts the level of the
<0-255>
smudged/faint
smudged/faint
text
text.With increasing the
decreasing it, the
Adjustment of
PS
PRT
5
smudged/faint
<0-9>
smudged/faint
text
PCL
PRT
5
SYS text.With decreasing
the value, the faint text
<0-9>
is suppressed, and with
increasing it, the
PRT
0
M
Adjustment of the
Adjustment of Normal
<0-10>
image density.With
printer image
decreasing the value,
density
PRT
4
M
the text becomes
<0-10>
lighter.
PRT
5
M
672-3
PRT
672-4
PRT
676-0
Image
Toner
saving
PRT
676-1
PRT
676-2
PRT
676-3
PRT
676-4
PRT
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
10
<0-10>
0
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
Procedur
e
1
1
1
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 75
07/11
Code
Classification
693
Image
694
695
700
Image
701
702
710
Image
714
715
Image
719
720
724
Image

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
EUR: 12 SYS Sets whether the values of the background
UC: 12
tion on origipeak and text peak are
nal set on the
JPN: 22
fixed or not. Ones
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Photo
PPC
12
SYS they are fixed, the
1
range correction is per<11-14,
formed with standard
21-24,
values.
31-34,
The values of the back41-44>
ground peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the backSYS ground density and text
1
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
1: fixed/fixed
21-24,
2: varied/fixed
31-34,
3: fixed/varied
41-44>
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
1
Center
FAX
120
SYS When the value
Adjustment of
binarized
value
<0-255>
the center step
threshold
becomes lighter.
(Text)
Light step
FAX
20
SYS When the value
1
value
<0-255>
light side becomes
lighter.
Dark step
FAX
20
SYS When the value
1
value
<0-255>
dark side becomes
darker.
Density
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
1
adjustment
<0-255>
Fine adjustthe center step
ment of man- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS becomes darker.
1
ual density/
<0-255>
Center value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
1
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
the light steps
FAX
20
SYS becomes lighter.
1
ual density/
<0-255>
Light step
value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS When the value
1
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
the dark steps
FAX
20
SYS becomes darker.
1
ual density/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 76
07/11
Code
Classification
725
Image
729
825
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
becomes darker.
Fine adjustment of auto- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
matic density
<0-255>
set on the
original glass
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
830
Image

RADF
831
Text
SCN
832
Photo
SCN
SYS
SYS

fixed or not. Ones
they are fixed, the
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Sets whether the value
or not. Ones place is
an adjustment for
tens place is for manual density. Once they
values.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Procedur
e
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 77
07/11
Code
Classification
835
Image
836

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
48
SYS When the value
<0-255>
increases, the backtion / Background peak
Text
SCN
48
adjustment
brightened.
<0-255>
837
845
Image
846
847
850
Image
851
852
855
Image
856
857
860
861
862
Image
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Center value
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
adjustment/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of automatic density
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
40
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
When the value

the center step
becomes darker.
SYS
When the value

the light steps
becomes lighter.
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
When the value

the dark steps
becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value

becomes darker.
1
1
1
2 - 78
07/11
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
4
1
SYS When the value
tion ratio
<0-99>
justment(Text/
Photo)
40% or
becomes sharper.
smaller
When the value
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS decreases, the image
4
becomes softer. The
tion ratio
<0-99>
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS less the moire
4
becomes.
tion ratio
<0-99>
Ones place: Fixed
81% or
value (05-865 is 1,
larger
05-866 is 2, 05-867 is
2
SYS 5) Tens place: Sharp4
justment(Text) tion ratio
<0-99>
ness intensity (0: Use
40% or
smaller
intensity)
2
SYS
4
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
2
SYS
4
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
81% or
larger
5
SYS
4
justtion ratio
<0-99>
ment(Photo)
40% or
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
4
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
4
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
1
Custom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values
Range correcof the background peak
Mode 1
UC: 12
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
JPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
an adjustment for
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
ten's place is for man41-44>
SYS ual density. Once they
1
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
correction is per21-24,
31-34,
values.
41-44>
SYS The values of the back1
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
peak affect the repro21-24,
duction of the back31-34,
ground density and text
41-44>
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 79
07/11
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Range correcCustom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values
Mode 1
UC: 12
tion on origiand text peak are fixed
nal set on the
JPN: 22
RADF
<11-14,
an adjustment for
21-24,
31-34,
ten's place is for man41-44>
SYS ual density. Once they
1
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
correction is per21-24,
31-34,
values.
41-44>
Custom
PPC
12
SYS The values of the back1
Mode 3
<11-14,
peak affect the repro21-24,
duction of the back31-34,
ground density and text
41-44>
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Range correcCustom
PPC
40
SYS When the value
1
Mode 1
<0-255>
increases, the backtion Background peak
Custom
PPC
64
1
brightened.
adjustment
Mode 2
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
16
SYS
1
Mode 3
<0-255>
1
Sharpness
Custom
PPC
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-99>
Custom
PPC
EUR: 45 SYS becomes sharper.
1
When the value
Mode 2
UC: 45
JPN: 45
becomes softer. The
<0-99>
Custom
PPC
2
SYS smaller the value is, the
1
less the moire
Mode 3
<0-99>
becomes.
One's place: Fixed
value (05-922 is "1",
05-923 is "5", 05-924 is
"2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use
intensity)
Adjustment of
PPC
2
Custom
1
smudged/faint
Mode 1
<0-4>
smudged/faint text.
text
With increasing the
decreasing it, the
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 80
07/11
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935
936
937
Image
938
939
940
Image
941
942
943
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Density
Custom
PPC
128
SYS When the value
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS the center step
ment of "manbecomes darker.
Mode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of "manual density"/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of "manual density"/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of "automatic density"
Gamma data
slope adjustment
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
0
<0-99>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
945
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial

number) entry
ALL
SYS
Maintenance
When the value

the "Dark" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value

becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
SYS
944
976
When the value

the "light" step density
becomes lighter.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
Ones place:
value 5
of Gammacurve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Tens place:
value 5
of low density (The
darker the background
becomes.)
When this adjustment
is performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also performed automatically
(10 digits)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 81
07/11
2.2.7
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][8]
[POWER]
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 82
05/12
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Setting)
[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.

*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 83
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Notes:
2. e-STUDIO350/450:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board and "NIC"
stands for the NIC board.
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Date and time setting
ALL
<13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User
interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
204
User
interface
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
<0-10>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 2
<0-2>
0
<0-3>
Contents
Procedur
e
Year/month/date/day/
hour/minute/second
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
1 to 6.
0: EUR
1: UC
2: JPN
0: No external counter
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
(This value is valid
only when 2 is set
to 08-201.)
3: Key copy counter
0: For factory shipment
1: For line
* Field: 0 must be
selected
Timer to return the
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
2 - 84
07/05
Code
205
Classification
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Auto power save mode
ALL
EUR: 11
timer setting
UC: 11
JPN: 6
Others:11
<0, 6-15>
206
User
interface
Auto Shut Off Mode timer

setting (Auto Shut Off
Mode / Sleep Mode)
ALL
Refer to
content
<0-20>
SYS
207
User
interface
Highlighting display on
LCD
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
209
User
interface
Paper
feeding
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing

Paper size (A6-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
SYS
216
Paper
feeding
Tab paper print Tab width

setting (Bypass feeding)
ALL
217
Paper
feeding
User
interface
Tab paper print Tab width

setting (Bypass feeding)
Default setting of filing format when storing files
ALL
1
<0-1>
148/105
<148432/105297>
130
<100200>
1300
<0-3000>
0
<0-3>
210
219
PRT
SCN
Contents
Timer to automatically
switch to the Auto
power save mode when
the equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min. 10: 10min.
11: 15min. 12: 20min.
13: 30min. 14: 45min.
15: 60min.
Timer to turn OFF the
power or to enter the
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.11: 80min.
12: 90min. 13: 100min.
14: 110min. 15: 120min.
16: 150min. 17:180min.
18: 210min. 19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO350
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 9
Others: 9
e-STUDIO450
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 12
Others: 12
0: Black letter on white
background
1: White letter on black
background
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
Procedur
e
1
10
SYS
SYS
SYS
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 85
04/09
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
power-ON
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
220
User
interface
221
User
interface
Language selection in UI
data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS
224
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
Paper size for upper

drawer
ALL
226
Paper
feeding
Paper size for lower

drawer
ALL
227
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP upper

drawer
ALL
228
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP lower

drawer
ALL
229
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A3)

ALL
230
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A4-R)

ALL
231
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A5-R)

ALL
232
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B4)

ALL
233
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B5-R)

ALL
234
Paper
feeding
Paper size (LT-R)

ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
EUR: A3
UC: LD
JPN: A3
EUR:
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
EUR: A4
UC: LG
JPN: B4
420/297
<182432/140297>
297/210
<182432/140297>
210/148
<182432/140297>
364/257
<182432/140297>
257/182
<182432/140297>
279/216
<182432/140297>
225
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Procedur
e
1
9
9



10
10
10
10
10
10
2 - 86
04/09
Code
Classification
235
Paper
feeding
236
Paper
feeding
237
Paper
feeding
238
Paper
feeding
239
Paper
feeding
240
Paper
feeding
241
Paper
feeding
242
Paper
feeding
243
Paper
feeding
244
Paper
feeding
245
Paper
feeding
247
Paper
feeding
248
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Paper size (LD)
ALL
432/279
M
<182feeding/width wise direction
432/140297>
Paper size (LG)
ALL
356/216
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
Paper size (ST-R)
ALL
216/140
M
432/140297>
Paper size (COMPUTER)
ALL
356/257
M
432/140297>
M
Paper size (FOLIO)
ALL
330/210
432/140297>
M
ALL
330/216
Paper size (13LG)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
M
ALL
216/216
Paper size (8.5X8.5)
297>
ALL
432/279
SYS
Paper size (Non-standard)
297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 1
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
Paper size (8K)
ALL
390/270
M
432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R)
ALL
270/195
M
432/140297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 2
297>
Memory 3
ALL
148/100
SYS
Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type)
432/100feeding/width wise direc297>
tion
Contents
Procedur
e
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Registers the paper

size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 1].
10
10
10
Registers the paper

size of bypass feed
[MEMORY 2].
10
Registers the paper

size of bypass feed
[MEMORY 3].
10
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 87
04/09
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 4
297>
Service technician teleALL
0
SYS
phone number
<32 digits>
249
Paper
feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM
counter
ALL
Refer to
content
<8 digits>
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM
counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
253
Maintenance
Paper
feeding
Error history display
ALL
SYS
LTA4/LDA3
PRT
0
<0-1>
SYS
254
255
Paper
feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
<0-4>
256
Paper
feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
<1-2>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Procedur
e
Registers the paper

size of bypass feed
[MEMORY 4].
10
A telephone number
can be entered up to 32
digits.
Use the [MONITOR/
PAUSE] button to enter
a hyphen(-).
<Default>
e-STUDIO350
UC, EUR: 120000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO450
UC, EUR: 150000
JPN: 0
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON.
Displays the latest 20
errors data
Sets whether the data is
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
0: Automatic
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
Press the icon on the
11
1: Electrical counter ->

Backup counter
2: Backup counter ->
Electrical counter
(P. 2-241)
1
2
1
2 - 88
06/01
Code
258
Classification
Maintenance

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS
<0-2>
PRT
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
SYS
Sets the file retention

level when editing the
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source file
until CutDoc/SaveDoc
command is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when "1" is set.
Sets the data retention
period when creating a
user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
260
Network
Storage period at trail and

private
Web data retention period
263
User
interface
Administrator's password
(Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456
<10 digits>
264
Network
File retention period
SCN
SYS
265
Network
SCN
266
Network
267
Electronic
filing
Maximum data capacity at

E-mailing
Internet FAX
Full guarantee of documents in Electronic Filing
when HDD is full
30
<0-999>
30
<2-30>
30
<2-30>
0
<0-1>
270
Electronic
filing
Default setting of user box

retention period
ALL
ALL
0
<0-999>
SYS
Network
ALL
Procedur
e
Sets whether the FSMS

connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB connections)
0: No limits
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
The password can be
entered in alphabets
and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 digits.
0: No limits
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
2 to 30 M bytes
259
SCN
14
<0-30>
10
<3 digits>
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
11
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 89
05/11
Code
Classification
271
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Warning display of the
ALL
90
SYS
HDD capacity to be filled
<0-100>
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3
<0-99>
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial

size when transmitting Email
ALL
0
<0-6>
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by

page when transmitting
Internet FAX
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
276
User
interface
Default setting of density

adjustment
SCN
0
<0-11>
SYS
281
User
interface
Default setting of resolution
SCN
1
<0-4>
SYS
283
User
interface
Default setting of original

mode
SCN
0
<0-2>
SYS
284
User
interface
Default setting of scanning

mode
SCN
0
<0-2>
SYS
285
User
interface
Default setting of rotation

mode
SCN
0
<0-3>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Sets the percentage of
the HDD capacity filled
which warning is displayed
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
Sets the days left the
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
Sets the default value
for the partial size of Email to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
Sets the default value
for the page by page of
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
0: Automatic density
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
0: Text
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
0: Single
1: Book
2: Tablet
0: 0 degree
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
2 - 90
05/11
Code
286
Classification
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SCN
0
SYS
paper size
<0-22>
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files
ALL
12
<1-24>
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job

(Paper size)
PRT
1
<0-1>
EUR: 6
UC: 2
JPN: 6
<0 -13>
292
Network
Raw printing job

(Paper type)
PRT
0
<0-4>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
Raw printing job (receiving

tray)
PRT
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-5>
SYS
294
Raw printing job

(Paper direction)
Raw printing job (Staple)
296
Network
Raw printing job

(Number of form lines)
PRT
1200
<50012800>
SYS
297
Network
Raw printing job

(PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000
<449999>
SYS
PRT
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: Automatic
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
Sets the search interval of expired files.
Deletes if expired file is
found. (Unit: Hour)
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: LD
1: LG
2: LT
3: COMP
4: ST
5: A3
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
0: Portrait
1: Landscape
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Inner tray
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray* The settings 4 and
5 are effective only
when the Job Separator
(MJ-5004) is installed.
Sets the number of
form lines from 5 to
128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Sets the font pitch from
0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 91
04/05
Code
Classification
298
Network
299
Network
300
User
interface
User
interface
302
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
SYS
(PCL font size)
<40099975>
Raw printing job
(PCL font number)
Maximum number of copy
volume (MAX9)
Original counter display
Number of
A3
output pages A4
in copier func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
output pages A4
in Printer
A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
PRT
PPC
PPC
0
<0-79>
0
<0-2>
EUR: 2
UC: 0
JPN: 0
<0, 2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Sets the font size from
4 to 999.75.
(A hundredfold of the
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
Sets the PCL font number.
0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
Counts the output
pages in the copier
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
Counts the output

pages in the printer
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
2 - 92
Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS
<8 digits>
output pages A4
at List Print
A5
Mode
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
FAX
0
SYS
Number of
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in FAX Func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the output

pages at the List Print
Mode for each paper
Counts the output

pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 93
Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS
Number of
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Copier FuncA6
tion
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
SCN
0
SYS
Number of
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Scanning
A6
Function
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning

pages in the Copier
Function for each paper
Counts the scanning

pages in the Scanning
2 - 94
Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
FAX
0
SYS
Number of
<8 digits>
transmitted
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning

paper (08-353).
Counts the transmitted

paper (08-353).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 95
Code
Classification
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
<8 digits>
received
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Large
PPC
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PPC
0
SYS
in Copier
<8 digits>
Function
Total
PPC
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in Printer
Function
Large
PRT
Small
PRT
Total
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the received

paper (08-353).
Counts the number of

output pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
output pages in the
Printer Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
14
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 96
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Large
PRT
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PRT
0
SYS
at List Print
<8 digits>
Mode
Total
PRT
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in FAX Function
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Copier Function
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
PPC
Small
PPC
Total
PPC
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
output pages at the List
Print Mode Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
output pages in the FAX
Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
scanning pages in the
Copier Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 97
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Large
FAX
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
scanning
Small
FAX
0
SYS
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Scanning
Function
Display of
number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
Large
SCN
Small
SCN
Total
SCN
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Scanning Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
transmitted pages in the
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 98
Code
331
Classification
User
interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
353
Counter
356
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS
<0-3>
Display of
number of
received
pages in FAX
Function
Display of
total number
of pages
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
ALL
Small
ALL
Total
ALL
Count setting of tab paper

(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (PM)
Definition setting of largesized paper (PM)
Count setting of thick paper
(PM)
Count setting of OHP film
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Counter for upper drawer
feeding
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
<0-2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Sets the screen to be

displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
received pages in the
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Displays the total number of pages in the
Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
SYS
M
M
M
M
M
M
ALL
0
<0-1>
ALL
0
<8 digits>
Contents
Procedur
e
1
14
14
14
14
14
14
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Counted as 1
Counted as 2
Counted as 1
Counted as 2
A3/LD
A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8k
sheets fed from upper
drawer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 99
04/10

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Counter for lower drawer
ALL
0
M
feeding
<8 digits>
Code
Classification
357
Counter
358
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper

drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower

drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
<8 digits>
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed

externally
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-7>
390
Counter
PPC
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
391
Number of errors in HDD

(Copier)
(FAX)
(Scanning)
(Printer)
Number of polygonal motor
rotational speed switching
399
Laser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation
FAX
SCN
PRT
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Contents
sheets fed from lower
drawer
sheets fed from bypass
feed
sheets fed from LCF
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
output pages of duplex
printing.
originals fed from RADF
Selects the job to count
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
The number of error is
reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
SYS
SYS

time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation
Accumulates the time
the polygonal motor has
rotated at normal rotation.
2 - 100
04/01
Code
Classification
400
Fuser

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
counter
<0-19>
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at

a energy saver mode
(Center thermistor)
ALL
0
<0-13>
410
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature

during printing (Center
thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL
12
<0-14>
411
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on

standby (Center thermistor)
ALL
12
<0-12>
412
Fuser

during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 3)
ALL
12
<0-14>
413
Fuser

during printing
paper 1)
ALL
12
<0-14>
414
Developer
Toner density correctionsetting
ALL
0
<0-8>
Contents
0: No error
1: C411(Once)
2: C410(consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C480 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490
0: OFF 1: 40C
2: 50C 3: 60C
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C 11: 140C
12: 150C 13: 160C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C
1: 140C 1: 145C
3: 150C 4: 155C
5: 160C 6: 165C
7: 170C 8: 175C
9: 180C 10: 185C
11: 190C 12: 195C
13: 200C 14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 210C
0: Invalid
1: +3bit
2: +6bit
3: +9bit
4: +12bit
5: -3bit
6: -6bit
7: -9bit
8: -12bit
Procedur
e
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 101
Code
Classification
417
Fuser
419
Image
Processing
420

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
printing (Thick paper 3)
<0-15>
Black band pattern

between sheets of paper
ALL
0
<0-20>
Fuser
Pre-running time at
warming-up
ALL
JPN: 3
UC: 4
EUR: 4
<0-10>
437
Fuser

during printing
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)
ALL
12
<0-14>
438
Fuser

during printing
(Center thermistor/OHP
film)
ALL
12
<0-14>
439
Fuser

ALL
0
<0-15>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Sets whether or not a
black band pattern is
formed on the drum
between two sheets of
paper being transported.
0: Invalid
1 to 20: Black band
width (Unit: mm)
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Procedur
e
1
2 - 102
Code
Classification
440
Fuser

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
<0-15>
printing
(Plain paper)
441
Fuser

printing
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
<0-15>
455
Image
processing
Toner supply amount correction setting
ALL
0
<0-2>
462
RADF
Setting for switchback

operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF
ALL
0<0-1>
SYS
463-0
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry
number setting (upper
drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
ALL
Feeding retry
number setting (lower
drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
463-1
464-0
464-1
Paper
feeding
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
Contents
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Corrects the period of
the toner motor rotation
time during toner supply.
0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80%
Sets whether or not
detecting the original
length by transporting
without scanning in
reverse when finding
A4-R/FOLIO paper.
0: Invalid- Judges as
A4-R without trans
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Valid- Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO size by
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
* The original is
transported in
reverse with no
scanning when
detecting LT-LG
size-paper in LT,
regardless of this
setting.
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Sets the number of
retry from the lower
drawer.
Procedur
e
1
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 103
05/05
Code
465-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
465-1
466-0
Paper
feeding
466-1
467-0
Paper
feeding
467-1
468-0
Paper
feeding
468-1
469
Fan
471
Paper
feeding
472
Fan
478
Laser
479
Laser
480
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
paper
<0-5>
number setting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
upper drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
lower drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (bypass
Others
ALL
5
M
feed)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (LCF)
Others
ALL
5
M
<0-5>
Speed switching for subALL
0
M
separation fan
<0-1>
ALL
148/100
M
Paper size (Post card)
297>
Speed switching for midALL
0
M
dle fan
<0-1>
Judged number of polygoALL
0
M
nal motor rotation error
<0-1>
(Normal rotation)
Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error

(At acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0
<0-1>
Default setting of paper

source
PPC
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the number of

retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Sets the number of

retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Sets the number of

retry from the bypass
tray.
Sets the number of

retry from the LCF.
0: High speed
1: Low speed
model.
0: High speed
1: Low speed
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
1: 12 times
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
0: A4/LT
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
10
1
1
2 - 104
05/05
Code
481
482
Classification
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Automatic change of paper
PPC
1
SYS
source
<0-2>
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of
polygonal motor
ALL
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational

status switching at the Auto
Clear Mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
M
SYS
Contents
Sets whether or not
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
0: ON
1: OFF
Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
RADF only)
Sets whether or not
motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)1: Stopped
Procedur
e
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 105

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Timing of auto-clearing of
ALL
0
SYS
<0-2>
polygonal motor pre-running rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor

type
ALL
3
<2-3>
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation

number on standby
ALL
5
<0-5>
490
Laser
ALL
Transfer
0
<0-1>
165
<0-255>
491
Polygonal motor rotation in

the energy saving mode
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
492
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H) at duplexing
ALL
106
<0-255>
493
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
ALL
128
<0-255>
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither

setting at photo mode
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
503
User
interface
Image

adjustment
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
SYS
508
ALL
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
SYS
Contents
Switches the polygonal
motor to the standby
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when 0 or 2
is set at 08-483.
Set the type of polygonal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
0: 38090.55rpm
1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
0: Stopped
1: 10000rpm
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
charger bias output
value of the trailing
duplexing.
Sets the image reproduction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Automatic
1: Manual (Center)
0: Not used
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo
is set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set
as a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 106
04/05
Code
Classification
509
Image

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PPC
1
SYS
<0-1>
setting at a photo mode
(Custom Mode)
526
Fuser

printing (OHP film)
ALL
6
<0-15>
550
Image
Default setting of Original

mode
PPC
0
<0-3>
SYS
601
User
interface
User
interface
Setting for the EnergySaving Mode

Screen setting for Auto
power Save Mode and
Auto Shut OFF Mode
ALL
SYS
603
User
interface
Setting for automatic

duplexing mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
EUR:0
UC:1
JPN:1
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
604
User
interface
Default setting for APS/

AMS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
605
User
interface
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
607
User
interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction

at AMS
Default setting of RADF
mode
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
610
User
interface
User
interface
Key touch sound of control

panel
Book type original priority
ALL
SYS
PPC
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
General
Summer time mode
ALL
602
611
612
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Switches the image
processing method
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Invalid
1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Text/Photo
1: Photo
2: Text
3: Custom Mode
0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1: Sleep Mode
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
0: APS (Automatic
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Continuous feeding
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Not summer time
1: Summer time
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 107
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
SYS
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS
<1-50>
613
User
interface
614
Network
615
General
Size information of main

memory and page memory
ALL
SYS
617
User
interface
Print setting without

department code
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
618
User
interface
Default setting when mixed

size originals are set on
RADF
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
619
Paper
feeding
Time lag before Auto Job

Start of bypass feeding
ALL
4
<0-10>
SYS
620
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Department management
setting (Copier)
setting (FAX)
setting (Printer)
setting (Scanner)
setting (List print)
Blank copying prevention
mode during RADF jamming
PPC
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
User
interface
Rotation printing at the

nonsorting
621
622
623
624
625
627
FAX
PRT
SCN
PRT
PPC
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e

Sets the period of time

when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
Displays the sizes of
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
0: Printed forcibly
1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
0: Scanned as all in
same size
1: Scanned as each
original size
Sets the time taken to
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: OFF
1: ON (Start printing
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
0: Not rotating
1: Rotating
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 108
Code
628
629
633
634
636

Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
cation
tion
able
value>
User
Direction priority of original
PPC
0
SYS
interface image
<0-1>
User
ALL
0
SYS
interface setting
<0-1>
Releasing F200 service
ALL
0
SYS
Data
<0-2>
overwrite call
kit
User
interface
User
interface
638
General
640
User
interface
641
642
Inner receiving tray priority

at Non-sort Mode
Width setting for image
shift copying (linkage of
front side and back side)
Time differences
ALL
PPC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24
UC: 40
JPN: 6
<0-47>
SYS
Date display format
ALL
SYS
User
interface
Automatic Sorting Mode

setting (RADF)
PPC
EUR:1
UC:2
JPN:0
<0-2>
2
<0-4>
User
interface
Default setting of Sorter

Mode
PPC
0
<0-4>
SYS
SYS
Contents
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
2:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Automatic
Portrait
Invalid
Valid
Not used
Board installed
(GP-1050)
Service call
Normal
Inner receiving tray
ON
OFF
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
0: YYYY.MM.DD.
1: DD.MM.YYYY
2: MM.DD.YYYY
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Invalid
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
NON-SORT
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 109
05/11
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
645
User
interface
646
User
interface
Image position in editing
PPC
2
<0-3>
SYS
647
User
interface
User
interface
Direction priority for date

and time stamp printing
Returning finisher tray
when printing is finished
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
649
User
interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
650
User
interface
User
interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating

order setting
Printing format setting for
Time Stamp and Page
Number
PPC
SYS
PPC
0
<0-1>
2
<0-3>
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Cascade operation setting
PPC
PRT

PPC
648
651
652
653
657
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets the reproduction
ratio for the X in 1
printing (including magazine sort) to the
Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
Sets the page pasted
position for X in 1 to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Cornering
1: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Cornering
2: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Centering
3: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Centering
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Sets whether or not
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
0: Left page to right
page
page
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
Hyphen
(with page number)
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 110
07/11
Code
658
Classification
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
SYS
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
Contents
Procedur
e
1
659
User
interface
Auto Job start setting for

PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
ALL
SYS
0: Invalid1: Valid
662
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of
received FAX
received E-mail
Clearing of SMS partition
Sets whether or not

feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Sets whether or not
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
0: Invalid1:Valid
SYS
665
General
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
M/
SYS
666
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
SYS
667
General
ALL
SYS
669
General
System all clearing
ALL
SYS
670
General
ALL
SYS
671
User
interface
HDD diagnostic menu display

Size indicator
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Clears SMS partition.

(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes all the adjustment modesand the
setting modes.
Initializes the Electronic Filing.
Initializes the shared
folder.
Initializes system
NVRAM area.
Display the HDD information
0: Invalid 1: Valid
3
3
3
3
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 111

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Initialization of department
SYS
management information
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
Trial period setting
ALL
254
<1-60>
SYS
678
General
Setting of banner advertising display
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
679
General
ALL
SYS
680
General
ALL
SYS
681
General
Banner advertising display

1
2
Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
682
Use
interface
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Offsetting between jobs
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Initializing of the department management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management information is destroyed
for some reason,
Enter Department
Code is displayed
on the control panel
even if the department management
function is not set
on. In this case, initialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initialized at the factory.
Sets the trial period
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is "254". Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.
Sets whether or not displaying the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
Maximum 27 letters
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on
the control panel.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Procedur
e
3
11
11
1
2 - 112
Code
Classification
683
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Duplex printing setting
ALL
1
SYS
<0-1>
when coin controller is
used
684
685
General
General
Rebuilding all databases

related to Address Book
ALL
ALL
SYS
SYS
686
General
ALL
SYS
689
FAX

related to log
Adaptation of paper source
priority selection
FAX
0
<0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
<2>
<0-2>
692
Maintenance
Performing panel calibration
ALL
SYS
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
SYS
694
695
General
General
Performing HDD testing

Sets when the end of trial
period is notified.
ALL
PRT/
SCN
3
<0-59>
SYS
SYS
696
Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding
Installation of scrambler
board (Option)
ALL
0
<0-1>
Paper type priority
PPC
1
<1-2>
SYS
697
SYS
Contents
When the duplex printing is short paid with a
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
Rebuilds all databases.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the Address
Book.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the logs.
0: Not subjected for
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
2: Normal formatting
0: Not formatted
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performs the calibration
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
Checks the bad sector.
Sets when the end of
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Sets the paper type priority during copying.
1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Procedur
e
1
3
3
3
1
7
7
1
3
3
1
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 113
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Entering the key code for
ALL
scrambler board
698
Scrambler
board
699
Scrambler
board
FAX
Erasing all data in HDD
ALL
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
function
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
707
Maintenance
HTTP server
URL setting
HTTP initially-registered
server
URL setting
ALL
710
Maintenance
Short time interval setting

of recovery from Emergency Mode
ALL
https://
device.mf
p-support.com:
443/
device/firstregist.ashx
24
<1-48>
711
Maintenance

of Emergency Mode
ALL
701
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
60
<30-360>
Contents
Procedur
e
5
SYS
Start up this code and

have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
This setting is effective
only when the scrambler board is installed.
0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
0: Valid (Remote-controlled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
Maximum 256 Bytes
11
SYS
Maximum 256 Bytes
11
SYS
Sets the time interval to

recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
Unit: Minute
SYS
3
1
2 - 114
Code
Classification
715
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance
Maintenance
720

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
1230
SYS
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
ALL
0
SYS
<0-1>
Writing data of self-diagnostic code
ALL
3
SYS
response waiting time
<1-30>
(Timeout)
ALL
0
SYS
initial registration
<0-2>
tentative password
Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only)
Service center call function
2
<0-2>
SYS
ALL
SYS
0: OFF
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1
<0-1>
-
SYS
ALL
729
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
HTTP proxy ID setting

HTTP proxy password setting
HTTP proxy panel display
738
739
ALL
HTTP proxy port number

setting
734
0: OFF
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
Maximum 10 letters
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
0: Not registered
1: Registered
728
733
Unit: Minute
SYS
ALL
732
0
<0-1>
HTTP proxy IP address

setting
731
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted
ALL
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
730
SYS
723
727
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
Maintenance
726
Procedur
e
ALL
721
Service center call HTTP

server URL setting
HTTP proxy setting
Contents
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
SYS
11
11
1
11
ALL
0
<065535>
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
Automatic ordering function of supplies
ALL

FAX number
E-mail address
User's name
User's telephone number
ALL
SYS
ALL
SYS
ALL
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 32 digits
11
SYS
11
11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 115
Code
740
741
742
743
744
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
745
Maintenance
(Remote)
746
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763
765

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS
tion of supplies
User's E-mail address
ALL
SYS
User's address
SYS
tion of supplies
Service number
SYS
tion of supplies
Service technician's name
SYS
tion of supplies
Service technician's telephone number
SYS
tion of supplies
Service technician's E-mail
address
SYS
tion of supplies
Supplier's name
SYS
tion of supplies
Supplier's address
ALL
SYS
Notes
Information about supplies
ALL
SYS
Part number of toner cartridge K
ALL
1
SYS
Order quantity of toner car<1-99>
tridge K
ALL
1
SYS
<1-99>
Condition number of toner
cartridge K
ALL
SYS
Part number of toner bag
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 192 letters

List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 5 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 32 digits
11
Maximum 192 letters

List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 128 letters
11
Maximum 20 digits
11
1
1
Maximum 20 digits
11

Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS

bag
Automatic ordering supplies
Display
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
2 - 116
07/11
Code
767
768
769
770
771
772
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Service Notification setting
ALL
0
SYS
<0-2>
Contents
Enables to set up to 3
E-mail
addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Maximum 192 letters
Procedur
e
1
Destination E-mail address
ALL
SYS
11
Total counter information

transmission setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Total counter transmission

date setting
ALL
1
<1-31>
SYS
1 to 31
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Dealer's name
ALL
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
SYS
Display setting of [Service

Notification] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters

Needed at initial registration
Maximum 20 letters
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Sending error contents of

equipment
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Setting total counter transmission interval

2
ALL
SYS
ALL
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11

3
ALL
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
773
Maintenance
774
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
Notification format selection
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Text
1: Text + XML data
polling day selection Day-1
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
781
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
782
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
775
776
777
778
779
780
11
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 117
Code
Classification
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance
Maintenance
790
794
795
796
797
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
SYS
<0-31>
polling day selection Sunday
polling day selection Monday
polling day selection Tuesday
polling day selection
Wednesday
Thursday
polling day selection Friday
polling day selection Saturday
Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K
Information of supplies setting of toner bag
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
Firmware download
ALL
Notifying address of trialperiod end
PRT/
SCN
Contents
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Procedur
e
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
798
Maintenance
General
799
General
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SCN
SYS
826
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Toner saving mode)
PRT
128<0255>
840
Image
control
Setting of toner density

temperature control
ALL
0
<0-1>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
SYS
SYS
0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
Sets where the end of
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF
1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
[CANCEL]: Cancel
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the Forcible end
of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
0: Controlled
1: Not controlled
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 118
Code
Classification
841
Transfer

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Transfer timing correction
ALL
0
M
<0-7>
855
Fuser

thermistor / Tab paper)
ALL
12
<0-14>
856
Fuser

printing (Tab paper)
ALL
10
<0-15>
859
Developer
Developer bias DC correction(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
860
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
861
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
862
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
863
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
864
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
865
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
866
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
867
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
868
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H)
ALL
128
<0-255>
Contents
0: Standard
1: Timing 1
2: Timing 2
3: Timing 3
4: Timing 4
5: Timing 5
6: Timing 6
7: Timing 7
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
the developer bias
the developer bias
the developer bias
the developer bias
the developer bias
charger bias output
edge area of paper.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 119

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Transfer charger bias corALL
84
M
rection (L)
<0-255>
Code
Classification
869
Transfer
872
Laser
Laser power correction

(Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
873
Laser

(Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
875
Laser

(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
876
Laser

(Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
877
Laser

(Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
900
Version
System firmware ROM version
ALL
903
905
907
908
915
916
920
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
FAX
ALL
ALL
921
922
Version
Version
ALL
ALL
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
933
Version
Engine ROM version

Scanner ROM version
RADF ROM version
Finisher ROM version
FAX board ROM version
NIC board ROM version
FROM basic section software version
FROM internal program
UI data fixed section version
UI data common section
version
Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Web data whole version
Contents
Procedur
e

charger bias output
edge area of paper.
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
JPN: T360SY0JXXX
UC: T360SY0UXXX
EUR: T360SY0EXXX
Others: T360SY0XXXX
360M-XXX
360S-XXX
DF-XXXX
SDL-XX FIN-XX
F562-XXX
X.XXX
VX.XX/X.XX
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
1
1
1
1
1
2
2 - 120

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 1
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 2
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 3
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 4
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 5
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 6
HD version
ALL
-
Code
Classification
934
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
948
General
Mode setting by pressing

[Energy Saver] button for a
while
949
General
950
1
<1-2>
-
UTY
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Automatic interruption
page setting during black
printing
ALL
0
<0-100>
SYS
Electronic
filing
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
ALL
0
<0-3>
SYS
953
User
interface
Access code entry for

Electronic Filing printing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
954
User
interface
Clearing timing for files and

Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
969
User
interface
User
interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when

switching to Energy Saving
Mode
ALL
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
970
Two-way setting of RawPort 9100

Initialization after software
version upgrade
ALL
ALL
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
JPN: T360HD0JXXX
UC: T360HD0UXXX
EUR: T360HD0EXXX
Others: T360HD0XXXX
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
Sets the mode to enter
when the [Energy
Saver] button is
pressed for a while.0:
Sleep Mode1: Auto
Shut Off Mode
Sets the number of
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
Sets the start-up
method of the Electronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
3: Data update
0: Renewed automatically
1: Enter every time
0: Immediately after
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
12
3
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 121
Code
Classification
973
Network
975
General
976
Electronic
Filing
977
Network
978
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS
<0-3>
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin

controller
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Equipment name setting to

a folder when saving files
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Switching of extended
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
Raw printing job
(Paper feeding drawer)
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
PRT
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Sets the PCL line feed
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
Sets whether pause or
stop the printing job
when it is short paid
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
Sets whether or not
adding the equipment
name to the folder
when saving files.
0: Not add
1: Add
0: ISO8859-1
1: ISO8859-2
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
AUTO
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
PFP upper drawer
PFP lower drawer
LCF
Procedur
e
1
1
1
2 - 122
Code
Classification
979
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
985
ElecPrint mode setting of mixed

tronic Fil- input source of Electronic
ing
Filing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
986
General
Copy function setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
988
Paper
feeding
Setting of paper size

switching to 13" LG
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
989
Scrambler
board
Scrambler board initial setting
ALL
Contents
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Roman-8
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6:ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
0: Image quality priority
mode
1: Function priority
mode
Sets the copy function
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Not switched
1: LG13"LG
2: FOLIO13"LG
Performs the initial setting of the scrambler
board.
Procedur
e
1
1
3
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 123
04/10
Code
Classification
995
Version
999
1002
Maintenance
Maintenance
Network
1003

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Equipment number
ALL
0
SYS
(serial number) display
<10 digits>
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
3
<1-3>
1
<1-2>
SYS
Reset of NIC board
ALL
Selection of NIC board status information
ALL
Network
Speed setting of Ethernet
ALL
3
<1-3>
NIC
1004
Network
NIC Web password
ALL
NIC
1005
Network
Availability of IP
ALL
NIC
1006
Network
Address Mode
ALL
1
<1-2>
2
<1-5>
1007
1008
Network
Network
Domain name
IP address
ALL
ALL
NIC
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
NIC
1012
Network
Network frame type
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-5>
1013
Network
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
NIC
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1001
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Contents
This code can be also
keyed in from the
adjustment mode (05976).
10 digits
Refer to values of total
counter.
1: Cold
2: Warm
3: Not reset
1: Not printed out
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
1: 10 MBPS
2: 100 MBPS
3: Automatic
Writing only (Current
setting is not displayed.)
Maximum 31 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Fixed IP address
2: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
without BOOTP
without DHCP
Maximum 96 letters
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Procedur
e
11
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 124
Code
Classification
1015
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
NIC
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
IP address to DNS server

(Primary)
1019
Network
1020
Contents
Procedur
e
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
-
NIC

(Secondary)
ALL
NIC
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1021
Network
Availability of SLP
ALL
NIC
1023
1024
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
UTY
UTY
1025
Network
ALL
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1026
Network
NetBios name
Name of WINS server or IP
address (Primary)
address (Secondary)
Availability of Bindery
1
<1-2>
-
Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 15 letters
Maximum 128 letters
ALL
NIC
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028
1029
1030
Network
Network
Network
Directory service context

Directory service tree
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
ALL
ALL
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 47 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
12
1027
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP

server
ALL
1032
Network
Port number to system

HTTP server
ALL
1033
Network
ALL
1034
Network
Availability of NIC HTTP

client
TCP port number to Controller HTTP client
1035
Network
IP address to HTTP server

(Primary)
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
80
<165535>
8080
<165535>
2
<1-2>
80
<165535>
-
1037
Network
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1038
Network
ALL
1039
Network
FQDN or IP address to
SMTP server
TCP port number of SMTP
client
ALL
ALL
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
12
SYS
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
UTY
NIC
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
25
<165535>
NIC
NIC
12
12
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 125

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Availability of SMTP server
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
ALL
25
UTY
server
<165535>
E-mail box name to SMTP
ALL
UTY
server
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY
<1-2>
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
ALL
NIC
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC
<1-3>
Code
Classification
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050
1051
Network
Network
1052
Network
1053
Network
Availability of FTP client
ALL
1054
Network
ALL
1055
Network
FTP server
TCP port number of FTP
client
1056
Network
Data port number of FTP

client
ALL
1057
1058
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1059
Network
Login name to FTP server

Login password to FTP
server
Availability of FTP server
1060
Network

server
ALL
1061
1062
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1063
Network
Login name to FTP client

Login password to FTP client
MIB function
1065
1066
Network
Network
Login name to POP3

server
Login password to POP3
E-mail reception interval
(Unit: Minute)
TCP port number of POP3
client
Setting of read Community

Setting of read/Write Community
ALL
NIC
ALL
ALL
5
<0-4096>
110
<165535>
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
NIC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
21
<165535>
0
<065535>
1
<1-2>
21
<165535>
1
<1-2>
public
private
Contents
1: Available
2: Not available
NIC
12
12
Maximum 192 letters
12
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
12
1: Automatic
2: POP3
3: APOP
Maximum 96 letters
Maximum 96 letters
NIC
NIC
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 letters
12
12
UTY
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC
NIC
12
12
2 - 126
05/05
Code
Classification
1067
Network
1068
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Authentication TRAP funcALL
1
NIC
tion
<1-2>
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
TRAP destination IP
ALL
UTY
address
Contents
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Maximum 31 letters
Procedur
e
12
12
12
ALL
public
NIC
Network
Community setting of
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
NIC
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
1075
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1076
Network
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
1077
1078
Network
Network
LPD queue name

Availability of IPP
ALL
ALL
1079
Network
ALL
1080
Network
Availability of IPP port

number 80
TCP port number of IPP
1081
1082
1083
1084
Network
Network
Network
Network
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Maximum 127 letters

Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
12
12
12
12
1085
Network
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
1090
1091
Network
Network
1092
Network
1093
Network
1094
Network
IPP printer name

IPP printer location
IPP printer information
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
driver
IPP printer Make and
Model
(more)
MFGR
IPP message from operator
Availability of FTP print
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
9100
<165535>
1
<1-2>
515
<165535>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
631
<165535>
-
ALL
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
ALL
ALL
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
Printer user name of FTP

Printer user password of
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
print server
1
<1-2>
print
-
Login name to Novell print

server
Login password to Novell
print server
ALL
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
NIC
NIC
12
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
Maximum 31 letters
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
ALL
21
<165535>
-
NIC
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 127
05/05

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Name of SearchRoot
ALL
NIC
server
Scan rate setting of print
ALL
5
NIC
queue
<1-255>
ALL
5
UTY
Page number limitation for
<1-99>
printing text of received
Email
MDN return mail setting
ALL
2
UTY
when receiving E-mail
<1-2>
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY
Code
Classification
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server

authentication
ALL
5
<1-5>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP

server authentication
Login password for SMTP
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
1105
Network
Service name setting
ALL
1107
1108
Network
Network
1109
1110
Network
Network
1111
Network
FTP server login name 1

FTP server login password
1
FTP server login name 2
FTP server login password
2
POP Before SMTP setting
1112
Network
Host name
ALL
1114
Network
ALL
1117
Network
Sending mail text of InternetFAX

SMB time-out period
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 31 letters
12
Unit: Second
12
12
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
1: Plain
2: Login
3: Cram-MD5
4: Digest MD5
5: Disable
Maximum 64 letters
12
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
Refer to
contents
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
ALL
Tiger
Woods
ALL
ALL
Shigeki
Maruyam
a
2
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
1
<0-1>
300
<1-9999>
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
UTY
UTY
Maximum 63 letters
<Default value>
e-STUDIO350:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO350
e-STUDIO450:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO450
Maximum 64 letters
Maximum 32 letters
12
12
UTY
UTY
Maximum 64 letters
Maximum 32 letters
12
12
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 63 letters
12
NIC
SYS
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Unit: Second
12
1
1
2 - 128
05/05
Code
Classification
1120
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Backup/Restore of NIC
ALL
0
SYS
setting information
<0-1>
0: Read (Reads all of

the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B
(no extension) in
USB)
1: Write (Writes all of
the setting information read from a file
NAM1B (no extension) in USB)
Maximum 15 letters
12
Sets the Job Build

Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sets the maximum
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times
Selects the default
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
Network
Workgroup name
ALL
1130
User
interface
Job Build Function
ALL
1131
User
interface
Maximum number of time

job build performed
ALL
1000
<5-1000>
SYS
1132
General
Default screen selection of

ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1135
Paper
feeding
Default setting of drawers

(Printer/BOX)
PRT
1
<1-5>
SYS
1136
Network
ALL
13
<0-16>
SYS
1137
Network
ALL
8-20 M bytes
Network
12
<8-20>
0
<0-3>
SYS
1138
Number of lines simultaneously connectable when

using SMB
Memory partition size
when using Samba
LDAP search method setting
SYS
1139
Network
1140
User
interface
Sets the search method

when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
0: Not authenticated
1: Authenticated
Selects the restriction of
the template function
usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
LDAP authentication setting

Restriction of the template
function with the administrator privilege
ALL
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
UTY
Procedur
e
1124
ALL
workgroup
1
<0-1>
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
12
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 129
05/11
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Counter notification
ALL
SYS
Remote FAX setting
1145
Maintenance
(Remote)
1372
Image
processing
Heater and energizing time

accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1376
Image
processing
Image
processing
Toner cartridge drive

counter Number of output
pages
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1386
Image
processing

(Thick paper 2)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1387
Image
processing

(Thick paper 3)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1388
Image
processing

(OHP film)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1390
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter

(upper drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1391
Paper
feeding

(lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1385
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Maximum 32 digits
Enter a hyphen with the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Counts up the heater
control time accumulated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
Counts the rotation
number of the toner
cartridge.
Counts up when the
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at the PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
sync at PM support
mode.
drawer.
drawer.
Procedur
e
11
1
1
2 - 130
05/05
1392
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
(PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
1393
Paper
feeding

(PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1394
Paper
feeding

(bypass feed)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1395
Paper
feeding

(LCF)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1396
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1397
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1398
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1399
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1400
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1401
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
1410
Paper
feeding
Counter

upper limit value
(upper drawer)
upper limit value
(lower drawer)
upper limit value
(PFP upper drawer)
upper limit value
(PFP lower drawer)
upper limit value
(bypass feed)
upper limit value (LCF)
Counter for period of toner
cartridge rotation time
1412
Counter
Code
Classification
Counter for tab paper
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
M
Contents
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
tray.
retry from the LCF.
When the number of
feeding retry (08-1390
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
feeding retry will not be
performed subsequently. In case 0 is
set as a setting value,
however, the feeding
retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Counts up the period of

rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
Counts up when the
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 131
05/05
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
HDD data overwriting type
ALL
3
SYS
setting
<0-4>
1422
Data
overwrite kit
1424
Data
overwrite kit
HDD data clearing type

setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
3
<0-4>
SYS
1426
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
1427
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible NVRAM data all

clearing
ALL
1428
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible SRAM backup

data all clearing
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
HDD data is cleared by
overwriting the type of
value set in this code.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1050
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
ON)
OFF)
HDD data is cleared by
overwriting the type of
value set in this code.
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
ON)
OFF)
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
Procedur
e
1
2 - 132
05/05

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
SYS
<0-1>
Code
Classification
1432
Network
1433
Network
"Disable e-Filing" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1434
Network
"Disabling local file save"

function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1484
Network
Authentication method of
"Scan to Email"
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1486
Network
Setting whether use of

Internet FAX is permitted
or not when it is given an
authenticationn
Server setting for LDAP
user authentication
ALL
SYS
1487
Network
"From" address assignment method when it is

given an authentication
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-2>
1488
Network
ID setting of LDAP server

for "From" address assignment
ALL
1489
Network
ALL
1491
Network
Setting for "From" address

edit at "Scan to Email"
E-mail domain name
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
Contents
0: Normal mode
1: Mode for Private
Print
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Disabled
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
SYS
1
1
0: "User name" + @ +
"Domain name"
1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail setting
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
96 + 2 (delimiter) character
ASCll sequence only
1
11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 133
05/05
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Standard paper size setting
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
1500
Pixel
counter
1501
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
SYS
1502
Pixel
counter
Service technician reference counter clearing
ALL
SYS
1503
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference

counter clearing
ALL
SYS
1504
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter display setting
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1505
Pixel
counter
Displayed reference setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1506
Pixel
counter
Toner empty determination

counter setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1507
Pixel
counter
Threshold setting for toner

empty determination (Output pages)
ALL
400
<0-999>
SYS
1508
Pixel
counter

empty determination (Pixel
counter)
ALL
17550
<060000>
SYS
1509
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1510
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter clear flag/

Service technician reference
Service technician reference cleared date
ALL
SYS
1514
Pixel
counter

cleared date
ALL
SYS
1518
Pixel
counter

count started date
ALL
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
Procedur
e
Selects the standard

paper size to convert it
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
Selects whether or not
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Selects the reference
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference1: Toner
cartridge reference
Selects the counter to
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
Sets the number of output pages to determine
toner empty. This setting is valid when 0 is
set at 08-1506.
Sets the number of output pages to determine
set at 08-1506.
Becomes 1 when 081502 is performed.
Displays the date on

which 08-1502 was performed.
3
3
2
2
2 - 134
05/12
Code
1548
Classification
Pixel
counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(Service technician reference)
1550
Pixel
counter

PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1551
Pixel
counter

FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1553
Pixel
counter

(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
<8 digits>
SYS
1555
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages/

black (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1556
Pixel
counter

FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1566
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge replacement counter
ALL
<3 digits>
SYS
1592
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1593
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
Contents
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
paper size in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
paper size in the FAX
[Unit. page]
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
[Unit. page]
[Unit. page]
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
[Unit: 0.01%]
pixel count in the printer
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 135
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Average pixel count
FAX
0
SYS
<0(Service technician reference)
10000>
1594
Pixel
counter
1595
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1606
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count

PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1607
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count

PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1608
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count

FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1613
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1619
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1624
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count

PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1625
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count (Toner

cartridge reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1634
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count

FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1639
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count

PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Contents
pixel count in the FAX
[Unit: 0.01%]
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy function, black mode and
service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
count in the printer
[Unit: 0.01%]
count in the FAX function and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
[Unit: 0.01%]
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
pixel count in the FAX
[Unit: 0.01%]
count in the FAX function and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
count in the copy function and toner cartridge
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2 - 136
Code
1640
Classification
Pixel
counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
SYS
<010000>
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
Contents
[Unit: 0.01%]
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
Procedur
e
2
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

are divided into 10
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

are divided into 10
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 137
05/11
<<PM support mode related code>>

The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
<e-STUDIO350/450>
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
1150-0 to 8
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
Items
Photoconductive drum
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Remarks
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
2 - 138
05/12

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
Transfer charger wire
1214-0 to 8
1215
Separation charger wire
1224-0 to 8
1225
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Cleaning roller
1266-0 to 8
1267
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
Items
Pickup roller
(RADF)
Feed roller
(RADF)
Separation roller
(RADF)
Remarks
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 139
05/12

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
Pickup roller
(LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
Feed roller
(Upper drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
Feed roller
(Lower drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
Separation roller
(Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
Separation roller
(Lower drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
Separation roller
(LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
Separation roller
(Bypass unit)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
Items
Feed roller
(LCF)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Remarks
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
2 - 140
05/12

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(Bypass unit)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
Items
Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)
Remarks
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 141
05/12
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>

(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code 257 and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3)
Key in the value 1 or 2 and press the [START] button.

The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)
Key in 1 to copy the value of the total

counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
(B)
2 - 142
05/12
Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup

counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(B)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 143
05/12
2.2.8
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][8]
[POWER]
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 144
07/11
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Setting)
[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.

*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 145
05/12
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Notes:
2. e-STUDIO352/353/452/453:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS", "NIC" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
202
User
interface
203
General
204
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Year/month/date/day/
Date and time setting
ALL
<13 dighour/minute/second
its>
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
1 to 6.
Destination selection
ALL
EUR: 0
M
0: EUR
UC: 1
1: UC
2: JPN
JPN: 2
<0-2>
Counter installed externally
ALL
0
M
0: No external counter
<0-3>
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
(This value is valid
only when 2 is set
to 08-201.)
3: Key copy counter
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
M
0: For factory ship<0-1>
ment
1: For line
* Field: 0 must be
selected
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
SYS Timer to return the
<0-10>
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
5
2 - 146
07/11
Code
205
Classification
User
interface
206
User
interface
207
User
interface
209
User
interface
210
Paper
feeding
213
User
interface

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Auto power save mode
ALL
JPN: 6
SYS Timer to automatically
switch to the Auto
timer setting
Other: 11
<0, 6-15>
power save mode when
the equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min. 10: 10min.
11: 15min. 12: 20min.
13: 30min. 14: 45min.
15: 60min.
1
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
ALL
Refer to
SYS Timer to turn OFF the
setting (Auto Shut Off
content
power or to enter the
Mode / Sleep Mode)
<0-20>
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.11: 80min.
12: 90min. 13: 100min.
14: 110min. 15: 120min.
16: 150min. 17:180min.
18: 210min. 19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO352/353
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 9
Others: 9
e-STUDIO452/453
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 12
Others: 12
Highlighting display on
ALL
0
SYS 0: Black letter on white
1
LCD
<0-1>
background
1: White letter on black
background
1
Default setting of filing forALL
1
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when E-mailing
<0-6>
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)
Paper size (A6-R)
PRT
148/105
M
10
432/105297>
Display of [REVERSE
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
1
ORDER] button
<0-1>
1: Displayed
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 147
07/11
Code
Classification
219
User
interface
220
User
interface
221
User
interface
224
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
225
226
Paper
feeding
227
Paper
feeding
228
Paper
feeding
229
Paper
feeding
230
Paper
feeding
231
Paper
feeding
232
Paper
feeding
233
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Default setting of filing forSCN
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
mat when storing files
<0-6>
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
power-ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
<0-6>
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Language selection in UI
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Language 1
data at Web power ON
UC: 0
1: Language 2
JPN: 5
2: Language 3
<0-6>
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS Press the button on the
Paper size for upper
ALL
EUR: A4
M
drawer
UC: LT
JPN: A4
M
Paper size for lower
ALL
EUR: A3
drawer
UC: LD
JPN: A3
Paper size for PFP upper
ALL
EUR:
M
drawer
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
Paper size for PFP lower
ALL
EUR: A4
M
drawer
UC: LG
JPN: B4
ALL
420/297
M
Paper size (A3)
297>
ALL
297/210
M
Paper size (A4-R)
297>
ALL
210/148
M
Paper size (A5-R)
297>
ALL
364/257
M
Paper size (B4)
297>
ALL
257/182
M
Paper size (B5-R)
297>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
2 - 148
07/11
Code
Classification
234
Paper
feeding
235
Paper
feeding
236
Paper
feeding
237
Paper
feeding
238
Paper
feeding
239
Paper
feeding
240
Paper
feeding
241
Paper
feeding
242
Paper
feeding
243
Paper
feeding
244
Paper
feeding
245
Paper
feeding
247
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Paper size (LT-R)
ALL
279/216
M
<182feeding/width wise direction
432/140297>
Paper size (LD)
ALL
432/279
M
432/140297>
Paper size (LG)
ALL
356/216
M
432/140297>
Paper size (ST-R)
ALL
216/140
M
432/140297>
M
Paper size (COMPUTER)
ALL
356/257
432/140297>
M
ALL
330/210
Paper size (FOLIO)
297>
M
ALL
330/216
Paper size (13LG)
297>
ALL
216/216
M
Paper size (8.5X8.5)
297>
ALL
432/279
SYS
Paper size (Non-standard)
297>
ALL
148/100
SYS Registers the paper
Memory 1
<148size of bypass feed
Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into
ing/non-standard type)
297>
[MEMORY 1].
Paper size (8K)
ALL
390/270
M
432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R)
ALL
270/195
M
432/140297>
ALL
148/100
Memory 2
297>
[MEMORY 2].
Procedur
e
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 149
07/11
Code
Classification
248
Paper
feeding
249
Paper
feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
252
Maintenance
253
Maintenance
Paper
feeding
254
255
Paper
feeding
256
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
148/100
Memory 3
297>
[MEMORY 3].
Memory 4
ALL
148/100
Paper size (bypass feed<148size of bypass feed
432/100(non-standard type) into
feeding/width wise direc297>
[MEMORY 4].
tion
SYS A telephone number
Service technician teleALL
0
can be entered up to 32
phone number
<32 digdigits.
its>
Use the [MONITOR/
PAUSE] button to enter
a hyphen(-).
Setting value of PM
ALL
Refer to
M
<Default>
counter
content
e-STUDIO352/353
<8 digits>
UC, EUR: 120000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO452/453
UC, EUR: 150000
JPN: 0
Current value of PM
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
counter Display/0 clearing
<8 digits>
ON.
Error history display
ALL
SYS Displays the latest 20
errors data
LTA4/LDA3
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether the data is
<0-1>
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
M
0: Automatic
<0-4>
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
M
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
10
10
11
1
2
1
2 - 150
07/11
Code
Classification
257
Counter
258
Maintenance
259
Network
260
Network
263
User
interface
264
Network
265
Network
266
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Counter copy
ALL
1: Electrical counter ->
<1-2>
Backup counter
(NVRAM-> SRAM)
2: Backup counter ->
Electrical counter
(SRAM-> NVRAM)
(P. 2-142)
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether the FSMS
<0-2>
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB connections)
Storage period at trail and
PRT
14
SYS 0: No limits
private
<0-30>
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1hour
32: 2hours
33: 4hours
34: 8hours
35: 12hours
Web data retention period
SCN
10
SYS When a certain period
<3 digits>
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
Administrator's password
ALL
123456
The password can be
(Maximum 10 digits)
<10 digentered in alphabets
its>
and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 digits.
SYS 0: No limits
File retention period
SCN
30
<0-999>
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
SCN
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
E-mailing
<2-30>
ALL
30
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
Internet FAX
<2-30>
Procedur
e
-
2
1
11
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 151
07/11
Code
267
270
271
272
273
274

Default
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
ElecFull guarantee of docuALL
1
SYS Sets the file retention
ments in Electronic Filing
<0-1>
level when editing the
tronic
filing
when HDD is full
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source file
until CutDoc/SaveDoc
command is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when "1" is set.
ElecDefault setting of user box
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data retention
tronic
retention period
<0-999>
period when creating a
filing
user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
General Warning notification of the
ALL
90
SYS Sets the percentage of
File Share and e-Filing par<0-100>
HDD partition filled
titions are filled
when warning notification is sent.
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
* Related code
08-288
Scanning Notification setting of EALL
3
SYS Sets the days left the
mail saving time limit
<0-99>
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
SYS Sets the default value
Scanning Default setting of partial
ALL
0
size when transmitting E<0-6>
for the partial size of Email
mail to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
FAX
Default setting of page by
ALL
0
SYS Sets the default value
page when transmitting
<0-4>
for the page by page of
Internet FAX
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
2 - 152
07/11
Code
276
Classification
User
interface
281
User
interface
283
User
interface
284
User
interface
285
User
interface
286
User
interface
288
General
290
Network

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic density
adjustment
<0-11>
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
Default setting of resolution SCN
1
SYS 0: 150 dpi
1
<0-4>
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
1
SCN
0
SYS 0: Text
mode
<0-3>
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
3: Gray scale
Default setting of scanning
SCN
0
SYS 0: Single
1
mode
<0-2>
1: Book
2: Tablet
Default setting of rotation
SCN
0
SYS 0: 0 degree
1
mode
<0-3>
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
1
SCN
0
SYS 0: Automatic
paper size
<0-22>
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
1
Searching interval of deletALL
12
SYS Sets the search intering expired files and check<1-24>
val of deleting expired
ing capacity of HDD
files and checking
partitions
capacity of HDD partitions. (Unit: Hour)
* Related code
08-271
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
1
<0-1>
1: Invalid
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 153
07/11
Code
Classification
291
Network
292
Network
293
Network
294
Network
295
Network
296
Network
297
Network
298
Network
299
Network
300
User
interface
User
interface
302

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
EUR: 6
SYS 0: LD
1: LG
2: LT
3: COMP
(Paper size)
UC: 2
JPN: 6
4: ST
5: A3
<0 -13>
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Plain paper
(Paper type)
<0-5>
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
5: Tab paper
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: Portrait
(Paper direction)
<0-1>
1: Landscape
Raw printing job (Staple)
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
Raw printing job (receiving
PRT
0
SYS 0: Inner tray
tray)
<0-5>
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray* The settings 4 and
5 are effective only
when the Job Separator
(MJ-5004) is installed.
SYS Sets the number of
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
form lines from 5 to
(Number of form lines)
<500128. (A hundredfold of
12800>
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
1000
SYS Sets the font pitch from
(PCL font pitch)
<440.44 to 99.99. (A hun9999>
dredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
SYS Sets the font size from
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
4 to 999.75.
(PCL font size)
<400(A hundredfold of the
99975>
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL font num(PCL font number)
<0-79>
ber.
Maximum number of copy
PPC
0
SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
volume (MAX9)
<0-2>
Original counter display
PPC
EUR: 2
SYS Sets whether the origiUC: 0
nal counter is disJPN: 0
played or not.
<0, 2, 4>
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Doublesized original is
counted as 2.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 154
07/11
Code
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the output
<8 digits>
pages in the copier
output pages A4
in copier func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
largesized paper (08LD
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
PRT
0
Number of
output pages A4
<8 digits>
pages in the printer
in Printer
A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Procedur
e
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 155
07/11
Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
<8 digits>
pages at the List Print
output pages A4
at List Print
Mode for each paper
A5
Mode
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
FAX
0
Number of
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in FAX Func- A5
tion
A6
B4
large-sized paper (08B5
352) and the definition
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD
Procedur
e
4
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 156
07/11
Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS Counts the scanning
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the Copier
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Copier FuncA6
tion
B4
B5
FOLIO
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
SCN
0
Number of
<8 digits>
pages in the Scanning
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Scanning
A6
Function
B4
B5
FOLIO
353).
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Procedur
e
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 157
07/11
Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
Classification
Counter
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX Funcscanning
A4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
Function
A6
B4
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD
Number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
FAX
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Counts the transmitted

paper (08-353).
Procedur
e
4
2 - 158
07/11
Code
Classification
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS Counts the received
<8 digits>
pages in the FAX Funcreceived
A4
pages in FAX A5
tion for each paper size
Function
A6
B4
FOLIO
paper (08-353).
LD
Display of
number of
output pages
in Copier
Function
Display of
number of
output pages
in Printer
Function
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Large
PPC
Small
PPC
Total
PPC
Large
PRT
Small
PRT
Total
PRT
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

output pages in the
Copier Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
output pages in the
Printer Function
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
4
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 159
07/11
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Large
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages at the List
number of
output pages Small
PRT
0
SYS Print Mode Function
at List Print
<8 digits>
Mode
Total
PRT
0
SYS (large/small).
Large:
<8 digits>
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Large
FAX
0
Display of
<8 digits>
output pages in the FAX
number of
output pages Small
FAX
0
SYS Function according to
its size (large/small).
in FAX Func<8 digits>
tion
Total
FAX
0
SYS Large:
Number of output
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Display of
Large
PPC
0
number of
<8 digits>
scanning
Small
PPC
0
SYS Copier Function
pages in
<8 digits>
Copier Func- Total
PPC
0
SYS (large/small).
tion
Large:
<8 digits>
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 160
07/11
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Large
FAX
0
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
scanning
Small
FAX
0
SYS FAX Function according
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS Large:
Number of output
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Large
SCN
0
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
scanning
Small
SCN
0
SYS Scanning Function
pages in
<8 digits>
Scanning
Total
SCN
0
SYS (large/small).
Large:
Function
<8 digits>
Number of output
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Display of
Large
FAX
0
number of
<8 digits>
transmitted pages in the
transmitted
Small
FAX
0
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS Large:
Number of output
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 161
07/11
Code
Classification
331
User
interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
342
User
interface
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
348
Counter
349
Counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS Sets the screen to be
<0-5>
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier
1: Fax
2: Scan
3: Box
4: Job Status
5: Template
Large
FAX
0
Display of
<8 digits>
received pages in the
number of
received
Small
FAX
0
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS Large:
Number of output
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
paper sizes.
Display of
SYS Displays the total numLarge
ALL
0
total number
<8 digits>
ber of pages in the
of pages
Small
ALL
0
SYS Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
<8 digits>
Total
ALL
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Displaying number of origiSYS This setting is whether
PPC
0
nal pages placed on origi<0-1>
the number of pages of
nal glass
originals placed on the
original glass is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
Count setting of tab paper
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of largeALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Definition setting of largeALL
1
M
0: A3/LD
sized paper (PM)
<0-1>
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
Count setting of thick paper
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
Count setting of OHP film
ALL
1
M
0: Counted as 1
(PM)
<0-1>
1: Counted as 2
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
14
14
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 162
07/11
Code
Classification
352
Counter
353
Counter
356
Counter
357
Counter
358

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Count setting of largeALL
JPN: 0
M
0:
OTHER:
1:
sized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
1
2:
<0-2>
Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Counter for upper drawer
feeding
ALL
0
<0-1>
ALL
0
<8 digits>
Counter for lower drawer

feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper

drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower

drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
<8 digits>
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed

externally
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-7>
390
Counter
PPC
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
391

(Copier)
(FAX)
(Scanning)
(Printer)
Number of polygonal motor
rotational speed switching
FAX
SCN
PRT
ALL
SYS
Contents
Counted as 1
Counted as 2
Counted as 1
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8k
sheets fed from upper
drawer
sheets fed from lower
drawer
sheets fed from bypass
feed
sheets fed from LCF
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
output pages of duplex
printing.
originals fed from RADF
Selects the job to count
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
The number of error is
reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur
e
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
SYS
SYS

time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 163
07/11
Code
Classification
399
Laser
400
Fuser
409
Fuser
410
Fuser
411
Fuser
412
Fuser
413
Fuser
414
Developer

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Accumulated time of polygALL
0
M
Accumulates the time
<8 digits>
the polygonal motor has
onal motor at normal rotation
rotated at normal rotation.
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
0: No error
counter
<0-19>
1: C411(Once)
2: C410(consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C480 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490
Fuser roller temperature at
ALL
0
M
0: OFF 1: 40C
a energy saver mode
<0-13>
2: 50C 3: 60C
(Center thermistor)
4: 70C 5: 80C
6: 90C 7: 100C
8: 110C 9: 120C
10: 130C 11: 140C
12: 150C 13: 160C
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
thermistor/Plain paper)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
Fuser roller temperature on
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
standby (Center ther<0-12>
2: 150C 3: 155C
mistor)
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C
ALL
12
M
1: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
3: 150C 4: 155C
5: 160C 6: 165C
paper 3)
7: 170C 8: 175C
9: 180C 10: 185C
11: 190C 12: 195C
13: 200C 14: 210C
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
paper 1)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 210C
Toner density correctionALL
0
M
0: Invalid
1: +3bit
setting
<0-8>
2: +6bit
3: +9bit
4: +12bit
5: -3bit
6: -6bit
7: -9bit
8: -12bit
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
2
2 - 164
07/11
Code
Classification
417
Fuser
419
Image
Processing
420
Fuser
437
Fuser
438
Fuser
439
Fuser

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
ALL
0
M
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
<0-15>
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
1
Black band pattern
ALL
0
M
Sets whether or not a
between sheets of paper
<0-20>
black band pattern is
formed on the drum
between two sheets of
paper being transported.
0: Invalid
1 to 20: Black band
width (Unit: mm)
1
Pre-running time at
ALL
JPN: 3
M
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
warming-up
UC: 4
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
EUR: 4
<0-10>
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
1
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
during printing
4: 160C 5: 165C
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
1
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
during printing
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
(Center thermistor/OHP
4: 160C 5: 165C
film)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
1
ALL
0
M
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 165
07/11
Code
Classification
440
Fuser
441
Fuser
449
Paper
feeding
Image
processing
455

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
printing
(Plain paper)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
ALL
0
M
printing
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Thick paper 1)
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Incorrect paper size jam
ALL
0
M
0: Enabled
detection switching
<0-1>
1: Disabled
Toner supply amount corALL
0
M
Corrects the period of
rection setting
<0-2>
the toner motor rotation
time during toner supply.
0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80%
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
2 - 166
07/11
Code
Classification
462
RADF
463-0
463-1
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Setting for switchback
ALL
0
M
This setting is whether
<0-2>
the original length is
operation in mixed-size
copying using RADF
detected or not by
transporting without
scanning in reverse
when A4-R/FOLIO
paper or LT-R/LG paper
is detected in a mixedsize copying.
0: Disabled AMS:
A series - Judges as
A4-R without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by its length
without transporting
in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges
FOLIO without
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
LT series - Judges
LG without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges
FOLIO by transporting without scanning
in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges
LG by transporting
without scanning in
reverse to detect its
length.
APS:
The same as that of
APS in 0: Disabled.
2: Enable 2
AMS/APS:
The same as that of
AMS in 1: Enable 1.
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (upper
Others
ALL
5
M
drawer)
drawer.
<0-5>
Procedur
e
1
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 167
07/11
Code
464-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
464-1
465-0
Paper
feeding
465-1
466-0
Paper
feeding
466-1
467-0
Paper
feeding
467-1
468-0
Paper
feeding
468-1
469
Fan
471
Paper
feeding
472
Fan
478
Laser
479
Laser
480
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
Sets the number of
paper
<0-5>
number setting (lower
Others
ALL
5
M
drawer)
drawer.
<0-5>
Feeding retry
number setting (PFP
upper drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
Feeding retry
number setting (PFP
lower drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
Feeding retry
number setting (bypass
feed)
Plain
paper
Others
Feeding retry
number setting (LCF)
Plain
paper
Others
Speed switching for subseparation fan

Paper size (Post card)
Speed switching for middle fan
(Normal rotation)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
0
<0-1>
148/100
<148432/100297>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M

(At acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0
<0-1>
Default setting of paper

source
PPC
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
4
4
Sets the number of

retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Sets the number of

retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Sets the number of

tray.
Sets the number of

retry from the LCF.
0: High speed
1: Low speed
model.
0: High speed
1: Low speed
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
1: 12 times
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
0: A4/LT
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
10
1
1
2 - 168
07/11
Code
481
482
Classification
Paper
feeding
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
484
Laser
485
Laser

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Automatic change of paper
PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
source
<0-2>
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
Feeding retry setting
ALL
0
M
0: ON
1
<0-1>
1: OFF
1
Pre-running rotation of
ALL
0
polygonal motor
<0-2>
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
RADF only)
1
ALL
0
Polygonal motor rotational
<0-1>
status switching at the Auto
motor from the normal
Clear Mode
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Rotational status of polygoALL
0
SYS Sets the rotational sta1
nal motor on standby
<0-1>
tus of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)1: Stopped
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 169
07/11
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
489
Laser
490
Laser
491
Transfer
492
Transfer
493
Transfer
502
Image
503
User
interface
Image
508

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Timing of auto-clearing of
ALL
0
SYS Switches the polygonal
<0-2>
motor to the standby
polygonal motor pre-running rotation
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when 0 or 2
is set at 08-483.
Setting of polygonal motor
ALL
3
M
Set the type of polygotype
<2-3>
nal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
Polygonal motor rotation
ALL
5
M
0: 38090.55rpm
number on standby
<0-5>
1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
Polygonal motor rotation in
ALL
0
M
0: Stopped
the energy saving mode
<0-1>
1: 10000rpm
165
M
rection (L) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
duplexing.
106
M
rection (H) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
128
M
rection (L) at duplexing
<0-255>
charger bias output
duplexing.
PPC
1
SYS Sets the image reprosetting at photo mode
<0-1>
duction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
adjustment
<0-1>
1: Manual (Center)
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Not used
<0-3>
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo
is set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set
as a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 170
07/11
Code
Classification
509
Image
526
Fuser
550
Image
601
User
interface
User
interface
602
603
User
interface
604
User
interface
605
User
interface
607
User
interface
610
User
interface
User
interface
611
612
General

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
PPC
1
SYS Switches the image
1
<0-1>
processing method
setting at a photo mode
(Custom Mode)
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
1
ALL
6
M
0: Invalid
1: 0 sec.
printing (OHP film)
<0-15>
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
1
Default setting of Original
PPC
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo
mode
<0-3>
1: Photo
2: Text
3: Custom Mode
Setting for the EnergySavALL
0
SYS 0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1
ing Mode
<0-1>
1: Sleep Mode
SYS 0: OFF
1
Screen setting for Auto
ALL
EUR:0
power Save Mode and
UC:1
1: ON
Auto Shut OFF Mode
JPN:1
<0-1>
Setting for automatic
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1
duplexing mode
<0-3>
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
1
Default setting for APS/
ALL
0
SYS 0: APS (Automatic
AMS
<0-2>
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
Centering printing of priSYS 0: Invalid
1
PPC
1
mary/secondary direction
<0-1>
1: Valid
at AMS
Default setting of RADF
PPC
0
SYS 0: Continuous feeding
1
mode
<0-1>
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
Key touch sound of control
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
panel
<0-1>
1: ON
Book type original priority
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
1
<0-1>
page
page
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not summer time
1
<0-1>
1: Summer time
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 171
07/11
Code
Classification
613
User
interface
614
Network
615
General
617
User
interface
618
User
interface
619
Paper
feeding
620
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
621
622
623
624
625
627
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
SYS Press the icon on the
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS Sets the period of time
<1-50>
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
Size information of main
ALL
SYS Displays the sizes of
memory and page memory
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
Print setting without
ALL
1
SYS 0: Printed forcibly
department code
<0-2>
1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
PPC
0
SYS 0: Scanned as all in
Default setting when mixed
<0-1>
same size
size originals are set on
1: Scanned as each
RADF
original size
Time lag before Auto Job
ALL
4
SYS Sets the time taken to
Start of bypass feeding
<0-10>
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid
setting (Copier)
<0-1>
1: Valid
FAX
1
SYS 0: Invalid
setting (FAX)
<0-1>
1: Valid
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
setting (Printer)
<0-1>
1: Valid
SCN
1
SYS 0: Invalid
setting (Scanner)
<0-1>
1: Valid
PRT
1
SYS 0: Invalid
setting (List print)
<0-1>
1: Valid
Blank copying prevention
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
mode during RADF jam<0-1>
1: ON (Start printing
ming
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
Rotation printing at the
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not rotating
nonsorting
<0-1>
1: Rotating
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 172
07/11
Code
628
629
633
634
636
638
640
641
642

Default
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
User
Direction priority of original
PPC
0
SYS 0: Automatic
interface image
<0-1>
1: Portrait
User
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting
<0-1>
1: Valid
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not used
Releasing F200 service
Data
<0-2>
1: Board installed
overwrite call (System ROM version:
(GP-1060)
earlier than T364SY0*329)
kit
2: Service call
User
Inner receiving tray priority
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal
interface at Non-sort Mode
<0-1>
1: Inner receiving tray
User
Width setting for image
PPC
0
SYS 0: ON
interface shift copying (linkage of
<0-1>
1: OFF
front side and back side)
General Time differences
ALL
EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
UC: 40
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
JPN: 6
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
<0-47>
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
User
Date display format
ALL
EUR:1
SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD.
interface
UC:2
1: DD.MM.YYYY
JPN:0
2: MM.DD.YYYY
<0-2>
User
Automatic Sorting Mode
PPC
2
SYS 0: Invalid
interface setting (RADF)
<0-4>
1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Default setting of Sorter
PPC
0
SYS 0: NON-SORT
User
interface Mode
<0-4>
1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 173
08/07
Code
Classification
645
User
interface
646
User
interface
648
User
interface
649
User
interface
650
User
interface
User
interface
651
652
653
657
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS Sets the reproduction
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
ratio for the X in 1
printing (including magazine sort) to the
Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
Image position in editing
PPC
2
SYS Sets the page pasted
<0-3>
position for X in 1 to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Cornering
1: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Cornering
2: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Centering
3: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Centering
Returning finisher tray
ALL
0
when printing is finished
<0-1>
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
<0-1>
page
page
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating
PPC
0
SYS 0: Horizontal
order setting
<0-1>
1: Vertical
Printing format setting for
PPC
2
SYS Hyphen
Time Stamp and Page
<0-3>
(with page number)
Number
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
PRT
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
PPC
0
SYS 0: Short edge
<0-1>
1: Long edge
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 174
07/11
Code
658
Classification
User
interface
659
User
interface
660
Network
661
Network
662
General
665
General
666
General
667
General
669
General
670
General
671
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
<0-1>
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Auto Job start setting for
PPC
1
<0-1>
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid1:Valid
received FAX
<0-1>
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid1: Valid
received E-mail
<0-1>
Clearing of SMS partition
ALL
SYS Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes all the adjustM/SYS all clearing
ALL
M/
SYS ment modesand the
setting modes.
ALL
SYS Initializes the Electronic Filing.
ALL
SYS Initializes the shared
folder.
System all clearing
ALL
SYS Initializes system
NVRAM area.
HDD diagnostic menu disALL
SYS Display the HDD inforplay
mation
Size indicator
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid
<0-1>
Procedur
e
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 175
07/11
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
678
General
679
General
680
General
681
General
682
Use
interface

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
3
Initialization of department
SYS Initializing of the departmanagement information
ment management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management information is destroyed
for some reason,
Enter Department
Code is displayed
on the control panel
even if the department management
function is not set
on. In this case, initialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initialized at the factory.
Trial period setting
ALL
254
SYS Sets the trial period
1
<1-60>
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is "254". Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.
1
Setting of banner advertisALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not dising display
<0-1>
playing the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
ALL
SYS Maximum 27 letters
11
1
ALL
11
2
1
Display of [BANNER MESALL
0
SAGE] button
<0-1>
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on
the control panel.
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1
<0-1>
1: Valid
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 176
07/11
Code
Classification
683
General
684
685
General
General
686
General
689
FAX
690
General
691
General
692
Maintenance
693
General
694
695
General
General
696
Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding
697

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Duplex printing setting
ALL
1
SYS When the duplex print<0-1>
ing is short paid with a
when coin controller is
used
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases.
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to Address Book
related to the Address
Book.
ALL
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to log
related to the logs.
Adaptation of paper source
FAX
0
SYS 0: Not subjected for
priority selection
<0-1>
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS 2: Normal formatting
<2>
HDD type display
ALL
SYS 0: Not formatted
<0-2>
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performing panel calibraALL
SYS Performs the calibration
tion
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Initialization of NIC inforALL
SYS Returns the value to the
mation
factory shipping default
value.
Performing HDD testing
ALL
SYS Checks the bad sector.
Sets when the end of trial
PRT/
3
SYS Sets when the end of
period is notified.
SCN
<0-59>
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
Installation of scrambler
ALL
0
0: Not installed
board (Option)
<0-1>
1: Installed
Paper type priority
PPC
1
<1-2>
SYS
Sets the paper type priority during copying.

1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Procedur
e
1
3
3
3
1
7
7
1
3
3
1
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 177
07/11
Code
Classification
698
Scrambler
board
699
Scrambler
board
FAX
701
702
Maintenance
703
Maintenance
704-0
User
interface
704-1
707
Maintenance

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
5
Entering the key code for
ALL
Start up this code and
scrambler board
have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
Erasing all data in HDD
ALL
This setting is effective
3
only when the scrambler board is installed.
1
SYS 0: Japan
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5
1: Asia
UC: 4
2: Australia
JPN: 0
3: Hong Kong
Other: 1
4: U.S.A./Canada
<0-25>
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
ALL
2
SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con1
function
<0-2>
trolled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
ALL
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
HTTP server
URL setting
Interruption of Copying
SYS 0: Continues printing
ALL
1
4
stapling oper<0-1>
by switching sort
ation (no stasetting
ple)
1: Interrupts printing
Printing /
SYS 0: Continues printing
ALL
1
4
BOX print<0-1>
by switching sort
ing
setting
1: Interrupts printing
ALL
https://
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
HTTP initially-registered
device.mf
server
p-supURL setting
port.com:
443/
device/firstregist.ashx
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 178
07/11
Code
710
711
715
Classification
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance
Maintenance
720
721
Maintenance
723
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
726
727
728
Maintenance
729
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
730
731
732
733

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
24
SYS Sets the time interval to
<1-48>
recover from the Emerof recovery from Emergency Mode
gency Mode to the Normal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
ALL
60
SYS Unit: Minute
of Emergency Mode
<30-360>
ALL
1230
SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
periodical polling timing
ALL
0
SYS 0: Prohibited
Writing data of self-diag<0-1>
1: Accepted
nostic code
ALL
3
SYS Unit: Minute
response waiting time
<1-30>
(Timeout)
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
initial registration
<0-3>
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
3: Sattelite communication starts
ALL
tentative password
Status of remote-conALL
0
SYS 0: Not registered
trolled service initial regis<0-1>
1: Registered
tration (Display only)
Service center call function
ALL
2
SYS 0: OFF
<0-2>
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Service center call HTTP
ALL
server URL setting
HTTP proxy setting
ALL
1
SYS 0: Valid
<0-1>
1: Invalid
HTTP proxy IP address
ALL
SYS 000.000.000.000 setting
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
HTTP proxy port number
ALL
0
SYS
setting
<065535>
HTTP proxy ID setting
ALL
HTTP proxy password setting
HTTP proxy panel display
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
11
2
1
11
1
11
1
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
ALL
Mainte- Automatic ordering function of supplies

nance
(Remote) FAX number
ALL
SYS
SYS
11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 179
07/11
Code
734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
745
Maintenance
(Remote)
746
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
tion of supplies
List: 256 digits
E-mail address
ALL
User's name
SYS Maximum 32 digits
tion of supplies
User's telephone number
tion of supplies
List: 256 digits
User's E-mail address
ALL
User's address
tion of supplies
Service number
ALL
Service technician's name
tion of supplies
Service technician's telephone number
tion of supplies
List: 256 digits
Service technician's E-mail
address
tion of supplies
Supplier's name
tion of supplies
Supplier's address
ALL
Notes
ALL
Part number of toner cartridge K
ALL
1
SYS
Order quantity of toner car<1-99>
tridge K
ALL
1
SYS
<1-99>
cartridge K
ALL
Part number of toner bag
Procedur
e
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
11

Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS

bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 180
07/11
Code
765

Default
RAM
cation
tion
able
value>
Mainte- Automatic ordering supALL
EUR: 2
SYS 0:
plies
UC: 0
nance
(Remote) Display
JPN: 2
1:
<0-2>
Contents
Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
Enables to set up to 3
E-mail
addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Maximum 192 letters
Procedur
e
1
2
1
767
Mainte- Service Notification setting

nance
(Remote)
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
768
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
ALL
SYS
Total counter information

transmission setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid

date setting
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0 to 31
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Dealer's name
ALL
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
SYS
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters

Maximum 20 letters
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
0: Invalid
1: Valid
769
770
771
772
773
Maintenance
11
11
774
Mainte- Display setting of [Service

nance
Notification] button
(Remote)
ALL
775
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
Sending error contents of

equipment
ALL
Setting total counter transmission interval

2
ALL
SYS
ALL
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11

3
ALL
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
776
777
778
780
781
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 181
07/11
Code
Classification
782
Maintenance
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance
Maintenance
790
794
795
796
797
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
798
Maintenance
General
799
General
826
Charger

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-31>
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-31>
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection Sun<0-1>
1: Valid
day
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
polling day selection Monday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection Tues<0-1>
1: Valid
day
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
Wednesday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
Thursday
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection Friday
<0-1>
1: Valid
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
polling day selection Satur<0-1>
1: Valid
day
Information of supplies setALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
ting of toner cartridge K
<0-1>
1: Valid
Information of supplies setALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
ting of toner bag
<0-1>
1: Valid
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
Firmware download
ALL
0
SYS 0: Accepted
<0-1>
1: Prohibited
Notifying address of trialpPRT/
3
SYS Sets where the end of
eriod end
SCN
<0-3>
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF
1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SYS [CANCEL]: Cancel
SCN
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the Forcible end
of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Main charger bias correcPRT
128<0M
tion (Toner saving mode)
255>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 182
07/11
Code
840
Classification
841
Image
control
Transfer
855
Fuser
856
Fuser
859
Developer
860
Developer
861
Developer
862
Developer
863
Developer
864
Charger
865
Charger
866
Charger
867
Charger
868
Transfer

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Setting of toner density
ALL
0
M
0: Controlled
temperature control
<0-1>
1: Not controlled
Transfer timing correction
ALL
0
M
0: Standard
<0-7>
1: Timing 1
2: Timing 2
3: Timing 3
4: Timing 4
5: Timing 5
6: Timing 6
7: Timing 7
ALL
12
M
0: 140C 1: 145C
<0-14>
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
thermistor / Tab paper)
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C 11: 195C
12: 200C 13: 205C
14: 210C
ALL
10
M
printing (Tab paper)
<0-15>
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Developer bias DC correcPRT
128
M
tion(Toner saving mode)
<0-255>
the developer bias
Developer bias DC correcPRT
128
M
tion (Normal)
<0-255>
the developer bias
Developer bias DC correcPPC
128
M
tion (Text/Photo)
<0-255>
the developer bias
128
M
tion (Text)
<0-255>
the developer bias
128
M
tion (Photo)
<0-255>
the developer bias
Main charger bias correcPRT
128
M
tion (Normal)
<0-255>
Main charger bias correcPPC
128
M
tion (Text/Photo)
<0-255>
128
M
tion (Text)
<0-255>
128
M
tion (Photo)
<0-255>
128
M
rection (H)
<0-255>
charger bias output
edge area of paper.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 183
07/11
Code
Classification
869
Transfer
872
Laser
873
Laser
875
Laser
876
Laser
877
Laser
900
Version
903
905
907
908
911
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
915
920
Version
Version
921
922
Version
Version
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
84
M
rection (L)
<0-255>
charger bias output
edge area of paper.
PRT
128
M
(Normal)
<0-255>
PPC
128
M
(Text/Photo)
<0-255>
PRT
128
M
(Toner saving mode)
<0-255>
PPC
128
M
(Text)
<0-255>
PPC
128
M
(Photo)
<0-255>
System firmware ROM verALL
JPN: T364SY0JXXX
sion
UC: T364SY0UXXX
EUR: T364SY0EXXX
Others: T364SY0XXXX
Engine ROM version
ALL
364M-XXX
Scanner ROM version
ALL
364S-XXX
RADF ROM version
ALL
DF-XXXX
Finisher main ROM version
ALL
SDL-XX FIN-XX
Finisher hole punch ROM
ALL
PUN-XX
version
(This setting is displayed only when the
MJ-6101E is installed.)
FAX board ROM version
FAX
F562-XXX
FROM basic section softALL
VX.XX/X.XX
ware version
FROM internal program
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
UI data fixed section verALL
VXXX.XXX X
sion
UI data common section
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
version
Version of UI data lanALL
VXXX.XXX X
guage 1 in HDD
VXXX.XXX X
guage 2 in HDD
VXXX.XXX X
guage 3 in HDD
VXXX.XXX X
guage 4 in HDD
VXXX.XXX X
guage 5 in HDD
VXXX.XXX X
guage 6 in HDD
Version of UI data in
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
FROM displayed at powerON
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 - 184
07/11
Code
Classification
931
Version
933
934
Version
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
949
General
950
Electronic
filing
953
User
interface
954
User
interface
969
User
interface
User
interface
970
972
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
VXXX.XXX X
guage 7 in HDD
Web data whole version
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 1
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 2
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 3
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 4
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 5
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
Version: Language 6
HD version
ALL
JPN: T364HD0JXXX
UC: T364HD0UXXX
EUR: T364HD0EXXX
Others: T364HD0XXXX
Two-way setting of RawALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
Port 9100
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Initialization after software
ALL
SYS Perform this code when
version upgrade
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
Automatic interruption
ALL
0
SYS Sets the number of
page setting during black
<0-100>
pages to interrupt the
printing
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
ALL
0
SYS Sets the start-up
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
<0-2>
method of the Electronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
Access code entry for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Renewed automatiElectronic Filing printing
<0-1>
cally
1: Enter every time
Clearing timing for files and
ALL
1
SYS 0: Immediately after
Electronic Filing Agent
<0-1>
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
Error sound
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
Sound setting when
ALL
JPN: 0
SYS 0: OFF
switching to Energy Saving
Other: 1
1: ON
Mode
<0-1>
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
Enables/disables the dis<0-1>
1: Enabled
play that the toner is nearly
empty
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
3
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 185
07/11
Code
Classification
973
Network
975
General
976
Electronic
Filing
977
Network
978
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL line feed
<0-3>
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether pause or
Job handling when print<0-1>
stop the printing job
ing is short paid with coin
when it is short paid
controller
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
Equipment name and user
ALL
0
name setting to a folder
<0-2>
adding the equipment
when saving files
name and user name to
the folder when saving
files.
0: Not add
1: Add the equipment
name
2: Add the user name
ALL
0
SYS 0: ISO8859-1
Switching of extended
<0-1>
1: ISO8859-2
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0: AUTO
(Paper feeding drawer)
<0-5>
1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
5: LCF
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
2 - 186
07/11
Code
Classification
979
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS 0:
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
1:
2:
3:
4:
JOB STATUS initial screen

setting
Print mode setting of mixed
input source of Electronic
Filing
ALL
985
User
interface
Electronic Filing
986
General
Copy function setting
988
Paper
feeding
Setting of paper size

switching to 13" LG
983
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
ALL
SYS
Contents
Roman-8
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6:ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
0: Print
1: Private
0: Image quality priority
mode
1: Function priority
mode
Sets the copy function
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Not switched
1: LG13"LG
2: FOLIO13"LG
Procedur
e
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 187
07/11
Code
Classification
995
Version
999
1002
Maintenance
Network
1003
Network
1005
Network
1006
Network
1007
1008
Network
Network
1009
Network
1010
Network
1011
Network
1012
Network
1013
Network
1014
Network
1015
Network
1016
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Equipment number
ALL
0
SYS This code can be also
keyed in from the
(serial number) display
<10 digits>
adjustment mode (05976).
10 digits
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
SYS Refer to values of total
<8 digits>
counter.
Selection of NIC board staALL
1
NIC 1: Not printed out
tus information
<1-2>
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
Communication speed and
ALL
1
NIC 1: Auto
settings of Ethernet
<1-5>
2: 10MBPS Half
Duplex
3: 10MBPS Full
Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half
Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full
Duplex
Availability of IP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Address Mode
ALL
2
NIC 1: Fixed IP address
<1-3>
without AutoIP
Domain name
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
IP address
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Subnet mask
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Gateway
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Availability of IPX
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Network frame type
ALL
1
NIC 1: Automatic
<1-5>
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
*: Wildcard character
NIC 1: Available
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1
<1-2>
2: Not available
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
11
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 188
07/11
Code
Classification
1017
Network
1018
Network
1019
Network
1020
Network
1023
Network
1024
Network
1025
Network
1026
Network
1027
Network
1028
1029
1030
Network
Network
Network
1031
Network
1032
Network
1037
Network
1038
Network
1039
Network
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Availability of DNS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000(Secondary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
NIC 1: Invalid
<1-5>
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_
UTY Maximum 15 letters
serial
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
serial
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Availability of Bindery
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of NDS
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Directory service context
ALL
Directory service tree
ALL
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
NIC
Port number to NIC HTTP
ALL
80
server
<165535>
ALL
8080
Port number to system
NIC
HTTP server
<165535>
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
SMTP server
NIC
ALL
25
client
<165535>
UTY 1: Available
Availability of SMTP server
ALL
1
<1-2>
2: Not available
UTY
ALL
25
server
<165535>
E-mail box name to SMTP
ALL
server
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 189
07/11
Code
Classification
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050
1051
Network
Network
1052
Network
1055
Network
1057
1058
Network
Network
1059
Network
1060
Network
1061
1062
Network
Network
1063
Network
1065
1066
Network
Network
1067
Network
1068
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073
Network
1074
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
ALL
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Automatic
<1-3>
2: POP3
3: APOP
Login name to POP3
ALL
server
Login password to POP3
ALL
E-mail reception interval
ALL
5
NIC
(Unit: Minute)
<0-4096>
NIC
TCP port number of POP3
ALL
110
client
<165535>
ALL
21
UTY
client
<165535>
Login name to FTP server
ALL
Login password to FTP
ALL
server
Availability of FTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
<1-2>
2: Not available
UTY
ALL
21
server
<165535>
Login name to FTP client
ALL
Login password to FTP cliALL
ent
MIB function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Setting of read Community
ALL
public
Setting of read/Write ComALL
private
munity
Authentication TRAP funcALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
tion
<1-2>
2: Invalid
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
TRAP destination IP
ALL
UTY 000.000.000.000address
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Community setting of
ALL
public
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
9100
<165535>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
11
11
12
12
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 190
07/11
Code
Classification
1075
Network
1076
Network
1077
1078
Network
Network
1079
Network
1080
Network
1081
Network
1082
1083
1084
Network
Network
Network
1085
Network
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
1090
1091
Network
Network
1092
Network
1093
Network
1094
Network
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
515
NIC
<165535>
LPD queue name
ALL
Availability of IPP
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Availability of IPP port
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
number 80
<1-2>
2: Invalid
NIC
TCP port number of IPP
ALL
631
<165535>
IPP printer name
ALL
MFP_seri NIC Maximum 127 letters
al
The network-related
serial
IPP printer location
ALL
ALL
ALL
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
ALL
driver
IPP printer Make and
ALL
Model
ALL
(more)
MFGR
IPP message from operaALL
tor
NIC 1: Available
Availability of FTP print
ALL
1
<1-2>
2: Not available
Printer user name of FTP
ALL
print
Printer user password of
ALL
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
ALL
21
NIC
print server
<165535>
Login name to Novell print
ALL
MFP_
server
serial
The network-related
serial
Login password to Novell
ALL
print server
Name of SearchRoot
ALL
server
Scan rate setting of print
ALL
5
NIC Unit: Second
queue
<1-255>
Page number limitation for
ALL
5
UTY
printing text of received
<1-99>
Email
MDN return mail setting
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
when receiving E-mail
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 191
07/11
Code
Classification
1099
Network
1100
Network
1101
Network
1102
Network
1103
Network
1104
Network
1105
Network
1111
Network
1112
Network
1113
Network
1114
Network
1117
Network
1118
1119
General
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
Method of SMTP server
ALL
1
NIC 1: Disable
authentication
<1-7,10>
2: Plain
3: Login
4: Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
7: NTLM
10: Auto
Login name for SMTP
ALL
Login password for SMTP
ALL
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Link local host name
ALL
MFP_
serial
The network-related
serial
Service name setting
ALL
Refer to
contents
The network-related
serial
e-STUDIO352:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO352_serial
e-STUDIO353:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO353_serial
e-STUDIO452:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO452_serial
e-STUDIO453:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO453_serial
POP Before SMTP setting
ALL
2
NIC 1: Valid
<1-2>
2: Invalid
Host name
ALL
MFP_
serial
The network-related
serial
Windows domain No.1 of
ALL
user authentication
ALL
1
SYS 0: Invalid
Sending mail text of InternetFAX
<0-1>
1: Valid
SMB time-out period
ALL
300
SYS Unit: Second
<1-9999>
Clearing of TAT partition
ALL
SYS
Initialization of NIC inforALL
Initializes only the information
mation of the Network
setting items.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
3
3
2 - 192
07/11
Code
Classification
1121
Network
1122
Network
1123
Network
1124
Network
1125
General
1126
Counter
1128
Network
1129
Network
1130
User
interface
1131
User
interface
1132
General
1134
Network
1135
Paper
feeding
1138
Network
1139
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
PDC (Primary Domain
ALL
Controller) name
BDC (Backup Domain
ALL
Controller) name
NT domain ON/OFF setALL
4
UTY 3: ON (Domain
ting
<3-4>
selected)
4: OFF (Work group
selected)
Workgroup name
ALL
workUTY Maximum 15 letters
group
Data writing of address
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
book data import
<0-1>
1: Valid
(overwriting method)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
Validity of interrupt copy<0-1>
1: Valid
ing when external counters
are installed
NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
Name1
NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
Name1
Job Build Function
ALL
1
SYS Sets the Job Build
<0-1>
Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Maximum number of time
ALL
2000
SYS Sets the maximum
job build performed
<5-2000>
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-2000: 5 to 2000 times
Default screen selection of
ALL
1
SYS Selects the default
<0-1>
screen when entering
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
Name2
Default setting of drawers
PRT
1
SYS 1: LCF
(Printer/BOX)
<1-5>
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
LDAP search method setALL
0
SYS Sets the search method
ting
<0-3>
when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
LDAP authentication setALL
0
SYS 0: Not authenticated
ting
<0-1>
1: Authenticated
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
1
1
12
12
1
12
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 193
07/11
Code
1140
1141
1143
1144
1145
1148
1149
1372
1376
1385
1386

Default
RAM
Contents
cation
tion
able
value>
User
Restriction of the template
ALL
0
SYS Selects the restriction of
<0-1>
the template function
interface function with the administrator privilege
usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
Network Display of MAC address
ALL
SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**)
The address is displayed as above (6-byte
data is divided by a
colon at every 2 bytes).
Network NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
Name2
Network NetwareUserAuthTree
ALL
Name3
Mainte- Counter notification
ALL
nance
Remote FAX setting
Enter a hyphen with the
(Remote)
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Network NetwareUserAuthContext
ALL
Name3
General Enhanced bold for PCL6
ALL
0
SYS 0:OFF
<0-1>
1:ON
Image
Heater and energizing time
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
process- accumulating counter Dis<8 digits>
control time accumuing
play/0 clearing
lated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
ALL
0
M
Counts the rotation
Image
<8 digits>
number of the toner
process- counter Number of output
cartridge.
pages
ing
Image
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
process- (Thick paper 1)
<8 digits>
ing
sync at the PM support
mode.
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
Image
<8 digits>
process- (Thick paper 2)
ing
sync at PM support
mode.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
12
12
11
12
1
1
1
1
2 - 194
07/11
Code
1387
Classification
Image
processing
1388
Image
processing
1390
Paper
feeding
1391
Paper
feeding
1392
Paper
feeding
1393
Paper
feeding
1394
Paper
feeding
1395
Paper
feeding
1396
Paper
feeding
1397
Paper
feeding
1398
Paper
feeding
1399
Paper
feeding
1400
Paper
feeding
1401
Paper
feeding

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(Thick paper 3)
<8 digits>
sync at PM support
mode.
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
(OHP film)
<8 digits>
sync at PM support
mode.
ALL
0
M
(upper drawer)
<8 digits>
drawer.
ALL
0
M
(lower drawer)
<8 digits>
drawer.
ALL
0
M
(PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
ALL
0
M
(PFP lower drawer)
<8 digits>
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
ALL
0
M
(bypass feed)
<8 digits>
tray.
ALL
0
M
(LCF)
<8 digits>
retry from the LCF.
ALL
0
M
When the number of
upper limit value
<8 digits>
feeding retry (08-1390
(upper drawer)
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
ALL
0
M
feeding retry will not be
<8 digits>
upper limit value
performed subse(lower drawer)
quently. In case 0 is
ALL
0
M
set as a setting value,
upper limit value
<8 digits>
however, the feeding
(PFP upper drawer)
retry continues regardFeeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
less of the counter setupper limit value
<8 digits>
ting value.
(PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0
M
<8 digits>
upper limit value
(Bypass feed)
ALL
0
M
upper limit value (LCF)
<8 digits>
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 195
07/11
Code
Classification
1410
Counter
1412
Counter
1422
Data
overwrite
kit
1424
Data
overwrite
kit
1426
Data
overwrite
kit
1427
Data
overwrite
kit
1428
Data
overwrite
kit
1429
User
interface
1430
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Counter for period of toner
ALL
0
M
Counts up the period of
cartridge rotation time
<8 digits>
rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
Counter for tab paper
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
<8 digits>
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
HDD data overwriting type
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
setting
<0-2>
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
HDD data clearing type
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
setting (forcible clearing)
<0-2>
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
ALL
When this code is perForcible NVRAM data all
clearing
formed, the equipment
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
Forcible SRAM backup
ALL
When this code is perdata all clearing
formed, the equipment
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
Margin width
ALL
Front: 7/
SYS This setting is not
(Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
Back: 7
reflected in "Right",
<2-100/even if the value less
100-100>
than 2 is set for "Back".
Margin width
ALL
14
SYS
(Bookbinding margin)
<2-30>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
10
2 - 196
07/11
Code
Classification
1431
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ACC
ALL
1
SYS 0:
<0-2>
1:
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)
for Printer/Box printing
2:
1432
Network
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
1435
Network
"Disable private and proof

print save" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
1436
Network
"Disable fax save" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
1437
1438
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
Hole punch on tab paper
ALL
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
1
<1-2>
1439
Paper
feeding
1440
Network
Automatic feed setting of

tab paper and insertion
sheet
(Remote)
Automatic feed setting of
tab paper and insertion
sheet
(Local)
IP Conflict Detect
1441
Network
SNTP Enable
ALL
2
<1-2>
1442
Network
SNTP Polling rate
ALL
1444
Network
Primary SNTP Address
ALL
24
<1-168>
-
1445
Network
Secondary SNTP Address
ALL
1446
Network
Port number to SNTP
ALL
1447
Network
IPP administrator name
ALL
123
<165535>
-
1448
Network
IPP administrator password
ALL
SYS
0:
1:
0:
1:
Contents
ACC prohibited
Only in the same
paper direction
In both same direction and different
directions
Normal mode
Mode for Private
Print
Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
No hole punch
Hole punch
Disabled
Enabled
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Data obtaining interval
(Unit: Hour)
SNTP server IP
Address (Primary)
SNTP server IP
Address (Secondary)
12
12
12
12
12
12
This should be an
account which can control all IPP jobs.
This should be the
password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 197
07/11
Code
Classification
1449
Network
1450
Network
1451
Network
1464
Network
1470
General
1471
General
1472
General
1473
General
1474
General
1476
Network
1477
Network
1478
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
IPP authentication method
ALL
1
1: Disabled
<1-4>
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
User name for IPP authenALL
This should be the
tication
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
Password for IPP authentiALL
This should be the
cation
password of the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
Samba server ON/OFF
ALL
1
NIC 1: Samba enabled
setting
<1-4>
2: Samba disabled
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
Device authentication funcALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
tion setting
<0-1>
1: ON
User authentication
ALL
0
SYS 0: Local
method
<0-5>
1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
User data management
<0-1>
1: Enabled
automatic registration function setting
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
limitation setting
<0-1>
1: Enabled
ALL
0
SYS 0-9,999,999:
limitation
<7 digits>
0-9,999,999 sheets
Setting by number of printouts
ALL
0
SYS Some restrictions can
Restriction on Address
<0-1>
be given on the adminbook operation by adminisistrator for operating the
trator
Address book.
0: No restriction
1: Can be operated
only under the
administrator's
authorization
ALL
0
SYS 0: No restriction
Restriction on "To" ("cc")
address
<0-3>
1: Can be set from
both of the Address
book and LDAP
server
2: Can be set only
from the Address
book
3: Can be set only
from the LDAP
server
ALL
JPN: 0
Display of paper size setUC: 1
1: Displayed
ting by installation operaEUR: 0
tion of drawers
<0-1>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 198
07/11
Code
Classification
1479
User
interface
1481
General
1482
General
1483
General
1484
Network
1485
Network
1487
Network
1489
Network
1491
Network
1492
Paper
feeding
1493
Network
1494
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Default setting of sharpALL
5
SYS 1: -4 2: -3
ness
<1-9>
3: -2 4: -1
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
ALL
All the user data in the
clearing
database and backup
files can be deleted.
User data department
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
management
<0-1>
1: Valid
* When this code is
set to 1 (Valid), the
department management setting
(08-629) should be
1 (Valid).
User data recovery
ALL
The data in the database is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.
Authentication method of
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
"Scan to Email"
<0-2>
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
Setting whether use of
Internet FAX is permitted
<0-1>
1: Permitted
or not when it is given an
authenticationn
"From" address assignALL
0
SYS 0: "User name" + @ +
ment method when it is
<0-2>
"Domain name"
given an authentication
1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail setting
Setting for "From" address
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
edit at "Scan to Email"
<0-1>
1: Permitted
E-mail domain name
ALL
SYS 96 + 2 (delimiter) character
ASCll sequence only
Detection method of 13"
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
LG for single-size docu<0-1>
1: Enabled
ment
Role Base Access FuncALL
0
SYS 0: Function off (No
tion
<0-1>
restriction on data
saving and other
operations)
1: Function on (Data
saving and other
operations have
some restrictions)
Limitation check method
ALL
0
SYS 0: Checked at every
<0-1>
page printed
1: Checked at every
job printed
Procedur
e
1
3
1
1
11
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 199
08/04
Code
Classification
1495
Maintenance
1496
General
1497
Network
1498
FAX
1530-0
Counter
1530-1
1530-2
1530-3
1530-4
1530-7

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
12
Service call checking
ALL
6
0: No checking period
period setting
<0-12>
specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)
1
Operation setting for User
ALL
1
SYS 0 : Disables operation
authentication/registration
<0-1>
setting for User
1 : Enables operation
setting for User
e-Filing Access Mode (for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Mode 1
1
Client)
<0-2>
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
Inbound FAX function
1
SYS 0: OFF
1
(Forwarding by TSI)
<0-1>
(Function disabled)
1: ON
(Function enabled)
Number of
1-UP /
PPC
0
4
output pages Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages.
printing
PPC
0
4
2-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
4
PPC
0
2-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [2IN1] or
Simplex
[MAGAZINE SORT].
printing
4-UP /
PPC
0
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
4-UP /
PPC
0
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [4IN1].
printing
PPC
0
4
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages.
Simplex
printing
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 200
07/11
Code
Classification
1533-0
Counter
1533-1
1533-2
1533-3
1533-4
1533-5
1533-6
1533-7
1535-0
Counter
1535-7
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Number of
1-UP /
PRT
0
<8 digits>
output pages.
output pages Duplex
of the printer
printing
or BOX
PRT
0
2-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
* When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
2-UP /
PRT
0
Simplex
<8 digits>
printing
[MAGAZINE SORT].
4-UP /
PRT
0
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
PRT
0
4-UP /
<8 digits>
Simplex
printing
N-UP /
PRT
0
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using [N
printing
IN1].
PRT
0
N-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets using [N IN1].
Simplex
printing
1-UP /
PRT
0
Simplex
<8 digits>
output pages .
printing
1-UP /
FAX
0
Number of
<8 digits>
sheets in the default
output pages Duplex
printing
settings.
of the FAX
printing
FAX
0
SYS
1-UP /
(1-UP /
<8 digits>
Simplex
Duplex printprinting
ing)
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: OFF
2: ON
Radio ON/OFF setting
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 32 letters
SSID
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Infrarstructure
Network type
<1-2>
2: Ad-Hoc
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
4
1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK
Security
<1-4>
3: WEP 4: NONE
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: TKIP 2: AES
Encryption system
<1-3>
3: Dynamic WEP
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 100% 2: 50%
Transmission output power
<1-5>
3: 25%
4: 12.5%
5: min
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Auto
2: Manual
Transmission rate
<1-2>
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 201
07/11
Code
Classification
1667
Wireless
LAN
1668
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
1681
Wireless
LAN
1682
Wireless
LAN
1684
Wireless
LAN
1685
Wireless
LAN

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 1
2: 2
Transmission rate value
<1-12>
3: 5.5
4: 11
5: 6
6: 9
7: 12
8: 18
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Auto
2: Manual
Operation channel
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Operation channel value
<1-11>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: 64
2: 128
WEP bit number
<1-3>
3: 152
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
2
1: Hex
2: ASCII
WEP key entry system
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 32 letters
WEP key value
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
Maximum 64 letters
WPA-PSK passphrase
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Off
2: Max
Sleep mode setting
<1-3>
3: Normal
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Long 2: Short
Slot-time limitation
<1-2>
ALL
5
Wireless LAN driver
<0-1000>
Number of times of software retry
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: Long 2: Longshort
Preamble
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
1: All
2: 11b
Operation mode
<1-3>
3: 11g
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
Wireless LAN setting
<1-3>
the wireless LAN connection is enabled or
disabled.
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
ALL
This should be the path
name in full where the
Path name for client certificlient certificate is
cate
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
ALL
Path name for secret key
name in full where the
of client certificate
client certificate is
located.
ALL
Path name for CA self-cername in full where the
tificate
CA self-certificate is
located.
ALL
This should be the user
EAP user name
name when the EAPTLS is used.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 202
07/11
Code
Classification
1686
Wireless
LAN
1689
Wireless
LAN
1690
Wireless
LAN
1691
Wireless
LAN
1692
Wireless
LAN
1693
Wireless
LAN
1696
Wireless
LAN
1697
Wireless
LAN
1699
Wireless
LAN
1700
Wireless
LAN

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
ALL
This should be the user
12
EAP user name
name when the PEAP
is used.
This should be the time12
ALL
30
out interval between
Authentication interval
<30EAP responses.
65535>
30: 30 seconds
12
M
The EAP authenticaWireless LAN supplicant
ALL
60
tion will start after havHolding interval
<60ing been waited in this
65535>
period when an EAP
failure was received.
60: 60 seconds
12
ALL
3
M
When an EAPOL-Start
EAPOL-Start
<1packet has been sent
Number of times of packet
65535>
and the request ID canretry
not be received, this
EAPOL-Start packet will
be re-sent for the number of times set in this
code.
3: 3 times
12
ALL
2
Session resume
<1-2>
the pre-master key
should be updated or
not upon a TLS renegotiation.
1: Session is resumed
2: Session is not
resumed
ALL
1398
This is a MAC frame
12
MAC Frame size
<1-1398>
size used in the wireless LAN connection.
The data is fragmented
into this size.
1398: 1398 bytes
12
ALL
/dev/
This should be the
urandom
device file name which
Device file setting for
can obtain a seed to iniobtaining random number
tialize the WEP PRNG
for xsupplicant.
ALL
12
CRL directory designation
name of the directory in
full where the CRL file
is located.
12
ALL
1
This setting is for the
EAP authentication type
<1-3>
EAP authentication
type which xsupplicant
can authenticate.
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
ALL
This should be an
12
CN name
authentication server
name (basically a
domain name in full).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 203
07/11
Code
1701
1704
Classification
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
1705
Wireless
LAN
1706
Wireless
LAN
1707
Wireless
LAN
1708
User
interface
1709
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
Bluetooth

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
1
1: NO
2: YES
CN name check
<1-2>
ALL
0
The update interval of a
Update interval of PTK
<0-720>
secret key across AP
(Pairwise Transient Key)
(Access Point) and STA
(Station) can be set.
This interval is for
updating the secret key
from STA.
0: Not updated
1-720: 1-720 minutes of
interval
ALL
1
The Ack bit and request
Strict packet check
<1-2>
bit of EAPOL-Key is
checked.
1: Not checked
2: Checked
ALL
1
A higher priority is given
<1-2>
to the xsupplicant task
Priority change at 4-way
when a 4-way handhandshake
shake is started.
1: Priority not changed
2: Priority changed
ALL
1
The encryption capabilSecurity level
<1-3>
ity output in TLS clientHello message can be
selected.
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE
3: HIGH
Selectable security level
ALL
1
These are the security
(EAP-TLS)
<1-3>
level which can be
selected from the user
interface. This setting is
not applied in case of
PEAP. ("LOW" and
"MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP)
1: LOW + MIDDLE +
HIGH
2: MIDDLE + HIGH
3: HIGH
Bluetooth
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not installed
Installation status of option
<0-1>
1: Installed
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
ON/OFF setting
<0-1>
1: ON
Bluetooth
ALL
MFP
Device name
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Not allowed
Discovery
<0-1>
1: Allowed
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Security function
Security
<0-1>
OFF
1: Security function
ON
Bluetooth
ALL
0000
PIN
(8-digit sequence)
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
11
1
1
11
2 - 204
07/11
Code
1715
Classification
Bluetooth
1716
Bluetooth
1717
Bluetooth
1719
Bluetooth
1720
Network
1721
Network
1722
Network
1723
Network
1724
Network
1725
Network
1726
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Bluetooth
ALL
1
SYS 0: Not encrypted
Data encryption
<0-1>
1: Encrypted
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
Bluetooth
ALL
6
SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
HCRP reception time-out
<1-50>
period
Bluetooth
ALL
6
SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
HCRP transmission time<1-50>
out period
Bluetooth
ALL
0
SYS 0: Fit page
BIP Paper type
<0-3>
1: 1/2 size
2: 1/4 size
3: 1/8 size
ALL
IP filter minimum area 1
IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 1)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
IP filter maximum area
IP address range for IP fil1
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 1)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP address range for IP filALL
ter I
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 2)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 2)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 3)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 3)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 4)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 205
07/11
Code
Classification
1727
Network
1728
Network
1729
Network
1730
Network
1731
Network
1732
Network
1733
Network
1734
Network
1735
Network
1736
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
4
ter
(Maximum area 4)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 5)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
5
(Maximum area 5)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
255.255.255.255
(Minimum area 6)
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 6)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 7)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 7)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 8)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
ter
000.000.000.000(Maximum area 8)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 9)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 206
07/11
Code
Classification
1737
Network
1738
Network
1739
Network
1740
Network
1741
Network
1742
Network
1743
Network
1744
Network
1745
Network
1746
Network
1747
Network
1748
Network
1749
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
9
ter
(Maximum area 9)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ALL
IP filter minimum area
ter
000.000.000.000(Minimum area 10)
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter
10
(Maximum area 10)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
SSL setting
ALL
2
1: Enabled
HTTP server OFF/ON set<1-2>
2: Disabled
ting
SSL setting
ALL
10443
SSL HTTP server port
HTTP server port number
<1number
65535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
1: Enabled
IPP server OFF/ON setting
<1-2>
2: Disabled
SSL setting
ALL
443
SSL IPP server port
IPP server port number
<1number
65535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL ftp server OFF/ON
<1-2>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to FTP
SSL setting
ALL
990
Server
SSL ftp server Port
<165535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
<1-3>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
3: Use imported certificate
Port number to LDAP
SSL setting
ALL
636
Server
SSL LDAP Client Port
<165535>
SSL setting
ALL
2
OFF/ON
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
<1-3>
1: Valid
2: Invalid
3: Use imported certificate
Port number to POP3
SSL setting
ALL
995
Server
SSL POP3 Client Port
<165535>
Procedur
e
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 207
07/11
Code
Classification
1750
Network
1751
Network
1755
Network
1756
Network
1757
Network
1759
Network

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
12
SSL setting
ALL
2
2: Invalid
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
<2-6>
3: Accept all certificates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
4: Accept all certificates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
5: Use imported certificates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
6: Use imported certificates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
SSL setting
ALL
465
Port number to SMTP
12
SSL SMTP Client Port
<1Server
65535>
12
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
Domain Name Server
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
option (6)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
12
ALL
2
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
<1-2>
Name Server option
(44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
ALL
1
The Host Name Ven12
<1-2>
dor Extension option
(12)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
12
ALL
2
SMTP Server Option
<1-2>
(69) Simple Mail Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 208
07/11
Code
Classification
1760
Network
1762
Network
1764
Wireless
LAN
1765
Wireless
LAN
1766
Wireless
LAN
1767
Network
1768
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
2
POP3 Server Option
<1-2>
(70) Post Office Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
ALL
2
SNTP Server Option
<1-2>
(42)
NTP Server Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
ALL
Maximum 255 letters
Control sequence setting
of "Cipher Suite"
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
Path name for user certificate
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
Path name entered for CA
self-certificate
ALL
2
SYS DNS domain name
<1-2>
Option (15) DNS
domain name of the client
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
Previous IP address
ALL
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 209
07/11
Code
Classification
1772
General

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
5
Card reading device setALL
0
SYS To enable the e-Bridge
ting
<8 digits>
ID Gate, a card reading
device should be set in
the order of
"ABYYZZZZ". (Enter
the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY"
and "ZZZZ".)
- AB:Special setting
- A :Debugging NIC
0: Not used
1: Used
- B :Interface
0: USB connection
1: N/A
- YY: Authentication
00: No authentication using a noncontact IC card
02: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2003)
03: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2005)
04: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2004)
- ZZZZ: Sub-code
0000: No authentication using a noncontact IC card
0001: Use CSN
(Card Serial Number) of a noncontact IC card
0002: Use the Data
Area Address Information of a noncontact IC card
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 210
07/11
Code
Classification
1773
General
1774
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Card reader format inforALL
SYS To access the data in
mation -1
the noncontact IC card,
the Key Information
"LLLL" and the Sector
Number "MMMM"
should be set.
The "LLLL" should be
set first, and then
"MMMM".
KP-2003:
LLLL: System code
(hexadecimal number)
MMMM: Service code
Card reader format information -2
ALL
SYS
KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
The data of the block
number in the noncontact IC is set.
KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU
(hexadecimal number)>
PP:1st block
Q: 1st block beginning
byte
R: 1st block endingbyte
SS:2nd block
T: 2nd block beginning byte
U: 2nd block ending
byte
Procedur
e
5
KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block number
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
* If the 2nd block/area is
not used, set the SSTU
to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse
to"FFF" (hexadecimal
number).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 211
07/11
Code
Classification
1775
General
1776
General
1777
General
1778
General
1779
Network
1781-0
Network
1781-1
1782
Network

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
5
Card reader format inforALL
SYS Security key
mation -3
KKKKKKKKKKKK (12
digits) <hexadecimal
number> in the [Key
Information] of the [Sector Number] set in the
code 08-1773 should
be entered.
Card authentication LDAP
ALL
0
SYS LDAP server number
1
server
<0-100>
for the card authentication when a noncontact
IC card is used should
be set.
11
Card authentication LDAP
ALL
SYS LDAP search index
search index
when a noncontact IC
card is used is set.
1
ALL
1
SYS 0: 0 min.
Period for locking the control panel when an incor<0-7>
1: 0.5 min. (30 sec.)
2: 1 min.
rect administrator
3: 3 min.
password has been
entered 3 consecutive
4: 5 min.
5: 10 min.
times
6: 15 min.
7: 30 min.
Default data saving direcALL
0
SYS 0: Local directory
1
tory of "Scan to File"
<0-2>
1: REMOTE 1
2: REMOTE 2
4
Notification of When job
ALL
0
SYS Sets the notification
scan job
completed
<0-1>
method of scan job
On error
ALL
0
SYS completion.
4
0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
1
SYS Sets the naming
File name format of "Save
ALL
0
as file" and Email transmis<0-6>
method of the file of
sion
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [FileName]-[Data][Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page][Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName][Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName]
4: [Page]-[FileName][Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName]
6: [HostName]_[Data][Page]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 212
07/11
Code
Classification
1783
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Date display format of the
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data display
<0-5>
format of the file of
file name of "Save as file"
and Email transmission
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
1: [YY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
5: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS][mm0]
1784
Network
Single page data saving

directory at "Save as file"
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1785
Network
ALL
4
<3-6>
SYS
1786
Network
Page number display format of the file of "Save as

file" and Email transmission
Extension (suffix) format of
the file of "Save as file"
ALL
3
<3-6>
SYS
1850
Network
ALL
NIC
1851
Network
1852
Network
1853
Network
1854
Network
16
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
1855
Network
1856
Network
1857
Network
1911
Finisher
IPP
MaxConnection
IPP
ActiveConnection
LPD
MaxConnection
LPD
ActiveConnection
AppleTalk
MaxConnection
AppleTalk
ActiveConnection
RawPrint
MaxConnection
RawPrint
ActiveConnection
Manual stapling time-out
period
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
15
<3~30>
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
M
The order of [YY], [MM]

and [DD] varies
depending on the setting of the code 08-640
(Data display format).
Sets the directory
where the file of "Save
as file" is saved.
0: Save it under a subfolder
1: Save it without creating a subfolder
Sets the digit of a page
number attached on the
file.
3-6: 3-6 digits
Sets the extension digits of the file to be
saved.
3: Auto
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
Number of maximum
connections (IPP).
Number of active connections (IPP).
Number of maximum
connections (LPD).
Number of active connections (LPD).
Number of maximum
connections (AppleTalk).
Number of active connections (AppleTalk).
Number of maximum
connections (RawPrint).
Number of active connections (RawPrint).
3-30 sec. (in increments
of 1 sec.)
Procedur
e
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 213
07/11
Code
Classification
1912
Finisher
1913
General
1914
General
1915
Network
1916
General
1920
Network
1921
Network
1922
Network
1923
Network
1924
Network
1925
Network
1926
FAX
1927
Network
1928
Network
1929
User
interface
1930
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Finisher model switching
ALL
0
M
0: MJ-1023/MJ-1024
setting value
<0~1>
1: MJ-1101
Page number addition on
ALL
0
SYS
multipage file names of
<0-1>
"File/Email"
Maximum number of deciALL
2
SYS 0: 0 digit
mals in extension fields
<0-6>
1: 1 digit
2: 2 digits
3: 3 digits
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
Filing size for Network
ALL
0
SYS 0: Eliminates 2 mm
scanning function
<0-1>
from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
Default saving/attachment
ALL
0
SYS
files of "File/Email"
<0-1>
Device domain name of
ALL
device authentication
Windows domain No. 2 of
ALL
user authentication
Windows domain No. 3 of
ALL
user authentication
LDAP authentication
ALL
1
NIC 1: Windows Server
Server type
<1-2>
2: Not Windows Server
LDAP authentication
ALL
NIC Sets a user attribute
User attribute
name.
SYS 0: Forcible execution
Execution of user authentiALL
2
cation when the user ID is
<0-2>
1: Execution impossinot entered
ble (pooled in the
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
ALL
0
SYS Sets on or off of the
Tab/cover sheet printing at
<0-1>
printing function of speFAX reception
cial sheets such as tab
Printing stop function
or cover sheet of FAX,
Email or list print.
0: Function off
1: Function on
ALL
eBMUser SYS Up to 32 letters
LDAP server attribute
Card
name setting for card
authentication
Role Based Access
ALL
0
SYS
LDAP search index
<04294967
295>
Keyboard layout for LanALL
0
SYS 1: QWERTY layout
guage 1
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1
guage 2
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
1
11
5
2 - 214
07/11
Code
Classification
1931
User
interface
1932
User
interface
1933
User
interface
1934
User
interface
1935
User
interface
1936
Network
1937
Network
1940
General
1941
Bluetooth
1942
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
EUR:2
(for Europe)
guage 3
Other:0
<0-2>
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
0
guage 4
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
0
guage 5
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
0
guage 6
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
0
guage 7
<0-2>
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
AppleTalk device name
ALL
MFP_
serial
The Network-related
"serial".
User name and password
ALL
0
SYS 0: User name and
at user authentication or
<0-2>
password of the
"Save as file"
device
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registration information
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
STAGE port number
SCN
20080
SYS Port number used for
<0the remote scanning is
65535>
set.
Bluetooth
ALL
EUR: 6
SYS 0: Ledger 1: Legal
BIP Paper size
UC: 2
2: Letter 3: Computer
JPN: 6
4: Statement 5: A3
<0-13>
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: Folio
12: Legal13"
13: LetterSquare
ALL
60
NIC Unit: Second
Device authentication
PDC/BDC time-out period
<1-180>
Procedur
e
1
12
1
1
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 215
07/11
Code
Classification
1943
Network
1944
Network
1950
Network
1951
Network
1952
Network
1953
Network
1954
Network
1955
Network
1956
Network
1957
Network
1958
Network
1959
Network
1960
General
1961
General
1963
General
1964
General
1965
General
1966
General
1967
General
1968
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
User authentication
ALL
30
NIC Unit: Second
PDC/BDC time-out period
<1-180>
Device/User authentication
ALL
1
NIC 1: Auto
Method of Windows
<1-3>
2: Kerberos
domain authentication
3: NTLMv2
SMB signature for SMB
ALL
1
UTY 1: Auto
server
<1-3>
2: Valid
3: Invalid
SMB signature for SMB cliALL
1
UTY 1: Auto
ent
<1-3>
2: Valid
3: Invalid
Device name for device
ALL
authentication
ALL
Password for the device
name used for device
authentication
PDC2 of user authenticaALL
tion
BDC2 of user authenticaALL
tion
PDC3 of user authenticaALL
tion
BDC3 of user authenticaALL
tion
PDC of device authenticaALL
tion
BDC of device authenticaALL
tion
KS Filter operation mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
<0-1>
1: Enabled
ALL
Does not reset the
KS/KSSM setting all clearing
value of the code 081960 but resets those
of the codes 08-1963 to
1994.
KS Filter Emulation Mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Auto
<0-2>
1: KS
2: KSSM
KS Filter Paper Size
ALL
1
SYS 0: A3
<0-5>
1: A4
2: B4
3: B5
4: Letter
5: Legal
KS Filter Orientation
ALL
0
SYS 0: Portrait
<0-1>
1: Landscape
KS Filter Copies
ALL
1
SYS
<1-999>
KS Paper Source
ALL
0
SYS
<0-1>
KS Duplex Mode
ALL
0
SYS
<0-2>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 216
07/11
Code
Classification
1970
General
1971
General
1972
General
1973
General
1974
General
1975
General
1976
General
1977
General
1978
General
1979
General
1980
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
KS CPI (English CPI/
ALL
1
SYS 0: (5/10)
Hangle CPI)
<0-10>
1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
KS LPI
ALL
60
SYS Key in the value 10
<30-160>
times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "45" for a
font size 4.5.)
KS Type Face
ALL
0
SYS 0: MYUNGJO
<0-5>
1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
KS Font Size
ALL
96
<96-160>
font size.
font size 10.0.)
KS Zoom
ALL
100
SYS
<20-400>
KS CR/LF Mode
ALL
2
SYS 0: CR->CR,
<0-3>
LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
KS Top Margin
ALL
0
<0-50>
font size.
font size 4.0.)
KS Left Margin
ALL
0
<0-50>
font size.
font size 4.0.)
KS Auto Wrap
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KS Han Mode
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KS Han Code
ALL
0
SYS 0: Wansung
<0-1>
1: Johap
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 217
07/11
Code
Classification
1984
General
1985
General
1986
General
1987
General
1988
General
1989
General
1990
General
1991
General
1992
General
1993
General
1994
General
3506
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
KSSM CPI
ALL
1
SYS 0: (5/10)
(English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
<0-10>
1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
KSSM LPI
ALL
60
<30-160>
font size.
font size 4.5.)
KSSM Type Face
ALL
0
SYS 0: MYUNGJO
<0-5>
1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
KSSM Font Size
ALL
96
<96-160>
font size.
font size 10.0.)
KSSM Zoom
ALL
100
SYS
<20-400>
KSSM CR/LF Mode
ALL
2
SYS 0: CR->CR,
<0-3>
LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
KSSM Top Margin
ALL
0
<0-50>
font size.
font size 4.0.)
KSSM Left Margin
ALL
0
<0-50>
font size.
font size 4.0.)
KSSM Auto Wrap
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KSSM Han Mode
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
<0-1>
1: ON
KSSM Han Code
ALL
0
SYS 0: Wansung
<0-1>
1: Johap
"Attribute 1" indicated in
ALL
company SYS Attribute name for
the LDAP search result
list
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
2 - 218
07/11
Code
Classification
3507
General
3736
Network
3737
Network
3738
Network
3739
Network
3740
Network
3741
Network
3742
Network
3743
Network
3744
Network
3745
General
3746
General
3747
General
3748
General
3749
General
3750
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
departSYS Attribute name for
ment
"attribute 2" indicated in
list
DNS Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC Use when a timeout
<1-180>
occurred at DNS client
connection
DDNS Client Time Out
ALL
60
<1-180>
occurred at DDNS client connection
HTTP Client Time Out
ALL
60
<1-180>
occurred at HTTP client connection
FTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
(SCAN)
<1-180>
occurred at FTP client
connection
SNTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
<1-180>
occurred at SNTP client
connection
SMTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
<1-180>
occurred at SMTP client
connection
POP3 Client Time Out
ALL
30
<1-180>
occurred at POP3 client
connection
LDAP Client Time Out
ALL
30
<1-180>
occurred at LDAP client connection
POP3 Authentication
ALL
1
NIC POP3 authentication
method
<1-3>
method setting
1: Disable (Default)
2: NTLM
3: Kerberos
ALL
NIC Login name for login
Secure DDNS Primary
Login Name
<1-128>
with the Primary DDNS
Secure DDNS Primary
ALL
NIC Login password for
Login Password
<1-128>
login with the Primary
DDNS
ALL
NIC Login name for login
Secure DDNS Secondary
Login Name
<1-128>
with the Secondary
DDNS
Secure DDNS Secondary
ALL
NIC Login password for
Login Password
<1-128>
login with the Secondary DDNS
DPWS Friendly Name
ALL
NIC MFP name indicated in
DPWS search result
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx
[NIC serial number]
DPWS Printer Name
ALL
NIC Printer name used for
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Printer[NIC serial number]
Procedur
e
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 219
07/11
Code
Classification
3751
General
3752
General
3753
General
3754
Network
3755
Network
3756
Network
3757
Network
3758
Network
3759
Network
3760
Network
3761
Network
3762
Network
3763
Network
3764
Network
3765
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
DPWS Scanner Name
ALL
NIC Scanner name used for
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Scanner[NIC serial number]
DPWS Printer Information
ALL
NIC Information regarding
DPWS printer
<Default value> NULL
DPWS Scanner InformaALL
NIC Information regarding
tion
DPWS scanner
<Default value> NULL
Switching DPWS Printer
ALL
1
NIC DPWS printer /DPWS
setting
<1-3>
secure printer function
is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3: Security enabled
Switching DPWS Scanner
ALL
1
NIC DPWS scanner function
setting
<1-2>
is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching DPWS Security
ALL
1
NIC DPWS security funcsetting
<1-2>
tion is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
NIC Port number used for
DPWS Discovery Port
ALL
3702
DPWS Discovery
Number
<165535>
DPWS Metadata
ALL
5081
Exchange Port Number
<1DPWS Metadata
65535>
Exchange
DPWS Print Port Number
ALL
5082
<1DPWS Print
65535>
DPWS Scan Port Number
ALL
5083
DPWS Scan
<165535>
DPWS Security Discovery
ALL
3702
Port Number
<1DPWS Security Discov65535>
ery
DPWS Security Metadata
ALL
5084
Exchange Port Number
<1DPWS Security Meta65535>
data Exchange
DPWS Security Print Port
ALL
5085
DPWS Security Print
Number
<165535>
DPWS Security Scan Port
ALL
5086
Number
<1DPWS Security Scan
65535>
DPWS Print Max numbers
ALL
10
NIC Maximum numbers
of connection
<1-20>
received from more
than one connection
request in the DPWS
print
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 220
07/11
Code
Classification
3766
Network
3767
Network
3768
Network
3769
Network
3770
Network
3771
Network
3772
Network
3773
Network
3774
Network
3775
Network
3776
Network
3777
Network
3778
Network

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
DPWS Print Max numbers
ALL
10
NIC Maximum numbers of
of reception
<1-20>
data received from
more than one clients in
the DPWS print
Switching IPv6 setting
ALL
2
NIC IPv6 function is
<1-2>
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching IP(IPv6)
ALL
2
NIC IP(IPv6) Address
Address Acquisition
<1-2>
Acquisition setting is
switched.
1: Manual
2: Auto configuration
Link Local Address
ALL
NIC Link Local Address is
<0-16>
displayed. Unique IP
address (128 bits) is set
using Mac address.
IPv6 Address
ALL
0
NIC DHCPv6 Address in
<0-16>
Manual/Auto configuration is displayed.
Prefix display setting
ALL
0
NIC The range of Prefix dis<0-128>
play is set.
Default Gateway setting
ALL
0
NIC Default Gateway of
<0-16>
DHCPv6 Address in
Manual/Auto configuration is set.
Displaying previous
ALL
0
NIC The previous DHCPv6
DHCPv6 Address
<0-16>
Address is displayed.
NIC DHCPv6 Option is
DHCPv6 Option setting
ALL
2
<1-2>
switched when the
Manual is set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address Auto
ALL
1
NIC Stateless Address Auto
Configuration
<1-2>
Configuration is
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2
NIC When Prefix sent from
continuation
<1-2>
router is changed,
Stateless Address is
continued to be set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2
NIC IP Address is acquired
<1-2>
by both Stateless and
State full Address.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Acquiring DHCPv6 Option
ALL
2
NIC When Stateless
<1-2>
Address is selected, an
option is acquired from
DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 221
07/11
Code
Classification
3779
Network
3780
Network
3781
Network
3782
Network
3783
Network
3784
Network
3785
Network
3793
Network
3794
Network
3804
Scanner

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
State full Address setting
ALL
2
NIC IP Address is acquired
<1-2>
from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
State full Option setting
ALL
2
NIC An option is acquired
<1-2>
from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Primary DNS Server
ALL
0
NIC Registration of Primary
Address Registration
<0-16>
DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server
ALL
0
NIC Registration of SecondAddress Registration
<0-16>
ary DNS Server
Address
Selecting SAMBA Protocol
ALL
2
NIC Either IPv6 or IPv4 is
<2-3>
selected to use
SAMBA.
2: IPv6
3: IPv4
DSN Server resolve type
ALL
4
NIC Either "ip6.arpa" or
<1-4>
"ip6.int" is selected for
the name resolution in
DNS.
1: "ip6.arpa" only
2: "ip6.int" only
3: In case of error with
"ip6.int", "ip6.arpa"
is requested.
4: In case of error with
ip6.arpa, ip6.int
is requested.
DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with
ALL
2
NIC Either IPv4 only or IPv6
IPv6
<1-2>
together with it is
selected to operate
Print, Scan and Security related with DPWS.
1: Multi (IPv4 and
IPv6)
2: IPv4
Switching LLTD setting
ALL
1
NIC LLTD function is
<1-2>
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Switching LLMNR setting
ALL
2
NIC LLMNR function is
switched.
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
List Analysis Logic of Scan
ALL
0
SYS Acquisition of Contents
to File (FTP)
<0-1>
in Host side is switched
by Scan to File (FTP).
0: NLST
1: LIST
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 222
07/11
Code
Classification
3805
Scanner
3810
Network

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Department Management
ALL
0
SYS Department Managesetting by Remote Scan
<0-3>
ment is set when
Remote Scan is performed.
0: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI OFF
1: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI OFF
2: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI ON
3: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI ON
1
Direct SMTP communicaALL
0
SYS When an Internet Fax is
tion setting
<0-1>
sent, Direct SMTP communication is set.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When "0: Disabled" is
set, an Internet Fax is
sent using an SMTP
server.
3811
Network
Image encrypting at the

Direct SMTP communication
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
3812
Scanner
Dummy full mode at the

Internet Fax transmission
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
When "1: Enabled" is

set, direct SMTP communication is enabled
and an Internet Fax is
sent to MFPs on the
intranet without using
an SMTP server. Since
no SMTP server is
used, the SSL encryption and SMTP-AUTH
function cannot be used
for internet Fax transmission.
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.
When Direct SMTP
communication is performed, an attached
image is encrypted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When an Internet Fax is
sent, the resolution ratio
and the paper size of an
attached image are set
to the full mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 223
07/11
Code
Classification
3815
Scanner
3816
Scanner
3817
Scanner
3818
Scanner
3819
General
3820
General
3821
General
3822
General

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
XPS file thumbnail addition
ALL
1
SYS Thumbnail is added to
1
<0-1>
the XPS file produced
by the Scan function.
0: Not added
1: Only the top page
added
1
XPS file paper size setting
ALL
1
SYS The paper size of the
<0-1>
XPS file produced by
the Scan function is set.
0: Scanned image size
1: Standard size
1
PDF file version setting
ALL
0
SYS The version of PDF file
<0-1>
produced by the Scan
function is set.
0: PDF V1.3
1: PDF V1.4
1
DPWS Scan operation
ALL
1
SYS The operation mode in
mode
<0-1>
the DPWS Scan function is switched.
0: Batch type
1: Serial type
1
Network Fax/Internet Fax
ALL
2
SYS The processing mode
processing mode (STD)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
ALL
0
processing mode (FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
ALL
0
processing mode (S-FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
1
ALL
0
processing mode (U-FINE)
<0-2>
of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 224
07/11
Code
Classification
3823
General
3824
General
3825
General
3826
General
3827
General
3828
General
3829
General
3830
General
3831
Network
3833
General

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Processing mode threshALL
254
SYS Image quality adjust<0-255>
ment when "Standard"
old for network Fax/Internet Fax (STD) [Standard]
is set for the Network
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (STD)
254
SYS Image quality adjust1
old for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
net Fax (FINE) [Standard]
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (FINE)
1
166
SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255>
net Fax (S-FINE)
[Standard]
Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE)
1
ALL
170
SYS Image quality adjustProcessing mode thresh<0-255>
old for network Fax/Internet Fax (U-FINE)
Fax/Internet Fax pro[Standard]
cessing mode (U-FINE)
200
<0-255>
ment when "Low speed/
old for network Fax/Internet Fax (STD) [Low speed/
High image quality" is
set for the Network Fax/
High image quality]
Internet Fax processing mode (STD)
1
ALL
204
SYS Image quality adjustProcessing mode thresh<0-255>
old for network Fax/InterHigh image quality" is
net Fax (FINE) [Low
speed/High image quality]
Internet Fax processing mode (FINE)
SYS Image quality adjustProcessing mode threshALL
206
1
net Fax (S-FINE) [Low
Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE)
161
net Fax (U-FINE) [Low
Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Require eBMUser1
Mode switching for Role
<0-1>
Role attribute
Based Access Control
1: User available
function
LDAP attribute
1
Home directory function
ALL
0
SYS Function to store a file
<0-1>
in the user's home
directory
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 225
07/11
Code
Classification
3834
General
3837
General
3840
General
3841
General
3842
General
3845
Network
3847
General
3848
General
3849
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Backup file encryption
ALL
0
SYS When the backup file is
<0-1>
created from TopAccess, it is encrypted.
0: Enabled (Encryption)
1: Disabled (No
encryption)
Display switching for the
ALL
0
SYS The display method of
machine name/computer
<0-1>
the machine name/
name shown in the notificomputer name shown
cation
in the event-related
notification is switched.
0: IP address
1: NetBIOS name/
FQDN
Electronic License Key
ALL
Licenses for Electronic
Registration
License Key are registered.
ALL
Registered licenses for
Deletion
are deleted.
ALL
All licenses stored in
Display
the ELK jig are displayed.
SNMP Trap Enterprise OID
ALL
0
SYS Trap Enterprise OID is
mode setting
<0-1>
enabled for existing
models.
0: Normal (Not
enabling for existing models)
1: Enabled for existing
models
FAX mistransmission preFAX
0
SYS FAX mistransmission
vention
prevention function is
<0-1>
switched.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
Restriction on Address
0
SYS Availability of destinaFAX
Book destination setting
tion selection from the
<0-1>
Address Book is
switched as one of FAX
mistransmission prevention functions when
setting FAX destinations
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled) .
Restriction on destination
0
SYS Availability of direct
FAX
direct entry
entry is switched as one
<0-1>
of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX
destinations.
0: OFF (Disabled )
1: ON (Enabled)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
3
3
3
1
2 - 226
07/11
Code
Classification
3850
General
3851
General
3852
User
interface
3853
User
interface
3854
User
interface
3855
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Remote Scan
ALL
0
SYS User authentication on
User authentication
Remote Scan driver is
<0-3>
switched according to
the availability of GUI.
0: OFF (No GUI) /
OFF (GUI installed)
1: ON (No GUI) /
OFF (GUI installed)
2: OFF (No GUI) /
ON (GUI installed)
3: ON (No GUI) /
ON (GUI installed)
Template display
ALL
0
SYS The order of displaying
<0-1>
templates on the LCD
screen is switched.
0: Order of IDs
1: Alphabetical order
Automatic summer time
ALL
0
SYS Automatic summer time
change
<0-1>
change on the day previously set is switched.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS Summer time is started
Offset value
<0-7>
as follows when 083852 is enabled.
0: +2:00
1: +1:30
2: +1:00
3: +0:30
4: -0:30
5: -1:00
6: -1:30
7: -2:00
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The month in which
Starting month
<1-12>
summer time is started
is set.
1: January
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The week in which
Starting week
<1-5>
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last
Procedur
e
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 227
07/11
Code
Classification
3856
User
interface
3857
User
interface
3858
User
interface
3859
User
interface
3860
User
interface
3861
User
interface
3862
User
interface
3863
User
interface

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The day on which sumStarting day
mer time is started is
<0-6>
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The time at which sumStarting time
mer time is started is
<00-23>
set.
00-23
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The minute at which
Starting minute
<00-59>
is set.
00-59
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The month in which
Ending month
summer time is ended
<1-12>
is set.
1: January
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
Summer time mode
ALL
1
SYS The week in which
Ending week
<1-5>
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The day on which sumEnding day
<0-6>
mer time is ended is
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The time at which sumEnding time
mer time is ended is
<00-23>
set.
00-23
Summer time mode
ALL
0
SYS The minute at which
Ending minute
<00-59>
is set.
00-59
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
1
2 - 228
07/11
Code
Classification
3864
Network
3865
Network
3866
Network
3867
Network
3868
Network
6810-0
Counter
6810-1
6810-2
6810-3
6810-4
6810-7

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Disclosing Telnet Server
ALL
0
SYS Disclosure of Telnet
function
<0-1>
Server function is
switched.
0: Not disclosed
1: Disclosed
Availability of Telnet Server
ALL
2
NIC Availability of Telnet
12
<1-2>
Server is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
Telnet Server
ALL
23
12
NIC A port number for TelTCP port number
<1net Server is set.
65535>
Telnet Server
ALL
Admin
12
NIC A user name for the TelServer administrator's user
<Maxinet Server administraname
mum 15
tor is confirmed.
letters>
12
Telnet Server
ALL
System
NIC A password for the TelServer administrator's
<Maxinet Server administrator is set.
password
mum 15
letters>
4
PRT
0
Number of
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages printed
output pages Duplex
only in the black mode.
in black mode printing
/ Large size
4
2-UP /
PRT
0
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages printed in
printing
the black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
4
PRT
0
2-UP /
<8 digits>
sheets printed in the
Simplex
black mode using
printing
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
4-UP /
PRT
0
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages printed in
printing
the black mode using
[4IN1].
4-UP /
PRT
0
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets printed in the
printing
black mode using
[4IN1].
1-UP /
PRT
0
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
output pages.
printing
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 229
07/11
Code
Classification
6813-0
Counter
6813-1
6813-2
6813-3
6813-4
6813-5
6813-6
6813-7
6815-0
Counter
6815-7
9117
Network
9359
9394
User
interface
Network
9629
Network
9739
Maintenance
9819
General

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1-UP /
PRT
0
4
Number of
<8 digits>
output pages.
output pages Duplex
printing
of the printer
or BOX /
PRT
0
4
2-UP /
Large
<8 digits>
output pages using
Duplex
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
printing
SORT].
4
PRT
0
2-UP /
<8 digits>
Simplex
[MAGAZINE SORT].
printing
4-UP /
PRT
0
4
Duplex
<8 digits>
output pages using
printing
[4IN1].
4-UP /
PRT
0
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
printing
4
PRT
0
N-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages using [N
Duplex
IN1].
printing
N-UP /
PRT
0
4
Simplex
<8 digits>
sheets using [N IN1].
printing
PRT
0
4
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages.
Simplex
printing
Number of
1-UP /
FAX
0
4
<8 digits>
output pages in the
output pages Simplex
printing
default settings.
of the FAX
printing /
1-UP /
FAX
0
SYS
4
Large
Duplex
<8 digits>
printing
PRT
0
SYS 0: OFF
1
Raw printing job
<0-1>
1: ON
(Blank page will not be
printed)
Printing resume after jam
ALL
0
SYS 0: Auto resume
1
releasing
<0-1>
1: Resume by users
1
Single-page option for storALL
0
SYS 0: Sets 1 page as 1 file
ing File and sending Email
<0-1>
1: Makes a file based
on the original
Attribute name for LDAP
ALL
eBMUser SYS
11
Role Based Access
R
<->
Remote service
ALL
0
SYS 0: RDMS toner empty
1
Toner-end notification
<0-2>
notified immediately
1: RDMS toner empty
notified once a day
2: RDMS toner empty
not notified
1
STAGE SSL
ALL
1
SYS When remote scanning
<0-1>
is performed, the SSL
communication is carried out.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled(SSL communication)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 230
07/11
Code
Classification
9822
General
9828
General
9829
General
9847
Finisher
9880
9881
Maintenance
General
9882
General
9886
Scanner
9888
Scanner
9889
General
9891
User
interface
9946
General
9947
General

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
STAGE SSL port number
ALL
20443
SYS When remote scanning
is performed using SSL
<065535>
communication, the
SSL port number is set.
Remote scanning mode
ALL
0
SYS 0: Batch
<0-1>
1: Sequential
ALL
0
SYS Decide the default limilimitation setting
<0-1>
tation setting when the
new department code is
created.
0: No limit
1: Limited
Hole punching setting
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
<0-1>
1: Valid
ALL
0
0 to 31
date setting(2)
<0-31>
Day of total counter data
ALL
0
1 byte 00000000(0)transmission
<0-127>
01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
Display mode of the used
ALL
1
SYS 0: All files search
capacity on the e-Filing
<0-1>
mode
administrator page
1: Performance priority
mode
Decimal point indication for
SCN
EUR: 0
SYS 0: Comma
Enhanced Scan Template
UC: 1
1: Period
JPN: 1
<0-1>
Permission setting for
SYS 0: Prohibited
SCN
0
changing the scan parame<0-1>
1: Accepted
ter when recalling an
extension
ALL
0
SYS Acceptance of the
Acceptance of data cloning
using USB storage device
<0-1>
usage of the USB data
cloning tool
0: Accepted
1: Not accepted
Warning message on the
ALL
1
SYS 0: No warning notificatouch panel when PM
<0-1>
tion
(Periodic Maintenance)
1: Warning notification
time has come
E-mail transmission retry
ALL
3
SYS The number of times of
number
<0-14>
E-mail communication
retry for Scan to E-mail
and Internet Fax is set.
E-mail transmission retry
ALL
1
SYS When E-mail transmisinterval
<0-15>
sion retry for Scan to Email and Internet Fax is
performed, the interval
is set.
0 min - 15 min
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 231
07/11
Code
9960
Classification
Maintenance

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
Displaying equipment
ALL
0
SYS Equipment information
2
information
<0-2>
stored in NVRAM is displayed.
0: Unset
1: e-STUDIO352/452
2: e-STUDIO353/453
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 232
07/11
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)
Code
1500
Classification
Pixel
counter
1501
Pixel
counter
1502
Pixel
counter
1503
Pixel
counter
1504
Pixel
counter
1505
Pixel
counter
1506
Pixel
counter
1507
Pixel
counter
1508
Pixel
counter
1509
Pixel
counter
1510
Pixel
counter
1514
Pixel
counter
1518
Pixel
counter

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
Standard paper size setting
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS Selects the standard
1
UC: 1
paper size to convert it
JPN: 0
into the pixel count (%).
<0-1>
0: A4
1: LT
3
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
SYS Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
Service technician referALL
3
ence counter clearing
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
ALL
3
counter clearing
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
1
Pixel counter display setALL
1
SYS Selects whether or not
ting
<0-1>
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1
Displayed reference setALL
0
SYS Selects the reference
ting
<0-1>
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference1: Toner
cartridge reference
Toner empty determination
ALL
0
SYS Selects the counter to
1
counter setting
<0-1>
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
1
ALL
400
SYS Sets the number of outThreshold setting for toner
<0-999>
put pages to determine
empty determination (Outtoner empty. This setput pages)
ting is valid when 0 is
set at 08-1506.
1
ALL
17550
SYS Sets the number of outempty determination (Pixel
<0put pages to determine
counter)
60000>
set at 08-1506.
Pixel counter clear flag/
ALL
0
SYS Becomes 1 when 082
Service technician refer<0-1>
1502 is performed.
ence
Service technician referALL
SYS Displays the date on
2
ence cleared date
2
ALL
cleared date
ALL
2
count started date
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 233
07/11
Code
Classification
1548
Pixel
counter
1550
Pixel
counter
1551
Pixel
counter
1553
Pixel
counter
1555
Pixel
counter
1556
Pixel
counter
1566
Pixel
counter
1592
Pixel
counter
1593
Pixel
counter

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
output pages con(Service technician reference)
verted to the standard
function, black mode
reference.
[Unit. page]
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
[Unit. page]
FAX
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(Service technician referoutput pages conence)
[Unit. page]
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
[Unit. page]
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
black (Toner cartridge refoutput pages conerence)
[Unit. page]
FAX
[Unit. page]
Toner cartridge replaceALL
ment counter
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
SYS Displays the average
PPC
0
Average pixel count
pixel count in the copy
<0(Service technician referfunction and service
10000>
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PRT
0
(Service technician refer<0pixel count in the printer
ence)
10000>
[Unit: 0.01%]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2 - 234
07/11
Code
1594
Classification
Pixel
counter
1595
Pixel
counter
1606
Pixel
counter
1607
Pixel
counter
1608
Pixel
counter
1613
Pixel
counter
1619
Pixel
counter
1624
Pixel
counter
1625
Pixel
counter
1634
Pixel
counter
1639
Pixel
counter

Default
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
2
Average pixel count
FAX
0
<0pixel count in the FAX
10000>
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PPC/
0
2
(Service technician referPRT/
<0pixel count in the copy/
ence)
FAX
10000>
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Latest pixel count
PPC
0
SYS Displays the latest pixel
2
(Service technician refer<0count in the copy funcence)
10000>
tion, black mode and
service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
PRT
0
Latest pixel count
<0(Service technician referfunction and service
10000>
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
FAX
0
Latest pixel count
count in the FAX func<0(Service technician refertion and service techni10000>
ence)
cian reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Average pixel count
PPC
0
<0pixel count in the printer
10000>
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count
PRT
0
2
<0pixel count in the printer
10000>
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
0
Average pixel count
PPC/
<0(Toner cartridge reference) PRT/
10000>
FAX
and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Average pixel count (Toner
FAX
0
2
cartridge reference)
<0pixel count in the FAX
10000>
[Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
FAX
0
count in the FAX func(Toner cartridge reference)
<0tion and toner cartridge
10000>
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
2
Latest pixel count
PPC
0
count in the copy func(Toner cartridge reference)
<0tion and toner cartridge
10000>
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 235
07/11
Code
Classification

Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
<010000>
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
distribution
5.1-10%
PPC <8 digits> SYS are divided into 10
10.1-15%
PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of
15.1-20%
PPC <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In
20.1-25%
PPC <8 digits> SYS this code, the distribu25.1-30%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tions in the copy func30.1-40%
PPC <8 digits> SYS tion are displayed.
40.1-60%
PPC <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page]
1640
Pixel
counter
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
Pixel
counter
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
Procedur
e
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
PPC
PPC
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

are divided into 10
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

are divided into 10
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 236
07/11
<<PM support mode related code>>

The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
1150-0 to 8
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
Items
Remarks
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 237
07/11

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
1214-0 to 8
1215
1224-0 to 8
1225
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Cleaning roller
1266-0 to 8
1267
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
Items
Pickup roller
(RADF)
Feed roller
(RADF)
Separation roller
(RADF)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Remarks
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
2 - 238
07/11

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
Pickup roller
(LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
Feed roller
(Upper drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
Feed roller
(Lower drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
Separation roller
(Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
Separation roller
(Lower drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
Separation roller
(LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
Separation roller
(Bypass unit)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
Items
Feed roller
(LCF)
Remarks
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 239
07/11

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(Bypass unit)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
Items
Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
Remarks
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
2 - 240
07/11
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>

(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code 257 and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3)
Key in the value 1 or 2 and press the [START] button.

The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)
Key in 1 to copy the value of the total

counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
(B)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 241
05/12
Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup

counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(4)
(B)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 242
05/05
2.2.9
Pixel counter
1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 243
05/05
2) Factors affecting toner consumption

Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:
- Original/Data coverage
- Original/Data density
- Original/Print mode
- Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Original density
Toner consumption
Original coverage
TEXT
/PHOTO
TEXT
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual

density density density density density density
+5
+1
Center
-1
-5
PHOTO
Original mode
Density setting
Fig. 2-4 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 244
05/05
3) Details of pixel counter

- Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference.
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count
or output pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold.The threshold to
be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0:
Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508)
and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507).When the new toner cartridge is
judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the
data after the installation of new cartridge.Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference
is performed in the setting mode(08-1503).
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.Clearing of the
counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode(08-1502).
-
Print count (number of output pages)

The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).The examples of
conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
1. 1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
2. 2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
3. 1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
4. 1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
Pixel count (%)

Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 245
05/05
4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission

Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
-
Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)

There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
Type of calculated data

Since this is multifunctional, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function.The following
list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be
confirmed by the setting mode (08).See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details.
{: With data
: Without data
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total

{
{
{
{

{
{
{
{
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data

-
Setting related with the pixel counter function

(f-1) Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
(f-2) Pixel counter display setting
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
(f-3) Display reference setting
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge
reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
(f-4) Determination counter of toner empty
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner
empty is detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner
empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output
pages is counted.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 246
05/05
(f-5) Pixel counter clearing

There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption
The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the
standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.The
relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
Number of output pages per cartridge (page)
Standard number of output pages

X
X/2
X/10
60%
6% 12%
Pixel count (%)

Fig. 2-5 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 247
05/05
5) Pixel counter confirmation

- Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-6 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-7 Information screen of service technician reference
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 248
06/09
Data list printing

The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2003.4.23 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
0 20030423
1 20030423
2 20030423
Print Count [LT/A4]

Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
Fig. 2-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

2003.4.23 09:55
SERVICEMAN
No DATE
0 20030423
1 20030423
2 20030423
Print Count [LT/A4]

Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
Fig. 2-9 Data list of service technician reference
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 249
06/09
Display in the setting mode (08)

Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)".
(c-1) Print count, pixel count
Copier
function
Printer
function
FAX function
Total
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Average pixel count
(%)

1553

1548
1613
1592
1639
1606
1555
1550
1619
1593
1640
1607
1556
1551
1625
1594
1634
1608
1624
1595
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table

(c-2) Pixel count distribution
Copier function
Pixel count distribution (page)

1649
Printer function
FAX function
1650
1651
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table

Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
(c-3) Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (05-1518)
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date is displayed. (08-1510)
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 250
07/11
2.2.10
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /

Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)

[Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer]
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 989, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
612
[Paper size]
613
[Department management]
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
User interface
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 251
06/09
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
Scanner
Image
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction]
628
[Image shift]
636
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Box printing]
647, 953, 954
[X in 1]
650
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Automatic transfer]
660, 661
[Indicator]
671
[Priority drawer]
689
[Media type]
697
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Job build]
1130, 1131
[Position]
305, 306
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
[Carriage position]
359
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438
[Image density]
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,
931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938,
939, 940, 941, 942
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835,
836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918,
919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope]
593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Sharpness]
620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2,
867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text]
653, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density]
672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4
[Binarizing]
700, 701, 702
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
[Error diffusion / Dither]

502, 509
2 - 252
06/09
Classification
Drive
Paper
feeding
Laser
Developer
High-voltage
transformer
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
[Main motor]
421, 422
[Exit motor]
424, 425
[Aligning amount]
448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2,
452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2,
471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount]
466-0 to 7, 467
[Laser power]
286
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
[Write starting]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,
498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
[Auto-toner]
200, 201
[Main charger bias]

210
[Developer bias]
205
[Transfer bias]
221
[Separation bias]
231
Fuser
Fan
RADF
[Aligning amount]
354, 355
[Sensors/EEPROM]
356, 367, 368
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
[paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 471
[Paper feeding]
254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988
[Retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size]
216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention]
625
[Polygonal motor]
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
488, 489, 490
[Power correction]
872, 873, 875, 876, 877
[Auto-toner]
414, 455, 840
[Black band]
419
[Transfer bias]
491, 492, 493, 868, 869
[Main charger bias]
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Transfer timing]
841
[Developer bias]
859, 860, 861, 862, 863
[Status counter]
400
[Temperature]
409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855
[Pre-running]
417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856
[Separation fan]
469
[Middle fan]
472
[Switchback]
462
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 253
06/09
Classification
Finisher
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
[Folding / Binding position]

468-0 to 2
[Tray reset]
648
[Cascade]
652, 653
[NIC]
1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1120
[IP address]
1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[Frame type]
1012
[NCP]
1013
[Apple Talk]
1014, 1015
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1139, 1486
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019
[DDNS]
1020
[SLP]
1021
[NetBios]
1023
[WINS]
1024, 1025
[Bindery]
1026
[NDS]
1027
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035
[SMTP]
1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100,
1101, 1102, 1111
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052
[FTP]
1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090,
1091, 1092, 1107, 1108, 1109, 1110
[MIB]
1063
[Community]
1065, 1066
[TRAP]
1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP]
945, 1073, 1074
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088
Network
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 254
06/09
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[SerchRoot]
1095
[Print queue]
1096
[ASCII code]
977
[Rendezvous]
1103
[Link local host name]
1104
[Service name]
1105
[Host name]
1112
[Internet FAX]
1114, 1485
[SMB]
1117, 1136
[Samba]
1137
[Workgroup name]
1124
[Private print]
1432
[Function]
1433, 1434
[Scan to E-mail]
1484
[From Address]
1487, 1488, 1489
[E-mail domain]
1491
[External counter]
202, 381, 683, 975
[Counter copy]
257
[Paper size]
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size]
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
335-0 to 2
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
629
[Fuser unit]
1372
[Toner cartridge]
1376
[Media type]
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412
[Toner cartridge driver counts]
1410
Counter
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 255
06/09
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
Version
[System firmware]
900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935,
936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware]
903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX]
915
[NIC]
916
[PM counter]
251, 252
[Telephone]
250
[Error history]
253
[FSMS]
258, 999
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717,
718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777,
778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785,
786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759,
760, 761, 762, 763, 765, 794, 795
[Firmware download]
797
Maintenance
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 256
07/11
Classification
Others
e-STUDIO350/450
Setting Mode (08)
[Equipment number]
976
[Destination]
201, 701
[Line]
203
[Private printing]
259
[Local I/F]
614
[Memory]
615
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Clear]
665, 669, 693
[Trial period]
673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Database]
684, 685, 686
[HDD]
670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel]
692
[Scrambler board]
696, 698, 699
[Equipment number]
995
[Message button]
681
[Initialization]
947
[Mode setting]
948, 949
[Template]
1140
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 257
06/09
2.2.11
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /

Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Classification
User interface
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
[Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer]
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979, 1856, 1857, 9117
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857,
3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863
[Paper size]
613
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 258
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
Scanner
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction]
628
[Image shift]
636, 1429, 1430
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Box printing]
953, 954
[X in 1]
650
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Automatic transfer]
660, 661
[Indicator]
671
[Priority drawer]
689
[Media type]
697
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Job build]
1130, 1131
[Display of REVERSE ORDER]
213
[Displaying number of original pages]
342
[Toner is nearly empty]
972
[Paper size setting (drawers)]
1478
[Selectable security level]
1708
[Keyboard layout]
1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935
[JOB STATUS]
983
[Jam releasing]
9359
[PM]
9891
[Enhanced template]
9886, 9888
[Position]
305, 306
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
[Carriage position]
359
[Shading position]
350, 351
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 259
07/11
Classification
Image
Drive
Paper
feeding
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438
[Image density]
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,
931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938,
939, 940, 941, 942
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835,
836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918,
919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope]
593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Gamma balance]
596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2,
599-0 to 2
[Sharpness]
620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2,
867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text]
648, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density]
672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4
[Binarizing]
700, 701, 702
[Main motor]
421, 422
[Exit motor]
424, 425
[Aligning amount]
448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2,
452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2,
471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount]
466-0 to 7, 467
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
[Error diffusion / Dither]

502, 509
[Default setting of sharpness]
1479
[paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 471
[Paper feeding]
254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988
[Retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size]
216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention]
625
[Incorrect paper size jam]
449
[Tab paper]
1437, 1438, 1439
[Detection method of 13"LG]
1492
2 - 260
07/11
Classification
Laser
Developer
High-voltage
transformer
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
[Laser power]
286
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
[Write starting]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,
498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
[Auto-toner]
200, 201
[Main charger bias]

210
[Developer bias]
205
[Transfer bias]
221
[Separation bias]
231
Fuser
Fan
RADF
Finisher
[Aligning amount]
354, 355
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
[Folding / Binding position]
468-0 to 2
[Polygonal motor]
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
488, 489, 490
[Power correction]
872, 873, 875, 876, 877
2
[Auto-toner]
414, 455, 840
[Black band]
419
[Transfer bias]
491, 492, 493, 868, 869
[Main charger bias]
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Transfer timing]
841
[Developer bias]
859, 860, 861, 862, 863
[Status counter]
400
[Temperature]
409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855
[Pre-running]
417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856
[Separation fan]
469
[Middle fan]
472
[Switchback]
462
[Tray reset]
648
[Cascade]
652, 653
[Interruption of stapling operation (no staple) ]
704-0 to 1
[Manual stapling]
1911
[Finisher model]
1912
[Hole punching]
9847
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 261
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[NIC]
1002, 1003, 1119
[IP address]
1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 3769
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[Frame type]
1012
[NCP]
1013
[Apple Talk]
1014, 1015, 1854, 1855, 1936
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1139, 3506, 3507, 3743, 9629
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782, 3784
[DDNS]
1020, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748
[DHCP]
3772, 3773, 3774, 3778, 3779, 3780
[DPWS]
3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754,
3755, 3756, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760,
3761, 3762, 3763, 3764, 3765, 3766, 3785
[NetBios]
1023
[WINS]
1024, 1025
[Bindery]
1026
[NDS]
1027
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032, 3738
[SMTP]
1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100,
1101, 1102, 1111, 3741
[Direct SMTP]
3810, 3811
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051,
1052, 3742, 3744
[FTP]
1055, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061,
1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 3739
[MIB]
1063
[Community]
1065, 1066
[TRAP]
1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP]
945, 1073, 1074
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077, 1852, 1853
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 262
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,
1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 1850, 1851
[IPv6]
3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3777
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[SerchRoot]
1095
[Print queue]
1096
[ASCII code]
977
[Rendezvous]
1103
[Link local host name]
1104
[Service name]
1105
[Host name]
1112
[Internet FAX]
1114, 1485, 3812, 3819, 3820, 3821, 3822,
3823, 3824, 3825, 3826, 3827, 3828,
3829, 3830
[SMB]
1117, 1950, 1951
[Samba]
1464, 3783, 3883
[Workgroup name]
1124
[Private print]
1432
[Scan to E-mail]
1484
[From Address]
1487, 1489
[E-mail]
3837, 9946, 9947
[E-mail domain]
1491
[User authentication]
1113, 1471, 1496, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937,
1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1943
[PDC]
1121
[BDC]
1122
[NT domain]
1123
[Address book]
1125, 1476, 1477
[Netware]
1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148
[MAC address]
1141
[ACC]
1431
[Disable print save]
1435
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 263
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[Disable fax save]

1436
[IP Confilct]
1440
[SNTP]
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740, 3845
[Device authentication]
1470, 1920, 1952, 1953, 1958, 1959,
1942, 1944
[IP Filter]
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737,
1738, 1739
[SSL setting]
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745,
1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751,
9819, 9822
[Enable server's IP]
1755, 1756, 1757, 1759, 1760, 1762, 1767
[Previous IP address]
1768
[Card authentification]
1776, 1777, 1927
[Scan to File]
1779, 1784, 1786, 3804, 3815, 3816,
3817, 3818
[Notification of scan job]
1781-0 to 1
[Save as file and Email transmission]
1782, 1783, 1785, 9394
[Network scanning]
1915
[Remote scanning]
1940
[LDAP authentication]
1923, 1924
[Role Based Access]
1928, 3831
[Prefix]
3771
[LLTD]
3793
[LLMNR]
3794
[Telnet]
3864, 3865, 3866, 3867, 3868
[Driver]
1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665,
1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671,
1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677,
1678
[Supplicant]
1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685, 1686,
1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696,
1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705,
1706, 1707, 1764, 1765, 1766
[Bluetooth]
1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715,
1716, 1717, 1719, 1941
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 264
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Counter
[External counter]
202, 381, 683, 975, 1126
[Counter copy]
257
[Paper size]
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size]
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
335-0 to 2
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
629
[Fuser unit]
1372
[Toner cartridge]
1376
[Media type]
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412
[Toner cartridge driver counts]
1410
[Number of output pages]
1530-0 to 7, 1533-0 to 7, 1535-0 to 7,
6810-0 to 7, 6813-0 to 7, 6815-0 to 7,
[System firmware]
900, 911, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924,
925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933,
934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware]
903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX]
915
Version
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 265
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Maintenance
[PM counter]
251, 252
[Telephone]
250
[Error history]
253
[FSMS]
258, 999
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717,
718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777,
778, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786,
787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145, 9739,
9880, 9881
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759,
760, 761, 762, 763, 765, 794, 795
[Firmware download]
797
[Service call checking period]
1495
[Equipment information]
9960
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 266
07/11
Classification
Others
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
[Equipment number]
976
[Destination]
201, 701
[Line]
203
[Private printing]
259
[Local I/F]
614
[Memory]
615
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Clear]
665, 669, 693
[Trial period]
673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Database]
684, 685, 686
[HDD]
670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel]
692
[Scrambler board]
696, 698, 699
[Data overwrite kit]
633
[Equipment number]
995
[Message button]
681
[Initialization]
947
[Mode setting]
949
[Template]
1140, 3851
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
[TAT partition]
1118
[Enhanced bold]
1149
[User data management]
1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483
[Limitation]
1494, 9829
[Inbound FAX]
1498
[Card reader]
1772, 1773, 1774, 1775
[FAX reception]
1926
[e-Filing Access Mode]
1497
[Administrators password]
1778
[File/Email]
1913, 1916
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 267
07/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Setting Mode (08)
Others
[Extension fields]
1914
[KS/KSSM setting]
1961
[KS]
1960, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967,
1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974,
1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980
[KSSM]
1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989,
1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994
[Remote scanning]
3850, 9828
[Filing box]
9882
[Data encryption]
3834
[Data cloning]
9889
[Electronic Key]
3840, 3841, 3842
[FAX function]
3847, 3848, 3849
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
2 - 268
07/11
3.
ADJUSTMENT
3.1
Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
<Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-200))
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit into the equipment.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.
100%
[0] [5]
[POWER]
(3)
A3
200
A3
TEST MODE
Key in code [200] and press the [START] button.

The display changes as follows.
B
230%
[200]
[START]
TEST MODE
128
128
C
Notes:
A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output.
B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
C indicates the latest adjustment value.
(4)
After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.
230%
200
TEST MODE
A3
WAIT
128
128
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-1
04/05
(5)
After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
B
240%
200
A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
158
128
(6)
Check if the value B is within the range of 235 to 245 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.35 V to 2.45 V).
(7) If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Note:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.
(8)
Button to be pressed
Value A
Value B
Up
Increased
Increased
Down
Decreased
Decreased
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.

The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
100%
A3
TEST MODE
(9) Turn the power OFF.

(10) Install the toner cartridge.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-2
3.2
3.2.1
Image Dimensional Adjustment

General description
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
Paper alignment at the registration roller
Printer related
adjustment
Scanner related
adjustment
Code in mode 05
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction

(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed)
401
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
411
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction

(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)
421
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position

at duplexing
498
(a) Image distortion
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
405
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction
306
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
340
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction
305
(f) Top margin
430
(g) Right margin
432
(h) Bottom margin
433
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-3
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]

In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05S), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
<Operation keys>
Varies with the code XXX keyed in
<Display>
100%
0
A3
TEST MODE
POWER
1
Code No.
Digital keys : Enter codes.
XXX
100%
START
A3
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment
values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
YYY
ZZZ
Current adjustment
value
100%
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY.

or
INTERRUPT
If the test copy does not

satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.
A3
A3
A3
TEST MODE
100%
FAX : Test copy
Adjustment value newly entered

(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
Wait Warming Up
100%
COPYING
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-4
04/05
3.2.2
Paper alignment at the registration roller
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
PPP
upper
drawer
PPP
lower
drawer
LCF
ADU
Bypass
feed
64 - 80 g/m2
17 - 20 lb.
450 (*1)
452 (*1)
448 (*1)
449 (*1)
457
455 (*1)
458 (*1)
Thick
paper 1
81 - 105 g/m2
21 - 28 lb.
469 (*1)
470 (*1)
471 (*1)
472 (*1)
473
474 (*1)
460 (*1)
Thick
paper 2
106 - 163 g/m2

29 - 43 lb.
461 (*1)
Thick
paper 3
164 - 209 g/m2

44 - 55 lb.
462 (*2)
OHP
463 (*3)
Paper
type
Weight
Plain
paper
Sub-code
*1 0: Long size
1: Middle size
2: Short size
*2 0: Long size
1: Middle size
2: Short size
*3 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220 - 239 mm (8.7 - 12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of "Post card" is for Japan only.
3: Post card
<Procedure>
(1)
Perform the test print according to the following procedure.

(Not necessary for LCF)
[0][5]
[Power]
(Code)
[START]
(Sub-code)
[SET] or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores in memory
Enter new
value
Current value
displayed
[START]
[Drawer
selection]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(*3) +[FAX]
(Test print)
(*4) 1: Single-sided grid pattern 3: Double-sided grid pattern

(2)
Check if any transfer void is occurring. If

there is a transfer problem, try the values in
descending order as 31 30 29
until the transfer void disappears. At the
same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs.
Also, when the aligning amount has been
increased, this may increase the scraping
noise caused by the paper and the Mylar
sheet as it is transported by the registration
roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to
decrease the value.
Transfer void
50
mm
-1
00
mm
Fig. 3-1
(3)
Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-5
Note:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-6
3.2.3
Printer related adjustment
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [401]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
"100% A" is displayed.
Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)

drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance B is within 520.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START]
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
"100% A" is displayed
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
(6) After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.
<Procedure>
(Key in the same value in the step 5 above)
Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
(1)
(2)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-7
04/09
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)
drawer.)
Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the
grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
Check if the distance C is within 2000.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [421]) [START]
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position

This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source.
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Order for
adjustment
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable
value
Lower drawer
441
A3/LD
0 to 40
Upper drawer
440
A4/LT
0 to 15
PFP or LCF
444/443
A4/LT
0 to 15
Bypass feed
442
A4/LT
0 to 15
Duplexing
445
A3/LD
0 to 15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remarks
Paper fed from the lower drawer
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance D is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above with digital keys) [START]
(Key in an acceptable value shown above with digital keys)
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
[FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes. (approx. 0.4 mm/step)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-8
05/05
[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[E-1]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
[E-2]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Adjustment for long-sized paper

drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [498]) [START] [0] [START]
"100% A" is displayed.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
Adjustment for short-sized paper
Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3-9
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) )
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
21
A
6
30
Feeding direction
10
B, E
[Grid pattern]
Fig. 3-2 Grid pattern
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 10
04/09
<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX]
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
Key in the same value for 05-410.
C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
D: 05-441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
520.5 mm (0.4 mm/step)
E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) 520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
Remark:
When the adjustment (05-421) is performed, the same adjustment for FAX (05-422) is automatically and consecutively performed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
04/09
3.2.4
Scanner related adjustment
[A] Image distortion

A
Feeding direction
Step 1
Feeding direction
Step 2
Fig. 3-3
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,

turn the power ON.
Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on
a sheet of A3/LD paper.
Key in [308] and press the [START] button to
move the carriage to the adjustment position.
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)
Carriage-2
Fig. 3-4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 12
04/09
(4)
(5)
Make an adjustment in the order of step 1

and 2.
Step 1
- In case of A
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of B
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Step 2
- In case of C
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of D
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E
Adjustment screw
for the mirror-1 (Rear)
Carriage-1
Fig. 3-5
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13
04/09
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode)
Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance A is within the range of 2600.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405] with the digital keys) [START]
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance
A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).
50
100
150
Copied image of the ruler
200
250
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-6
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 14
04/05
[C] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance B is within the range of 100.5 mm.
<Procedure>
* The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance B
becomes narrower (0.085 mm/step).
50
100
150
200
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-7
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
04/05
[D] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
Measure the distance C from 210 mm to 410 mm (in case of A3) or from 220 mm to 420 mm (in
case of LD) of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance C is within the range of 2000.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
* The smaller the adjustment value, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes. (0.045 mm/step)
C (LD)
200
200
250
250
300
350
300
350
400
400
C (A3)
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-8
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 16
04/05
[E] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
Check if the distance D is within the range of 340.5 mm.
<Procedure>
* The larger the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.68 mm/
step).
10
20
30
40
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-9
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
04/05
[F] Top margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Open the platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx.0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
E
Fig. 3-10
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 18
04/05
[G] Right margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Open platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) ? [START]
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
04/05
[H] Bottom margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Open platen cover or RADF.
Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area G is within the range of 20.5 mm.
<Procedure>
(Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
G
Fig. 3-12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 20
04/05
3.3
Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
3.3.1
Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
503
(931)
501
(933)
504
(932)
Manual density mode center

value
The larger the value is, the darker the

image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
505
(934)
506
(936)
507
(935)
Manual density mode light

step value
The larger the value is, the lighter the

light side becomes.
508
(937)
509
(939)
510
(938)
Manual density mode dark

step value

dark side becomes.
514
(940)
512
(942)
515
(941)
Automatic density mode

image becomes.
* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. ? The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job.
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
3.3.2
Gamma slope adjustment
Gamma slope is adjustable with the following codes.

Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
593
(943)
594
(945)
595
(944)
Item to be adjusted
Gamma slope adjustment
Remarks
One's place:
0: equivalent to the set value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle.
(The larger the value is, the
larger the angle becomes.)
Ten's place:0: equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle
of the low density area. (The
smaller the value is, the darker
the background becomes.)
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
3.3.3
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
620
(922)
621
(924)
622
(923)
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Key in the following values depending
on the original mode.
One's place:
1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 5: TextTens
place:
0: Use Default value1 to 9:Change
intensity (The larger the value
is, the sharper the image
becomes.)
Example of value entry in case
the mode is Text/Photo.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value 0 is keyed in

at the tens digit, the value is
not displayed on LCD screen.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 22
04/05
3.3.4
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
570
(913)
571
(915)
572
(914)
Range correction for original

manually set on the original
glass
693
(916)
694
(918)
695
(917)
Range correction for original

set on the RADF
Remarks
The following are the default values
set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
<Procedure>
3.3.5
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
532
(919)
533
(921)
534
(920)
Item to be adjusted
Background peak for range
correction
Remarks
When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the
image is not output.
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)
<Procedure>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
3.3.6
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.

< e-STUDIO 350/450 >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
653
(928)
Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text
Remarks
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
< e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 >

Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
648
(928)
Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text
Remarks
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
<Procedure>
3.3.7
Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 >
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Language and screen
Item to be adjusted
Smooth
(PS)
Detail
(PS)
Smooth
(PCL)
Detail
(PCL)
596-0
597-0
598-0
599-0
Low density
596-1
597-1
598-1
599-1
Medium density
596-2
597-2
598-2
599-2
High density
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
Remarks
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
3 - 24
07/11
3.4
Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
3.4.1
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.

Language
PS
PCL
654
655
Remarks
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
3.4.2
Adjustment of image density
The image density level is adjustable both at standard and toner saving modes.
Toner mode
Standard
Toner saving
672-0 to 4
676-0 to 4
Item to be
adjusted
Adjustment of
image density
Remarks
When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small number of
the setting value corresponding to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 672-0, 6721, 672-2, 672-3, and 672-4 is assumed to be
"A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively, they should
have the following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the
default value.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
06/09
3.5
Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
3.5.1
Density adjustment
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button.
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
845
847
846
Manual density
mode center value
850
852
851
Manual density
The larger the value is, the lighter the light side
mode light step value becomes.
855
857
856
Manual density
mode dark step
value
The larger the value is, the darker the dark side
becomes.
860
862
861
Automatic density
mode
The larger the value is, the darker the image

becomes.
The larger the value is, the darker the image

becomes.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 26
3.5.2
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
865-0
867-0
866-0
Reproduction ratio:
25% to 40%
865-1
867-1
866-1
Reproduction ratio:
41% to 80%
865-2
867-2
866-2
Reproduction ratio:
81% to 400%
Remarks
Key in the following values depending on the
original mode.
Ones place:
1: Text/Photo
5: Photo
2: Text
Tens place:
0: Use Default value
1 to 9: Change intensity
The larger the value is, the sharper the
image becomes.)
Example of value entry in case the mode is
Text/Photo.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value 0 is keyed in at the

tens digit, the value is not displayed on
LCD screen.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
3.5.3
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
826
Range correction for

original manually set
on the original glass
831
Range correction for

original set on the
RADF
The following are the default values set for each

original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
825
827
830
832
<Procedure>
3.5.4
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
835
837
836
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Background peak for

range correction
When the value increases, the background (low

density area) of the image is not output.
(Default: text/photo: 48, photo: 40, text: 48)
<Procedure>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 28
3.6
Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer
When replacing the high-voltage transformer, checking each output adjustment of main charger, developer bias, transfer charger and separation charger is needed.
3.6.1
Adjustment
[ 1 ] Preparation
Developer Bias
Main Charger
Transfer Charger
Separation
Charger
Developer unit
Disconnect the
connector.
Take off from the equipment. (Not used)
Cleaner unit
Take off the drum

and install the
cleaner unit in the
equipment.
Install the unit together with the current measuring jig in the
equipment.
Note:
Note:
Connect the green cable of the current measuring jig to
ground on the equipment frame. Refer to (a) Installation
of current measuring jig.
Developer unit connector

of the equipment
Not connected
Connect the jig detection connector with the developer unit

connector of the equipment.
Digital
Tester
(+) terminal
Connect in the hole

at the front side of
the developer unit.
Connect to the
main charger case
(between the case
and terminal).
() terminal
Connect to the
machine frame (to
ground).
Connect with the white cable of the current measuring jig (to
ground).
Function switch
Full-scale
Remarks
Connect with the red cable of the current

measuring jig.
DC
1,000 V
AC
2V
Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M. (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON the power Attach the door switch jig and press the front cover opening/closing switch while the
front cover is opened.
Remarks
Refer to (b) Connection for developer bias

adjustment.
Refer to (c) Connection for main

charger adjustment.
Refer to (d) Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
[ 1-1 ]
Installation of the current measuring jig
Notes:
Clean the toner recovery auger when the toner is sticking to it. Then attach the jig.
Do not damage the tip of the separation fingers.
(1)
Open the front cover.

Front cover
Fig. 3-13
(2)
Remove the toner bag.
Toner bag
Fig. 3-14
(3)
(4)
Pull up the hinge pin and extract it.

Take off the front cover.
Front cover
Hinge pin
Fig. 3-15
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 30
(5)
(6)
Release the latches and take off the toner

bag full detection sensor-2.
Loosen 2 screws and take off the cleaner
unit from the equipment.
Cleaner unit
Screw
Toner bag full

detection sensor-2
3
Fig. 3-16
(7)
Release the latch and take off the main

charger unit.
Main charger unit
Fig. 3-17
(8)
Release the latch and take off the cleaner

stay.
Clear stay
Fig. 3-18
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
(9)
Rotate the lever of the drum shaft and

release the lock. Then pull out the drum
shaft.
Drum shaft
lever
Drum shaft
Fig. 3-19
(10) Take off the drum.
Drum
Fig. 3-20
(11) Press down the drum cleaning blade and fix

the blade with the blade releasing jig so that
it will not rebound.
Note:
Do not touch the edge of the drum cleaning
blade.
Blade
releasing jig
Cleaning blade
Fig. 3-21
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 32
(12) Put through the current measuring jig into the

drum shaft and fix it to the cleaner unit.
(13) Rotate the lever of the drum shaft to fix the
drum shaft.
Drum shaft lever
Current
measuring jig
Drum shaft
3
Fig. 3-22
(14) Remove the blade releasing jig.
Blade
releasing jig
Fig. 3-23
(15) Install the cleaner stay.

Cleaner stay
Fig. 3-24
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33
(16) Install the main charger unit.

Main charger unit
Fig. 3-25
(17) Install the cleaner unit and fix it with 2

screws.
(18) Install the toner bag full detection sensor-2.
Cleaner unit
Screw
Toner bag full

detection sensor-2
Fig. 3-26
(19) Fix the green cable of the current measuring

jig to the frame of the equipment, and connect the jig detection connector to the connector of the developer unit in the
equipment.
Connector of
developer unit
Screw
Jig detection
connector
Green cable
Fig. 3-27
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 34
07/07
(20) Fix the front door switch to be closed with the

door switch jig.
Door switch jig
3
Fig. 3-28
(21) After the adjustment, remove the jigs in a

reverse procedure to return it to the original
state.
[ 1-2 ]
(1)
Connection
Connection for developer bias adjustment
(+) terminal:
Connect in the hole at the front
side of the developer unit
Front cover
opening/closing switch
() terminal:
Connected to the machine frame
Fig. 3-29
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35
(2)
Connection for main charger adjustment

Front cover
Ground to the machine
frame (green cable)
() terminal:
Connect the white cable of the current
measuring jig
(+) terminal:
Connect the main charger case
Fig. 3-30
(3)
Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment

Front cover
Ground to the machine

(green cable)
(+) terminal:
Connect the red cable of the current
measuring jig
() terminal:
Connect the white cable of the
current measuring jig
Fig. 3-31
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 36
07/07
[ 2 ] Operation
Note:
When adjusting output of high-voltage transformer, make sure to use a current measuring jig
(except developer bias).
Connect the digital testers as described in (1) Preparation, and follow the procedure on the next
page to adjust the output from the main charger, developer bias charger, transfer charger and
separation charger.
<Keys to press>
<Display>
A3
100%
TEST MODE
[0][5]
[POWER]
1
[Digital keys] : Enter the code.
100%
A3
XXX
Code No.
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY
Current set value
[UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value YYY to satisfy the following table.
Main
Developer Transfer charger
charger bias charger Center value
Code
210
205
221
Adjustment value -7905V
-5215V
41345mV
Separation
Center value
231
Code
Adjustment value RMS value 1267115mV
Mean value 1235112mV
[SET] : Adjusted value YYY is stored in memory.
or
[INTERRUPT]
100%
A3
TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter
the other adjustment
code.
[POWER] : OFF/ON
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
3.6.2
Precautions
[A] Developer bias

Note for adjustment
Adjust the developer bias if fogging occurs over the entire image even though the main charger grid
voltage and toner density are appropriate. However, the following may occur if the developer bias is
lowered too much:
Image contrast becomes low.
Image is patchy or blurred.
The carrier in the developer material adheres to the photoconductive drum, causing scratches
around the cleaner.
[B] Transfer
Items to check before adjustment
Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the transfer charger.
Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the transfer guide deformed?
Is the developer unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low?
Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
Is the output of the transfer guide bias normal?
Is the separation output different from the set value?
Is the developer bias value an appropriate one?
Are the transfer/separation charger case and the drum shaft grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
Is the transfer insulation film (transparent film attached to the transfer guide) damaged or deformed?
Note for adjustment
When blotched image appear:
If blotched image appear in halftone areas, lower the transfer output value. Remember that transfer
performance becomes low if the transfer output value is lowered too much.
When transfer is poor:
Increase the transfer output value under the following conditions. Remember that blotched image
appear if the transfer output value is increased too much.
Transfer is poor even though the charger wire is not dirty.
Thick paper has been frequently used.
Note:
The Thick Paper Mode is recommendable when thick paper is used.
Increase the transfer output value only to prevent a poor transfer without selecting the Thick
Paper Mode when thick paper is frequently used.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 38
[C] Separation
Items to check before adjustment
Poor paper separation from the drum can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
the separation output. Check the following items before making an adjustment. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the separation charger.
Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty?
Is the developer unit installed properly? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low?
Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
Is the output of the main charger normal?
Is the transfer output different from the set value?
Is the transfer/separation charger case grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
Is the sub-separation fan rotating?
Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface?
Note for adjustment
When poor paper separation occurs:
Increase the separation output value under the following conditions. Remember that if the separation
output value is increased too much, blotched image occurs and separation performance becomes low.
Poor separation occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty.
Thin paper has been frequently used.
When poor transfer occurs:
Decrease the separation output value when poor transfer occurs. Remember that the separation
performance becomes low if the separation output value is decreased too much.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
3.7
Adjustment of the Scanner Section
3.7.1
Carriages
[A] Installing carriage wires

When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:
[Front side]
Carriage wire
Carriage-2
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Tension spring
Hook
Wire pulley
Fig. 3-32
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1

Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-33
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 40
[B] Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions

(1)
(2)
Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.

Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Pulley bracket
Carriage-2
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
Enlarged view of carriage
Fig. 3-34
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
(3)
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
Bracket
Bracket
Enlarged view of carriage
Fig. 3-35
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 42
[A] Assembling carriage wires

Winding the wire around the wire pulley:
(1)
Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
4 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
4 turns
4 turns
2 turns
2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns

Hook
Hook
Color: Silver
Color: Black
[Front]
[Rear]
Fig. 3-36
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
(3) After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.
Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.
Fig. 3-37
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 44
3.7.2
Lens unit
[A] Replacing the lens unit

The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the
field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole
unit.
When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 10 screws indicated with the arrows.
Fig. 3-38
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-39
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45
[B] Adjustment of the magnification ratio of the lens

Notes:
1. Perform this adjustment only when the lens unit is taken off or replaced.
2. Make sure that the primary scanning reproduction ratio (printer section) is correct before this
adjustment.
(1)
Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
(2)
Compare the copied ruler with the actual

ruler.
Feeding Direction
Copied ruler
Actual ruler
Fig. 3-40
(3)
If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
Take off the original glass and lens cover.

Loosen 2 screws fixing the lens unit.
Screw
Lens unit
Fig. 3-41
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 46
(3)
Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide
right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.)
The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and
actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit.
Reproduction-ratio error
Movement amount of unit
0.1%
0.5 mm
0.2%
0.9 mm
0.3%
1.4 mm
0.4%
1.8 mm
0.5%
2.3 mm
0.6%
2.7 mm
0.7%
3.2 mm
0.8%
3.6 mm
0.9%
4.1 mm
1.0%
4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-42
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(4)
(5)
(6)
Tighten 2 screws fixing the lens unit.

Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47
3.8
3.8.1
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System

Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding
<Procedure>
The center of the printed image shifts to the

front side. Move the guide to the front side
(Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure).
The center of the printed image shifts to the

rear side. Move the guide to the rear side
(Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Center
Center
[Front]
[Front]
Fig. 3-44
Fig. 3-43
Bypass feeding
(A)
Drawer feeding
(B)
(B)
(A)
Fig. 3-46
Fig. 3-45
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 48
05/07
3.9
Adjustment of Developer Unit
3.9.1
Doctor-to-sleeve gap
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig

(1)
(2)
Take out the developer unit from the equipment.

Take off the developer material cover and
discharge the developer material.
Developer
material cover
Fig. 3-47
(3)
Remove 2 screws and take off the developer

sleeve cover.
Screw
Developer sleeve
cover
Screw
Fig. 3-48
(4)
Loosen 4 screws fixing the doctor blade.

Doctor blade
Developer
sleeve
Screw
Fig. 3-49
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
(5)
Lift up the toner scattering prevention sheet

and insert the gauge 0.45 of the doctorsleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade. Tighten the
screws while pressing the doctor blade to the
doctor-sleeve jig lightly.
Note:
Make sure the mark on the developer sleeve
faces the blade when adjusting the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer
sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-50
(6)
Insert the gauge 0.40 of the doctor-sleeve

jig into the gap between the developer
sleeve and doctor blade. Confirm that the jig
moves smoothly to the front and rear side,
and the gauge 0.50 cannot be inserted into
the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer
sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-51
(7)
Confirm that the both ends of the toner scattering prevention sheet are inserted between
Doctor blade
support holder
the developer sleeve and doctor blade support holder, and the side seals are attached
Side seal
on the toner scattering prevention sheet.
Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig. 3-52
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 50
(8)
Attach the developer sleeve cover and

tighten 2 screws.
Notes:
1. Tighten the screws from the one on the
front side.
2. Make sure that the developer sleeve
cover is correctly attached otherwise it will
be deformed.
3. Make sure that the toner scattering prevention sheet is not caught up in the
developer sleeve cover.
Developer
sleeve cover
Screw
Screw
3
Fig. 3-53
(9)
Attach the developer material cover.

Developer
material cover
Fig. 3-54
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 51
3.10 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015)

3.10.1
Adjustment of RADF position
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Remove the platen sheet during adjustment.
(1)
Open the RADF and then attach 2 positioning pins to the equipment.
(The positioning pins have been attached at
the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Positioning
pin
Fig. 3-55
(2)
Close the RADF to check that the positioning

pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
If they do not, adjust them according to the
following procedure.
Fig. 3-56
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 52
(3)
Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2

screws on the adjustment plate a half turn
(status of temporary fixing).
Half turn
1 turn
3
Fig. 3-57
(4)
Remove the stepped screw at the rear of

right-hand hinge.
Fig. 3-58
(5)
Open the RADF, and then loosen 2 hand

screws 1 turn (status of tentative fixing).
Screw
Fig. 3-59
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 53
(6)
Remove the positioning pin at the front side.

Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the rear side of the RADF. While
peering inside from the front side, fit the positions of the pin and hole by moving the
RADF right and left.
Fig. 3-60
(7)
Tighten the positioning pin at the front side.

Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the front side of the RADF. (For
the front side, adjust the RADF position all
around.)
Fig. 3-61
(8)
While peering inside from the left side, close

the RADF. Check the positions of the holes
of the RADF and pins and then fit their positions by moving the RADF back and forth.
(For the front side, also adjust the RADF
position right and left.) Make sure not to dislocate the positions of the pin and hole at the
rear side.
Fig. 3-62
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 54
(9)
Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws.

Close the RADF and then check again that
the positioning pins fit smoothly into the
holes on the RADF.
3
Fig. 3-63
(10) Fit the hinge hole into the hole of the equipment at the rear right of the RADF to tighten
the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust
the position of the hole by turning the screw
of the adjustment plate.
Fig. 3-64
(11) Tighten the stepped screw and 2 screws on

the adjustment plate. Open and close the
RADF to check again that the positioning
pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
Remove the positioning pins after checking
it. (Replace the positioning pins at the rear of
the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Screw
Stepped Screw
Fig. 3-65
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 55
(12) Place the platen sheet on the original glass

with the semi round cutout toward you.
Align the platen sheet against the left and
rear side of the original glass. Close the
RADF slowly. Open the RADF to check that
the platen sheet is correctly attached.
Fig. 3-66
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 56
3.10.2
Adjustment of RADF height
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after 3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position.
Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267)
(1)
Adjustment standard
Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass.
Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass
becomes 0.5 mm 0.3.
3
Platen guide
front holder
0mm
0.5mm0.3
Platen guide
rear holder
ADF original glass
Fig. 3-67
(2)
Adjust the height by turning the height

adjusting screw on the left hinge.
Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes
high.
Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge
becomes low.
Fig. 3-68
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 57
(3)
Adjust the height by turning the height

adjusting screw on the right hinge.
Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes
high.
Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge
becomes low.
Fig. 3-69
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 58
3.10.3
Adjustment of skew
When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1 Step 2 Step 3.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly.
Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted.
(1)
Step 1
Case A: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
Case B: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
B
White arrow: feeding direction
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-70
(2)
Step 2
Case C: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Case D: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw clockwise.
Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position 0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.
Fixing screw
D
Adjustment screw
Paper
Hand screw
Original
RADF
Front side
Fig. 3-71
Fig. 3-72
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 59
04/05
(3)
Step 3
Case E: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original (Chap. 3.10.6).
Case F: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original (Chap. 3.10.6).
F
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-73
3.10.4
Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM
When any of the PC board, original length sensor, read sensor, reverse sensor is replaced with a new
one, make sure to perform the initialization of EEPROM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment
Mode (05).
Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF.
Also, make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor
adjustment have been performed.
Refer to P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)" for the details.
Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not
adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 60
3.10.5
Adjustment of aligning
Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3.10.3.
Rear side "+" of the original +
- Rear side "-" of the original
Skew of paper
Fig. 3-74
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 61
3.10.6
Adjustment of aligning at reversing
Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3.10.3.
- paper
of
w
ke
Fig. 3-75
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 62
3.10.7
Adjustment of reverse solenoid
When operating the reverse solenoid, adjust it if the position of the flapper lever is out of the followingdimension.
Gap between A of the front frame and the flapper lever C: 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm
<Procedure>
(1)
Remove the screw on the left and take off the

plate spring.
Plate spring
Fig. 3-76
(2)
Align B of the front frame with the edge of the

reverse solenoid, and temporarily fix the
reverse solenoid with the screw on the right.
Fig. 3-77
(3)
While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is

put in the position to be turned ON (by pressing it in the direction of an arrow), loosen the
screw on the right to adjust the reverse solenoid so that the gap (C) between A of the
front frame and the flapper lever is 0.5 mm to
2.0 mm.
Fig. 3-78
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 63
(4)
Fix the plate spring temporarily with the

screw on the left. Then press the plate spring
slightly in the direction of an arrow and
tighten the screw in the position where the
gap (D) between the plunger and the flapper
lever is eliminated.
Plunger
Flapper lever
Fig. 3-79
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 64
3.10.8
Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch
Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-80
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 65
3.10.9
Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30-35 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-81
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 66
3.10.10 Adjustment of tray volume

Adjust in the adjustment mode (05).
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,

turn the power ON.
Narrow the original guide to the limit.
Input the code "367".
Press the [START] button.
Fig. 3-82
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Extend the original guide to the limit.

Input the code "368".
Turn the power OFF.
Fig. 3-83
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 67
3.11 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)

3.11.1
Adjustment of RADF Position
Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1)
Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins

(the positioning pins are installed to the back
side of the hinge which is on the left side of
the RADF).
Fig. 3-84
(2)
Remove the platen sheet.
Fig. 3-85
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 68
05/11
(3)
Close the RADF and check if the positioning

pins fit the holes on the RADF.
3
Fig. 3-86
[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
(1)
Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the

rear side.
Fig. 3-87
(2)
Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-88
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 69
05/11
(3)
Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
Fig. 3-89
(4)
Position the pins with the holes on the RADF

by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes
when the RADF is closed.
Fig. 3-90
(5)
Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-91
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 70
05/11
(6)
Loosen the hole position adjustment screws

on the right hand side.
3
Fig. 3-92
(7)
Match the screw hole positions.
Fig. 3-93
(8)
Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-94
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 71
05/11
(9)
Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
Fig. 3-95
(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass

and align it to the top left corner.
Close the RADF gently and open it to check
if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig. 3-96
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 72
05/11
3.11.2
Adjustment of RADF Height
Note:
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1)
(2)
(3)
Close the RADF.

Light the exposure lamp.
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously.
Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given
length of time.
Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass
"B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
0 mm
0.2-0.5 mm
[Tolerance of the gap]

Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm
Front side: 0 mm
Fig. 3-97
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 73
05/11
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)
Close the RADF.

Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges.
Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered
Fig. 3-98
Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig. 3-99
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 74
05/11
3.11.3
Adjustment of Skew
Note:
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Fig. 3-100 Chart (Original)
Simplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 75
05/11
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1)
Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-101
(2)
If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
Fig. 3-102
Fig. 3-103
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 76
05/11
Duplex copying:
(1)
Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-104
(2)
If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "", and if "D", shift it to "+".
Fig. 3-105
Fig. 3-106
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 77
05/11
3.11.4
Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position
Note:
[A] Checking
Simplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
Duplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
Fig. 3-107 Chart (Original)
Fig. 3-108 Copy
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
(3)
Press the [ENTER] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 78
05/11
Duplex copying:
(1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
(3)
3.11.5
Adjustment of Horizontal Position
Note:
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)

Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Fig. 3-109
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 79
05/11
Note:
Fig. 3-110
(3)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 80
05/11
3.11.6
Adjustment of Copy Ratio
Note:
[A] Checking
(1)
(2)
(3)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension I.
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)

Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
If the copy image dimension I is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
If the copy image dimension I is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig. 3-111
(3)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 81
05/11
3.11.7
Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 100 mm or
less (within the empty weight falling limit).
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-113
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 82
05/11
3.12 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)

Note:
Before performing each adjustment, make sure that all covers (incl. those of the finisher and host
machine) are closed. Otherwise, the power is not supplied to the finisher and the adjustment may
not be performed properly.
3.12.1
(1)
(2)
Adjusting the jogging plate width
Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.

Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position.
Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-114.
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board.
- The front jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON
Fig. 3-114
(3)
Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position.

Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-115.
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board.
- The rear jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON
Fig. 3-115
Rear jogging plate home position
Fig. 3-116
(4)
(5)
Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm).

Remove the processing tray.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 83
06/09
(6)
Loosen the screw on the home position sensor plate at the front.
Screw
Home position
sensor plate
Fig. 3-117
(7)
Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the
index.
EX. 1
If the width is 319 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation
of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm.
EX. 2If the width is 316 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.
Sensor
Fig. 3-118
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 84
3.12.2
(1)
Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate
Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging
plate.
Screw
Rear jogging plate
Fig. 3-119
(2)
Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At
this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is
0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
0 mm to 0.5 mm
Paper
Screw
Butted
(3)
Rear jogging
plate
With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the
same manner.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 85
3.12.3
Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag
If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjustment.
(1)
(2)
Remove the processing tray unit.

Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Jogging plate
adjusting plate
Screw
Screw
Adjusting plate
Jogging plate Adjusting plate

adjusting plate
Fig. 3-120
(3)
Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the
sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Sensor flag
Sensor
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-121
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 86
3.12.4
(1)
(2)
Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt

Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Screw
Grip unit
Screw
Fig. 3-122
(3)
Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension
by the tension spring.)
Screw
Tension arm plate
Fig. 3-123
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 87
(4)
Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, tighten
the screw on the tension arm plate.
Screw
Tension arm
plate
Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-124
(5)
Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.
Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-125
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 88
3.12.5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate

Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.
Remove the stack tray.
Remove the stack tray drive unit.
Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate
(front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)
Screw
Stack tray guide lever

fixing plate
Fig. 3-126
Note:
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray
guide lever
Fig. 3-127
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 89
3.12.6
(1)
Adjustment of the upper tray angle
Remove the front cover.
Fig. 3-128
(2)
Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.
Fig. 3-129
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 90
(3)
The tension becomes loose.

While pushing the bracket down, hold the tray and move it up or down, to adjust the angle so that
the tray becomes parallel by a visual check.
Fig. 3-130
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket.
Note:
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped
tooth.
Fig. 3-131
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 91
3.12.7
DIP switch functions
You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board
appropriately.
Initiating Operations
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on during operation).
Setting
ON
ON
ON
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Front jogging
plate motor
When not at the

home position
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Press SW2 again.

Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
The front jogging plate

moves to its home position
and stops.
When at the
The front jogging plate
home position
moves over a specific position and stops at the home
position.
When not at the The rear jogging plate
home position
moves to the home position and stops.
When at the
The rear jogging plate
home position
moves over a specific distance and stops.
The upper stack tray moves up and stops
when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor
turns ON.
To stop
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
The upper stack tray moves down and stops

when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor
turns ON.
Press SW2 again.

Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Lower stack tray

motor (up)
The lower stack tray moves up and stops

when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is
turned ON.
Press SW2 again.

Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Lower stack tray

motor (down)
The lower stack tray moves down and stops

when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is
turned ON.
Press SW2 again.

Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Stapler motor
The stapler motor stops after the stapling

operation.
The upper and lower stack trays move to the

shipping position and stop.
Press the stapler

safety switch (S14).
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Shipping position operation

2
Upper stack tray

motor (down)
ON
The returning roller moves to the home position and stops.
ON
Stack processing motor

(returning roller)
ON
Turn OFF the joint

sensor (S4).
Upper stack tray

motor (up)
ON
ON
The stack delivery lever moves to its home

position and stops.
Rear jogging
plate motor
ON
Stack processing motor (stack

delivery lever)
ON
Operation
The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed.
ON
Item
Delivery motor
Note:
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 92
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)

Note:
3.13.1
Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position
must be changed for some reason.
(1)
(2)
Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.

Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON
ON
A4 paper
LT paper
Fig. 3-132
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Turn ON the power.

Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stopper.
Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against
the paper.
When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward.
When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward.
When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once to store the adjustment in memory.
Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104.
Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 93
06/09
3.13.2
Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position
must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when
the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type.
(1)
(2)
Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.

Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON
ON
A4/front stitch
ON
A4-R/rear stitch
ON
ON
LT/front stitch
LT/rear stitch
ON
ON
A4-R/front stitch
A4/rear stitch
ON
LT-R/front stitch
LT-R/rear stitch
Fig. 3-133
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Turn ON the power.

Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the
rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment
plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and
repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment.
Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled
paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once again.
Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is
needed, proceed to the step 9).
Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.
When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.
When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 94
04/11
(9)
After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the
alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the
rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value
is stored in memory.)
The staple position adjustment is completed.
(10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board.
(11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 95
3.13.3
Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper positioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position).
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the
settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you
must change the folding position.
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine.
If the optional puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
Do not change bits 5 through 8.

Fig. 3-134
(3)
Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).
(4)
Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-135
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Turn ON the power.

Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)
Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.
Close the inlet cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 96
(9)
Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

The saddle stitcher unit will stitch the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
(10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform
positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment.
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment.
Positive Width Adjustment
Negative Width Adjustment
Mark
Mark
3
L
Stitching position
Folding position
Folding position
Stitching position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm".
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
If for positive width adjustment
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
If for negative width adjustment
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
Bit 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
DIPSW1 bit settings

Bit 7
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Bit 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Setting
(in units of 0.5 mm)
+3
+2
+1
0
-1
-2
-3
Do not use the following setting

Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
ON
OFF
OFF
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 97
3.13.4
Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.
Code
Paper size
468-0
A4-R / LT-R
468-1
B4
468-2
A3 / LD
Remarks
When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page. (0.25mm/step)
Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding is longer
than the lower side
B: When the upper side of the folding is shorter

than the lower side
Paper feeding direction
Paper feeding direction
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 98
3.13.5
Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)
Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photosensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit).
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
Fig. 3-136
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power.

Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinksalternately.
Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
Turn OFF the power.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 99
3.13.6
Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that
the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed
when the punch driver PC board has been replaced.
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
Fig. 3-137
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Turn ON the power.

Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately.
Number of punch holes
LED601/LED602
2 hole (E)
Blinks 1 times per cycle
2/3 hole (N)
4 hole (F)
4 hole (S)
Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
Turn OFF the power.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 100
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)

Note:
3.14.1
Adjusting the Alignment Position
Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the alignment position must
be changed for some reason.
(1)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2)
Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3)
Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-138
Adjusting for
A4 size paper
Adjusting for
LT size paper
ON
ON
Fig. 3-139
(4)
Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops.
(It stops at the position of -5 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 101
06/09
(5)
Press the [Button1] to adjust the alignment position.

Every time the [Button1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 1 step (0.419 mm/step) toward the
+ direction. (The gap between the alignment plates becomes narrower.)
Adjustment range is from -5 to +5 steps.
If the [Button1] is pressed when the alignment position is at the +5 step, the plate will return to
the home position and then moves to the position of -5 step.
LED3
LED2
LED1
Button1
Button2
Fig. 3-140
(6)
When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment value.
Number of Blinking
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Adjustment Value
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
(7)
(8)
Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(9)
Install the board access cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 102
06/09
3.14.2
Adjusting the Stapling Position
Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the stapling position must be
changed for some reason.
(1)
(2)
(3)
SW1
Fig. 3-141
When adjusting the rear

side for A4 size paper
When adjusting the rear

side for LT size paper
ON
ON
When adjusting the front

side for A4 size paper
When adjusting the front

side for LT size paper
ON
ON
Fig. 3-142
(4)
The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the
position of -20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 103
06/09
(5)
Press [Button 1] to adjust the stapling position.

Every time [Button 1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 4 steps (0.45 mm) toward the "+"
direction. (It moves toward the rear side.)
Adjustment range is from -20 to +20 steps. If [Button 1] is pressed when the alignment position is
at the +20 steps, the plate will return to the home position and then moves to the position of 20 steps.
Note:
Stapling for checking the position can be done by pressing [Button 2] with sheets placed on the
finishing tray. (stapled on the rear side)
LED3
LED2
LED1
Button1
Button2
Fig. 3-143
(6)
When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
Number of blinking
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Adjustment value
-20
-16
-12
-8
-4
0
+4
+8
+12
+16
+20
(7)
(8)
(9)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 104
06/09
3.14.3
B4-size recycled paper mode settings
Set this mode if the trailing edge of the paper gets caught by the exit section of the finisher while B4size recycled paper is used. This mode increases the paper exiting speed when the paper exits to the
movable tray in the sort mode, or to the stationary tray in the non-sort mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-144
ON
Fig. 3-145
(4)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 105
06/09
(5)
Press [Button1] and [Button2] as described in the following table to set the B4-size recycled
paper mode. Press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as below to set the B4-size recycled paper mode.
Note:
Be sure to press [Button1] and [Button2] the correct number of times.
Press [Button1] and [Button2] simultaneously to cancel the operation.
LED3
LED2
LED1
Button1
Button2
Fig. 3-146
B4-size recycled paper mode

Step
Buttons
Number of pressing
Button1
Button2
Button1
Button2
Remarks
Confirms the input value
Note:
To change settings from the B4-size recycled paper mode to the normal mode, perform steps (1)
through (4), and then press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as shown below to set
the normal mode.
Normal mode
Step
Buttons
Number of pressing
Button1
Button2
Button1
Button2
Remarks
(6)
When the settings are stored normally, [LED1] on the control panel is lit. [LED1] blinks, if an error
occurs. In this case, turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step (4).
(7)
(8)
(9)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 106
06/09
3.14.4
Stopping Position Adjustment (MJ-6101:Puncher unit)
This adjustment can change the position where paper transport stops during the punching operation.
Perform this adjustment when you adjust the punching position on the paper in the transporting direction.
(1)
Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(2)
Take off the board access cover of the Finisher. Then set SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control
PC board as shown below.
SW1
ON
Fig. 3-147
(3)
Turn the power of the equipment ON. The finisher enters into the stopping position adjustment
mode.
(4)
LED1 on the finisher control panel blinks. The number of times it blinks indicates the current
adjustment value.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 107
06/09
(5)
Press Button1 on the finisher control panel to change the adjustment value. The number of times
LED1 blinks changes in ascending order (e.g. 1, 2, 3 11) each time you press Button1
.
Number of LED1s
blinking
Adjustment value*
Distance moved
-5
1.10 mm
-4
0.88 mm
-3
0.66 mm
-2
0.44 mm
-1
0.22 mm
0 mm (Reference position)
+1
0.22 mm
+2
0.44 mm
+3
0.66 mm
10
+4
0.88 mm
11
+5
1.10 mm
Note:
When the adjustment value goes further in minus numbers in the table above, the distance
between the paper edge and the holes becomes wider. When it goes further in plus numbers,
this distance becomes narrower.
Fig. 3-148
(6)
When the value change is completed, press Button2 on the finisher control panel to determine
the adjustment value. (The adjustment value is written into the flash ROM.)
(7)
Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(8)
Turn all the bits of SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board OFF.
(9)
Install the board access cover of the Finisher.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 108
06/01
3.15 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)

To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the equipment.
Key copy counter

MU-8
Counter socket
MU-10
3
<Installation procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
Remove the right upper cover.

Open the bypass tray, ADU, jam access
cover and fuser unit cover. Take off the IH
terminal cover.
Remove the right rear cover, and cut open
the window for the key copy counter.
Right upper cover
IH terminal
cover
Right rear cover

Fig. 3-149
(4)
Pull out the harness connector from the hole

of the machine frame, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness
properly to avoid it causing a short circuit
with the machine frame.) Then, disconnect
the dummy connector.
Dummy connector
Harness
connector
Fig. 3-150
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 109
04/09
(5)
(6)
(7)
Connect the connector of the counter socket

to the harness connector of the equipment
side.
Install the counter socket to the machine
frame with two M3 screws.
Counter socket
Reattach the cover.
Harness connector
Screw
Fig. 3-151
(8)
Insert the key copy counter with its arrow

mark pointing the rear side of the equipment.
Key copy counter
Fig. 3-152
(9)
Enter the value 3 in the setting mode (08-202).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 110
3.16 Adjustment of Dogleg

Dogleg is the name given to an image which is deformed approx. 44 mm of the trailing edge of the output paper.
Since adjustment has usually been performed when the equipment was manufactured, dogleg image
should not occur. However, if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur, the following
adjustment must be performed. An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the
adjustment.
Normal Image
Feeding
Direction
Fig. 3-153
Dogleg Image A
Dogleg Image B
Feeding
Direction
Feeding
Direction
Approx. 44 mm of
the trailing edge
Approx. 44 mm of
the trailing edge
Fig. 3-154
Fig. 3-155
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 111
04/10
<Preparation>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Take off the front cover, right upper cover

and the paper exit tray.
Remove the upper drawer, and then open
the bypass tray and the ADU.
Take off the right front cover.
Open the jam access cover.
Fig. 3-156
<Adjustment procedure>
(1)
(2)
Check the scale position. (See Fig. 3-157.)

Loosen 2 screws so that the fuser unit and its
lower stay can move.
(3) For dogleg image A
Move the lower stay of the fuser unit upward
from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the
scale, and then tighten the screws.
For dogleg image B
Move the lower stay of the fuser unit downward from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the
scale, and then tighten the screws.
Note:
Be sure to match the height of both right and
left scales.
Fig. 3-158
For dogleg image A:

Move the stay upward
by 0.5 on the scale.
For dogleg image B:
Move the stay downward
by 0.5 on the scale.
Scale
Fig. 3-157
(4)
Check the copy image and repeat Step 1 to 3

if further adjustment is needed..
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 112
04/10
4.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4.1
PM Support Mode
4.1.1
General description
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after
they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of
users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not
only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part
(the number of output pages, drive counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).
4.1.2
Operational flow and operational screen
[ 1 ] Operational flow
PM support mode activated
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[RETURN] pressed
[2]
[1]
[START]
Auto-toner automatic
adjustment performed
(
Chapter 3.1)
Adjustment
finished
[START]
Main unit chosen
[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed
[RETURN]
pressed
[CANCEL] pressed
Main unit chosen

[RESET]
Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear finished
Clear screen
Counter clear
confirmation displayed
[CANCEL]
pressed
Sub unit chosen
[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 4-1
The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-1
[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10
Fig. 4-2
1
Displaying of the main unit name
Back to the PM support mode activation screen

Clearing of the chosen unit counters (all the sub unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit)
All counters are cleared when the unit is not selected
Moving to the sub screen
Moving to the next/previous page
Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
* is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000)
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top
* is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has
exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the number of output pages counts (Cpy.), driving counts (Cnt.) and previous
replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit.
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed
8
9
10
Notes:
1. is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
2. The paper source differs depending on the structure of options, however, 0.0k is displayed
in OUTPUT PAGES (k) and its standard number of output pages is displayed in PM OUTPUT PAGES (k) even for the installed paper source.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-2
2) Sub screen
8
Fig. 4-3
Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
Back to the main screen
Clearing of the chosen sub unit (parts) counters
Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000)

* is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has
exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
* is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-3
3) Clear screen
1
Fig. 4-4
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of output pages counts and
Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-4
[ 3 ] Access tree
Note:
The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.
Main screen
Sub-screen
Drum/cleaner unit
[CLEANER/DRUM]
Drum [DRUM]
Drum cleaning blade [DRUM CLEANING BLADE]
Main charger grid [GRID]
Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE]
Separation finger for drum [SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)]
Developer unit
[DEVELOPER]
Developer [DEVELOPER]
Transfer /separation charger unit

[TRANS./SEP.CHARGER]
Transfer charger wire [TRANSFER CHARGER WIRE]

Separation charger wire [SEPARATION CHARGER WIRE]
Filter
[FILTER]
Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]
Fuser unit
[FUSER]
Fuser roller [FUSER ROLLER]

Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER]
Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER]
Separation finger for fuser roller [SEPARATION FINGER (FUSER)]
Upper drawer
[1st CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Lower drawer
[2nd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Bypass unit
[SFB]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (SFB)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (SFB)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (SFB)]
RADF
[RADF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (RADF)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (RADF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (RADF)]
LCF
[LCF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (LCF)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (LCF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (LCF)]
PFP upper drawer

[3rd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
PFP lower drawer

[4th CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)]

Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-5
4.1.3
Work flow of parts replacement
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever made after
they were replaced before. However, its drive counts time is also to be considered when replacing the
parts.
Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part may still
be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the part may
need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replacement with its
driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed roller is
heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts.
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
The parts in RADF
The parts in feeding system
The parts in the drum/cleaner unit

The parts in the fuser unit
The parts in the developer unit
The parts in the transfer/separation charger unit
Check the drive counts at PM

support mode.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?
Replace the part.
Yes
Replace the part.
No
The part is still usable.
Replace the part after the drive

counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig. 4-5
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
Does it exceed the specified drive count?
Yes
Replace the part.
No
Check the part and equipment according to the TROUBLESHOOTING.
Fig. 4-6
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-6
4.2
(1)
General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance

Performed Every 120,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/
353) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453))
Preparation
Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2 :
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [2] [START]
9S-103 :
[9]+[START]+[POWER]ON [103] [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
11-10-'03 09:30
UNIT
OUTPUT PAGES
DRUM
DRUM BLADE
GRID
MAIN CHARGER WIRE
SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)
81813
81813
81813
81813
81813
PM OUTPUT PAGE
DRIVE COUNTS
PM DRIVE COUNTS
150000
150000
150000
150000
150000
119758
119758
119758
119758
119758
220000
220000
220000
220000
220000
Fig. 4-7
Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2)
Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3)
Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-7
07/11
4.3
Operational Items in Overhauling
Overhaul each equipment with the following timing.

e-STUDIO350/352/353: When the number of output pages has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier)
e-STUDIO450/452/453: When the number of output pages has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Replace all the supplies.

Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if necessary.
Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-8
07/11
4.4
Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output

Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 75,000 Output Pages
(e-STUDIO450/452/453)
Clean inside the machine as needed following the checklist.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4-9
07/11
4.5
Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Symbols used in the checklist

Cleaning
A: Clean with alcohol
D: Clean with a well
squeezed cloth
O: Clean with soft pad,
cloth or vacuum
cleaner
Lubrication
L:
SI:
W1:
W2:
W3:
AV:
CG:
Replacement
Operation check
Data
The number of
sheets conCoating
sumed before
replacement
Silicon oil
(Value x 1,000)
White grease
R: Replace if
(Molykote X5-6020)
deformed or
White grease
damaged
(Molykote HP-300)
White grease
(Molykote EM-30L)
Alvania No.2
FL Floil
(GE-334C)
Conductive grease
(KS-660)
O: After cleaning
or replacement, confirm
there is no
problem.
User Name
Launa 40
Sirial No.
Inspector's name
Remarks
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]

Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in every 120,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO350/352/
353, and every 150,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO450/452/453. Lubricate the replacement parts following to the replacement cycle.
2. Values under Replacement indicate the replacement cycle for the e-STUDIO350/eSTUDIO450, e-STUDIO352/e-STUDIO452, or e-STUDIO353/e-STUDIO453.
3. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
4. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
A. Scanner
Items to check
A1
Original glass
A2
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
O or A
*a1
ADF original glass
*a1
A3
Mirror-1
A4
Mirror-2
A5
Mirror-3
A6
Reflector
A7
Lens
A8
Exposure lamp
A9
Automatic original
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet

(front and rear)
R
O
O
O
O or A
B. Laser unit
Items to check
B1
Slit glass
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 10
07/11
C. Feed unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Lubrication
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
C1
Pickup roller
80/80
P14-I20
C2
Feed roller
80/80
P14-I24
C3
Separation roller
80/80
P14-I15
C4
Transport roller
C5
Paper guide
C6
Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)
W1
C7
GCB bushing bearing
C8
One side of the plastic

bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
W1
C9
Registration roller
AV, W2
Remarks
*c1
*c2
4
D. Automatic duplexing unit
Items to check
D1
Transport roller (upper,

middle and lower)
D2
One side of the GCB

shaft is inserted
D3
One side of the plastic

shaft is inserted
D4
Paper guide
Cleaning
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Lubrication
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
R
L
W1
E. Bypass feed unit

Items to check
E1
Pickup roller
E2
Feed roller
E3
Separation roller
E4
Bypass tray
E5
Drive gear (shaft)
E6
GCB bushing bearing
E7
Transport roller
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
AV, W2
Operation
check
80/80
P18-I26
80/80
P18-I37
80/80
P17-I1
*e1
O
W1
L
A
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 11
F. Main charger
Items to check
F1
Main charger case
F2
Main charger wire
F3
Contact point of terminals
F4
Charger wire cleaning

pad
F5
Main charger grid
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*f1
120/150
R
P23-I10
*f1
O
R
120/150
R
P23-I15
G. Transfer / Separation charger

Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
G1
Charger case
*g1
G2
120/150
R
P24-I6
*g1
G3
Separation charger
wire
120/150
R
P24-I6
*g1
G4
Pre-transfer guide
O or A
G5
Post-transfer guide
O or A
G6
Separation supporter
G7
Terminal cover
G8
Contact point of terminals
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
H. Drum/Cleaner related section

Items to check
Cleaning
H1
H2
Drum shaft
H3
Whole cleaner unit
H4
Drum cleaning blade
H5
Separation finger for

drum
H6
Recovery blade
H7
Discharge LED
H8
Ozone filter
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
CG
120/150
P103-I1
Refer to
Chapter
4.9.2
P25-I4
Refer to
Chapter
4.9.2
120/150
P25-I4
*h1
120/150
R
P25-I13
*h2
CG
120/150
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
*h3
P11-I16
4 - 12
04/05
I. Toner bag
Items to check
I1
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Toner bag
Operation
check
19.3/19.3
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
P103-I6
J. Developer unit
Items to check
Cleaning
J1
Whole developer unit
J2
Developer material
J3
Front shield
J4
Oil seal (5pcs.)
J5
Guide roller
J6

gear shaft
J7
Side shield
J8
Developer unit lower

stay
J9
Inside of the toner cartridge stay
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
P103-I2
*j1
P103-I33
*j2
O
120/150
O
R
AV
360/450
O or A
R
W1
K. Fuser unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
K1
Fuser roller
120/150
P103-I2
K2
Pressure roller
120/150
P103-I2
K3

fuser roller
120/150
P103-I2
K4

pressure roller
K5
Cleaning roller
K6
One side of the cleaning roller to which the

shaft is inserted
K7
Thermistor (2pcs.)
K8
Fuser unit entrance

guide
K9
Exit / reverse guide
K10 Exit roller

K11 Drive gear
120/150
Remarks
*k1
*k1
P103-I2
SI
*k2
R
SI
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 13
04/05
L. RADF (MR-3015)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
L1
Pickup roller
120
P8-I26
L2
Feed roller
120
P8-I25
L3
Separation roller
120
P6-I6
L4
Original length sensor
L5
Registration roller
L6
1st small roller
L7
2nd small roller
L8
Read sensor
L9
Read guide
L10 Read roller
L11 3rd small roller
L12 4th small roller
L13 Reverse sensor
L14 Exit roller
L15 Reverse roller
L16 Platen sheet
Remarks
O or A
M. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
M1
Pickup roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I29
M2
Feed roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I26
M3
Separation roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I12
*m1
M4
Drive gear (tooth face)
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
AV, W2
W1
N. LCF (KD-1012)
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Items to check
Cleaning
N1
Pickup roller
160/160
P4-I30
N2
Feed roller
160/160
P4-I28
N3
Separation roller
160/160
P5-I12
N4
Drive gear
W1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 14
06/01
O. Job Separator (MJ-5004)

Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
O1
Idling roller
O or A
W1
O2
Other rollers
O or A
O3
Paper guide
O or A
O4
JSP stack sensor

(Lower)
O5
JSP stack sensor

(Upper)
O6
JSP paper jam sensor
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*o1
P. Offset Tray (MJ-5005)

Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
W1, FL
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
P1
OCT separator roller
O or A
P2
Other rollers
O or A
P3
Paper guide
O or A
P4
OCT stuck sensor
P5
OCT home position

sensor
P6
OCT feed sensor
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*p1
Q. Drive system
Items to check
Q1
Main motor drive

unit gear
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
W1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 15
04/01
R. RADF (MR-3018)
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Items to check
Cleaning
R1
Pickup roller
120
5-1
R2
Separation roller
120
4-10
R3
Feed roller
120
5-1
R4
Registration roller
R5
Intermediate transfer
roller
R6
Front read roller
R7
Platen roller
R8
Rear read roller
R9
Reverse registration
roller
R10
Exit/reverse roller
R11
Platen sheet
Remarks
{ or A
S. Finisher (MJ-1101)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000)
Operation
check
Parts list
Remarks
(P-I)
S1
Stack transport roller-1
S2
Stack transport roller-2
S3
Buffer roller
S4
Exit roller
S5
Entrance roller
S6
Transport roller
S7
Paddle
S8
Paper holder cam
W3
*s1
S9
Buffer tray shaf
W3
*s2
S10
Stapler carrier shaft
W3
*s3
S11
Rack & pinion gear

(Aligning plate)
W3
*s4
S12
Movable tray drive gear
W3
*s5
S13
Buffer tray guide
W3
*s6
S14
Finishing tray shaft
W3
*s7
1,000
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 16
06/01
A2
A5
A4
A8 A6
A3
A1
A9
A10
K10 K3
K9
K4
K2 K5,K6 H6
D1
K8
G5
H5
G6
G1
K7 K1
F2,F4
F1
A7
F5 H7
H4
H3
H1
H8
D1
G3
G2
G4
J5
C9
C9
B1
J2
I1
D1
C1
J1
C2
C3
E4
E1
E2
E3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J4
Fig. 4-8 Front side
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 17
04/05
Q1
Fig. 4-9 Rear side
L4
L2
L3
L10 L11 L12
L13
L14
L5
L1
L6
L8
L7
L9
L15
L16
Fig. 4-10 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 18
04/05
M1
M2
M3
M2
M3
M1
Fig. 4-11 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
N1
N2
N3
Fig. 4-12 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 19
04/05
O2
O5
O6
O3
O1
O2
O4
Fig. 4-13 Job Separator (JSP)
P4
P1
P3
P2
P6
P5
Fig. 4-14 Offset Tray (OCT)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 20
04/05
R5
R6
R9
R7
R4
R3
R8
R2
R10
R1
R11
Fig. 4-15 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF: MR-3018)
[Front side]
[Rear side]
4
S3
S8
S9
S4
S14
S12
S2
S5
S6
S7
S11
S13
S1
S10
Fig. 4-16 Finisher (MJ-1101)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 21
06/01
Remarks * in the Preventive Maintenance Check List

* a1.
Original glass / ADF original glass
Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original glass.
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
*
c1, m1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP)

Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the

inner surface
Apply white grease

Fig. 4-18
Fig. 4-17
c2.
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 22
04/05
e1.
Separation roller (SFB)

Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the

inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-19
f1.
Fig. 4-20
Main charger case/Main charger wire

Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly,
and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 363 mm).
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*
g1.
Transfer / separation charger case and transfer / separation wire

Clean the transfer / separation charger case and wires with a cloth soaked in water and
squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Notes:
1. Do not deform the metal plate of the pre-transfer guide.
2. Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 353 mm)
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*
h1.
Drum cleaning blade

Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as
the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are
printed due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages if which have
been made.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 23
04/05
h2.
Separation fingers for drum

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the separation finger is damaged or deformed. If
there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of
output pages which have been made.
If any mark which was made by the finger appears on the printed image, clean the tip of
the finger.
Notes:
1. Wipe the tip of the finger lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it.
Do not leave the lint on the tip.
2. Apply patting powder to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning
them to reduce the load on the drum surface by the finger.
*
h3.
Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade
get damaged.
j1.
Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment.
( P. 3-1 "3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor")
j2.
Oil seal (Developer unit)

Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2)
Developer sleeve (Rear side shaft)
4 pcs.
1 pc.
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2).
(1)
(2)
(3)
Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
Amount: About two small drops
Wipe off any grease the exudes from the
inside.
Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
Outside
Inside
Grease
Oil seal
Fig. 4-21
k1.
Separation fingers for fuser roller and pressure roller

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is
any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning.
The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly.
Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 24
04/05
k2.
Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a
new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
o1.
Idling roller
Apply one-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part A in the figure below.
Fig. 4-22
p1.
OCT separator roller

Apply one-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the part A in the figure below. Also
apply three-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part B.
A
Fig. 4-23
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 25
04/05
*s1.Paper holder cam

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) all around the paper holder cam.
Paper holder cam
Fig. 4-24
*s2.Buffer tray shaft

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray shaft.
Buffer tray shaft
Fig. 4-25
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 26
06/01
*s3.Stapler carrier shaft

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire stapler carrier shaft.
Stapler carrier shaft
4
Fig. 4-26
*s4.Rack gear, pinion gear (Aligning plate)

*s5.Finishing tray shaft
1) Take off the metal shield plate.
* If the hole punch unit is installed, take it off beforehand.
2) Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate has been
removed.
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the rack and pinion gears which drive the aligning plate, and the entire finishing tray shaft.
Finishing tray shaft
Rack gear
Pinion gear
Fig. 4-27
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 27
06/01
*s6.Movable tray drive gear

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the gear-A and
gear-B.
Gear B
Gear A
Fig. 4-28
*s7.Buffer tray guide

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray guide (inside
of the folded section of the plate).
Buffer tray guide
Fig. 4-29
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 28
06/01
4.6
PM KIT
KIT name
DEV-KIT-3520
FU-KIT-3520
FU-KIT-3520T
ROL-KIT-16CST
ROL-KIT-1010
DF-KIT-3015
Component
Part name
Qty.
Drum cleaning blade
BL-3520D
Separation finger for drum
SCRAPER-DRUM
Main charger grid
GRID-220
Main charger wire
WIRE-CH-363
WEX-CH-060*353
WEX-CH-060*353
Ozone filter
FILTER-OZ-SPB-700B
Developer material
D-3500
Fuser roller
HR-3520-U
Pressure roller
HR-3520-L
Separation finger for fuser roller
SCRAPER-H/R
Cleaning roller
SHAFT-CLAN-P/R
Fuser roller
HR-3520-U-TWD
Pressure roller
HR-3520-L
Separation finger for fuser roller
SCRAPER-H/R
Cleaning roller
SHAFT-CLAN-P/R
Leaf spring
SPG-L-GND-TWD
Pickup roller
ROLLER-PICK-AT
Feed roller
K-ROLL-FEED
Separation roller
K-ROLL-PST
Pickup roller
ROLL-PICK-UP
Feed roller
ROLL-PAPER-FED-F
Separation roller
ROLL-PAPER-FED-S
Pickup roller
ROLL-PICK-UP
Feed roller
ROLL-FEED
Separation roller
ROL-SPT-513
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 29
05/05
4.7
Jig List
Item
Parts list
Page
Item
Door switch jig
101
Brush
101
Downloading jig (DLM board)
102
Wire holder jig
101
Current measuring jig
101
Jig detection connector
101
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs)
102
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs)
102
ROM writer adapter (For 1881)
102
ROM writer adapter (For 1931)
102
Doctor-sleeve jig
101
Blade releasing jig
101
Developer material nozzle
101
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 30
04/01
4.8
Grease List
Grease name
Part name
Volume
Container
SI Silicon oil
ASM-SILICONE-1M
100cc
L Launa 40
OIL-LAUNA40-100
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)

W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)
AV Alvania No.2
W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020)
FL Floil (GE-334C)
CG Conductive grease (KS-660)
Parts list
Page
Item
Bottle
101
10
100cc
Oiler
101
11
ASM-PG-HP300-S
100g
Bottle
101
12A
GREASE-HP300-S
10g
Bottle
101
12B
ASM-PG-ALV2
100g
Tube
101
13
MOLYKOTE-100
100g
Tube
101
14
ASM-PG-GE334C-S
20g
Bottle
101
15
GRS-KS660
30g
Tube
101
16
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 31
4.9
4.9.1
Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies

Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies
1) Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to
35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2) Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3) Drum cleaning blade
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Fuser roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5) Cleaning roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
They should also be stored horizontally on a flat surface.
6) Paper
Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 32
4.9.2
Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum
1) Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photoconductive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the print image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare
hands.
2) Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. Also, apply conductive grease (KS660) to the circumference of the drum shaft and the entire inner surface of the flange on the drum
rear side, referring to the figures below. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum
counter (the Setting Mode 08-1150-0,3,6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
This clearing can be performed in the PM Support Mode.
10mm
7mm
Apply it to the circumference

of this area
Apply it to the entire inner surface

Fig. 4-31
Fig. 4-30
Notes:
1. Application of patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade.
If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged.
2. When paper fibers or thread adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
3. When the cleaner unit has been assembled, wipe off the grease adhering to the head of the
drum shaft with a piece of cloth.
3) Installation of the equipment and storage of drum
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light
such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the equipment.
4) Cleaning the drum
At preventive maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated
cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum
surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before
starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 33
08/04
5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface

If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no print image will
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a
new drum will be necessary.
6) Collecting used photoconductive drums
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the
relevant local regulations or rules.
4.9.3
Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade
1) Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.9.4
Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller
(1)
Handling precautions
Fuser roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the fuser roller.
- Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser roller, or it may be
damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
Pressure roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
(2)
Checking
Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary.
Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.
Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller.
Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.
(3)
Cleaning procedure
When fuser roller and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a piece of suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the roller white they
are still warm.
Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser roller and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser roller and pressure roller.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 34
4.9.5
Checking and replacing the cleaning roller
(1)
Handling precautions
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the cleaning rollers.
(2)
Poor cleaning and corrective treatment

Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the pressure
roller surface. When its surface is stained with toner, check the cleaning roller. If toner is heavily
adhered on the cleaning roller, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the cleaning
roller should be replaced with new ones.
The cleaning roller is gradually worn out due to the heat and toner stain.
Replace it when a specified number of output pages have been made.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 35
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
4 - 36
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
When any of the PC boards or the HDD requires replacement, refer to P. 5-131 "5.3 Replacement of
PC Boards and HDD"
5.1
5.1.1
Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code

Paper transport jam
[E010] Leading edge of paper not reaching the exit sensor

[E020] Trailing edge of paper not passing the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-108/158)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration clutch.
|
|
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1
04/09
[E030] Paper remaining inside the equipment at power-ON

Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is blinking on the control panel. Is there any
paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table.)
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table.)
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the sensor.
|
|
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers (If a jam is occurring in
the ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area
Cover
Jam access cover
Exit area
ADU
Jam access cover

ADU
Bypass unit
Feeding area
(Main unit)
LCF
PFP
Bypass unit
Side cover
Bridge unit
Bridge unit
JSP
OCT
JSP cover
OCT cover
LCF side cover

PFP side cover
Sensor
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor
Test mode / Input check

03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
LCF feed sensor

Bridge unit transport sensor-1
JSP feed sensor
OCT feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the
drawer setting and the one in the drawer.
*
Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-2
07/11
[E090] Paper jam by HDD abnormality

1) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
2) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited.
4) Replace the HDD.
5) Replace the SYS board.
[E200] Paper fed from the upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E210] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E300] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E330] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E3C0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the registration sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
|
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
|
YES
Are the transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches (high/low speed) are dis|
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the transport clutches (high/low speed).
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-3
[E220] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E310] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E340] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E3D0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
|
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
|
|
YES
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-4
[E320] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
[E350] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
[E3E0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
|
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working?
NO 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
|
YES
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the PFP transport clutch.
|
7)
Replace
the
PFP board.

YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-5
[E360] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
|
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the
PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the
PFP board.
|
|
|
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
|
|
YES
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-6
[E510] ADU stack jam (paper not reaching the ADU entrance sensor)
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?
|
NO
Is the ADU entrance sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
|
6)
Replace
the ADU entrance sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
YES
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-121/171)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit motor.
|
|
YES
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/160)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the ADU motor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are
worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-7
04/05
[E520] ADU transport jam (paper not reaching the ADU exit sensor)
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?
|
NO
Is the ADU exit sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the ADU exit sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
|
|
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-8
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path

Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is blinking on the control panel. Is there any
paper on the transport path?
|
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the
ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area
Cover
Jam access cover
Exit area
ADU
Jam access cover

ADU
Bypass unit
Feeding area
(Main unit)
LCF
PFP
Bypass unit
Side cover
Bridge unit
Bridge unit
JSP
OCT
Finisher
JSP cover
OCT cover
Finisher door
LCF side cover

PFP side cover
Sensor
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor
Test mode / Input check

03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
LCF feed sensor

JSP feed sensor
OCT feed sensor
Sensors in the finisher
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
-
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5-9
[E950] Jam not reaching the JSP feed sensor

[E951] Stop jam at the JSP feed sensor
Open the JSP cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
NO
Is the JSP feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the JSP feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are short
|
|
6)
Replace
the JSP feed sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the
JSP board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
YES
1) Replace the JSP board.
[E960] Jam not reaching the OCT feed sensor

[E961] Stop jam at the OTC feed sensor
Open the OTC cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
NO
Is the OTC feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the OTC feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OTC board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the OTC board and LGC board are short
|
|
6) Replace the OTC feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the OTC board.
|
|
|
YES
1) Replace the OTC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 10
[EB50] Paper left on the transport path due to multiple feeding

In case the paper is fed from the upper drawer, bypass unit or ADU:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
|
NO
When the paper is fed from the upper drawer:
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[6]/[E])
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
|
|
YES
When the paper is fed from the ADU:
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the ADU exit sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
YES
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 11

|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
In case the paper is fed from the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
|
NO
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E], /[7]/[E])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the upper/lower drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the upper/lower drawer feed sensor.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 12
[EB60] Paper left on the transport path due to multiple feeding

|
NO
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 13
5.1.2
Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

NO
(Perform the input check in the test mode:03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
|
|
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 14
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

NO
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
Is the bypass feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-204)
Is the bypass feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor
|
|
are disconnected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
Check the bypass transport, feed separation and pickup rollers. Replace them if they are worn
out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 15
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working?
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.
|
|
YES
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 16
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working?
NO 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
|
YES
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-202)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.
|
|
YES
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 17
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
|
|
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
|
|
|
|
YES
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
|
|
|
|
YES
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 18
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
|
|
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
|
|
|
|
YES
Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-228)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
|
|
|
|
YES
Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 19
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
|
6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
|
|
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-209)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the LCF feed clutch.
|
7)
Replace
the
LCF board.
|
|
|
YES
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn
out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 20
5.1.3
Cover open jam
[E400] Jam access cover opened during printing

Is the jam access cover open?
YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[C])
NO 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
YES
[E410] Front cover opened during printing

Is the front cover open?
YES Close the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[C])
NO 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
YES
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[D])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the front cover opening/closing switch. Replace the LGC board.
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 21
[E420] PFP side cover opened during printing

Is the PFP side cover open?
NO
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is dis|
|
connected.
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
|
|
6) Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
|
|
|
|
YES
[E430] ADU opened during printing

Is the ADU open?
YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the ADU.
NO
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected.
|
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the ADU opening/closing switch.
|
7) Replace the ADU board.
|
|
YES
1) Replace the ADU board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 22
[E440] Side cover opened during printing

Is the side cover open?
NO
Is the side door switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/
[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited or
|
open circuited.
|
5) Replace the side door switch.
|
|
YES
[E450] LCF side cover opened during printing

Is the LCF side cover open?
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check in the test
mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is dis|
|
connected.
|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the
LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
|
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 23
[E480] Bridge unit opened during printing

Is the bridge unit open?
YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit.
NO
Is the bridge unit opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the bridge unit opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the bridge unit opening/closing switch.
|
|
YES
[E490] JSP cover opened during printing

Is the JSP cover open?
NO
Is the JSP cover switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/
[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the JSP cover opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board is dis|
connected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the JSP cover switch.
|
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 24
[E491] OCT cover opened during printing

Is the OCT cover open?
NO
Is the OCT cover switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/
[H])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the OCT cover switch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OCT board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the OCT board is disconnected.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the OCT board and LGC board are short
|
|
6) Replace the OCT cover switch.
|
7) Replace the OCT board.
|
|
YES
1) Replace the OCT board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 25
5.1.4
Transport jam (RADF)
Note:
When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic
adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) and RADF original
guide width adjustment (05-367/368) consecutively at the Adjustment Mode whenever the
RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[E711] Jam not reaching the original length sensor
[E712] Jam not reaching the registration sensor
[E713] Stop jam at the original length sensor
Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out?
YES Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
YES Flatten and set it again.
NO
Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [2]/[A])
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the original length sensor and registration sen|
|
sor are disconnected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the original length sensor and registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E714] Feed signal reception jam

Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])
NO 1) Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.
|
|
2) Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the empty sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 26
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor

Are the registration roller and read roller stained?
YES Clean the rollers.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
|
YES
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)

[E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning)
Is the read roller stained?
YES Clean the roller.
NO
Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the exit sensor and reverse sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 27
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor

Is the registration roller stained?
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor

Is the read roller stained?
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
|
YES
[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam

1) If the original remains in the RADF, remove it.
2) If any paper remains in the equipment, remove it.
3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the jam still occurs, lead the following procedure.
4) Check the connection between the RADF board and SLG board, and the connection between the
RADF board and switching power supply.
- Are the connection of the connectors and joint connectors normal?
- Are the connector pins disconnected or are the harnesses open circuited?
5) Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal.
6) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
8) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
9) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 28
05/05
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor

Is the exit roller stained?
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
[E741] Stop jam at the reverse sensor

Are the read roller and reverse roller stained?
NO
Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the reverse sensor.
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 29
[E742] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (feeding in reverse)

Is the reverse roller stained?
NO
Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the reverse sensor.
|
|
YES
[E743] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (feeding in reverse)

Are the reverse roller and read roller stained?
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
YES
[E860] Jam access cover open

Is the jam access cover opened?
YES Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover.
NO
Is the jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the jam access cover switch is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the jam access cover switch.
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 30
[E870] RADF open jam

Is the RADF opened?
YES Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF.
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?
NO Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor.
YES
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])
NO 1) Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the RADF opening/closing sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 31
5.1.5
Finisher jam
[ 1 ] Jam in bridge unit

[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit?
NO
Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[E])
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are
|
|
disconnected.
|
2) Check if the connector J512 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2.
|
7)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)
NO 1) Check if the connector J512 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
4) Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.
|
|
YES
Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated?
(Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
NO Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
YES
Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 32
[ 2 ] Paper jam in finisher section

[EA10] Paper transport delay jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open circuited?
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 33
MJ-1101
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
l
l
Reinstall the sensor correctly.
Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the gap between the flapper and entrance roller shaft other than 0.600.20mm when the
gate solenoid (SOL2) is pulled?
YES Adjust the gap.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
Is the harness between the gate solenoid (SOL2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
Replace the harness.
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 34
06/01
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam

MJ-1022
NO
NO
|
|

YES
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?
YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and processing tray sensor)
working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
NO 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
|
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.

YES
MJ-1101
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
l
YES Connect the connector securely.
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 35
06/01
[EA21] Paper size error jam

MJ-1101
NO
Is the paper size used shorter than the size specified in the specifications?
YES Use the paper size specified in the specifications.
NO
sensor (S1)?
sensor (S2)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 36
06/01
[EA30] Power-ON jam

MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
NO
NO
|
|
|
YES
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
NO
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 37
[EA31] Transport path paper remaining jam

MJ-1101
NO
sensor (S2)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
l
NO
[EA32] Exit paper remaining jam

MJ-1101
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the finishing tray
paper detection sensor (S12)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the finishing tray paper detection sensor (S12) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 38
06/01
[EA40] Finisher front door open jam

MJ-1022
NO
Is the finisher connected with the equipment?
NO Connect the finisher with the equipment.
YES
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open circuited?
NO
Is the joint sensor working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the joint sensor.
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 39
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is either of the covers upper and front of the finisher closed?
NO Close the cover.
YES
Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper and front cover opening
sensors (PI31 and PI32) open circuited?
NO
Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
YES
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open
circuited?
NO
Is the front cover switch working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the front cover opening switch securely.
|
2) Replace the front cover switch.
YES
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open
circuited?
|
NO
Are the upper and front door switches working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the front cover opening switch securely.
|
2) Replace the upper/front door switches.
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 40
MJ-1101
Is the front cover or stationary tray cover opened?
l
YES Close the front cover.
Close the stationary tray cover.
NO
Is there any breakage of the front cover hook which switches the front cover switch (SW1) to
ON?
YES Replace the handle cover.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front cover
switch (SW1)?
Is there an incorrect installation or breakage of the stationary tray cover opening/closing switch
(SW2)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the front cover switch (SW1) / stationary tray opening/closing switch
(SW2) and the finisher control PC board (CN16) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 41
06/01
[EA50] Stapling jam

MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray?
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
YES End.
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor
(S17) open circuited?
NO
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the stapling home position sensor.
YES
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray?
NO
YES End.
NO
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
NO
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the staple home position sensor.
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 42
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment, or on the finishing tray?
NO
YES End.
NO
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the stapler interference sensor (S11) is
moved?
YES Reinsert the clip which fixes the actuator from the side of it.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
l
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 43
06/01
[EA60] Early arrival jam

MJ-1022
NO
NO
|
|
|
YES
MJ-1023/1024
NO
NO
|
|
|
YES
MJ-1101
NO
sensor (S1)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the entrance sensor (S1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 44
06/01
[EA70] Stack delivery jam

MJ-1022
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) open circuited?
NO
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?
NO 1) Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor
|
|
securely.
|
2) Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.
YES
[EA70] Stack exit belt home position error

MJ-1101
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stack exit
belt home position sensor (S9)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the stack exit belt home position sensor (S9) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 45
06/01
[EAF0] Stack return jam

MJ-1022
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position
sensor (S3) open circuited?
NO
Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?
NO 1) Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor
|
|
securely.
|
2) Replace the returning roller home position sensor.
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 46
[ 3 ] Paper jam in saddle stitcher section

[EA80] Stapling jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle
stitcher section or equipment?
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples
stuck in the stapling unit?
YES End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7) open circuited?
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely.
|
2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5
[EA90] Door open jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
NO Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 47
[EAA0] Power-ON jam

MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?
NO
Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], vertical path paper sensor
[PI17] and delivery sensor[PI11]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path
paper sensor and delivery sensor) working properly?
(Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
YES
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam

MJ-1024
equipment?
NO
Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor
[PI11]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor and delivery sensor) working properly?
(Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 48
[EAC0] Transport delay jam

MJ-1024
equipment?
NO
NO
NO 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 49
[ 4 ] Paper jam in puncher unit

[E9F0] Punching jam
MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
NO
Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI63) open circuited?
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
|
NO 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the punch home position sensor.
YES
Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M3).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 50
06/01
[ 5 ] Other paper jam

[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam
Is the main motor rotating normally?
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam

Is the finisher working?
YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment
side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller
PC board is open circuited.
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EB30] Ready time time-out jam

Is there paper in the equipment?
NO Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
NO Connect them properly.
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
NO Connect the harness properly.
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher disconnected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
NO Connect the pin or replace the harness.
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 51
[ED10] Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality

NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
[ED11] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error

NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch sideways adjustment
motor (M2) correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
1) Replace the sideways adjustment motor (M2).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 52
07/11
[ED12] Shutter home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the shutter is opened/closed?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4) and the finisher control PC
board (CN13) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
Is the harness between the shutter clutch (CLT1) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
5
[ED13] Front alignment plate home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7) and the finisher
control PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 53
06/01
[ED14] Rear alignment plate home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8) and the finisher
l
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
[ED15] Paddle home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paddle is rotated?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the paddle home
position sensor (S3)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the paddle home position sensor (S3) and the finisher control PC
l
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 54
06/01
[ED16] Buffer tray home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the buffer tray
home position sensor (S5)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray home position sensor (S5) and the finisher control PC
l
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 55
06/01
5.1.6
Drive system related service call
[C010] Main motor is abnormal

Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-101/151)
NO 1) Check if the connector CN1 of the main motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
|
are short circuited or open circuited.
|
5) Replace the main motor.
|
|
YES
Is the LED on the main motor board lit without flickering?
NO 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
|
circuited.
|
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
|
are short circuited or open circuited.
|
3) Replace the main motor.
|
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN318-A1 output from the LGC board is always level L?
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the CPU input terminal IC24-14 is always L?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 56
5.1.7
Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP drawers)
Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)
NO 1) Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is discon|
nected.
|
5) Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is discon|
nected.
|
6)
Check
if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
7)
Check
if
the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
8) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
|
9) Replace the PFP motor.
|
10)Replace the PFP board.
|
11)Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flickering?
NO 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
|
circuited.
|
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
3) Replace the PFP motor.
|
|
|
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 output from the PFP board is always L level.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 is always L level.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 57
[C130] Upper drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than upper
drawers)
[C140] Lower drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than lower
drawers)
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-242/243)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[7]/[H])
|
|
|
3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
|
circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 58
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP
upper drawer)
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP
lower drawer)
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-278, 280)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
|
6)
Replace
the PFP board.
|
|
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 59
05/05
[C180] LCF tray-up motor is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF
drawer)
Does the tray move? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-271)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the LCF board.
|
|
YES
Are the LCF tray bottom sensor and LCF tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A])
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 60
05/11
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor is abnormal

(paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF drawer)
Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-207)
NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
circuited.
|
|
|
6)
Replace
the LCF board.
|
|
YES
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B])
NO 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
connected.
|
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
|
|
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 61
[C1B0] LCF transport motor is abnormal

(paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF drawer)
Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
NO 1) Check if the connector CN1 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is discon|
nected.
|
4) Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is discon|
nected.
|
|
|
circuited.
|
7) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF
|
board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
8) Replace the LCF transport motor.
|
|
|
10)Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always L level.
4) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 is always L
level.
5) Replace the LCF transport motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 62
5.1.8
Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error

Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-267)
YES 1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.
|
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lens unit.
|
|
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN9 is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 63
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a fixed time
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a fixed time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
[C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a position other than home position?
YES 1) Check if the connector of the scan motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short cir
cuited or open circuited.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open circuited.
[C280] Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
YES The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
|
1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Replace the carriage home position sensor.

NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are short circuited or
open circuited.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 64
5.1.9
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
[C410] Thermistor or heater abnormality at power ON

1.Check the thermistors
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the connectors are disconnected.

Check if the main and edge thermistors are in contact with the surface of the fuser roller properly?
Check if the harnesses of the main and edge thermistors are open circuited.
2. Check the IH board and IH coil

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the IH coil is broken.

Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected.
Check if the thermostat is blown.
Check if the connectors on the IH board are disconnected (AC input connector and LGC I/F connector CN455/456).
Check if the IH board or the switching power supply unit are abnormal.
Replace the IH control board.
3. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the connectors CN316 are disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
4. Clear the status counter

After repairing the matter which caused the error [C410], perform the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in "400", then press [START].
Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C410]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 65
[C440] Fuser abnormality after abnormality judgment

1,2.3. Check the thermistors, IH board, IH coil and LGC board
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2 and 3 for [C410].
Change the current status counter value (08-400) "5", "7" or "9" to "0" for [C440], taking the same procedure as that for [C410].
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
- The error occurred during warming-up: "5"
- The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7"
- The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 230C or higher: "9"
- The temperature detected by the edge thermistor is 280C or higher: "9"
[C450] Thermistor abnormality during printing
1. Check the edge thermistor
1) Check if the connector is disconnected.
2) Check if the edge thermistor is in contact with the surface of the fuser roller properly.
3) Check if the harness of the edge thermistor is open circuited.
1) Check if the connector CN302 is disconnected.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Change the current status counter value (08-400) 6 to 0.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 66
[C470] IH power voltage is abnormal / IH initialization error

1. Check the AC input voltage
Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range. (especially when the heater becomes ON
after the power is turned ON (the equipment is warming up))
2. Check the thermostat
Check if the thermostat is blown.
3. Check the IH board
1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH board or the LGC I/F connector CN455/456 is disconnected?
2) Check if the fuse on the IH board has blown.
3) Replace the IH board.
1) Check if the connector CN316 is disconnected.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Change the values 10, 11, 14 or 17 of the status counter (08-400) to 0.
*
The error occurred immediately after the power was turned ON: "10"
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "11"
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "14"
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "17"
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 67
[C480] IGBT high temperature

1. Check the operation of the IH board cooling fan
Check if the IH board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IH board.

Change the values 12, 15 or 18 of the status counter (08-400) to 0.
*
[C490] IH circuit or coil is abnormal

(1)
(2)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IH board.
2. Check the IH coil

(1)
(2)
Check if the coil is broken or shorted.

Replace the IH coil.

Change the values 13, 16 or 19 of the status counter (08-400) to 0.
*
[C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the power as long as the problem
was solved, and the status counter does not have to be changed to "0". The value of the status
counter remains until the next service call overwrites the value.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 68
5.1.10
Communication related service call
[C550 (C780)] RADF I/F error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the SLG board.
[C570] Communication error between main CPU and IPC board

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Check if the specified finisher is attached.

Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
[F070] Communication error between system CPU and main CPU

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and LGC board (CN321) is disconnected or open circuited.
Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
Replace the SYS board.
[F110] Communication error between system CPU and scanner CPU

[F111] Scanner response abnormality
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 69
5.1.11
RADF related service call (MR-3015)
Note:
When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic adjustment of
RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) and RADF original guide width adjustment
(05-367/368) consecutively at the Adjustment Mode whenever the RADF board, original length
sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[C730] EEPROM initialization error
(1)
(2)
Check the RADF board, mainly IC12, for short circuits and open circuits.
[C740] Reverse sensor adjustment error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the reverse sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check
if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the reverse sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN4, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the reverse sensor.
[C810] Fan motor is abnormal

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Check if the load on the motor shaft is normal.

Remove foreign matters.
Check if the harness connecting the fan motor and RADF board is open circuited.
Check if the power is supplied to the pin 1 of the CN9 on the RADF board during the operation.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly Q12 and Q16, for short circuits
and open circuits.
Replace the fan motor.
[C820] Read sensor adjustment error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if
the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Replace the read sensor.
[C830] Original length sensor adjustment error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the original length sensor and reflecting mirror.
Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the original length sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Replace the original length sensor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 70
06/06
5.1.12
RADF related service call (MR-3018)
No service call for the RADF (MR-3018)
5.1.13
Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018)
[CA10] Polygonal motor is abnormal

Is the polygonal motor rotating?
NO 1) Check if the connector of the harness is disconnected between LGC
|
|
board (CN308) and the laser optical unit?
|
2) Check if the harness is open circuited and the connector pin is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
|
open circuited.
|
4) Replace the laser optical unit.
|
|
YES
[CA20] H-Sync detection error

Are the harness open circuited and the connectors disconnected between the LGC
board (CN309) and LRL board (CN204), and between the LRL board (CN204) and laser
optical unit?
YES Replace the harness. Connect the disconnected connectors.
NO
2) Replace the laser optical unit.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 71
5.1.14
[CB10] Entrance motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the entrance roller is rotated?
NO
l
NO
1) Replace the entrance motor (M1).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB11] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB11] error when the [ED16] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed while the buffer
roller is lifted up?
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
1) Replace the buffer tray guide motor (M3).
[CB12] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer roller is rotated?
YES Fix the drive mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer roller drive motor (M6) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
1) Replace the buffer roller drive motor (M6).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 72
06/01
[CB20] Delivery motor abnormality

MJ-1022
Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the delivery motor (M1).
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?
NO Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/
M38) correct?
NO Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?
NO Fix the lift mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.
[CB30] Movable tray shift motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the movable tray is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray shift motor (M7) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
position A, B, and C sensors (S13, S14, and S15)?
l
YES Replace the harness.
Replace the sensor.

NO
1) Replace the movable tray shift motor (M7).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 73
06/01
[CB31] Movable tray paper-full detection error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection
sensor (S17) is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
paper-full detection sensor (S17)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the movable tray paper-full detection sensor (S17) and the finisher
l
NO
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear aligning plate motor (M34)
correct?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
YES
1) Replace the rear aligning plate motor.
[CB40] Front alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
Replace the front alignment motor (M9).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 74
06/01
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality

MJ-1022/1023/1024
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES
1) Replace the stapler.
[CB50] Stapler home position error

* You receive a [CB50] error when the [EA50] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
l
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
5
[CB51] Stapler shift home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stapler unit
home position sensor (S10)?
l
l
Replace the sensor.

NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit home position sensor (S10) and the finisher control PC
l
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 75
06/01
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) correct?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
NO
1) Replace the stapler shift motor.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
1) Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
YES End.
NO
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CB80] RAM abnormality

MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
YES End.
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 76
06/01
[CB81] Flash ROM abnormality

MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
YES End.
NO
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
[CB90] Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?
YES
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5
[CBA0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (front) abnormality
[CBB0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
NO Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) on the front and rear stitchers and stitcher
motors (M7/M6) working normally?
NO Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
[CBC0] Saddle stitcher alignment motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?
YES
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the alignment motor (M5).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 77
06/01
[CBD0] Saddle stitcher guide motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?
YES
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the guide motor (M3).
[CBE0] Saddle stitcher paper folding motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)
working normally?
NO Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).
[CBF0] Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?
YES
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 78
05/11
[CC00] Connection abnormality in saddle stitcher sensor connector

MJ-1024
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller
PC board?
NO Connect them to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly
connected to the ground?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
End.
[CC10] Saddle stitcher microswitch abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) normal?
NO Replace the switches.
YES
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is
it 24V?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board correct?
YES
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher

MJ-1024
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?
YES End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
NO Connect the wiring.
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 79
05/11
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality

MJ-1022
[Procedure 1]
Is the tension of the drive belt normal?
NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
|
contacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
YES Attach the spring.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) correct?
YES
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly?
YES
1) Replacing the stack processing motor.
[Procedure 2]
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame where the bushing con|
tacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
YES Attach the spring.
NO
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?
NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?
YES
1) Replace the stack delivery motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 80
[CC30] Stack transport motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC30] error when the [EA70] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport belt is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
1) Replace the stack transport motor (M5).
[CC31] Transport motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC31] error when the [ED12] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport roller -1 and -2 are rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the transport motor (M2) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
1) Replace the transport motor (M2).
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?
YES
Is the swing mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the swing motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 81
06/01
[CC41] Paper holder cam home position abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holder cam is rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the paper holder home position sensor (S6) and the finisher control PC
l
NO
1) Replace the paper holder home position sensor (S6).
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?
YES
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller
PC board correct?
YES
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).
[CC51] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality

* The [CC51] error will be displays when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and sideways adjustment motor
(M2) correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
1) Replace the punch sideways adjustment motor (M2).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 82
06/01
[CC52] Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality

* The [CC52] error will be displays when the [ED10] error occurs three times in succession or
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working normally?
NO Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
YES
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 83
06/01
[CC61] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error

* The [CC61] error will be displays when the [E9F0] error occurs three times in succession or
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
NO
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
Correct the wiring.
NO
YES
[CC71] Punch ROM checksum error

Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short circuited?
YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
[CC72] Punch RAM read/write error

NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 84
06/01
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality)
Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct?
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
YES Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the front jogging motor.
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)
Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)
correct?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
YES
1) Replace the front aligning plate motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 85
06/01
[CC80] Rear alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC80] error when the [ED14] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
l
NO
1) Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality

MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) correct?
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?
NO Level them.
YES
Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly?
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
YES
Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S22) and stack
processing safety switch (S26) working properly?
NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 86
06/01
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality

MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) correct?
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?
NO Level them.
YES
Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly?
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
YES
Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working
properly?
NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the motor.
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality

MJ-1022
Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct?
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
YES Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the rear jogging motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 87
05/11
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?
NO Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?
YES Fix the shutter mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) correct?
YES
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?
YES Fix the rear end assist mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the rear end assist motor.
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) correct?
YES
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?
YES Fix the gear change mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the gear change motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 88
[CDE0] Paddle motor abnormality

* You receive a [CDE0] error when the [ED15] error occurs three times in succession or during
the initial operation.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem with the paddle is rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) disconnected or open circuited?
l
NO
1) Replace the paddle motor (M8).
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit

MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?
YES End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?
YES
[CE00] Punch communication error

Is the harness between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and the finisher control PC
board disconnected or open circuited?
YES Replace the harness. Correct the wiring.
NO
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 89
06/01
[CF10]
<Undefined error code processing>
MJ-1022/1023/1024
1) Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
2) If not as in step 1, check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected correctly.
3) If the error has still not been recovered in step 2, check if there is any defect in the LGC
board, IPC board or finisher control board. If not, replace the LGC board, IPC board or finisher control board.
<Communication module SRAM writing failure>
MJ-1101
2) Check if the MJ-1101 (08-1912) is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3) Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short circuited.
circuited.
6) Try to update the finisher firmware again.
7) Replace the converter PC board.
MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is connected)
2) Check if the MJ-1101 (08-1912) is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3) Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the hole punch control PC board and the finisher control
PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short circuited.
circuited.
7) Check if the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board is open circuited or
short circuited.
8) Try to update the finisher firmware again.
9) Replace the converter PC board.
10)Replace the finisher control PC board.
11)Replace the hole punch control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 90
07/04
5.1.15
Service call for others
[C940] Engine-CPU is abnormal

Is the Call for Service displayed even after the power is turned OFF and back ON?
NO Leave it and see what happens.
YES
1) Check if the circuit pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited or open
circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if this error occurs frequently.
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Is the main charger installed securely?

Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.
Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.
Check if any foreign matters are on the charger wire or main charger grid.
Is the transfer/separation charger installed securely?
Check if the transfer/separation charger wire is broken or unhooked.
Check if any foreign matter is on the transfer/separation charger wire.
[CDF0] Initialize error of the offset tray

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Check if each connector between the OCT motor and OCT board (CN261) is disconnected.
Check if each connector between the OCT board (CN261) and LGC board (CN302) is disconnected.
Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.
Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the OCT motor.
Replace the OCT board.
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board

(1)
(2)
(3)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message "SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press [INITIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared.)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 91
[F091] NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board

(1)
(2)
When the message "NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board

(1)
(2)
When the message "NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD,
press the [INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F100] HDD format error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Check if the HDD is mounted.

Check if the specified HDD is mounted.
Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
Check if the power supply connector is disconnected.
Check if the connector J111 on the SYS board is disconnected.
Initialize the HDD. (Key in 2 at 08-690.)
Replace the HDD.
[F101] HDD unmounted

[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD CRC error
[F105] HDD other error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.

Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are broken.
Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 92
[F106] Point and Print partition damage

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Key in 662 and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
Restart the equipment.
Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the Point and Print driver.
[F107] / SHR partition damage

Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[F108] /SHA partition damage
Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[F120] Database abnormality
(1)
(2)
Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)

If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in 2 at 08-690.)
[F130] Invalid MAC address (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1050) is taken off (e-STUDIO350/450)
Clear the service call F200. (Key in 0 at 08-633.)
*
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1050) is removed from the equipment, the service call F200
occurs.
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

Check the system ROM version (08-900) since the countermeasure to be taken varies.
T364SY0*329 or later (* represents a letter of the alphabet corresponding to the destination.)
Download the system firmware again.
P. 6-1 "6. FIRMWARE UPDATING"
Earlier than T364SY0*329 (* represents a letter of the alphabet corresponding to the destination.)
Clear the service call F200. (Key in 0 at 08-633.)
*
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is removed from the equipment, the service call F200
occurs.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 93
08/07
5.1.16
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initialization.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initialization. Note that some of data cannot be backed up (Page 5-1).
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error

(When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061,
GM-1120/4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08690).
[1C11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error
[1C13] Message transmission error
[1C14] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
[1C20] System management module access abnormality
[1C21] Job control module access abnormality
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 94
07/11
[1C30] Directory creation failure

[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure
Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
[1C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[1C66] Server time-out error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C67] NIC time-out error
[1C68] NIC access error
[1C6D] System error
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 95
[1C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[1C6A] HOST NAME error
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if the SMTP authentication method is correct.
Check if there are any illegal characters in the Terminal mail address.
Select the correct SMTP authentication method. Delete the illegal characters and reset the mail
address. Then try again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authentication again.
[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentication again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Reset the mail box.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
[1CC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 96
07/11
[ 2 ] RFC related error

[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)
[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)
Check the capacity of the mail box in the mail server.
Select Text of the original modes for the original data or lower the resolution level and then retransmit.
Or divide the original data into several pieces and retransmit them.
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 97
07/11
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error

[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module
[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
[2B21] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
[2B50] Image library error
[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted
Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of
client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
[2B51] List library error
Check if the Function List can be printed out.
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 98
07/11
[2BA0] Invalid Box password

Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing
(opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2BA1] A paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected.
Check the paper size.
[2BB1] Power failure
[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error
[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents

Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders
Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 99
07/11
[ 4 ] E-mail related error

[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
[2C11] Insufficient memory
[2C12] Message reception error
[2C13] Message transmission error
[2C14] Invalid parameter
[2C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Message size limitation" or reduce the number of pages and perform the job
again.
[2C20] System management module access abnormality
[2C30] Directory creation failure
[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality
[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
[2C43] Encryption error

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 100
07/11
[2C44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing
[2C61] Address Book reading failure
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
5
[2C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[2C66] Server time-out error
[2C67] NIC time-out error
[2C68] NIC access error
[2C6D] System error
[2C69] SMTP server connection error
Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 101
07/11
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check if the SMTP authentication method is correct.
Check if there are any illegal characters in the Terminal mail address.
Select the correct SMTP authentication method. Delete the illegal characters and reset the mail
address. Then try again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authentication again.
[2C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentication again.
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received
Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2CC1] Power failure
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 102
[ 5 ] File sharing related error

[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion failure (in case of [2DA6])
[2D11] Insufficient memory
[2D12] Message reception error
[2D13] Message transmission error
5
[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter
[2D15] Exceeding document number
Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
[2D20] System management module access abnormality
[2D21] Job control module access abnormality
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality
[2D60] File library access abnormality
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion failure (in case of [2DA6])
[2D30] Directory creation failure
[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 103
07/11
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality

If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using
the Setting Mode (08-667).
[2D43] Encryption error
[2D44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error
Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.
[2D62] File server connection error
Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path
Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D64] Login failure
Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed
Delete some documents in the folder.
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing
[2D67] FTP service not available
Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available
Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2DC1] Power failure
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 104
07/11
[ 6 ] E-mail reception related error

[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error
[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error
The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error
The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
5
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error
[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,
etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption
This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error
The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error
These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 105
07/11
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error

These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error
The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error
The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,
LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
[3C70] Power failure error
Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3D10] Destination address error
Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error
This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 106
[3E10] POP3 server connection error

Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error
Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error
Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3E40] POP3 Login Type ERROR
Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.
[4030] No printer kit/Invalid

Install the print kit and perform the job again.
Install the Expansion Memory (GC-1230) and perform the job again.
Register it officially and perform the job again.
[4031] HDD full failure during printing
[4032] Private-print-only error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4033] Printing data storing limitation error
[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error
[4035] Local file storing limitation error
Select "Remote" (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.
[4036] User authentication error
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 107
07/11
[A221] Print job cancellation

This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.
[A222] Print job power failure
[A290] Limit over error
Clear the limit counter.
5.1.17
Image control related service call
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality

Is the connector CN317 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected?
NO
1) Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 108
07/06
5.2
Troubleshooting for the Image
1) Abnormality of image density / Gray balance
Gray balance
Feeding direction
Image density
5
Defective area
Density /
Gray balance
Printer density
Step
Check items
1
Check the density / gray balance.
2
Check test print image (04-113).
Scanner
Printed image
4
5
Are the original glass, mirrors and

lens dirty?
Is the image faded?
Is background fogging occurring?
Is there a blotch on the image?
Is the image transferred normally?
Prescription
Adjust the density.
Go to step 4 if there is any problem on
image.
Clean them.
Perform troubleshooting for faded image.
Perform troubleshooting for background
fogging.
Perform troubleshooting for blotched
image.
Perform troubleshooting for abnormal
transfer.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 109
Feeding direction
2) Background fogging
Defective area
Density reproduction
Background reproduction
Printer section
Step
Check items
Prescription
1
Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
2
Check the background reproduction. Adjust the background.
3
Scanner
Auto-toner
Are the original glass, mirrors and

lens dirty?
Is the auto-toner sensor normal?
6
7
Is the toner supplied normally?

Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Developer unit
Developer material/
Toner/Drum
Is the contact between the drum and

developer material normal?
Using the specified developer material, toner and drum?
Have the developer material and
drum reached their PM life?
Is the storage environment of the
toner cartridge 35c less without
dew?
Is the drum cleaned properly?
High-voltage transformer (Main

charger / Developer
bias)
10
11
Drum cleaning
blade
Toner dusting
12
13
Is toner heaped on the seal of the

developer unit?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to step 4 if there is any problem on

image.
Clean them.
Check the performance of the auto-toner
sensor and readjust.
Check the motor and circuits.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and polarity.

Use the specified developer material, toner
and drum.
Replace the developer material and drum.
Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment within specification.
Check the pressure of the drum cleaning
blade.
Remove the toner and clean the developer
unit.
5 - 110
3) Moire/lack of sharpness
Feeding direction
Moire
Defective area
Parameter adjustment value
Printer section
Step
Check items
Prescription
1
density.
2
Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
eters.
3
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
Lack of sharpness
Defective area
Parameter adjustment value
Printer section
Step
Check items
Prescription
1
density.
2
Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
eters.
3
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
4
Check the image processing param- Check the encircled areas A and B in the
eters.
image, and change the sharpness intensity
in the sharpness adjustment mode.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 111
Feeding direction
Approx.124mm
4)Toner offset
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 124 mm toward the dark image.)
Defective area
Density
Fuser unit
Paper
Step
Check items
1
Is the density too high?
2
Is the pressure of the fuser roller
normal?
3
Is the thermistor in contact with the
fuser roller?
4
Is there a scratch on the fuser roller
surface?
5
Has the fuser roller reached its PM
life?
6
Is the setting temperature of the
fuser roller normal?
7
8
Developer material
9
10
Scanner
11
Has the appropriate paper type

been selected?
fuser roller in each paper type normal?
Using the recommended paper?
Using the specified developer material?
Are the original glass (especially the
position of shading correction plate),
mirror and lens dirty?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Adjust the density.
Check the pressure releasing parts and
pressurization mechanism.
Contact the thermistor with the fuser roller.
Replace the fuser roller.
Replace the fuser roller.
Check the adjustment values of fuser roller
temperature?
08-410:12 (200C) 08-411:12 (200C)
Select a proper mode.
Check the setting and correct it. 08412,413,437,438
Use the recommended paper.
Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Clean them.
5 - 112
Feeding direction
5) Blurred image
Defective area
Paper
Bedewed scanner
Drum
Ozone exhaust
Step
Check items
1
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF
damp?
2
Is the scanner bedewed?
3
Is the drum surface wet or dirty?
4
5
Is the ozone exhaust fan operating

properly?
Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?
Prescription
Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp place.
Clean it.
Wipe the drum with a piece of dry cloth.
* Do not use alcohol or other organic solvents.
Check the connection of connector.
Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
Replace it.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 113
04/09
Feeding direction
6) Poor fusing
Defective area
IH electric power
Pressure between
fuser roller and
pressure roller
Developer material/
Toner
Paper
Step
Check items
1
Check if the connector contacts
properly.
2
Is the IH coil shorted or broken?
Is the IH board normal?
3
Are the pressure springs working
properly?
4
Is the temperature of the fuser roller

normal?
Using the specified developer material and toner?

damp?
Is the paper type corresponding to
its mode?
fuser roller in each paper type normal?
6
7
8
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Correct it.
Replace the IH coil or IH board.
Check and adjust the pressure springs.
Check the setting and correct it.

08-410:12 (200C)
08-411:12 (200C)
toner.
Avoid storing paper in damp place.
Use the proper type of paper or select the
proper made.
Check the setting and correct it.
08-412,413,437,438
5 - 114
05/11
Feeding direction
7) Blank copy
Defective area
Transfer charger
wire
High-voltage transformer (Transfer
charger / Developer
bias)
Developer unit
Step
Check items
1
Is the transfer charger wire cut off?
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Drum
CCD, SLG, SYS,

LGC boards and
harnesses
10

Are the connectors of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is
the harness open circuited?
Is the developer unit installed properly?
Do the developer sleeve and mixers
rotate?
Is the developer material smoothly
transported?
Has the magnetic brush phase been
shifted?
Is the doctor blade positioned properly?
Is the drum rotating?
Are the connectors securely connected? Check if the harnesses
connecting the boards are open circuited.
Prescription
Replace the transfer charger wire.
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace
the high-voltage harness.
Check and correct the engaging condition
of the developer unit gears.
Check and fix the drive system of the
developer unit.
Remove the foreign matter from the developer material.
Adjust the developer polarity.
Adjust it using the doctor-sleeve jig.
Check if the drum shaft is inserted. Check
the drive system of the drum.
Connect the connectors securely. Replace
the harness.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 115
05/11
Feeding direction
8) Solid print
Defective area
Exposure lamp and
inverter
Step
Check items
1
Does the exposure lamp light?
Scanner
Bedewed scanner
and drum
Main charger
4
5

charger)
CCD, SLG, SYS,

LGC boards and
harnesses
Is there any foreign matter on the

light path?
Is the scanner or drum bedewed?
Is the main charger securely

installed?
Is the main charger wire open circuited?
Are the connectors securely connected? Check if the harnesses
connecting the boards are open circuited.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Check if the connector contacts with the
lamp terminal.
Replace the defective inverter.
Remove it.
Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
Keep the power cord plugged in all trough
the day and night.
Install it securely.
Replace it.
Connect the connectors securely. Replace
the harness.
5 - 116
04/09
Feeding direction
9) White banding (in the feeding direction)
Defective area
Laser optical unit
Main charger grid
Transfer charger
wire
Developer unit
Step
Check items
1
Is there a foreign matter or stain on
the slit glass?
2
Is there a foreign matter or dew on
the charger grid?
3
Is there any foreign matter or stain
on the transfer charger wire?
4
Is the developer material transported properly?
5
Is there a foreign matter or dew on
the drum seal?
6
Is the upper drum seal of the developer unit in contact with the drum?
Drum
Transport path
Discharge LED
Scanner
9
10
11
Cleaner
12
Is there a foreign matter on the drum

surface?
Does the toner image contact with
any foreign matter before the paper
enters the fusing section after the
separation?
Is any of the discharge LEDS off?
Is there a foreign matter on the light
path?
position of shading correction plate)
Is there any foreign matter, which
contacts the drum on the cleaner
stay?
Prescription
Remove the foreign matter or stain.
Remove the foreign matter.
Clean the transfer charger wire.
Remove the foreign matter if there is any.
Remove the foreign matter or dew.
Correct the position of the drum seal or
replace it.
Replace the drum.
Replace the discharge LED.

Clean them.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 117
05/11
Feeding direction
10) White banding (at right angle with the feeding direction)
Defective area
Main charger
Drum
Discharge LED
Developer unit
Drive system
charger / Developer
bias / Transfer
charger)
Transfer charger
Feed system
Step
Check items
1
Is there a foreign matter on the
charger?
2
Is the connector in proper contact
with the terminal?
3
Is there any abnormality on the
drum surface?
4
Does the discharge LED light normally?
5
Is the developer sleeve rotating normally? Is there any abnormality on
the sleeve surface?
6
Are the drum and scanner jittering?
7
Is any foreign matter such as paper

shred sticking to the transfer
charger wire?
Is the aligning amount proper?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Clean or adjust the terminal.
Replace the drum.
Replace the discharge LED or clean the
terminals.
Check the drive system of the developer
unit, or clean the sleeve surface.
Check each drive system.
Remove the foreign matter from the wire.
Adjust the aligning amount.
5 - 118
05/11
Feeding direction
11) Skew (inclined image)
Defective area
Drawers LCF
Step
Check items
1
Is the drawer or LCF properly
installed?
2
Is there too much paper in the
drawer or LCF?
3
Is the corner of the paper folded?
4
Feed roller
Rollers
Registration roller
Pre-registration
guide
Carriage-1
8
9
Prescription
Install the drawer or LCF properly.
Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less. (2500
sheets or less/stack for LCF)
Change the direction of the paper and set
it again.
Adjust the position of the side guides.
Are the side guides of the drawer or

LCF properly installed?
Is the surface of the feed roller dirty? Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or
replace the roller.
Are the roller and shaft secured?
Check and tighten the E-rings, pins, clips
and setscrews.
Is the spring detached from the reg- Attach the spring correctly. Clean the roller
istration roller?
if it is dirty.
Is the pre-registration guide properly Correct it.
installed?
Is the carriage-1 slanted?
Adjust the carriage-1.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 119
05/11
Feeding direction
12) Black banding (in the feeding direction)
Defective area
Scanner
Shading correction
plate
Main charger grid
Main charger
Cleaner
Fuser unit
Drum
Laser optical unit
Step
Check items
1
Is there a foreign matter on the light
path?
2
Is there dust or stains on part of the
original glass where the shading
correction plate is placed.
3
Is there a foreign matter on the grid?
4
Is the grid dirty or deformed?
5
Is there a foreign matter on the main
charger?
6
Is the charger wire dirty or
deformed?
7
Is there a foreign matter inside the
charger case?
8
Is the inside of the charger case
dirty?
9
Is there paper dust sticking to the
cleaning blade edge?
10 Is the cleaning blade working properly?
11 Has the used toner been recovered
properly?
12 Is the fuser roller surface dirty or
damaged?
13 Is the thermistor dirty?
14 Are there scratches on the drum
surface?
15 Is there a foreign matter or stain on
the slit glass?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.
Clean the plate.

Clean or replace the grid.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Clean the inside of the case.
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.
Check the pressurization of the drum
cleaning blade.
Clean the toner recovery auger.
Clean or replace the fuser roller.
Clean the thermistor.
Replace the drum.
Remove the foreign matter or the stain.
5 - 120
Feeding direction
13) Black banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Defective area
Main charge wire
Fuser unit
High-voltage transformer
(Main charger /
Developer bias /
Transfer charger)
Drum
Step
Check items
1
deformed?
2
Are the fuser roller, separation finger
and thermistor dirty?
3
Has the cleaning roller for the pressure roller reached its PM life?
4
5
6
Scanner
Is there a deep scratch on the drum

surface?
Is there thin scratch (drum pitting)
on the drum surface?
Is there a foreign matter on the carriage rail?
Prescription
Clean them.
Replace it.
Replace the drum if the scratch has

reached the aluminum base.
Check and adjust the contact condition of
the cleaning blade and recovery blade.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 121
Feeding direction
14) White spots
Defective area
Developer unit /
Toner cartridge
Developer material/
Toner/ Drum
Step
Check items
1
Is the toner density in the developer
material appropriate?
2
3
4
5
6
7
Main charger
8
9

charger / Developer
bias / Transfer
charger)
Transfer/Separation charger
10
11
Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper?

Using the specified developer material, toner and drum?
Have the developer material and
drum reached their PM life?
Is the storage environment of the
toner cartridge 35c or less without
dew?
Is there any dent on the drum surface?
Is there any film forming on the
drum?
Is there any foreign matter on the
charger?
deformed?
Is there any foreign matter such as

fiber in the paper transport area of
the transfer/separation charger?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Check and correct the auto-toner sensor
and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of the toner is sufficient in the toner cartridge.
Adjust it.
Use the specified developer material, toner
and drum.
Replace the developer material and drum.
Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment with specification.
Replace the drum.
Clean or replace the drum.
Remove it.
Clean the charger.
5 - 122
Feeding direction
15) Poor image transfer
Defective area
Paper
Transfer charger
Registration roller
High-voltage transformer (Transfer

charger)
Step
Check items
1
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF/
PFP curled?
2
damp?
3
its mode?
4
5
Is the transfer charger case dirty?
6
Is the transfer charger wire dirty?
7
Is there any abnormality related to
the registration roller or with the
roller itself?
8
Prescription
Reinsert the paper with the reverse side up
or change the paper.
Avoid storing paper in damp place.
Select the proper mode.
Clean it.
Clean it.
Clean the roller if it is dirty. Securely attach
the springs if they are detached. Replace
the clutch if it is defective. Adjust the rotation speed of the roller.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 123
Feeding direction
16) Uneven image density
Defective area
Main charger
Transfer charger
Laser optical unit
Discharge LED
Developer unit
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Scanner section
10
11
Check items
Is the main charger dirty?
Is the transfer charger dirty?
Is there any foreign matter or stain
on the slit glass?
Is the discharge LED dirty?
Is any of the discharge LEDs off?
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve pressurization mechanism working?
Is the developer material transported normally?
Is the platen cover or RADF
opened?
position of shading correction plate),
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Clean or replace the charger wire/grid.
Clean it.
Clean it.
Remove the foreign matter or stain.
Clean it.
Remove it.
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
Check the mechanism.
Remove foreign matters if there is any.
Close the platen cover or RADF.
Clean them.
5 - 124
Feeding direction
17) Faded image (low density, abnormal gray balance)
Defective area
Toner empty
Auto-toner circuit
Toner motor
Toner cartridge
Developer material
Developer unit
Step
Check items
1
Is ADD TONER symbol lit?
2
Is there enough toner in the cartridge?
3
Is the toner density in the developer
material too low?
4
Is the toner motor working normally?
5
Is there any problem with the toner
cartridge?
6
Has the developer material reached
its PM life?
7
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum?
8
Main charger
Drum
Transfer charger
9
10
11
12
13
14
Is the developer sleeve pressurization mechanism working?

Is the main charger dirty?
Is film-forming occurring on the
drum surface?
Has the drum reached its PM life?
Is the transfer charger wire cut off?
Is the setting for the high-voltage
transformer proper?
Prescription
Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the performance of the auto-toner
circuit.
Check the motor drive circuit.

Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developer material.
Check the installation of the developer
unit. Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and
polarity.
Check the mechanism.
Clean it or replace the charger wire/grid.
Clean or replace the drum.
Replace the drum.
Replace the transfer charger wire.
Adjust the output from the high-voltage
transformer.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 125
Feeding direction
18) Image dislocation in feeding direction
Defective area
Scanner/Printer
adjustment
Registration roller
Feed clutch
Pre-registration
guide
Step
Check items
1
Have the printed images been dislocated in the same manner?
2
Is the registration roller dirty, or the
spring detached?
3
Is the registration roller working
properly?
4
Is the feed clutch working properly?
5
Is the pre-registration guide installed

properly?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Adjust the position of the leading edge of
paper in the Adjustment Mode.
Clean the roller with alcohol. Securely
attach the springs.
Adjust or replace the gears if they are not
engaged properly.
Check the circuit or clutch, and replace
them if necessary.
Install the guide properly.
5 - 126
Feeding direction
19)Jittering image
Defective area
Step
Check items
1
Is the toner image on the drum normal?
Registration roller
Fuser roller and

pressure roller
Drum
Operation of carriage
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scanner
Drum drive system
9
10
Is the registration roller rotating normally?

Are the fuser roller and pressure
roller rotating normally?
Is there a big scratch on the drum?
Is there any problem with the slide
sheet?
Is there any problem with the carriage foot?
Is the tension of the timing belt normal?
Is there any problem with the drive
system of the carriage?
Is the mirror secured?
Is there any problem with the drive
system of the drum?
Prescription
If normal, perform steps 2 to 4. Perform
step 5 and followings in case the image is
abnormal.
Check the registration roller area and
springs for installation condition.
Check the fuser roller area. Replace the
rollers if necessary.
Replace the drum.
Replace it.
Replace it.
Adjust the tension.
Check the drive system of the carriage.
Secure it.
Check the drive system of the drum. Clean
or replace the gears if they have stains or
scratches.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 127
Feeding direction
20) Poor cleaning
Defective area
Developer material
Cleaner
Toner recovery
auger
Fuser unit
Step
Check items
1
Using the specified developer material?
2
Is the blade in proper contact with
the drum?
3
Has the cleaning blade been turned
up?
4
Is the toner recovered normally?
5
6
7
8
9
Is the cleaning roller damaged or

has it reached its PM life?
Are there bubble-like scratches on
the fuser roller (125mm pitch on the
image)?
Has the fuser roller reached its PM
life?
Is the pressure of the fuser roller
normal?
fuser roller normal?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
toner.
Check the blade.
Replace the blade.
Check and replace drum if necessary.
Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the pressure of the cleaning blade.
Replace the roller.
Replace the fuser roller. Check and adjust
the temperature control circuit.
Replace it.
Check and adjust the mechanism.
Check the setting and correct it. 08-410:12
(200C) 08-411:12 (200C)
5 - 128
Feeding direction
21) Uneven light distribution
Defective area
Original glass
Main charger
Discharge LED
Scanner
Exposure lamp
Step
Check items
1
Is the original glass dirty?
2
Are the main charger wire, grid and
case dirty?
3
Is the discharge LED dirty?
4
Is any of the discharge LEDs off?
5
Are the reflector, exposure lamp,
mirrors, lens, and original glass
(especially the position of shading
correction plate) dirty?
6
Is the exposure lamp tilted?
7
Is the lamp discolored or degraded?
Prescription
Clean it.
Clean or replace them.
Clean it.
Replace the discharge LED.
Clean them.
Adjust the position of the lamp.

Replace it.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 129
Feeding direction
22) Blotched image
Defective area
Paper
Separation
Transfer
(Transfer charger)
Step
Check items
1
its mode?
2
Is the paper too dry?
3
Is the output from the separation
charger too high?
4
Is the transfer charger case dirty?
5
6
Is the output from the high-voltage
transformer normal?
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Check the paper type and mode.
Change the paper.
Adjust the output.
Clean the case.
Clean the wire.
Adjust the output. Replace the transformer
if necessary.
5 - 130
06/09
5.3
Replacement of PC Boards and HDD
When the HDD requires replacement, refer to "5.3.1 Replacing HDD".

When the SYS board requires replacement, refer to "5.3.2 Replacing SYS board".
5.3.1
Replacing HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD>

When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to
recover them after replacing.
Notes:
1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users data/information
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
3. When 08-690 is performed, the HDD self-certificate is not available, so the SSL-related setting becomes disabled. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows.
(1)
Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibility and the measure of the backup.
(2)
Image data in the Electronic Filing

- Archive them in the e-Filing of TopAccess.
As for the backup in Box data, all data (selectable by the box) can be backed up / restored
in one go by using "e-Filing Backup/Restore Utility".
F-code information, Template registration information, Address book
- Back them up in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Department management data
- Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception))
- Export them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.)
Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
- Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to
the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
- Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be
kept.)
Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data)
- If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data)
- Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)
- The data cannot be backed up.
Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE (content of Function Mode (13) setting)
list.
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
Press the [LIST] button.
Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 131
07/11
(3)
Print out the FUNCTION list.

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
Press the [FUNCTION] button. The list is outputted.
(4)
Replace the HDD.
(5)
Update of HDD program data and UI data.

Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON. When Firmware Version Up
Mode appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.
Update with the USB storage. See 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING for details.
Format the HDD. (Setting Mode (08-690: 2))
* When the FAX unit (GD-1150/1200) is installed. Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
Perform the 1*-100 (FAX Set Up), 1*-102 (Clearing the image data) of the FAX Clearing
Mode.
Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. See 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment for details.
(6)
Ask users to reset the users setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
Printer driver
- Upload them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template registering information, Address book
- Restore them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess
Department management data
- Import them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Upload them in the e-Filing of TopAccess.
When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with "Create selfcertificate" of TopAccess. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address
When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with "Install Certificate for Wireless LAN" of TopAccess. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
CA certificate
User certificate
(7)
Referring to the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting.
Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list after the formatting. (Refer to the
procedure of (2).)
While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
Turn the power OFF.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 132
07/11
(8)
Referring to the FUNCTION list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 133
5.3.2
Replacing SYS board
<<CAUTION IN REPLACING the SYS board>>

Perform the following procedures and settings when the SYS board is replaced.
<After replacing the SYS board>
(1)
Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2)
Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3)
(4)
Install NIC board to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board). (e-STUDIO350/450)
Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING for the details of System ROM update.
(5)
Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(6)
When the message SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of settings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(7)
[If a scrambler board has already been installed]

Perform 08-698 (Entering the key code for scrambler board). Have the user enter the key code.
(8)
Perform 08-200 (date and time setting) to set Date/Time.
(9)
Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the number on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
(10) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information). (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

* If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (13).
(12) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 134
07/11
(13) Perform 1*-102 (Clearing the image data).

Notes:
Following image data are deleted when 1*-102 is performed.
Images of fax polling transmission
Images of fax Mailbox and box information
Images of fax transmission
Images of fax reception
(16) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] [FAX] [INITIAL SETUP]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 135
5.3.3
Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.
<<Caution when disposing of the HDD>>
Be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing) before disposing of the HDD of the equipment.
* When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased.
<<Caution when disposing of the SYS board>>
Before the SYS board is disposed, the following codes can be performed.
08-1427 (Forcible NVRAM data all clearing)
08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing)
Caution:
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.
5.3.4
HDD information display
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer
Model name
HDD serial number
Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.

"---" is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 136
2) Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-108 or 120 occurred).
ID
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
Result
VALUE
0
0
From 1 to 999
0
Any value
1 or more
Either one is at
least 1000.
All values are displayed as "-------".
Description
Diagnosis
Low possibility of physical failure
HDD replacement
is not required.
Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered.
HDD replacement
is not required.
High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a

possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.)
HDD replacement
is recommended.
High possibility of physical failure
HDD replacement
is recommended.
High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness

or SYS board may be one of the causes.)
HDD replacement
is recommended.
3) ID=05 and c5
ID
05
Name
Re-allocated Sector Count
Description
The number of sectors reassigned
c5
Current Pending Sector Count
The number of candidate sectors to

be reassigned
Remarks
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 137
07/05
4) Description of each ID
ID
Name
Meaning
01
Read Error Rate
This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
02
Throughput Performance
This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.
03
Spin Up Time
This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to

spin up from a spun down condition.
04
Spin Start/Stop Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups

from a spun down condition.
05
Re-allocated Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated

sectors.
07
Seek Error Rate
This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08
Seek Time Performance
This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance during normal online operations.
09
Power-On Hours
This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes

depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a
Spin Retry Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
0c
Power Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive

has been turned on.
c0
Power off Retract Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency

unloads.
c1
Load Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/

unloads.
c2
Temperature
This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.
c3
ECC On the Fly Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On

the Fly.
c4
Reallocation Event Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallocation events.
c5
Current Pending Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate

sectors to be reallocated.
c6
Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7
Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate)
This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found

in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8
Write Error Rate
This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 138
06/09
5.3.5
Replacing or clearing NVRAM
<<Caution in replacing or clearing NVRAM>>

When NVRAM has been replaced or cleared (System all clearing (08-669)), the setting must be performed according to the following procedure.
<After replacing or clearing NVRAM>
(1)
Take off the FAX board if installed.
(2)
Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(3)
Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incorrect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(4)
Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).
(5)
Perform 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total
counter.
(6)
Shut down the equipment.
(7)
Install the FAX board taken off in step (1).

* If the FAX board has not been installed, the following steps are not necessary.
(8)
Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(9)
Set the destination with 08-701 (Destination setting of FAX machine).
(10) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).

(11) Perform 1*-100 (FAX Set Up).
(13) Turn the power ON.
(14) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] [FAX] [INITIAL SETUP]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 139
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 140
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.

Firmware
Master data (HDD program data, UI data)
System ROM (System firmware, OS data,
UI data)
Stored
Hard disk
System control PC board (SYS board)
<e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>
The system firmware is stored into the
hard disk from the FROM basic section
software version V1.00/4.22.
Engine ROM (Machine firmware)
Logic PC board (LGC board)
Scanner ROM (Scanner firmware)
Scanning section control PC board (SLG

board)
NIC ROM (NIC firmware)

(e-STUDIO350/ 450 only)
RADF ROM (RADF firmware)
NIC board
RADF control PC board (MR-3015/ MR3018)
Download jig
Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board

(MJ-1023/ MJ-1024/ MJ-1101)
Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024)
FAX board (GD-1150/ GD-1200)
Download jig
Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware)

FAX ROM (FAX firmware)
Update method
USB Storage Device
USB Storage Device
* When replacing
the system control
PC board (SYS
board), update
with the Download
jig.
USB Storage Device
* Updating with the
Download jig is
also possible.
USB Storage Device
* Updating with the
Download jig is
also possible.
Download jig
Download jig
Download jig
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.
<e-STUDIO350/450>
Updating with the download jig
P. 6-3 "6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450)"
Updating with PC connected
P. 6-66 "6.3 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450)"
Updating with the USB Storage Device
P. 6-79 "6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450)"
<e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>
Updating with the download jig
P. 6-34 "6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
Updating with the USB Storage Device
P. 6-91 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-1
07/11
Notes:
< e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 > Before updating the firmware, check the FROM basic section
software version (perform the code 08-920).
< e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 > For updating with the USB Storage Device; The firmware can
be updated to the latest version by storing the update program together with the firmware
data file for updating in the USB Storage Device.
< e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 > For updating with the download jig; Before the FROM basic
section software is updated from "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier version to the latest one, update it to
"V1.00 / 4.22" first. Select all of the SYS, OS, UI and HDD when updating "V1.00 / 1.12" or
earlier versions.
Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the NIC board and
FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control
PC board and finisher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware
version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.
The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and
then write the suitable version of the firmware.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-2
07/11
6.1
Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board. And three
types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware
Download jig
Stored
Individual update
Batch update
Master data
Hard disk
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
System ROM
System control PC board

(SYS board)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320 or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control

PC board (SLG board)
K-PWA-DLM-320 or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
NIC ROM
NIC board
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
RADF ROM
RADF control PC board

(MR-3015)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)

(MJ-1023/MJ-1024)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM (Saddle

stitcher firmware)

(MJ-1024)
K-PWA-DLM-320
FAX ROM
FAX board (GD-1150)
K-PWA-DLM-320
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P. 6-5 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
P. 6-11 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)"
P. 6-22 "6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320"
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-3
05/11
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig. 6-1
Fig. 6-2
Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) has two types having different ROM capacity.
ROM capacity for each jig is as follows.
Download jig
ROM capacity
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
8 MB x 6
Updating the master data
Application
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
8 MB x 2
Updating the system ROM, engine ROM, scanner ROM, NIC ROM
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) is substitutable for PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is different from the existing jigs. The ROM is
installed on the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required
to write the data to these ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P. 6-20 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
Connector
Mark for ROM

installation direction
LED
ROM
Fig. 6-3
Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320

Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-4
6.1.1
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
The master data written on the hard disk can be updated by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB).
Update the master data according to the need such as the case of replacing the hard disk.
The data to be overwritten are as follows.
HDD program data (RIP data, list data, Web data, filing box control data)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, the language 1 to 7 data, the language 1 to 6 data
for Web)
[A] Update procedure
Important:
Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB).
Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
Write the data to the download jig.

(2)
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-5
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-5
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-6
(6)
Turn ON the power.

Downloading starts automatically and the processing status is displayed on LCD screen.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-6
(7)
Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig.
(9)
Perform the Updating System ROM continuously.

P. 6-11 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)" <Updating System ROM>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-7
[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-8
[C] Display during the update

The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update..
The device check starts.
When the device check completes, copying the

data to HDD starts.
Copied
Total files
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-9
When copying all the files completes, the

backup of the RIP font starts.
When the backup of the RIP font completes,

the update completes with the following
screen.
If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 10
6.1.2
The firmware of the equipment except the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in a
batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board, scanning
section control PC board, or NIC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating System ROM>
System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
OS data (FROM basic section software)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
<Updating NIC ROM>
NIC ROM data
Important:
Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB).
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) is substitutable.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.

Connector cover
Fig. 6-7
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 11
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-8
(5)
Connector
Fig. 6-9
(6)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. * is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 12
(7)
Select the item with the digital keys.

* is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
Select items as follows to update it individually.
Select 1. OS Update, 2. UI Update, and 3. System Firmware.
Select 6. Machine Firmware Update only.
Select 5. Scanner Firmware Update only.
<Updating NIC ROM>
Select 4. NIC Firmware Update only.
Example: Updating the system ROM (Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and
explained.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 13
(8)

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
(9)
Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 14
When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only 4. NIC Firmware Update and restart updating from the beginning. This
may complete the updating properly.
NIC error message
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
NIC Error Message
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
Error Contents
NIC initialization time-out
Prescription
The IP address may not be assigned correctly.
Is the IP address assigned correctly?
Does the IP address conflict with the
other system?
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC
board because it may be destroyed.
ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be disconnected.
Is the HDD cable connected correctly?
If the HDD cable is connected correctly,
replace the SYS board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3
HDD partition mount error
NIC UPDATE FAILED 4

NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC setting information

backup error
NIC firmware transfer error
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC firmware writing error
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
NIC status time-out
Replace the HDD because it may be

destroyed.
destroyed.
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
destroyed.
destroyed.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 15
04/10
(11) Perform the initialization of the updating data (NVRAM updating).

a. Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
b. Key in 947, and then press the [START] button.
c. Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
<Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating NIC ROM>
08-916: NIC ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 16
04/10

The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example,
the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.)
Press [START] button after selecting the item

to be updated. The device check starts.
When the device check completes, erasing the

data in the ROM of the equipment starts.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 17
When erasing the data completes, copying the

data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
When copying the data completes, verifying

the data starts.
When verifying the data completes, copying

and verifying the other data are implemented
repeatedly.
When copying and verifying all the data complete, the update completes with the following
screen.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 18
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 19
6.1.3
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) differs from the existing jigs in that the Flash ROM is
mounted on the board of the jig directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to
write data to these Flash ROMs. Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter
to write data. For the procedure to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of
each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-10
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP/1881UXP
(or equivalent)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940
(or equivalent)
ROM writer adapter

PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
(model 1881)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
(model 1931)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
Fig. 6-11
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 20
08/04
[A] Precaution when writing the data

Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written
The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written
Important:
When an error such as "Over current detects" appears while the data are being written to the
download jig and the writing cannot be finished, set the writing voltage (VID) to 12 V and then
write them.
Rotary
Switch
File Name
System, Engine, Scanner and NIC data
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1)
Flash ROM
Master Data (PWA-DWNLD350-JIG2)
1
2
3
4
ROM. bin
1
2
3
ROM. bin
Sysfirm. bin
N/A
N/A
ROM1
ROM2
ROM3
ROM4
5
6
4
N/A
N/A
N/A
ROM5
ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 21
08/04
6.1.4
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
Engine ROM date
Scanner ROM date
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM date
<Updating Finisher ROM>
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM date
[A] Update Procedure
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.

Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-4 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 22
(3)
Connector cover
Fig. 6-12
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-13
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-14
(6)
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 23
(7)
When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 24

(1)

(2)
(3)
Take off the right upper cover.

Right upper cover
Fig. 6-15
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-16
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 25
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-17
(6)
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 26
<Updating RADF ROM (MR-3015)>

(1)

(2)
(3)

Take off the RADF rear cover.
RADF rear cover
Fig. 6-18
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN14) on the RADF control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-19
(5)
(6)
(7)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 27
05/11
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1023/1024)>

Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of Finisher firmware is needed.
MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update Finisher firmware and Saddle stitcher firmware are needed.
(1)

(2)
(3)
Take off the finisher rear cover.

Finisher rear cover
Finisher rear cover
*
(4)
Fig. 6-20
Fig. 6-21
[MJ-1023]
[MJ-1024]
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-22
(5)
Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 28
05/11
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
Fig. 6-23
<Updating Finisher Firmware>

Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 29
(6)
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-24
Processing status
LED
LED103
LED102
LED101
0% or above
OFF
OFF
ON
15% or above
OFF
ON
OFF
30% or above
OFF
ON
ON
45% or above
ON
OFF
OFF
60% or above
ON
OFF
ON
75% or above
ON
ON
OFF
90% or above
ON
ON
ON
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9)
Install the finisher rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 30
<Updating FAX ROM>

Important:
Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the Mailbox/Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(1)

(2)
(3)
Connector cover
Fig. 6-25
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-26
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 31
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-27
(6)
(7)
(8)
cover.
(9)
In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the FAX Set Up.

Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 100.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the Clearing the image data in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
Key in 102.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 32

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating RADF ROM>
08-907: RADF ROM version
08-908: Finisher ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>
08-915: FAX ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 33
6.2
Firmware Updating with Download Jig

(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.
And two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware
Download jig
Stored
Batch update
PWA-DWNLD-350JIG2 (48 MB)
Individual update
-
System ROM

(SYS board)
* The system firmware is
stored into the hard disk
from the FROM basic
section software version
V1.00/4.22.
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC

board
(SLG board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
RADF ROM
RADF control PC board

(MR-3018)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)

(MJ-1023/MJ-1024/MJ-1101)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware)

(MJ-1024)
K-PWA-DLM-320
FAX ROM
FAX board (GD-1200)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P. 6-36 "6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 34
07/11
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig. 6-28 Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector
Mark for ROM

installation direction
LED
6
ROM
Fig. 6-29 Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 35
05/11
6.2.1
The firmware of the equipment except for the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in
a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board
according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board or
scanning section control PC board.
System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
OS data (FROM basic section software)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
Engine ROM data
Scanner ROM data
Important:
(1)
Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.

(2)
(3)

Cover plate
Fig. 6-30
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 36
05/11
(4)
Connector
Fig. 6-31
(5)
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. * is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-32
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-33
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 37
06/10
(6)

Select items as follows to update it individually.
Types of Firmware
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
version to be updated.>
"V1.00/1.12" or earlier
"V1.00/4.22" or later
System ROM
0. OS Update
1. UI Update
2. System Firmware Update
1. OS UI Update
Engine ROM
3. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM
4. Scanner Firmware Update
Example: Updating the system ROM

Fig. 6-34
Fig. 6-35
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 38
06/10
(7)

Fig. 6-36
Status display during update
Status display when update is completed
OS Update .......
OS Update .......Completed
UI Data Update .......
UI Data Update .......Completed
SysFirm Update .......
SysFirm Update .......Completed
Engine MAIN Update ..Flash Update
Engine MAIN Update ..Completed
Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update..Completed
Fig. 6-37
OS UI Update .......
OS UI Update.................Completed
Engine MAIN Update......Flash Update
Engine MAIN Update..... Completed
Scanner Firm Update..... Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update..... Completed
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 39
06/10
(8)
Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Fig. 6-38
Fig. 6-39
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 40
06/10
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and cleaning the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
Fig. 6-40
Fig. 6-41
(9)
cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.

Key in 947, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 41
06/10

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 42
05/11
[C] Display during the update(When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is
"V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:)
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
System ROM
Engine ROM
Scanner ROM
0. OS Update
1. UI Data Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-42
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.

Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
Select items to be updated and press the

[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Engine ROM] and
[Scanner ROM] in parallel.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 43
06/09
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has

been updated, OS UpdateCompleted is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been

updated, UI Data UpdateCompleted is displayed and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 44
05/11
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,

Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update is
changed to Engine MAIN Update..Completed.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware

Update] has been updated, SysFirm
UpdateCompleted is displayed.
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,

Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update is
changed to Scanner Firm Update..Completed.
When all data has been updated, Update
Completed is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 45
05/11
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Failed items
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
Error message
6 - 46
05/11
[D] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is
"V1.00 / 4.22" or later:)
[System ROM]
[Engine ROM]
[Scanner ROM]
1. OS UI Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-43


[START] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 47
06/10

been updated, OS UI UpdateCompleted is
displayed.

changed to Engine MAIN Update..
Completed.

changed to Scanner Firm Update..
Completed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 48
06/09
6
Failed items
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 49
06/09
6.2.2
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-44
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer
ROM writer adapter
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP/1881UXP

(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940

(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Fig. 6-45 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
Fig. 6-46 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 50
08/04
Precaution when writing the data

- Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
- When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if
it is not set.
- The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written.
Important:
When an error such as "Over current detects" appears while the data are being written to the
download jig and the writing cannot be finished, set the writing voltage (VID) to 12 V and then
write them.
RotarySwitch
File Name
Flash ROM
firmImage0.bin
ROM1
firmImage1.bin
ROM2
firmImage2.bin
ROM3
N/A
ROM4
N/A
ROM5
N/A
ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 51
08/04
6.2.3
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
Engine ROM date
Scanner ROM date
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM date
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM date
[A] Update Procedure
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
(1)

(2)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 52
05/11
(3)
Connector cover
Fig. 6-47
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-48
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-49
(6)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 53
05/11
(7)
When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
(8)
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 54
05/11

(1)

(2)
(3)
Take off the right upper cover.

Right upper cover
Fig. 6-50
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-51
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 55
05/11
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-52
(6)
(7)
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 56
05/11
<Updating RADF ROM (MR-3018)>

(1)

(2)
Turning OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
(4)
Take off the RADF rear cover.

Connect the download jig with the connector (CN81) on the PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-53
(5)
(6)
When the data rewriting is completed, the LED blinks slowly (at an interval of 0.8 sec.).
If the LED blinks fast (at an interval of 0.1 sec.), the rewriting has been failed. In this case, turn
OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from
the beginning.
(7)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 57
05/11
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1023/ 1024)>

Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of Finisher firmware is needed.
MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update Finisher firmware and Saddle stitcher firmware are needed.
(1)

(2)
(3)
Take off the finisher rear cover.

Finisher rear cover
Finisher rear cover
*
(4)
Fig. 6-54
Fig. 6-55
[MJ-1023]
[MJ-1024]
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-56
(5)
Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 58
05/11
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
Fig. 6-57
<Updating Finisher Firmware>

Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 59
05/11
(6)
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-58
Processing status
LED
LED103
LED102
LED101
0% or above
OFF
OFF
ON
15% or above
OFF
ON
OFF
30% or above
OFF
ON
ON
45% or above
ON
OFF
OFF
60% or above
ON
OFF
ON
75% or above
ON
ON
OFF
90% or above
ON
ON
ON
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9)
Install the finisher rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 60
05/11
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1101)>

(1)
Attach the ROM to the download jig

Make sure that the ROM and its direction are correct. (P. 6-35 "Fig. 6-29")
(2)
(3)
Board access cover

Fig. 6-59
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
Download jig
Fig. 6-60
(5)
Turn ON the power while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously.

Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 61
06/01
(6)
When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking in approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update is failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed.
In this case, turn the power OFF and check the following items.
Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the downloading jig connected properly?
Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
(7)
Turn the power OFF and remove the download jig.
(8)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 62
06/01
<Updating FAX ROM>

Important:
Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the Mailbox/Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(1)

(2)
(3)
Connector cover
Fig. 6-61
(4)
Cover plate
Fig. 6-62
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 63
05/11
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-63
(6)
(7)
(8)
cover.
(9)
In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the FAX Set Up.

Key in 100.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the Clearing the image data in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
Key in 102.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 64
05/11

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
<Updating RADF ROM>
08-907: RADF ROM version
08-908: Finisher main ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>
08-915: FAX ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 65
06/06
6.3
Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager)

(e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the downloaded firmware from the PC connected with the
equipment by using the utility softwareFSMS (Field Service Manager). Firmware can be also downloaded through USB, in addition to an existing serial transfer through RS-232C.
This chapter explains only the firmware downloading method with FSMS. Refer to the Field Service
Manager Operators Manual for the details about installation method and functions of FSMS.
OS:
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Connecting cable:
USB cable or
RS-232C cable
PC:
IBM PC/AT or compatible machine
(USB port or RS-232C port is needed)
Fig. 6-64
Important:
Updating with USB connection is more recommended since the data transfer speed is lower
and it takes more time to update in the serial connection with RS-232C cable.
Example:
Updating time for system ROM (sysfirm.tz: Approx. 8 MB)
RS-232C connection: Approx. 1 hour and 20 minutes
USB connection: Approx. 10 minutes
* The updating time noted above is a reference. It may vary depending on the performance
of the PC used.
Updating through USB is not feasible for Windows NT4.0 since this operating system does
not support USB. When this system is used, update in the serial connection with RS-232C
cable.
When updating through USB (using FSMS), a printer driver needs to be installed in the PC in
advance. Refer to the Printing Guide about the installation method of the printer driver.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 66
06/01
The types of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Firmware
Stored
Data file name
Master data
Hard disk
uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz,

uidata6.tz, uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz,
webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz, webdata4.tz,
webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz
System ROM

(SYS board)
sysfirm.tz, uidataF.tz, uidata0.tz, uidata1.tz
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
mfirm.tz
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC board

(SLG board)
scnfirm.tz
NIC ROM
NIC board
nicfirm.tz
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 67

Important:
Do not operate the equipment or send a print job to the equipment during the update. This
interferes the updating operation and the firmware may not be written properly.
(1)
Do not turn OFF the power of equipment or PC during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be continued to function properly.
When using FSMS, set 1 at FSMS permission code (08-258) in the Setting Mode (08) in
advance.
The data file (tz file format) of each firmware is recommended to save at the local drive in the
PC (C drive, etc.) where FSMS program is installed.
Connect the equipment and PC with the cable.
USB connector (device)
*
*
RS-232C connector
USB cable
RS-232C cable
Fig. 6-65
Fig. 6-66
[USB connection]
[RS-232c connection]
Connect the cable to the RS-232C connector in RS-232C connection after taking off the connector cover of the equipment.
Connect the PC end of the cable to the USB port or RS-232C port on the PC.
(2)
Turn ON the power of the equipment.

Tip:
When updating with FSMS, updating can be performed in any of the normal mode, Adjustment
Mode (05) and Setting Mode (08). To avoid an interruption during the update, using the Setting
Mode (08) is recommended.
(3)
Turn ON the power of the PC.
(4)
Activate FSMS.
Select TOSHIBA FSMS starting with the Start menu.
(5)
Enter the login password and click the [OK] button.

* Set the login password at the installation of FSMS.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 68
(6)
Click the [F/W Download] button.
(7)
Select the model name of the equipment to be updated from the drop-down menu and click the
[OK] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 69
(8)
Click the [OFFLINE] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 70
(9)
Select the transmit media and click the [OK] button.
In case of RS-232C connection: Select Serial

In case of USB connection:Select USB
* The connection status between the printer driver installed in the PC and the equipment to be
connected is displayed only when USB is selected. Select the equipment to be updated and
click the [Activate FSMS] button.
Tip:
The content of Status display can be renewed to the latest status by clicking the [Refresh]
button. When the status is displayed as Disconnected because the start up of the equipment is
delayed, the status can be renewed to Connected by clicking this.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 71
(10) Check the firmware to be updated and click the [OK] button.
Tip:
The relation between the types of firmware to be updated and items to check is as follows in the
table below.
Item
Program
UI Data
Firmware
System ROM
Date file name to update

sysfirm.tz
uidataF.tz
Common UI Data
uidata0.tz
1st Language UI Data
uidata1.tz
MROM
Engine ROM
mfirm.tz
Scan ROM
Scanner ROM
scnfirm.tz
NIC ROM
NIC ROM
nicfirm.tz
Generic
Master data
uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz, uidata6.tz,

uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz, webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz,
webdata4.tz, webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 72
(11) Select the data file to be updated and click the [OK] button. There are two data filing methods:
Selecting the multiple data files in a batch (select the folder where the files are saved) and selecting each data file individually.
Selecting the multiple data files in a batch
a. Select Download File Folder.
b. Click the [Browse] button and select the folder where the files are saved.
Selecting each data file individually

a. Select File Name Conversion.
b. Click the [Browse] button of each data and select the file. When Generic Driver is used,
Tip:
When selecting the multiple files in a batch, the name of the unselected data file (not saved in the
folder) may be displayed. In this case, click the [OK] button and then the update of all files except
the displayed file starts.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 73
(12) The selected data is transmitted to the equipment.

The data file name being transmitted and transmission condition are displayed at the bottom.
Tip:
During transmission, the message WAIT or NOW SERVICING is displayed on the LCD
screen of the equipment. In this case, all the button operations are locked.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 74
(13) When the data transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. Then click the [OK]
button.
(14) The equipment restarts automatically and the items to be updated and processing status are displayed on the LCD screen.
Number of master data to be updated

Items
(" " is displayed next to the items to be updated.)
Processing staus of each item

Completed : Update completed
... ... ... ... : Updating
(15) Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 75
04/10
Update Failed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
Are the equipment and PC properly connected?
Is the selected data file proper?
Do the cable, equipment and PC operate properly?
Are FSMS and printer driver properly installed?
When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
them, select onlyNIC ROM (6. NIC Firmware Update) and restart updating from the beginning. This may complete the updating properly.
NIC error message
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 76
04/10
NIC Error Message
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3

NIC UPDATE FAILED 4
NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
Error Contents
Prescription
other system?
destroyed.
destroyed.
backup error
destroyed.
NIC firmware transfer error Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
destroyed.
NIC status time-out
destroyed.
Note:
(16) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 77
04/10

<Updating Master data>
<Updating NIC ROM>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 78
6.4
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device

(e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch. The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below. Also, the data file of each
firmware can be used commonly in the updating methods with USB storage device and Download jig.
Firmware
Stored
Date file name
Master data
Hard disk
1, 2, 3... n
* The file name should be consecutive numbers from
1 to n without file extension. The capacity of each
file is approx. 8 MB. However, the file capacity of n
(last number) may be less than 8 MB.
System ROM
System control PC
board (SYS board)
sysfirm.bin, ROM.bin
Engine ROM
Logic PC board (LGC

board)
ROM.bin
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC board (SLG

board)
NIC ROM
NIC board
Important:
The following USB storage devices are recommended for updating.
- MELCO
ClipDrive (RUF-C128M)
- Lexar Media
JumpDrive (RD128-231)
- Iomega
Mini USB Drive (Mini 128MB USB Drive)
Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is 64 MB or more
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number:
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
*
Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in this equipment is not always
guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC
environ ment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is
opera tional in this equipment when purchasing the device.
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 79
05/11

Important:
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the data file.
Confirm the data file name before writing
( P. 6-79 "6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450)").
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2)
Turn OFF the power of equipment.
(3)
Take off the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-67
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 6-68
Notes:
Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
In case the printer kit (GM-1010), printer/scanner kit (GM-2010) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 3010) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 80
(5)
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. * is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings.)
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item
Condition
0. OS Update
ROM.bin is written.
1. HDD Update
All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update
ROM.bin is written.
sysfirm.bin and ROM.bin are written.
4. NIC Firmware Update
ROM.bin is written.
ROM.bin is written.
6. Machine Firmware Update
ROM.bin is written.
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the
procedure from (5)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 81
04/10
(6)
Select the item with the digital keys. * is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete
the * by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings.
Select items as follows to update individually.
Select 1. HDD Update only.
Select 2. UI Data Update and 3. System Firmware Update.
Select 6. Machine Firmware Update only.
Select 5. Scanner Firmware Update only.
<Updating NIC ROM>
Select 4. NIC Firmware Update only.
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM (Updating the master data and system
ROM is taken as an example and explained.)
(7)

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen. When the multiple
items are selected, updating starts in order of item number.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 82
(8)
Tip:
Updating can be continued with another USB storage device on which the firmware data is written in the following procedure when the updating is completed.
a. Confirm the message Please Connect Next Storage Key. Push START Button!! is displayed
at the bottom of the LCD screen.
b. Replace the USB storage device while the power is left ON.
c. Press the [START] button.
d. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. Continue the updating from
procedure (6). However, the items already updated are not displayed on the screen.
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating (P. 6-79)?
Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
Is the USB storage device installed properly?
Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
* When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
them, select only 4. NIC Firmware Update and restart updating from the beginning. This
may complete the updating properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 83
04/10
NIC error message
NIC Error Message
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3

NIC UPDATE FAILED 4
NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
Error Contents
Prescription
other system?
destroyed.
destroyed.
backup error
destroyed.
NIC firmware transfer error Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
destroyed.
NIC status time-out
destroyed.
Note:
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the connector cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 84
04/10


<Updating NIC ROM>
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 85

The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example,
the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.)
The initial screen is displayed and the recognition of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly after 3

minutes, the screen for selecting items is displayed.
Press the [START] button after selecting the

item to be updated. The device check starts.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 86
04/10

data to the HDD starts.
6
File name of master data
Copied
Total files
When all files have been copied, the backup of

RIP font starts.
When the backup of RIP font is completed, the

following screen is displayed. Updating the
master data is completed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 87
Updating the system ROM starts subsequently.

The device check starts.

data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
When copying the data completes, copying the

other data are implemented repeatedly.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 88
When copying all the data complete, the

update completes with the following screen.
6
*
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 89
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 90
6.5
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device

(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Firmware
Master data
Stored
Model specific
folder name
Hard disk
352_452
Data file name

1, 2, 3 ... n
* The file name should be consecutive
numbers from 1 to n without file
extension. The capacity of each file
is approx. 8 MB. However, the file
capacity of n (last number) may be
less than 8 MB.
System ROM

(SYS board)
* The system firmware is stored
into the hard disk from the
FROM basic section software
version V1.00/4.22.
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
firmImage2.bin
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board

(SLG board)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 91
07/11
Important:
Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).
( P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)")
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number:
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color
Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the
most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or
Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device.
The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 92
07/11
Update program
The firmware can be updated to the latest version without considering the current one by storing the
update program together with the firmware data file for updating in the USB Storage Device.
Name
File name
Stored
Tool object for updating
mentusb.o
root
Update program
dlFirmWare_352_452
[352_452] folder
(Model specific folder)
USB Storage Device

mentusb.o
352_452
dlFirmWare_352_452
firmImage0.bin
firmImage1.bin
firmImage2.bin
1
2
3
:
Fig. 6-69
Important:
The "mentusb.o" file stored in the root of the USB storage device is a common file in eSTUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO451c Series and e-STUDIO282 Series. To save the firmware
of more than one model into one USB storage device, one "mentusb.o" file stored in the root
of USB storage device is sufficient.
Be careful not to mix up the "mentusb.o" file because there is a file whose name is the same
in the localization tool.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 93
07/05

Important:
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data
( P. 6-91 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)").
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2)
(3)
Take off the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-70
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 94
07/11
(4)
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device

Fig. 6-71
Notes:
In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 4060) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 95
05/11
(5)
When the update program is used, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-72
After the update program is finished being loaded, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-73
Note:
If the "dlFirmWare_352_452" file of the update program is not stored in the USB storage device
though "mentusb.o" file exists, or the loading of the update program fails, the following screen
appears. In this case, check if the update program is correctly stored and repeat step (5) and
after.
Fig. 6-74
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 96
07/05
(6)
Check the items to be updated.

The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. * is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier: All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings. When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or
later: All items are selected in the default settings.)
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-75
Note:
Item
Condition
0. OS Update
firmImage0.bin is written.
1. HDD Update
2. UI Data Update
firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-76
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 97
07/05
Note:
Item
Condition
1. OS UI Update
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin are written.
2. HDD SYS Update
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or turn OFF the
power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Fig. 6-77
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 98
06/10
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following message is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Note:
"If you still want to continue, Please Push Start Key" will not be displayed if the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later.
Fig. 6-78
If an attempt to update the FROM basic section software "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier version to the
latest firmware version without the update program, the following screen appears. In this case,
store "mentusb.o" and "dlFirmWare_352_452", which are the files for update program, in the
specified folder and repeat step (5) and after.
Fig. 6-79
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 99
07/05
(7)

Select items as follows to update individually.
Types of Firmware
System ROM
(OS data)
System ROM
(UI data)
Master data
System ROM
(System firmware)
Engine ROM
Scanner ROM
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
version of the equipment>
"V1.00/1.12" or earlier
"V1.00/4.22" or later
0. OS Update
1. OS UI Update
2. UI Data Update
1. HDD Update
2. HDD SYS Update


Example: Updating the master data and system ROM

Fig. 6-80
Fig. 6-81
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 100
06/10
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
(8)

Fig. 6-82
OS Update .......
HD Data Update .......
UI Data Update .......
SysFirm Update .......
Engine MAIN Update ..Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update
OS Update .......Completed
HD Data Update .......Completed
UI Data Update .......Completed
SysFirm Update .......Completed
Engine MAIN Update ..Completed
Scanner Firm Update..Completed
Fig. 6-83

OS UI Update.......
HDD SYS Update.......
Engine MAIN Update .....Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update..... Flash Update

OS UI Update...................... Completed
HDD SYS Update ............... Completed
Engine MAIN Update........... Completed
Scanner Firm Update ..........Completed
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 101
06/10
(9)
Fig. 6-84
Fig. 6-85
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 102
06/10
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating
( P. 6-91 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/
453)")?
Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
Fig. 6-86
Fig. 6-87
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
(11) Perform the initialization of the updating data.
Key in 947, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 103
06/10

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 104
05/11
[C] Display during the update(When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:)
[System ROM]
[Master data]
[Engine ROM]
[scanner ROM]
0. OS Update
1. HDD Update
4. Engine
Firmware Update
5. Scanner
Firmware Update
2. UI Data Update
3. System
Firmware Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-88
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 105
06/09

Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
When the device is recognized properly, the

screen for selecting update items is displayed.

[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Master Data], [Engine ROM]
and [Scanner ROM] in parallel.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 106
05/11

been updated, OS UpdateCompleted is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been

updated, UI Data UpdateCompleted is displayed and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 107
05/11

changed to Engine MAIN Update..Completed.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware

Update] has been updated, SysFirm
UpdateCompleted is displayed.
Total files
File name of
master data
Copies
When the [Master Data] has been updated,

HD Data UpdateCompleted is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 108
05/11

changed to Scanner Firm Update..Completed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 109
05/11
Failed items
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
Error message
6 - 110
05/11
[D] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:)
[System ROM]
[Master data]
[Engine ROM]
[Scanner ROM]
1. OS UI Update
2. HDD SYS Update
3. Engine
Firmware Update
4. Scanner
Firmware Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-89

When the device is recognized properly, the

screen for selecting update items is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 111
06/10

[START] button.
When the [OS data] / [UI data] has been

updated, OS UI UpdateCompleted is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 112
06/09

changed to Engine MAIN Update..
Completed.
Total files
File name of
master data
Copies
When the [Master Data] / [System firmware]

has been updated, HDD SYS Update

changed to Scanner Firm Update..
Completed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 113
06/09
Failed items
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
Error message
6 - 114
06/09
6.6
Appendix
6.6.1
e-STUDIO350/450
[A] Assist Mode

This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1)
NVRAM flag clearing (Clear NvRAM flags.)

Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function.
(Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2)
Data storage partition formatting (Format Loader Partition.)

When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary.)
(3)
HDD partition creation (All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode

(1)
Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
The following screen is displayed.
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 115
05/11
6.6.2
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
[A] Assist Mode

This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1)
NVRAM flag clearing (Clear NvRAM flags.)

Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the
download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2)
Data storage partition formatting (Format Loader Partition.)

When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary.)
(3)
HDD partition creation (All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode

(1)
Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
The following screen is displayed.
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 116
07/11
7.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7.1
Output Channel
The followings are five output channels which are not linked with the door switch.
1) +3.3V
+3.3VA:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
2) +5.1V
+5.1VA:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
3) +12V
+12VA:
+12VB:
+12VB:
+12VB:
CN412 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16

Output to the SYS board
CN412 Pins 19 and 20
CN413 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
Output to the SLG board
CN412 Pin 25
CN413 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
CN413 Pin 11
Output to the FIL board or FUS board
CN415 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the RADF
CN416 Pin 1
Output to the finisher
CN412 Pin 7
CN412 Pin 5
CN413 Pin 7
CN415 Pin 15
4) -12V (e-STUDIO350/450 only)

-12VA:
CN412 Pin 9
-12VB:
CN412 Pin 3
5) +24V (e-STUDIO350/450 only)
+24VB:
CN413 Pin 13
Output to the FAX board
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-1
05/11
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch.
1) +5.1V
+5.1VD:
2) +24V
+24VD1:
+24VD1:
+24VD2:
+24VD3:
+24VD4:
+24VD5:
CN414 Pin 9
CN414 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
CN418 Pin 1
Output to the power supply cooling fan
CN414 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
board)
CN415 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the RADF
CN415 Pins 9 and 10
CN416 Pin 3
Output to the finisher
<Output connector>
1) Not linked with the door switch
CN412
For the SYS board
CN413
For the LGC board, FIL board / FUS board, FAX board (e-STUDIO350/450 only),
PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
board)
CN415
For the SLG board, RADF
CN416
For the finisher
2) Linked with the door switch
CN414
For the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
CN415
For the SLG board, RADF
CN416
For the finisher
CN418
For the power supply cooling fan
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-2
05/11
7.2
Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part
using the following table.
Voltage
+24VD1
Board/Unit
LGC
+24VD2
Power supply
PFP/LCF
LGC
+24VD3
+24VD4
+24VD5
Part
Polygonal motor
ADU motor
Tray-up motor
Laser unit cooling fan
Upper drawer feed clutch
Lower drawer feed clutch
Bypass feed clutch
ADU clutch
Transport clutch (High speed)
Transport clutch (Low speed)
Bypass pickup solenoid
Power supply cooling fan
Exit motor
Main motor
Toner motor
Middle fan
Exhaust fan
Sub-separation fan
Fuser unit cooling fan
IH board cooling fan
Developer unit cooling fan-1
Developer unit cooling fan-2
Auto-toner sensor
Registration clutch
Developer drive clutch
Discharge LED
Key copy counter / Copy key card
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray
RADF
SLG
Scan motor
Exposure lamp (Lamp inverter)
Finisher
Fuse type
F3:8A(Semi time-lag)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-3
05/11
Neutral
Live
Breaker
Noise
filter
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-4
05/11
FUS board
FIL board
Main switch
*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard

*MJD model: Option
AC IN
*NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard
AC MAIN
AC DOOR
Door switch
CN411
CN411
F2
Switching
power supply
F1
IH
Noise
filter
Noise
filter
Reg.
Reg.
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
CN412
CN412
CN413
CN415
SYS board
SYS board
LGC board
SLG board
CN412 SYS board

CN412 SYS board
CN412 SYS board
CN413 LGC board
CN415 SLG board
CN412 SYS board
CN413 FAX board (e-STUDIO350/450 only)
+12VA
-12VA
+12VB
+12VB
+12VB
-12VB
+24VB
+5.1VB CN415 SLG board, RADF

+5.1VB CN416 Finisher
+5.1VA CN412 SYS board

+5.1VB CN412 SYS board
+5.1VB CN413 LGC board, FIL board / FUS board,
PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit /
Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
+5.1VD CN414 LGC board
+24VD5 CN416 Finisher
+24VD4 CN415 SLG board
+24VD3 CN415 RADF
+24VD2 CN414 LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator /

Offset tray (via LGC board)
+24VD1 CN418 Power supply cooling fan
+24VD1 CN414 LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
7.3
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
8.
REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.

(1)
Auto Supply Order

Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail.
(2)
Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
8.1
Auto Supply Order
8.1.1
Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.

(1)
Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
(2)
Order Intervals
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner container full detection.
(3)
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
If Order Failure Occurs
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-1
05/05
8.1.2
Setting Item
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.

Note:
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
(1)
Self-diagnosis (08) Setting

As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required.
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*
2: Invalid (Default)
When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-2
04/05
(2)
Touch Panel Setting

Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER
FAX NUMBER
E-MAIL
CUSTOMER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)

FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-mail address of supplier (*3)
Customer information
Supplier information
Service technician information
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.

*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
Detailed setting for the order

[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
***** TONER ORDER

PART NUMBER
Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER)

Part number to be ordered
CONDITIOIN
QUANTITY
AUTO ORDER
The number of conditions (*)

The quantity to be ordered
ON/OFF setting of order for each part
The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
FAX number of this equipment (common information)

[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME
FAX NUMBER
ID name of this equipment

FAX number of this equipment
E-mail information of this equipment (common information)

[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS
FROM NAME
E-mail address of this equipment (*)

E-mail username of this equipment
(3)
When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is
not sent.
Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the
setting list.
[USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-3
04/05
8.1.3
Setting procedure
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".
Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
Press the [ADMIN] button.
When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
(5)
Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
(6)
Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-4
05/05
(7)
The SERVICE screen is displayed.
(8)
Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.

(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
[FAX NUMBER]
Input the FAX number of supplier.

(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not
input the number.)
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of supplier.

(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the address.)
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.

(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.)
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER]
Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS]
Input the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
[ADDRESS]
Input the name of supplier.

Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-6
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME]
Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER]
Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-7
05/05
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.

(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
(23) Press the [TONER] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-8
(24) Input the order information of TONER.

[PART NUMBER]
Toner number
[CONDITION]
The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number
specified for the CONDITION.
[QUANTITY]
Quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF]
Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
(27) Press the [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED
TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information.

(29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8-9
Note:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
Contents
The transmitting way of order

[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF]
732
0: Ordered by FAX
2: Ordered by HTTP
SUPPLIER
[FAX NUMBER]
733
Maximum 32 digits
SUPPLIER
[E-MAIL]
734
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
738
Maximum 50 letters
CUSTOMER
[TEL NUMBER]
739
Maximum 32 digits
CUSTOMER
[E-MAIL]
740
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER
[ADDRESS]
741
Maximum 100 letters
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
746
Maximum 50 letters
SUPPLIER
[ADDRESS]
747
Maximum 100 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
742
Maximum 5 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NAME]
743
Maximum 50 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[TEL NUMBER]
744
Maximum 32 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[E-MAIL]
745
Maximum 192 letters
Remarks
[DESCRIPTION]
748
Maximum 128 letters
TONER
[PART NUMBER]
758
Maximum 20 digits
TONER
[CONDITION]
760
1-99
TONER
[QUANTITY]
759
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER

[PART NUMBER]
761
Maximum 20 digits

[CONDITION]
763
1-99

[QUANTITY]
762
1-99
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
3: OFF
8 - 10
07/11
8.1.4
Order Sheet Format
The sample of order sheet is as follows.

(1)
FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME
CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY
99
(*1)
99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
(2)
E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
Date&Time: '03-09-12 00:17
Customer Number: svc02
MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
SerialNumber: CV
Device FAX Number: 1122
Device Email: sss@linux.nam1.local
OrderInformation:
BLACK PartNumber: kuro-01
(*1)
Quantity: 1
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:5
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 11
(3)
Result list
DATE & TIME

CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
QUANTITY
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
99
(*1)
99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 12
8.2
Service Notification
8.2.1
Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
Total Counter Transmit

When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).
Service Call Transmit (E-mail only)
When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call
error.
PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2
Setting (e-STUDIO350/450)
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774
Setting of notification display

1: Valid
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
Confirm the password to the administrator.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 13
07/05
(2)
Press the [SERVICE] button.
(3)
Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
(4)
Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".

When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 14
05/05
(5)
Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.

When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 15
05/05
(6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item for E-mail and FAX.
When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set
date and time every month.)
Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the
[SET] button is already pressed.)
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".

Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the
minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the
[CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the
[RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is
already pressed.)
Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 16
05/05
(7)
Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
E-mail address 1
E-mail address 2
E-mail address 3
FAX number
Total Counter Transmit setting
Total counter transmission date setting
Total counter transmission interval setting (Hour/Hour/
Minute/Minute)
Service Call Transmit setting
PM Counter Transmit setting
08 code
767
768
777
778
1145
769
770
776
775
771
Contents
0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail
2:FAX
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 32 digits
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
1 to 31
00:00-23:59
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 17
8.2.3
Items to be notified (e-STUDIO350/450)
The items to be notified are shown below.

1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the
same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
1
2
3
4
Date
Machine Model
Serial Number
Total Counter
5
6
ChargeCounterFormat:
LargeSizeChargeCount
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
7
8
PMCounterFormat:
LargeSizePMCount
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition
:
:
:
:
10/20/2003 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
1234567890
00300000
1
1
Charge Counter:
Large
Small
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
9
10
11
12
<Print Counter>
Copy
Print
List
FAX
13
14
15
<Scan Counter>
Copy Scan
00000000 00000000
FAX Scan
00000000 00000000
Net Scan
00000000 00000000
16
17
<FAX Counter>
Transmit
Receive
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
Periodical Maintenance Counter:

18
19
20
21
22
Set PM
Current PM
Set PMTime
Current PMTime
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Printer Error History:

Date
Time
ErrorCode
----------------------------------------------10/18/2003 16:44
F110
10/15/2003 22:28
F110
(*1)
10/15/2003 22:23
F110
09/15/2003
08/25/2003
22:23
11:12
F110
F110
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 18
07/05
Date
Machine model name
Serial number
Total counter value
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
Number of output pages in the Copier Function
10
Number of output pages in the Printer Function
11
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
12
Number of output pages in the FAX Function
13
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
14
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function
15
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function
16
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function
17
Number of received pages in the FAX Function
18
PM count setting value
19
PM count present value
20
PM driving count setting value
21
PM driving count present value
22
History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 19
04/10
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX

*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION".
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
1
2
3
4
DATE
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
TOTAL COUNTER
:
:
:
:
05/03/10 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
1234567890
00004787
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT

5
6
PM COUNTER FORMAT
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT

:1
LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION : 1
7
8
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT

:1
LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION : 1
CHARGE COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
9
10
11
12
SCAN COUNTER
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
COPY
PRINT
LIST
FAX
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
13
14
15
FAX COUNTER
16
17
22
COPY SCAN
FAX SCAN
NET SCAN
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
LARGE
SMALL
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
18
19
20
21
SET PM
CURRENT PM
SET PM TIME
CURRENT PM TIME
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY

DATE
05/03/09
05/03/05
05/03/05
05/02/15
05/01/25
TIME ERROR CODE

16:44
F110
22:28
F110
22:23
F110
22:23
F110
11:12
F110
DATE
TIME
ERROR CODE
(*2)
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 20
05/05
Date
Machine model name
Serial number
Total counter value
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
History of error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 21
05/05
3) Service Call Transmit

Subject: Service Call Notification
1
Date: 10/20/2003 13:47

Machine Name: e-STUDIO450 SerialNumber: 1234567890
2
3
4
5
6
Function: Print
Severity: Error
ErrorCode: XXXX
Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Date
Time
ErrorCode
-----------------------------------------10/18/2003 16:44 F110
10/15/2003 22:28 F110
(*1)
10/15/2003 22:23 F110
09/15/2003 22:23
08/25/2003 11:12
F110
F110
Date (When an error occurs)
Machine model name
Serial number
Function: Fixed at "Print"
Severity: Fixed at "Error"
Error code
Error message: The content of error is displayed.
History of error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 22
04/10
8.2.4
Setting (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774
Setting of notification display

1: Valid
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 23
07/11
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
Confirm the password to the administrator.
(2)
Press the [SERVICE] button.
(3)
Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig. 8-1
Fig. 8-2
Fig. 8-3
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 24
07/05
(4)
Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".

When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
(5)
Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.

When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig. 8-4
Fig. 8-5
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig. 8-6
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 25
07/05
(6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or the [OFF] button not to notify each item for E-mail and FAX.
When Total Count Transmit is set to ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure.
Fig. 8-7
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.

The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
Notify Date 1
Notify Date 2
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
Day of the week ([Sunday] to [Saturday] buttons)

Pressing the buttons ([Sunday] to [Saturday]) of the desired day makes transmission on every
specified day. More than one day can be selected.
* This does not affect the settings of "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date 2".
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 26
07/05
Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ([DATE] button)

Pressing the [DATE] button sets up to 2 dates on which you wand to send data.
* This is not affected by the specified day of the week.
Fig. 8-8
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [SET]
button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
Time setting ([CHANGE] button)

Pressing the [CHANGE] button sets the time at which you wand to send data.
This is the time when data are sent with "Day of the week", "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date
2".
8
Fig. 8-9
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".

Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute
column of "Time" and press the [SET] button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
After all the settings are completed, press the [ENTER] button. The display returns to the screen
in step (5).
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 27
07/05
(7)
Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
E-mail address 1
E-mail address 2
E-mail address 3
FAX number
Total Counter Transmit setting
Total counter transmission date setting
Total counter transmission date setting(2)
Day of total counter data transmission
08 code
767
768
777
778
1145
769
770
9880
9881
Total counter transmission interval setting

Service Call Transmit setting
PM Counter Transmit setting
776
Contents
0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 32 digits
0 to 31
0 to 31
1 byte
00000000(0)-01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
00:00-23:59
775
771

e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 28
07/05
8.2.5
Items to be notified (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The items to be notified are shown below.

1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the
same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Date
: 01/01/2007 12:34
Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx
SerialNumber : 1234567890
Total Counter : 00004787
Supplier:
Name
: SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail
: Supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address
: SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
Customer:
Name
: CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail
: customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address
: CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
Service Technician:
Number
: svc12
Name
: SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail
: svc@toshibatec.co.jp
ChargeCounterFormat:
LargeSizeChargeCount
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition
1
PMCounterFormat:
LargeSizePMCount
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition
Charge Counter:
Large
<Print Counter>
Copy
00000000
Print
00000000
List
00000000
FAX
00000000
<Scan Counter>
Copy Scan
00000000
FAX Scan
00000000
Net Scan
00000000
<FAX Counter>
Transmit
00000000
Receive
00000000
1
0
Small
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Periodical Maintenance Counter:

Set PM
00150000
Current PM
00004787
Set PMTime
00000000
CurrentPMTime 00000000
Date
Time
ErrorCode
----------------------------------------------12/13/2006 16:44
F110
12/12/2006 22:28
F110
12/12/2006 22:23
F110
11/15/2006 22:23
F110
10/25/2006 11:12
F110
(*1)
Fig. 8-10
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 29
07/11
Date
Machine model name
Serial number
Total counter value
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
History of error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 30
07/05
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX

*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION".
Sheet 1
1
2
3
4
DATE
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
TOTAL COUNTER
: '07-01-01 12:34
: TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx
: 1234567890
: 00004787
CUSTOMER NAME
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
: CUSTOMER_NAME
: CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
: 1234567890
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER

SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER
: svc12
: 0987654321
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER
SUPPLIER E-MAIL
: SUPPLIER_NAME
: SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
: 5544332211
: supplier_emailaddress@ccccc.xxx
Sheet 2
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT
8
9
PM COUNTER FORMAT
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT

LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION
:1
:1
PRINT COUNTER
COPY
PRINT
LIST
FAX
SCAN COUNTER
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
LARGE
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
16
17
18
FAX COUNTER
19
20
25
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
:1
:0
10 11
CHARGE COUNTER
12
13
14
15
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT

LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION
COPY SCAN
FAX SCAN
NET SCAN
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER

21
22
23
24
SET PM
CURRENT PM
SET PM TIME
CURRENT PM TIME
:
:
:
:
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY

DATE
06/12/13
06/12/12
06/12/12
06/11/15
06/10/25
TIME
16:44
22:28
22:23
22:23
11:12
ERROR CODE
F110
F110
F110
F110
F110
DATE
TIME
ERROR CODE
(*2)
Fig. 8-11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 31
07/05
Date
Machine model name
Serial number
Total counter value
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
History of error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 32
07/05
3) Service Call Transmit

Subject: Service Call Notification
1
Date: 01/01/2007 12:34

Machine Name: e-STUDIOxxx SerialNumber:1234567890
2
3
4
5
6
Function: Printer
Severity: Error
ErrorCode: XXXX
Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Supplier:
Name
Tel Number
E-Mail
Address
: SUPPLIER_NAME
: 1122334455
: supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
: SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
Customer:
Name
Tel Number
E-Mail
Address
: CUSTOMER_NAME
: 1234567890
: CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10
Service Technician:
Number
: svc12
Name
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail
11

Date
Time
ErrorCode
-----------------------------------------12/13/2006 16:44
F110
12/12/2006 22:28
F110
(*1)
12/12/2006 22:23
F110
11/15/2006 22:23
F110
10/25/2006 11:12
F110
8
Fig. 8-12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 33
07/05
Date (When an error occurs)
Machine model name
Serial number
Function: Fixed at "Printer"
Severity: Fixed at "Error"
Error code
Error message: The content of error is displayed.
10
11
History of error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 34
07/05
9.
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE

(e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in
a batch.
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.
Storage location
Root directory
Program file name

rootusb, clone_352_452
Important:
It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h)
(Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)
(SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h)
(Bulk-only)
*
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equivalent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter values are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
Before starting data cloning, check that Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage
device (08-9889) is set at "0" (Accepted). If this is set at "1" (Not accepted), data cloning is
disabled. In this case, ask the administrator to enable it on the TopAccess menu.
Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
9-1
07/11
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup)

Important:
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly.
Back up or restore SRAM data only for the same equipment in the same ROM version. If
SRAM data are restored into the other equipment, problems such as overlapping serial numbers may occur.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(2)
Write the program file.

Write the data cloning program into the root directory.
(3)
(4)
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device

Fig. 9-1
Notes:
In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-2
07/11
<User Data Backup>

(5)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
Note:
When Disable is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-3
(6)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.

In case of backup, select one of the following items.
<Backing up User data>
Select "1: User Data Back Up".
<Backing up Setting item>
Select "3: Setting Back Up".
<Backing up SRAM data>
Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-3
07/11
(7)
Press the [1] button.

The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-4
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-4
05/11
(8)
Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.

The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Backing up Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
< Backing up Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Backing up 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Backing up Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
< Backing up User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-5
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-5
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)
(9)
Press the [Start] button.

The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-6
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-7
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-6
05/11
<Setting Backup>
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
Fig. 9-8
Notes:
When Disable is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-9
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-7
07/11
(14) Press the [3] button.

The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-10
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.

To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Backing up Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-8
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)
(16) Press the [Start] button.
Fig. 9-11
Fig. 9-12
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9-9
05/11
<SRAM Data Backup>

Fig. 9-13
Notes:
Fig. 9-14
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 10
07/11

The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-15
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys.

To back up the data individually, select the following item.
<Backing up SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
Fig. 9-16
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 11
05/11
Fig. 9-17
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 12
05/11
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore)

Important:
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly.
(1)
(2)
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device

Fig. 9-18
Notes:
In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 13
05/11
<User Data Restore>

(3)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
Fig. 9-19
Note:
When Disable is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-20
(4)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.

In case of restore, select the following items.
<Restoring User data>
Select "2: User Data Restore".
<Restoring Setting item>
Select "4: Setting Restore".
<Restoring SRAM data>
Select "6: SRAM Data Restore".
Note:
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 14
07/11
(5)
Press the [2] button.

The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-21
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 15
05/11
(6)
Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.

To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
To restore the data individually, select the following items.
Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually.
<Restoring Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Restoring Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
< Restoring Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Restoring 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Restoring Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Restoring User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-22
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 16
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)
(7)
Press the [Start] button.

The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-23
(8)
"Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-24
(9)
Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] [ADMIN] Enter the password
[COUNTER] [DEPARTMENT SETTING] Enter the password [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 17
05/11
<Setting Restore>
Fig. 9-25
Notes:
Fig. 9-26
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 18
07/11

The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-27
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.

To restore the data individually, select the following items.
<Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Restoring Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
Note:
Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were
backed up.
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 19
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)
Fig. 9-28
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-29
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 20
05/11
<SRAM Data Restore>

Fig. 9-30
Notes:
Fig. 9-31
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 21
07/11

The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-32
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys.

To restore the data individually, select the following item.
<Restoring SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
Fig. 9-33
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 22
05/11
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-34
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 23
[C] Confirmation of the error

"Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly?
Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?
Fig. 9-35
Error number
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR 3
ERROR 4
ERROR 5
ERROR 6
ERROR 7
ERROR 8
ERROR 9
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
Error content
Copy error
I/F error
USB memory full error
Working folder error
File not found error
Security error
Checksum error
Model check error
Version check error
Destination check error
Serial number check error
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 24
05/11
[D] Backup file

Backed up data files are encrypted.
<User data file>
The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Address book
Mailbox
Template
Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch
Department management information
User management information
File name
BACKUP_ADDR.sct
BACKUP_MBOX.sct
BACKUP_TEMP.sct
BACKUP_ALL.sct
BACKUP_Department.sct
BACKUP_User.sct
<Setting data file>

The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Network / Print service
SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX
Notification setting
Directory Service
FAX setting
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting
File name
network.sct
scan.sct
notice.sct
ldap.sct
fax.sct
wl.sct, bl.sct
<SRAM data file>

The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it.
Data item
File name
SRAM
sram.sct
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item
File name
user_data.txt
setting_data.txt
sram_data.txt
User data
Setting item data
SRAM data
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)

Line 1: Version
Line 2: Serial number
Line 3: Date
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 25
05/11
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
9 - 26
10 - 1
05/11
MJD MODEL:
OPTION
CN431
AC(L)
4
PWA-F-FUS
INLET
(AC IN)
MAIN
GND
RY
AC(L:MAIN)
AC(N:MAIN)
NF
4
AC(N)
AC(L)
SAD,TWD NAD
MODELS:
STANDARD
NS-FIL
(NOISE FILTER)
J656
2 2
3 3
1 1
J662
CN432
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN432
1
2
3
4
5
6
PWA-F-FIL
CN433
3
2
1
RY
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
2 2
1 1
J581
CN528
1 3
2 2
SG
3 1
+5.1VB
(OPTION)
+5V
WIRELESS LAN
AC ADAPTER
CN433
3
2
1
1
2
SG
3
BREAKER
+5.1VB
N
A
GND
B
L
C
CN493
AC(L)
1
2
J655
J582
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
LOAD
J653
AC(N:OUT)
AC (GND)
AC(L:OUT)
3
AC(N)
4
CN494
AC(L)
4
FG
AC(N)
3
2
1
CN495
+5.1VB
1
2
SG
3
ASD,AUD,CND
MODELS:
STANDARD
AC(N)
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
SG
+5.1VB
J541
COV-INTLCK-SW
J598
2 2
1 1
J606
A
CN451
AC(N:SCN DH)
AC(L:SCN DH)
AC(N:DRM DH)
AC(L:DRM DH)
PS-IH
SCANNER
J641 J60
2
1
J635
J463
J462
J583
1
J411
1
J61
J62
THERMO-SCN-DH
THERMO-DRM-DH
CN454
DH-SCN-N
1 1
DH-SCN-L
2 2
J644
2
1
J607
B
CN450
AC-IN-THM(N)
CN453
AC-IN-THM(N)
AC-IN-THM(N)
AC-IN(L)
AC(L:DOOR)
AC(N:DOOR)
AC(L:MAIN)
AC(L:MAIN)
J604
AC(N:MAIN)
AC(N:MAIN)
OPENING/CLOSING
(COVER
)
INTERLOCK SWITCH
MAIN-SW
(MAIN-SWITCH)
AC(N:DRM DH)
AC(L:DRM DH)
AC(N:SCN DH)
AC(L:SCN DH)
AC(L)
AC(N)
1 1
2 2
J63
J64
1 1
2 2
CN413
11
12
+5.1VB
SG
NAD,MJD MODELS:
OPTION
ASD,AUD,SAD,
TWD,CND MODELS:
STANDARD
FUSER
DC
SCN-L-DH
SCN-R-DH
IH-COIL
THERMO-FSR
AC-DC
DC
PS-ACC
AC-DC
DRM-DH
F1
F2
NF
NF
e-STUDIO350/450 only
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10.1 AC Wire Harness
10
Fig. 10-1
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10 - 2
SCRAMBLER BOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J428
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J429
PCI SLOT(1)
J425
LDFC-1
1
LDFC-2
2
LDFC-4
3
LDFC-5
4
LDFC-6
5
LDFC-7
6
LDFC-8
7
LDFC-9
8
LDFC-10
9
LDFC-11
10
LDFC-12
11
LDFC-13
12
LDFC-15
13
LDON0
14
LDON1
15
SG
16
J426
SCN15
1
SCN14
2
SCN13
3
SCN12
4
SCN11
5
RET0
6
RET1
7
RET2
8
RET3
9
RET8
10
RET9
11
J424
FRAWE
1
LOAD
2
CP
3
SG
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
VEE
7
D.OFF
8
D0
9
D1
10
D2
11
D3
12
J422
YD
1
XL
2
XR
3
YU
4
J423
CCFL+
1
2
CCFL3
PCI SLOT(0)
PWA-F-DSP
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
J427
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
COIN CONTROLLER/
COPY KEY CARD
(OPTION)
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WE-1A
YP-1A
SG
BZON-0A
CPPOW-0A
LDCLKA
LDDAT-0A
LDLTH-0A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
RSTCP-0A
SG
RTS1-0A
CTS1-0A
SOUT0-1A
SIN0-1A
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
PCI
J527
J523
J526
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
CN150
CN126
L/S
1
FULL-C
2
MONO-C
3
B/W
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
NC
7
CN118
XSCL-1A
1
LP-1A
2
WF-1A
3
YD-1A
4
INVGND
5
BZON-0A
6
CPPOW-1A
7
LDCLK-1A
8
LDDAT-1A
9
LDLTH-1A
10
LDON1-0A
11
LDON0-0A
12
SG
13
+5.1VA
14
+5.1VA
15
+5.1VA
16
+5.1VA
17
CPRST-0A
18
SG
19
RTS0-0A
20
CTS0-0A
21
SOUT[0]
22
SIN[0]
23
SG
24
UD3-1A
25
UD2-1A
26
UD1-1A
27
UD0-1A
28
SG
29
LCDEN-1A
30
CN124
+3.3VA
1
+3.3VA
2
+3.3VA
3
SG
4
-12VA
5
-12VA
6
+5.1VA
7
+5.1VA
8
+3.3VA
9
OPBINT(2)
10
OPBINT(0)
11
SG
12
PCICLK(5)
13
SG
14
PCICLK(3)
15
SG
16
REQ(1)#
17
REQ(0)#
18
+3.3VA
19
AD[31]
20
AD[29]
21
SG
22
AD[27]
23
AD[25]
24
+3.3VA
25
C/BE(3)#
26
AD[23]
27
SG
28
AD[21]
29
AD[19]
30
+3.3VA
31
AD[17]
32
C/BE(2)#
33
SG
34
IRDY#
35
+3.3VA
36
DEVSEL#
37
SG
38
LOCK#
39
PERR#
40
+3.3VA
41
SERR#
42
+3.3VA
43
C/BE(1)#
44
AD[14]
45
SG
46
AD[12]
47
AD[10]
48
M66EN
49
SG
50
AD[8]
51
AD[7]
52
+3.3VA
53
AD[5]
54
AD[3]
55
SG
56
AD[1]
57
+3.3VA
58
+5.1VA
59
SG
60
+3.3VA
61
+3.3VA
62
+3.3VA
63
SG
64
+12VA
65
+12VA
66
+5.1VA
67
+5.1VA
68
+3.3VA
69
OPBINT(1)
70
+3.3VA
71
PCIRST#
72
+3.3VA
73
PCICLK(4)
74
+3.3VA
75
GNT(1)#
76
GNT(0)#
77
SG
78
PME#
79
AD[30]
80
+3.3VA
81
AD[28]
82
AD[26]
83
SG
84
AD[24]
85
+3.3VA
86
+3.3VA
87
AD[22]
88
AD[20]
89
SG
90
AD[18]
91
AD[16]
92
+3.3VA
93
FRAME#
94
SG
95
TRDY#
96
SG
97
STOP#
98
+3.3VA
99
+3.3VA
100
SG
101
SG
102
PAR
103
AD[15]
104
+3.3VA
105
AD[13]
106
AD[11]
107
SG
108
AD[9]
109
SG
110
C/BE(0)#
111
+3.3VA
112
AD[6]
113
AD[4]
114
SG
115
AD[2]
116
AD[0]
117
+3.3VA
118
+5.1VA
119
+5.1VA
120
CN120
VBUS
1
D2
D+
3
SG
4
VBUS
5
D6
D+
7
SG
8
CN119
VBUS
1
D2
D+
3
SG
4
CN109
TXD
1
RXD
2
RTS
3
DSR
4
DTR
5
CTS
6
CNT
7
SG
8
CN172
3
2
7
6
4
8
1
5
NC
9
CN108
STB
1
DATA0
2
DATA1
3
DATA2
4
DATA3
5
DATA4
6
DATA5
7
DATA6
8
DATA7
9
NACK
10
BUSY
11
PERROR
12
SELECT
13
NATFD
14
NC
15
SG
16
FG
17
LOGIC
18
SG
19
SG
20
SG
21
SG
22
SG
23
SG
24
SG
25
SG
26
SG
27
SG
28
SG
29
SG
30
NINIT
31
NFAULT
32
NC
33
NC
34
NC
35
NSELIN
36
CN112
/RESET
1
SG
2
DD7
3
DD8
4
DD6
5
DD9
6
DD5
7
DD10
8
DD4
9
DD11
10
DD3
11
DD12
12
DD2
13
DD13
14
DD1
15
DD14
16
DD0
17
DD15
18
SG
19
NC(KEY)
20
MDARQ
21
SG
22
/DIOW
23
SG
24
/DIOR
25
SG
26
IORDY
27
SG
28
/DMACK
29
SG
30
INTRQ
31
NC(RESERVED)
32
DA1
33
/PDIAG
34
DA0
35
DA2
36
/CS0
37
/CS1
38
/DASP
39
SG
40
STANADARD
CN113
+12VA
1
SG
2
SG
3
+5.1VA
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN170
1
2
3
4
CN171
HDD
CN116
SG
1
DQ0
2
DQ1
3
DQ2
4
DQ3
5
+3.3VA
6
DQ4
7
DQ5
8
DQ6
9
DQ7
10
DQ8
11
SG
12
DQ9
13
DQ10
14
DQ11
15
DQ12
16
DQ13
17
+3.3VA
18
DQ14
19
DQ15
20
NC
21
NC
22
SG
23
NC
24
NC
25
+3.3VA
26
/WE
27
DQMB0
28
DQMB1
29
/CS0
30
NC
31
SG
32
A0
33
A2
34
A4
35
A6
36
A8
37
A10
38
BA1
39
+3.3VA
40
+3.3VA
41
CLK0
42
SG
43
NC
44
/CS2
45
DQMB2
46
DQMB3
47
NC
48
+3.3VA
49
NC
50
NC
51
NC
52
NC
53
SG
54
DQ16
55
DQ17
56
DQ18
57
DQ19
58
+3.3VA
59
DQ20
60
NC
61
NC
62
CKE1
63
SG
64
DQ21
65
DQ22
66
DQ23
67
SG
68
DQ24
69
DQ25
70
DQ26
71
DQ27
72
+3.3VA
73
DQ28
74
DQ29
75
DQ30
76
DQ31
77
SG
78
CLK2
79
NC
80
NC(WP)
81
SDA
82
SCL
83
+3.3VA
84
SG
85
DQ32
86
DQ33
87
DQ34
88
DQ35
89
+3.3VA
90
DQ36
91
DQ37
92
DQ38
93
DQ39
94
DQ40
95
SG
96
DQ41
97
DQ42
98
DQ43
99
DQ44
100
DQ45
101
+3.3VA
102
DQ46
103
DQ47
104
NC
105
NC
106
SG
107
NC
108
NC
109
+3.3VA
110
/CAS
111
DQMB4
112
DQMB5
113
/CS1
114
/RAS
115
SG
116
A1
117
A3
118
A5
119
A7
120
A9
121
A11
122
BA0
123
+3.3VA
124
NC(CLK1)
125
A12
126
SG
127
CKE
128
/CS3
129
DQMB6
130
DQMB7
131
NC(A13)
132
+3.3VA
133
NC
134
NC
135
NC
136
NC
137
SG
138
DQ48
139
DQ49
140
DQ50
141
DQ51
142
+3.3VA
143
DQ52
144
NC
145
NC
146
NC
147
SG
148
DQ53
149
DQ54
150
DQ55
151
SG
152
DQ56
153
DQ57
154
DQ58
155
DQ59
156
+3.3VA
157
DQ60
158
DQ61
159
DQ62
160
DQ63
161
SG
162
NC(CLK3)
163
NC
164
SA0
165
SA1
166
SA2
167
+3.3VA
168
PWA-F-SYS
Board to Board
J3
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN14
CN1
+5.1VB
1
+5.1VB
2
SG
3
SG
4
CCDRS
5
SG
6
CCDCP
7
SG
8
CCDSH
9
SG
10
CCDCK2B
11
SG
12
CCDCK2A
13
SG
14
CCDCK1A
15
SG
16
CCD-EVEN
17
SG
18
CCD-ODD
19
SG
20
AG
21
AG
22
AG
23
+12VB
24
+12VB
25
+12VB
26
CN600
TXOUT2
1
+5VA
2
+12VB
3
+3.3VB
4
MOD2DMA-1
5
SG
6
MEM2CS-0
7
+5.1VB
8
MEMRD2-0
9
CLKOE-1
10
TXEN2-1
11
+5.1VB
12
A[16]
13
A[14]
14
A[12]
15
A[10]
16
A[8]
17
A[6]
18
A[4]
19
A[2]
20
A[0]
21
+5.1VB
22
CEP1RST-0
23
+5.1VB
24
SG
25
CEPCLK
26
SG
27
D[0]
28
D[2]
29
D[4]
30
D[6]
31
D[8]
32
D[10]
33
D[12]
34
D[14]
35
SG
36
MOD2DET-0
37
SG
38
DREQC2-1
39
DACKC2-0
40
RXIN2
41
AG
42
-12VB
43
AG
44
MD2INT-1
45
MOD2CS-0
46
MOD2RST-0
47
SG
48
RXEN2-1
49
MEMWRH2-0
50
MEMWRL2-0
51
A[18]
52
A[17]
53
A[15]
54
A[13]
55
A[11]
56
A[9]
57
A[7]
58
A[5]
59
A[3]
60
A[1]
61
CPURST-0
62
CEP2INT-1
63
+5.1VB
64
+5.1VB
65
IORD2-0
66
IOWR2-0
67
D[1]
68
D[3]
69
D[5]
70
D[7]
71
D[9]
72
D[11]
73
D[13]
74
D[15]
75
+5.1VB
76
+5.1VB
77
CEP2CS-0
78
DREQD2-1
79
DACKD2-0
80
CN702
+24VB
3 1
PG
2 2
NC
1 3
JPD MODEL ONLY
J558
NC
NC
1 3
PG
PG
2 2
+24VB
+24VB
3 1
MDM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
CN401
FAX(OPTION)
CN9
PG
1
PG
2
LMPON-A
3
+24VD4
4
+24VD4
5
1
2
3
4
5
CN20
LP-EXPO
A4
SERIES
ONLY
FAX
INV-EXP
SCAN-MOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
APS1
APS2
APS3
APS-C
APS-R
J34
2
1
+5VAPS
APS1
SG
J29
3
2
1
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT
+5.1VB
LED
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
PNLCS
PNLDT1
PNLDT3
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD
PNLDT0
PNLDT2
+5VAPS
APS2
SG
J30
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
+5VAPS
APS3
SG
J31
3
2
1
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR
SG
+5VAPS
APSC
SG
CN502
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NC
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NC
21
NC
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
NC
29
NC
30
(OPTION)
RADF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN22
B7
B8
B9
B4
B5
B6
B1
B2
B3
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FG
CN1
CN701
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
NC
50
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CN6
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN4
CN602
D[0]
1
D[2]
2
D[4]
3
D[6]
4
RD-0
5
A[0]
6
A[2]
7
A[4]
8
A[6]
9
A[8]
10
A[10]
11
A[12]
12
A[14]
13
A[16]
14
A[18]
15
SG
16
SG
17
D[1]
18
D[3]
19
D[5]
20
D[7]
21
BOOTCS-0
22
A[1]
23
A[3]
24
A[5]
25
A[7]
26
A[9]
27
A[11]
28
A[13]
29
A[15]
30
A[17]
31
ROMDET0-0
32
+5.1VB
33
LEDDL-0
34
J32
3
2
1
J33
3
2
1
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
CN501
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHOOK
+5.1VB
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
RESERVED
NCU
(2)
NCU
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN503
1
2
+
-
Board to Board
SPEAKER
CN21
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J151
J152
TRST#
A1
+12VA
A2
TMS
A3
TD1
A4
+5.1VA
A5
INTA#
A6
INTC#
A7
+5.1VA
A8
RESERVED
A9
+3.3VA
A10
RESERVED
A11
A12
A13
+3.3VAUX
A14
RST#
A15
+3.3VA
A16
GNT#
A17
SG
A18
RME#
A19
AD[30]
A20
+3.3VA
A21
AD[28]
A22
AD[26]
A23
SG
A24
AD[24]
A25
IDSEL
A26
+3.3VA
A27
AD[22]
A28
AD[20]
A29
SG
A30
AD[18]
A31
AD[16]
A32
+3.3VA
A33
FRAME#
A34
SG
A35
TRDY#
A36
SG
A37
STOP#
A38
+3.3VA
A39
RESERVED
A40
RESERVED
A41
SG
A42
PAR
A43
AD[15]
A44
+3.3VA
A45
AD[13]
A46
AD[11]
A47
SG
A48
AD[09]
A49
SG
A50
SG
A51
C/BE(0)#
A52
+3.3VA
A53
AD[06]
A54
AD[04]
A55
SG
A56
AD[02]
A57
AD[00]
A58
+3.3VA
A59
REQ64#
A60
+5.1VA
A61
+5.1VA
A62
-12VA
B1
TCK
B2
SG
B3
TD0
B4
+5.1VA
B5
+5.1VA
B6
INTB#
B7
INTD#
B8
PRSNT1#
B9
RESERVED
B10
PRSNT2#
B11
B12
B13
RESERVED
B14
SG
B15
CLK
B16
SG
B17
REQ#
B18
+3.3VA
B19
AD[31]
B20
AD[29]
B21
SG
B22
AD[27]
B23
AD[25]
B24
+3.3VA
B25
C/BE(3)#
B26
AD[23]
B27
SG
B28
AD[21]
B29
AD[19]
B30
+3.3VA
B31
AD[17]
B32
C/BE(2)#
B33
SG
B34
IRDY#
B35
+3.3VA
B36
DEVSEL#
B37
SG
B38
LOCK#
B39
PERR#
B40
+3.3VA
B41
SERR#
B42
+3.3VA
B43
C/BE(1)#
B44
AD[14]
B45
SG
B46
AD[12]
B47
AD[10]
B48
M66EN
B49
SG
B50
SG
B51
AD[08]
B52
AD[07]
B53
+3.3VA
B54
AD[05]
B55
AD[03]
B56
SG
B57
AD[01]
B58
+3.3VA
B59
ACK64#
B60
+5.1VA
B61
+5.1VA
B62
PWA-F-CCD
PWA-F-NIC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
AG
+12VB
PG
PG
+24VD4
+24VD4
DOWNLOAD JIG(FAX)
(OPTION)
LCD
BACK LIGHT
TOUCH
PANEL
LCD PANEL
PWA-F-KEY
PC I/F(IEEE1284)
RS-232C
(D-sub 9pin)
USB
DEVICE
USB HOST
Board to Board
PLTNSNR
FG
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J38
CN102
SYSRST
1
SCTS
2
STXD
3
SRXD
4
SRTS
5
SCNT
6
SG
7
SVDEN
8
SDCLK
9
SHDEN
10
SG
11
SG
12
SCD7
13
SCD6
14
SCD5
15
SCD4
16
SCD3
17
SCD2
18
SCD1
19
SCD0
20
CN101
+5.1VB
1
DA1
2
+5.1VB
3
DD0
4
+5.1VB
5
DD3
6
+5.1VB
7
DD6
8
+5.1VB
9
DD9
10
SG
11
DD12
12
SG
13
SG
14
SG
15
SG
16
SG
17
SG
18
+3.3VB
19
INTRQ
20
+3.3VB
21
+5.1VA
22
-12VB
23
SG
24
+12VB
25
DA0
26
DA2
27
IDECS
28
DD1
29
DD2
30
DD4
31
DD5
32
DD7
33
DD8
34
DD10
35
DD11
36
DD13
37
DD14
38
DD15
39
/DIOR
40
/DIOW
41
/DMACK
42
/DLDCS0
43
/RESET
44
DMARQ
45
NC
46
FXWP
47
SG
48
SG
49
NC
50
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
J40
CN122
PWR-DN
26
PWR-EN
25
SG
24
-12VB
23
SG
22
+12VB
21
SG
20
+12VA
19
SG
18
-12VA
17
SG
16
SG
15
+3.3VA
14
+3.3VA
13
+3.3VA
12
+3.3VA
11
SG
10
SG
9
+3.3VB
8
+3.3VB
7
SG
6
SG
5
+5.1VA
4
SG
3
+5.1VA
2
+5.1VB
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN412
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN415
SG
24
SG
23
+5.1VB
22
+5.1VB
21
SG
20
SG
19
+3.3VB
18
+3.3VB
17
SG
16
+12VB
15
NC
14
NC
13
PG
12
PG
11
+24VD4
10
+24VD4
9
CN117
+5.1VB
A1
CBSY-0
A2
CMD-0
A3
SACK-0
A4
SERR-0
A5
SBSY-0
A6
STS-0
A7
CACK-0
A8
CERR-0
A9
SG
A10
SG
A11
SG
A12
IRCLK-1
A13
SG
A14
IHSYNC-0
A15
SG
A16
IVSYNC-0
A17
MCNT-1
B1
SYSRST-0
B2
IDATX[0]
B3
IDATX[1]
B4
IDATX[2]
B5
IDATX[3]
B6
IDATX[4]
B7
IDATX[5]
B8
IDATX[6]
B9
IDATX[7]
B10
SG
B11
IDCLK-1
B12
SG
B13
IHDEN-0
B14
SG
B15
IVDEN-0
B16
+3.3VB
B17
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J2
CN100
SG
SG
/WRX
RMSL
+3.3VA
/CS0
DWNLED
A02
A04
A06
A08
A10
A12
A14
A16
A18
A20
DATA15
DATA13
DATA11
DATA9
DATA7
DATA5
DATA3
DATA1
SG
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
CS7-B
CS7-A
RDX
A03
A05
A07
A09
A11
A13
A15
A17
A19
A21
DATA14
DATA12
DATA10
DATA8
DATA6
DATA4
DATA2
DATA0
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DOWNLOAD JIG(LGC)
CN418
+24VD1
1
PWRFN-0A
2
CN416
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
+24VD5
3
PG
4
CN414
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
+24VD2
5
+24VD2
6
PG
7
PG
8
+5.1VD
9
SG
10
CN413
+3.3VB
1
SG
2
+5.1VB
3
+5.1VB
4
SG
5
SG
6
+12VB
7
SG
8
PDWN-1A
9
PWRFN-0A
10
+5.1VB
11
SG
12
+24VB
13
PG
14
LAN(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
DOWNLOAD JIG(SYS)
PS-ACC
J45
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
J36
SG
3
PLTN
2
+5.1VB
1
J35
SG
3
HOME
2
+5.1VB
1
HOMESNR
1
2
3
4
CN19
SCNM-BB
1
+24VD4
2
SCNM-B
3
SCNM-AB
4
+24VD4
5
SCNM-A
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
DOWNLOAD JIG(SLG)
CN7
J37
PWA-F-SYS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
(TD+)FA1
(TD-)FA2
(RD+)FA3
FA45
FA45
(RD-)FA6
FA78
FA78
NC(MTG)
NC(MTG)
SH
SH
SH
SH
CN2
Board to Board
Board to Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
PWA-F-SLG
+
-
PWA-F-LGC
PS-FAN-MOT
+5.1VB
1 1
NC
NC
2 2
SG
3 3
J528
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN307
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
CN321
CN312
D[0]
1
D[2]
2
D[4]
3
D[6]
4
RD-0
5
A[0]
6
A[2]
7
A[4]
8
A[6]
9
A[8]
10
A[10]
11
A[12]
12
A[14]
13
A[16]
14
A[18]
15
SG
16
SG
17
D[1]
18
D[3]
19
D[5]
20
D[7]
21
CS2-0
22
A[1]
23
A[3]
24
A[5]
25
A[7]
26
A[9]
27
A[11]
28
A[13]
29
A[15]
30
A[17]
31
ROMDT-0
32
+5.1VB
33
ROMLD-1
34
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
RLHSW-0
RLTRS-0
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
OPCHK1
RLCSW-0
SG
JFSL2ON
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
1 11
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1A
+5VSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
J510
SG
BTLSW-1
MAMCK-1A
+5.1VB
SG
MAMON-0A
MAMCW-0A
MAMBK-0A
MAMPL-1
9 9
5 5
1 1
J582
CN301
PG
8
PG
7
PG
6
PG
5
+24VD2
4
+24VD2
3
+24VD2
2
+24VD2
1
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A9
A8
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
4
3
2
1
PWA-FFIL
CN431
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
PWA-F3
FUS
4
CN495
+5.1VB
1
2
SG
3
4
3
2
1
JPD,ASD,AUD,CND
MODELS :STANDARD
MJD MODEL :OPTION
NAD,SAD,TWD
MODELS :STANDARD
J527
POLFN-0A
2
LSU-FAN-MOT
+24VD1
1
J505
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
MAMON-0A
3
MAMCK-0A
4
MAMCW-0A
5
MAMPL-0A
6 MAIN-MOT
NC
7
PG
8
PG
9
+24VD2
10
+24VD2
11
MAMBK-0A
12
J549
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT1
J554
2
DEV-CLT
1
DEVCL-0A
A11
+24VD2
A10
J504
2
RGT-CLT
1
J507
1
2 RGST-SNR
3
J506
1
2 FED-U-SNR
3
J550
+5.1VB
1 6
CUFED-1
2 5
SG
3 4
+5.1VB
4 3
PSTPC-1
5 2
SG
6 1
J509
1
2 FED-L-SNR
3
+5.1VB
3 3
CLFED-1
4 2
SG
5 1
J508
1 SIDE-COVSW
2
TNR-SW
J533
1
TNR-MOT
2
+5.1VB
PSTPC-1
SG
NC
NC
RGTCL-0A
+24VD2
+5.1VB
CUFED-1
SG
+5.1VB
CLFED-1
SG
J542
SG
1 5
SDCSW-1
2 4
J553
1
2
SG
3
TNRMT-1A
A13
TNRMT-0A
A12
B3
B2
B1
A17
A16
A15
A14
B6
B5
B4
B9
B8
B7
SG
B11
SDCSW-1
B10
B12
BTLSW-1
J638
1
USD-TNR2
FLL-SNR1
3
J513
1
IHFAN-MOT
2
CN318
NC
B17
+5.1VB
B16
TBFL-1
B15
SG
B14
B13
(OPTION)
EXITMOT
J640
1
FUSFAN-MOT
2
JOB SEPARATOR/
OFFSET TRAY/
BRIDGE UNIT
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+24VD2
THM-2
THMSS-HTR
THM-1
THMSC-HTR
PS-IH
J621
1
EXIT-SNR
2
3
CN456
IH1ON
1
SG
2
NC
3
H1ERR1
4
H1ERR2
5
CN455
IH2ON
1
+5VSW
2
H1PWR1
3
H1PWR2
4
H1PWR3
5
H2PWR1
6
H2PWR2
7
H2PWR3
8
J565
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT2
J548
+5.1VB
1 3
TBLF-1
2 2
SG
3 1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J512
J552
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SG
4 8
+24VD2
3 9
FUSFN-0A
2 10
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
J511
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
J520
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN320
DV2FN-0A
2
+24VD2
1
e-STUDIO350 ONLY
CPSW2-0
B18
SG
B19
+24VD2
B16
IHFN-0A
B17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A13
+24VD2
CN302
FUSSW-1A
A1
MTH+-1A
A2
MTH--1A
A3
ETH+-1A
A4
ETH--1A
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
+5.1VB
A8
EXTSW-1
A9
SG
A10
+24VD2
A11
FUSFN-0A
A12
CN316
IH2ON-0A
A1
+5VSW
A2
H1PWR1-0
A3
H1PWR2-0
A4
H1PWR3-0
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
NC
A8
NC
A9
NC
B1
H2PWR1-0
B2
H2PWR2-0
B3
H2PWR3-0
B4
IH1ON-0A
B5
SG
B6
NC
B7
H1ERR1-0
B8
H1ERR2-0
B9
CN216
1
2
NC
3
4
5
CN215
1
2
3
4
5
CN214
1
2
3
CN217
CN311
SG
1
2
COVSW
2
1
J628
CLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J629
COLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J632
+5.1VB
1
SFBFED
2
SG
3
J619
SFSZ3-0
1
SFSZ2-0
2
SFSZ1-0
PWA-F-SFB 3
SFSZ0-0
4
SG
5
J630
SG
3
SFBSW
SFB-SNR
2
+5.1VB
1
SFBFEED-CLT
SFB-SOL
SFBFED-SNR
(OPTION)
BYPASS UNIT
FINISHER
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
+24VD5
3
PG
4
CN531
1
2
3
4
ADUSET-SW
ADU-MOT
+24VD1
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
CN328
SG
3
ADUADUFU
2
TRU-SNR
+5.1VB
1
CN213
1
2
3
CN526
1
2
3
4
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
24
27
29
CN525
FG
FG
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
J507
J631
3 1
2 2
1 3
NC
J600
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
5
6
NC
7
8
F-CNT
9
CNT-GND
10
FG
CN211 CN562
ADCOV-1
1
ADTR1-1
2
ADCNT-1
3
SG
4
+5.1VB
PWA5
ADTR2-1
F-ADU
6
CRT-DOWNA
7
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
9
ADM2B-0A
10
ADM2D-0A
11
CN212 CN563
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
J599
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
FG
5
F-CNT
6
CNT-GND
7
+5.1VB
8
SG
9
NC
10
+24VD5
11
PG
12
AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
J564
ADUCL-0
2
+24VD1
1
J312
SG
3
ADUADUFL
2
TRL-SNR
+5.1VB
1
ADU-CLT
PFP/LCF
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
COINCONTROLLER
COPY KEY CARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13
14
15
16
17
18
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CN545
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN501
NC
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN314
B16
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/FO00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
FG
24
23
22
21
20
19
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN313
SFSZ3
SFSZ2
SFSZ1
SFSZ0
SG
SG
NC
SFSSW
+5.1VB
SFBFED-1
SG
SOLSFB-0A
+24VD1
SFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SG
SWBSW-1
+5.1VB
CN304
NC
18
ADUCL-0
17
+24VD1
16
ADCOV-1
15
ADTR1-1
14
ADCNT-1
13
SG
12
+5.1VB
11
ADTR2-1
10
CRT-DOWNA
9
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
7
ADM2B-0A
6
ADM2D-0A
5
+24VD1
4
+24VD1
3
PG
2
PG
1
FG
LCCNT-0
CN303
CLKC-1A
A1
CLKB-1A
A2
SCSWC-0A
A3
DRV7-1A
A4
DRV6-1A
A5
DRV5-1A
A6
DRV4-1A
A7
DRV3-1A
A8
DRV2-1A
A9
DRV1-1A
A10
DRV0-1A
A11
PFRST-0
A12
+5.1VB
A13
SG
A14
+24VD1
A15
+24VD1
A16
PG
B1
PG
B2
SIZE0-0A
B3
SIZE1-0A
B4
SIZE2-0A
B5
SIZE3-0A
B6
RETS0-0A
B7
RETS1-0A
B8
RETS2-0A
B9
RETS3-0A
B10
RETS4-0A
B11
RETS5-0A
B12
RETS6-0A
B13
RETS7-0A
B14
SCSWB-0A
B15
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
TSIZE3
TSIZE2
TSIZE1
TSIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
+24VD2
CTRON-0A
CTRCNT-0
MCRUM-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMVR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
+5.1VB
HMS-1A
SG
TEMP-1
NC
+24VD2
B7
SPFN-0A
B8
NC
B9
NC
B10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
CN317
ATSSW-0
A1
ATSVR-1A
A2
+24VD2
A3
ATS-1A
A4
SG
A5
SG
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
J557
J577
J576
J517
J516
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
PS-HVT
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CURGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
5
4
3
2
1
J203
PWAF-SNS
M/DC-POL
EMPU-SNR
EMPL-SNR
NEMPU-SNR
NEMPL-SNR
J515
1
TRY-MOT
2
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-LFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-L2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-UFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-U2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PWA-F-LDR
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN201
1
2
3
CN202
POMCK-0
POMPL-0
POMON-0
PG
+24VD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B1
B2
B3
B10
B9
B8
4
3
2
1
6
5
8
7
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
B8
B9
B10
J556
B3
B2
B1
B4
B5
B6
B7
NC
A9
NC
A10
A2
A1
B7
B6
B5
B4
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A4
A3
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
1 SEPARATION BIAS
OUT6 1
2
1
4
3
2
1
J538
3
4
1
2
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS
OUT5 1
J535
1 TRANSFER BIAS
OUT4 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
1 DEVELOPER BIAS
THMSDRM
J540
+5.1VB
1
HMS-1A
2
TEMP/
SG
3 HUMI-SNR
TEMP-1
4
J541
RSTSW-0A
2
MAIN-SW
+24VD2
(RESET)
1
J543
FRDSW-0
2
FRNTSG
COV-SW
1
J534
+24VD2
2
LP-ERS
ERSLP-0A
1
J544
+24VD2
1
SPSPFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J503
+24VD2
1
EXTEXTFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J539
+24VD2
1
MIDMIDFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J562
SG
1
USD-TNRTBNFL-1
2
FLL-SNR2
+5.1VB
3
J547
DRTH-0A
2
SG
1
J546
ATSVR-1A
1
+24VD2
2
ATTNR-SNR
ATS-1A
3
SG
4
CHARGER CASE BIAS
1 MAIN CHARGER GRID

OUT3 1
FG
1 MAIN CHARGER WIRE

OUT2 1
OUT1 1
J524
1
CST-L-SW
2
J514
1
CST-U-SW
2
J522
1
CST-TRH-CLT
2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
CN206
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
NC
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
NC
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN207
BDIN -1
3
SG
2
+5.1VB
1
1
2
3
4
5
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
CN551
NC
NC
NC
NC
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J529
KEY COPY COUNTER
(OPTION)
J523
1
CST-TRL-CLT
2
SG
A11
CLSW-0
A12
NC
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
5
4
3
2
1
CN204
4
3
2
1
J532
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
SG
A9
CUSW-0
A10
A7
A8
A5
A6
CN306
NC
A1
NC
A2
CLTRM-0A
A3
CLTRM-1A
A4
SG
B9
CLFLS-0
B10
+5.1VB
B11
B7
B8
B4
B5
B6
B1
B1
B3
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
A9
CUFLS-1
A10
+5.1VB
A11
A7
A8
A4
A5
A6
CN305
SG
A1
CUEMP-1
A2
+5.1VB
A3
CN309
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
BDIN-1
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
+5.1VB
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN308
POMPL-0
1
POMON-0A
2
POMCK-0A
3
PG
4
+24VD1
5
CN315
NC
1
SG
2
KCTRC-0
3
+24VD2
4
KCTRO-0
5
NC
6
PWA-F-LRL
CN121
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
NC(/CS2P)
D15
D14
D13
SG
D12
D11
D10
SG
D09
D08
/INTPR1
SG
A03
A02
A01
NC(SRXD)
A00
D07
D06
A15
D05
A14
D04
A13
D03
A12
D02
A11
D01
A10
D00
A09
A04
A08
/RESET
A07
/ACK
A06
/CSP1
A05
NC(OEP)
NC(STXD)
RW
SG
A16
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC(DACK)
+3.3VA
/INTPR2
SG
BRDIN
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1st.DRAWER
2nd.DRAWER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
05/11
IPC
10.2 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)
Board to Board
DIMM(0)
Board to Board
10.3 Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450)

CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> MAIN-MOT, PS-ACC(CN414)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
PG
PG
Name
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
Active
-
CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> JOB SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET

TRAY (OPTION)/BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION), IH-FAN-MOT, EXITMOT, FUS-FAN-MOT, EXIT-SNR,THMS-S-HTR, THMS-C-HTR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
B1
B2
Symbol
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1
SG
+24VD2
FUSFN-0A
+24VD2
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
B3
RLHSW-0
B4
RLTRS-0
B5
B6
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
Name
Paper exit unit connection detection signal
Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal
Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Exit sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Fuser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
+24V
+24V
Exit motor drive signal-A
Exit motor drive signal-B
Exit motor drive signal-C
Exit motor drive signal-D
+5V
Not used
+5V
Job separator: lower stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: stack sensor detection signal
Job separator: paper jam sensor detection signal
Offset tray: paper feed sensor detection signal
Job separator/offset tray connection detection signal
Not used
B7
OPCHK1
Job separator/offset tray judgment signal
B8
B9
RLCSW-0
SG
B10
JFSL2ON
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
+24VD2
IHFN-0A
Job separator/offset tray cover switch detection signal

Signal ground
Job separator: upper stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: separation sensor detection signal
Solenoid driving signal
+24V
Power ground
OCT motor drive signal-2
+24V
IH board cooling fan motor drive signal
B18
CPSW2-0
e-STUDIO350/450 judgment signal
B19
SG
Signal ground
Active
H
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
-
L
L: Offset tray
H: Job separator
L
L: e-STUDIO350
H: e-STUDIO450
-
CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
Symbol
CLKC-1A
CLKB-1A
SCSWC-0A
DRV7-1A
DRV6-1A
DRV5-1A
DRV4-1A
DRV3-1A
DRV2-1A
DRV1-1A
DRV0-1A
PFRST-0
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
SIZE0-0A
SIZE1-0A
SIZE2-0A
SIZE3-0A
RETS0-0A
RETS1-0A
RETS2-0A
RETS3-0A
RETS4-0A
RETS5-0A
RETS6-0A
RETS7-0A
SCSWB-0A
LCCNT-0
Name
PFP/LCF output select signal
PFP/LCF input select signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
Reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Size data bus-0
Size data bus-1
Size data bus-2
Size data bus-3
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
LCF connection signal
Active
L
CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWAF-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
Symbol
PG
PG
+24VD1
+24VD1
ADM2D-0A
ADM2B-0A
ADM2C-0A
ADM2A-0A
CRT-DOWN
ADTR2-1
+5.1VB
SG
ADCNT-1
ADTR1-1
ADCOV-1
+24VD1
ADUCL-0
NC
SG
SG
SFBZ0
SFBZ1
SFBZ2
SFBZ3
+5.1VB
SFBSW-1
SG
+24VD1
FFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SOLSFB-0A
SG
SFDFED-1
+5.1VB
SFBSW
NC
Name
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
ADU motor drive signal-D
ADU motor drive signal-B
ADU motor drive signal-C
ADU motor drive signal-A
ADU motor control signal
ADU exit sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
ADU connection detection signal
ADU entrance sensor detection signal
ADU opening/closing switch detection signal
+24V
ADU clutch drive signal
Not connected
Signal ground
Signal ground
SFB paper size detection signal-0
+5V
SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Bypass feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal
Signal ground
Bypass feed sensor detection signal
+5V
SFB connection detection signal
Not connected
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-UFEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-LFEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
Symbol
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUFLS-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
+5V
Active
-
CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> PS-HVT (CN551), TRY-MOT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-H-CLT, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
Symbol
NC
NC
CLTRM-0A
CLTRM-1A
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUSW-0
SG
CLSW-0
NC
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
Name
Not connected
Not connected
Tray-up motor drive signal +
Tray-up motor drive signal Transport clutch (low speed) drive signal
+24V
Transport clutch (high speed) drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer detection switch signal
Signal ground
Lower drawer detection switch signal
Not connected
Not connected
+24V
Power ground
Drum main charger grid voltage ON/OFF signal
Drum main charger grid output reference voltage
Developer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Developer bias high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer belt high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Transfer belt high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage output reference voltage
High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal
Active
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
-
CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> PS-ACC (CN413, 414), LSU-FAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWREN-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
+24VD1
POLFN-0A
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
AC main power down signal
Power supply enable signal
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> M/DC-POL

Pin No
1
Symbol
POMPL-0
Name
Polygonal motor PLL signal
POMON-0A
Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal
3
4
5
POMCK-0A
PG
+24VD1
Polygonal motor reference clock signal

Power ground
+24V
CN309 PWA-F-LGC (CN309) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
BDIN-1
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
+5.1VB
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Laser level control signal (reference voltage)
Signal ground
Laser beam position detection signal
Signal ground
Laser image data (differential signal +)
Laser image data (differential signal -)
Signal ground
APC write signal
+5V
Laser shut down signal
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
CS2-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
ROMLD-1
Name
ROM data bus [0]

ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM data read signal
ROM address bus [0]
ROM address bus [2]
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
ROM address bus [10]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
ROM address bus [1]
ROM address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
Download board connection detection signal
+5V
External ROM loading status signal
CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> IPC (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/O00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
System address bus [0]
System data bus [0]
System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
Signal ground
Write signal
Chip select signal to IP2
+5V
IPC connection detection signal
Signal ground
+5V
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
Signal ground
Output enable signal
IPC reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
Active
L
-
Active
L: Normal
L: ON
H: OFF
-
Active
-
Active
L
L
L
Active
L
-
CN314 PWA-F-LGC (CN314) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY

KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Symbol
+24VD2
CTRON-0
CTRCNT-0
MCRUN-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
Name
+24V
Total counter ON signal
Copy permitting signal
Copying operation signal
Exit sensor ON signal
Power ground
Black and white mode counter ON signal
Mono-color mode counter ON signal
Full color mode counter ON signal
Signal ground
Paper size signal-3
Paper size signal-2
Paper size signal-1
Paper size signal-0
+5V
Copy key card detection signal
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN315 PWA-F-LGC (CN315) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
NC
SG
KCTRC-0
+24VD2
KCTR0-0
NC
Name
Not connected
Signal ground
Key copy counter/Copy key card connection detection signal
+24V
Key copy counter ON signal
Not connected
CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> PS-IH

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Symbol
IH2ON-0A
+5V SW
H1PWR1-0
H1PWR2-0
H1PWR3-0
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
H2PWR1-0
H2PWR2-0
H2PWR3-0
IH1ON-0A
SG
IH DUTY
H1 ERR1-0
H1 ERR2-0
Name
IH2 ON/OFF signal

+5V
Heater H1 power data-1
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
IH1 ON/OFF signal
Signal ground
IH1/2 duty control signal
Heater H1 error signal-1
Active
L
-
Active
H
H
-
CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, USD-TNRFLL-SNR2, MID-FAN-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, SP-FAN-MOT, LPERS, FRNT-COV-SW, MAIN-SW, TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Symbol
ATSSW-0
ATSVR-1A
+24VD2
ATS-1A
SG
SG
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
+24VD2
SPFN0A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
HMS-1A
SG
TEMP-1
NC
Name
Auto toner sensor connection detection signal
Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage
+24V
Black auto-toner sensor detection signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Drum thermistor detection signal
Signal ground
Front cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Reset signal from the main switch
+24V
Signal ground
Toner bag full detection sensor-2 signal
+5V
+24V
Exposure lamp drive signal
+24V
Middle fan motor drive signal
+24V
Exhaust fan motor drive signal
+24V
Sub-separation fan motor drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Humidity sensor signal
Signal ground
Temperature sensor signal
Not connected
Active
L
Analog
Analog
Analog
L
Analog
Analog
-
CN318 PWA-F-LGC (CN318) <-> MAIN-MOT, DEV-FAN-MOT1, DEV-CLT,

TNR-MOT, RGT-CLT, RGST-SNR, FED-U-SNR, FED-L-SNR, SIDECOV-SW, TNR-SW, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1
Pin No
A1
Symbol
MAMPL-1
Name
Main motor PLL signal
A2
MAMBK-0A
Main motor brake signal
A3
MAMCW-0A
Main motor rotational direction signal
A4
MAMON-0A
Main motor ON/OFF signal
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
SG
+5.1VB
MAMCK-1A
+24VD2
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
DEVCL-OA
TNRMT-0A
TNRMT-1A
+24VD2
RGTCL-0A
NC
NC
SG
PSTPC-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFED-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLFED-1
+5.1VB
SDCSW-1
SG
SG
BTLSW-1
SG
TBFL-1
+5.1VB
NC
Signal ground
+5V
Main motor reference clock signal
+24V
Developer unit cooling fan-1 motor drive signal
+24V
Developer drive clutch drive signal
Toner motor drive signal
+24V
Registration clutch drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Registration sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Side cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Toner cartridge switch signal
Signal ground
+5V
Not connected
CN320 PWA-F-LGC (CN320) <-> DEV-FAN-MOT2

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD2
DV2FN-0A
Name
+24V
CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
RDX
CS7-A
CS7-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
DWNLED
/CS0
+3.3VB
RMSL
/WRX
SG
SG
Name
System data bus [0]

System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
System data bus [8]
System data bus [10]
System read signal
Chip select signal (7-A)
Chip select signal (7-B)
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
System data bus [9]
System chip select signal-0
+3.3V
System control signal
System write signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Active
L: Normal
L: Braking
H: Normal
L: CW
H: CCW
L: ON
H: OFF
-
Active
-
Active
-
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX BOARD (CN701) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
+5.1VB
DA1
+5.1VB
DD0
+5.1VB
DD3
+5.1VB
DD6
+5.1VB
DD9
SG
DD12
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VB
INTRQ
+3.3VB
+5.1VA
-12VB
SG
+12VB
DA0
DA2
IDECS
DD1
DD2
DD4
DD5
DD7
DD8
DD10
DD11
DD13
DD14
DD15
/DIOR
/DIOW
/DMACK
/DLDCS0
/RESET
DMARQ
NC
FXWP
SG
SG
NC
Name
+5V
IDE Address [1]
+5V
FAX data bus [0]
+5V
FAX data bus [3]
+5V
FAX data bus [6]
+5V
FAX data bus [9]
Signal ground
FAX data bus [12]
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
IDE Interrupt request signal
+3.3V
+5V
-12V
Signal ground
+12V
IDE Address [0]
IDE Address [2]
IDE chip select signal
FAX data bus [1]
FAX data bus [2]
FAX data bus [4]
FAX data bus [5]
FAX data bus [7]
FAX data bus [8]
FAX data bus [10]
FAX data bus [11]
FAX data bus [13]
FAX data bus [14]
FAX data bus [15]
IDE I/O read signal
IDE I/O write signal
DMA acknowledge signal
Chip select signal
Reset signal
DMA request signal
Not connected
FAX wake-up signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not connected
CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Symbol
SYSRST
SCTS
STXD
SRXD
SRTS
SCNT
SG
SVDEN
SDCLK
SHDEN
SG
SG
SCD7
SCD6
SCD5
SCD4
SCD3
SCD2
SCD1
SCD0
Name
System reset signal

Transmission enabled
Transmitted SLG data
Received SLG data
Transmission request signal
SLG board connection detection signal
Signal ground
Vertical scanning synchronized signal
Clock signal for scanning data transmission
Horizontal scanning synchronized signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Scanning data [7]
Scanning data [6]
Scanning data [5]
Scanning data [4]
Scanning data [3]
Scanning data [2]
Scanning data [1]
Scanning data [0]
CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Symbol
STB
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
NACK
BUSY
PERROR
SELECT
NATFD
NC
SG
FG
LOGIC
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
NINIT
NFAULT
NC
NC
NC
NSEL IN
Name
nStrobe
Data bus [0]
Data bus [1]
Data bus [2]
Data bus [3]
Data bus [4]
Data bus [5]
Data bus [6]
Data bus [7]
nAck
Busy
PError
Select
nAutoFd
Not connected
Signal ground
Frame ground
Peripheral Logic High (Pull-up)
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
nInit
nFault
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
nSelect In
CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> RS-232C (CN172)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
TXD
RXD
RTS
DSR
DTR
CTS
CNT
SG
Name
Transmitted serial data
Received serial data
Data set ready signal
Data terminal ready signal
Transmission enabled signal
Carrier detection signal
Signal ground
Active
L
-
Active
-
Active
H
-
Active
-
CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Symbol
/RESET
SG
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
SG
NC(KEY)
MDARQ
SG
/DIOW
SG
/DIOR
SG
IORDY
SG
/DMACK
SG
INTRQ
NC(RESERV
ED)
DA1
/PDIAG
DA0
DA2
/CS0
/CS1
/DASP
SG
Name
Reset signal
Signal ground
Data bus [7]
Data bus [8]
Data bus [6]
Data bus [9]
Data bus [5]
Data bus [10]
Data bus [4]
Data bus [11]
Data bus [3]
Data bus [12]
Data bus [2]
Data bus [13]
Data bus [1]
Data bus [14]
Data bus [0]
Data bus [15]
Signal ground
Not connected
DMA request signal
Signal ground
I/O write signal
Signal ground
I/O read signal
Signal ground
I/O ready signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Interrupt request signal
Reserve signal
Device address [1]

Passed diagnostics
Device address [0]
Device address [2]
Chip select-0
Chip select-1
Device active or slave present signal
Signal ground
L
L
L
L
-
CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
+12VA
SG
SG
+5.1VA
Name
+12V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <-> DIMM (0)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
Symbol
SG
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
+3.3VA
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
SG
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
+3.3VA
DQ14
DQ15
NC
NC
SG
NC
NC
+3.3VA
/WE
DQMB0
DQMB1
/CS0
NC
SG
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
BA1
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
CLK0
SG
NC
/CS2
DQMB2
DQMB3
NC
+3.3VA
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ16
DQ17
DQ18
DQ19
+3.3VA
DQ20
NC
NC
CKE1
SG
DQ21
DQ22
DQ23
SG
DQ24
DQ25
DQ26
DQ27
+3.3VA
DQ28
DQ29
DQ30
DQ31
SG
CLK2
NC
NC(WP)
SDA
SCL
+3.3VA
SG
DQ32
DQ33
DQ34
DQ35
+3.3VA
DQ36
DQ37
DQ38
DQ39
DQ40
SG
DQ41
DQ42
DQ43
DQ44
DQ45
+3.3VA
DQ46
DQ47
NC
NC
SG
NC
NC
+3.3VA
/CAS
DQMB4
DQMB5
/CS1
/RAS
SG
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
A11
BA0
+3.3VA
NC(CLK1)
A12
SG
CKE
/CS3
DQMB6
DQMB7
NC(A13)
+3.3VA
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ48
DQ49
DQ50
DQ51
+3.3VA
DQ52
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ53
DQ54
DQ55
SG
DQ56
DQ57
DQ58
DQ59
+3.3VA
DQ60
DQ61
DQ62
DQ63
SG
NC(CLK3)
NC
SA0
SA1
SA2
+3.3VA
Name
Signal ground
Memory data bus [0]
Memory data bus [1]
Memory data bus [2]
Memory data bus [3]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [4]
Memory data bus [5]
Memory data bus [6]
Memory data bus [7]
Memory data bus [8]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [9]
Memory data bus [10]
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
+3.3V
Data write enable signal
Output disable/write mask-0
Chip select signal-0
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory address bus [0]
Bank select-1
+3.3V
+3.3V
Clock-0 input
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Clock enable signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Clock-2 input
Not connected
Not connected
PD serial data
PD serial clock
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
+3.3V
Column address strobe signal
Row address strobe signal
Signal ground
Bank select-0
+3.3V
Not connected (Clock-1 input)
Signal ground
Clock enable signal
Not connected (Memory address bus [13])
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Not connected (Clock-3 input)
Not connected
PD address [0]
PD address [1]
PD address [2]
+3.3V
CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN321)

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
Symbol
+5.1VB
CBSY-0
CMD-0
SACK-0
SERR-0
SBSY-0
STS-0
CACK-0
CERR-0
SG
SG
SG
IRCLK-1
SG
HSYNC-0
SG
VSYNC-0
MCNT-1
SYSRST-0
IDATX[0]
IDATX[1]
IDATX[2]
IDATX[3]
IDATX[4]
IDATX[5]
IDATX[6]
IDATX[7]
SG
IDCLK-1
SG
IHDEN-0
SG
IVDEN-0
+3.3VB
Name
+5V
System command busy
Command data
System status acknowledge signal
System status error signal
System status busy signal
Status data
System command acknowledge signal
System command error signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Clock signal input for image data transmission
Signal ground
Signal ground
LGC board connection detection signal
System reset signal
IDA Transmitted data bus [0]
Signal ground
Clock signal output for image data transmission
Signal ground
Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction
Signal ground
Data enable of the vertical scanning direction
+3.3V
CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WF-1A
YD-1A
INVGND
BZON-0A
CPPOW-1A
LDCLK-1A
LDDAT-1A
LDLTH-1A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
CPRST-0A
SG
RTS0-0A
CTS0-0A
SOUT(0)
SIN(0)
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
Name
LCD data transmission clock
LCD data latch pulse
LCD frame signal
LCD scanning line start signal
Signal ground
Buzzer-ON signal
Panel connection detection signal
LED serial clock
LED serial data
LED data latch signal
LED drive selection signal-1
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Reset signal
Signal ground
Key controller SIO Transmission request signal
Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal
Key controller SIO transmitted serial data
Key controller SIO received serial data
Signal ground
LCD display data-3
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-0
Signal ground
LCD enable signal
CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
VBUS
DD+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
VBUS
DD+
SG
VBUS
DD+
SG
Active
H
L
H
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
Active
-
Active
-
CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Symbol
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
NC (/CS2P)
D15
D14
D13
SG
D12
D11
D10
SG
D09
D08
/INTPR1
SG
A03
A02
A01
NC (SRXD)
A00
D07
D06
A15
D05
A14
D04
A13
D03
A12
D02
A11
D01
A10
D00
A09
A04
A08
/RESET
A07
/ACK
A06
/CSP1
A05
NC (OEO)
NC (STXD)
RW
SG
A16
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC (DACK)
+3.3VA
/INTPR2
SG
BRDNIN
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
Name
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Not connected
I/F data bus [15]
I/F data bus [14]
I/F data bus [13]
Signal ground
I/F data bus [12]
I/F data bus [11]
I/F data bus [10]
Signal ground
I/F data bus [9]
I/F data bus [8]
Interrupt PR1 signal
Signal ground
I/F address bus [3]
I/F address bus [2]
I/F address bus [1]
Not connected
I/F address bus [0]
I/F data bus [7]
I/F data bus [6]
I/F address bus [15]
I/F data bus [5]
I/F data bus [4]
I/F data bus [3]
I/F data bus [2]
I/F data bus [1]
I/F data bus [0]
I/F address bus [9]
I/F address bus [4]
I/F address bus [8]
System reset signal
I/F address bus [7]
NIC Acknowledge signal
I/F address bus [6]
Chip select signal
I/F address bus [5]
Not connected
Not connected
Read/write to NIC
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Not connected
+3.3V
PR2 interrupt signal
Signal ground
NIC board in detection signal
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Active
L
-
CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN150)/SCRAMBLER BOARD

(OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
Symbol
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
-12VA
-12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(2)
OPBINT(0)
SG
PCICLK(5)
SG
PCICLK(3)
SG
REQ(1)#
REQ(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE(3]#
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE(2)#
SG
IRDY#
+3.3VA
DEVSEL#
SG
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3VA
SERR#
+3.3VA
C/BE(1)#
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
AD[8]
AD[7]
+3.3VA
AD[5]
AD[3]
SG
AD[1]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
+12VA
+12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(1)
+3.3VA
PCIRST#
+3.3VA
PCICLK(4)
+3.3VA
GNT(1)#
GNT(0)#
SG
PME#
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME#
SG
TRDY#
SG
STOP#
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[9]
SG
C/BE(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[4]
SG
AD[2]
AD[0]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
Name
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
-12V
-12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-2
Interrupt request-0
Signal ground
PCI clock-5 (Not used)
Signal ground
PCI clock-3
Signal ground
Data request signal-1
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [31]
Signal ground
+3.3V
Command and byte enable-3
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Initiator ready
+3.3V
Device select
Signal ground
Lock
Data parity Error
+3.3V
System Error
+3.3V
Signal ground
PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+5V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
+12V
+12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-1
+3.3V
PCI reset signal
+3.3V
PCI clock-4
+3.3V
Grant-1
Grant-0
Signal ground
Power Management Event
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Ground
+3.3V
Cycle frame
Signal ground
Target ready
Signal ground
Stop
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Parity
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY

KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Symbol
L/S
FULL-C
MONO-C
B/W
+5.1VA
SG
NC
Name
Paper size signal
Full-color mode signal
Mono-color mode signal
Black and white mode signal
+5V
Signal ground
Not connected
CN412 PS-ACC (CN412) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Symbol
PWREN
PWRDN
-12VB
SG
+12VB
SG
+12VA
SG
-12VA
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VB
+5.1VA
Name
-12V
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
-12V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
Active
-
Active
L
L
-
CN413 PS-ACC (CN413) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN307), FAX BOARD (CN702),

PWA-F-FIL (CN495)/PWA-F-FUS (CN431)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWRFN-0A
+5.1VB
SG
+24VB
PG
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
Power supply cooling fan drive signal
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
CN414 PS-ACC (CN414) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN301, CN307)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
Active
L
-
Active
-
CN415 PS-ACC (CN415) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN6), RADF (CN1) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Symbol
+24VD3
+24VD3
PG
PG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+24VD4
+24VD4
PG
PG
NC
NC
+12VB
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Not connected
Not connected
+12V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
CN416 PS-ACC (CN416) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD5
PG
Name
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
CN418 PS-ACC (CN418) <-> PS-FAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD1
PWRFN-0A
Name
+24V
OUT1 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> MAIN CHARGER WIRE

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to main charger wire
OUT2 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> MAIN CHARGER GRID

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to main charger grid
OUT3 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to developer charger bias
OUT4 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> TRANSFER BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer charger bias
OUT5 PS-HVT (OUT5) <-> TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer guide bias
OUT6 PS-HVT (OUT6) <-> SEPARATION BIAS

Pin No
1
05/11
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to separation charger bias
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
CN1
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN7
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN9
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14)

Symbol
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
CCDRS
SG
CCDCP
SG
CCDSH
SG
CCDCK2B
SG
CCDCK2A
SG
CCDCK1A
SG
CCD-EVEN
SG
CCD-ODD
SG
AG
AG
AG
+12VB
+12VB
+12VB
Name
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
CCD RS signal
Signal ground
CCD CP signal
Signal ground
CCD TG signal
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2B
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2A
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-1A
Signal ground
CCD even data
Signal ground
CCD odd data
Signal ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
+12V
+12V
+12V
PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR

Symbol
SG
PLTN-1A
+5V
SG
HOME-1A
+5V
Name
Signal ground
Platen sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Carriage home position sensor detection signal
+5V
PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)

Symbol
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
Name
RADF acknowledge signal
VARID signal from RADF
Signal ground
RADF transmitted serial data
Signal ground
Acknowledge signal from RADF
Request signal from RADF
RADF request signal
RADF connection detection signal
PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)

Symbol
PG
PG
LMPON-A
+24VD4
+24VD4
Name
Power ground
Power ground
Exposure lamp ON signal
+24V
+24V
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
H
-
CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3,
APS4, APS5
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APSC-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS3-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS2-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS1-0A
SG
Name
Not connected
+24V(Reserved)
Not connected
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
SCNM-BB
+24VD4
SCNM-B
SCNM-AB
+24VD4
SCNM-A
Name
Scan motor drive signal-B
+24V
Scan motor drive signal-A
+24V
CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
J422
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD
(PNCNT)DLA
D[0]
(SSW)DLAD
[2]
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
CS02-0
(PNCNT)DLA
D[1]
(MER)DLAD
[3]
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
LED
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
Symbol
-
Symbol
ROM address bus [4]

ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
D/L address bus [1]
D/L address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]

ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
ROM select signal
+5V
LED drive signal
Name
Exposure lamp high-voltage output
Not connected
Not connected
Name
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (L)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (R)
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U)
J423
PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT
J424
PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL
J425
PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)
J426
Pin No
1
2
3
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
CCFL+
NC
CCFL-
Symbol
FRAME
LAOD
CP
SG
+5.1VA
SG
VEE
/D.OFF
D0
D1
D2
D3
Symbol
LDFC-1
LDFC-2
LDFC-4
LDFC-5
LDFC-6
LDFC-7
LDFC-8
LDFC-9
LDFC-10
LDFC-11
LDFC-12
LDFC-13
LDFC-15
LDON0
LDON1
SG
Symbol
SCN15
SCN14
SCN13
SCN12
SCN11
RET0
RET1
RET2
RET3
RET8
RET9
Name
High-voltage terminal (High)
Not connected
high-voltage terminal (Low)
Name
Ground
+5V
Signal ground
Ground
LCD enable signal
LCD display data-0
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-3
Name
LED driver output (1)
LED common driver signal (0)
Signal ground
Name
Button scanning signal (5)
Button scanning return signal (0)
PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Symbol
(TD+)FA1
(TD-)FA2
(RD+)FA3
FA45
FA45
(RD-)FA6
FA78
FA78
NC(MTG)
NC(MTG)
SH
SH
SH
SH
Name
Transmitted data +
Transmitted data Received data +
Not used
Not used
Received data Not used
Not used
Not connected
Not connected
Shield
Shield
Shield
Shield
CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
NC
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
NC
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not used
Signal ground
Signal ground
APC write signal
Not used
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202)

Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
BDIN-1
Name
+5V
Signal ground
CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR

Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFL
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
+5V
CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR

Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFU
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
+5V
CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
+24VD2
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
+24VD2
Name
+24V
+24V
CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
SG
COVSW
Active
-
D/L address bus [2]

YD
KL
XR
YU
Active
-
D/L address bus [0]
INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO

NC
NC
Active
-
Name
Signal ground
ADU opening/closing detection signal
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHO OK
+5.1VB
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
Name
Transmitted FAX data
Received FAX data
CML relay drive signal
Dial pulse drive signal
RG relay drive signal
-3db ATT exchange signal
MODEM select signal
MODEM select signal
Not used
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detection
Facsimile data answer detection
Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal
Internal telephone hook signal
External telephone hook signal
+5V
Anlog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Power ground
CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
NC
NC
+5VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
NC
Name
Received FAX data
Not used
-3 db ATT exchange signal
Modem select signal
Modem select signal
Not used
Signal ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detect
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Analog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not connected
Active
L
L
-
Active
L
L
-
CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
SP+
SP-
Name
Speaker output (+)

Speaker output (-)
CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Symbol
TXOUT2
+5VA
+12VB
+3.3VB
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS-0
+5.1VB
MEMRD2-0
CLKOE-1
TXEN2-1
+5.1VB
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5.1VB
CEP1RST-0
5.1VB
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
SG
MOD2DET-0
SG
DREQC2-1
DACKC2-0
RXIN2
AG
-12VB
AG
MOD2INT-1
MOD2CS-0
MOD2RST-0
SG
RXEN2-1
MEMWRH2-0
MEMWRL2-0
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CPURST-0
CEP2INT-1
5.1VB
5.1VB
IORD2-0
IOWR2-0
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
5.1VB
5.1VB
CEP2CS-0
DREQD2-1
DACKD2-0
Name
Transmitted data
+5V
+12V
+3.3V
Modem 2 DMA signal
Signal ground
SRAM chip select signal
+5V
SRAM data read signal
Clock out enable signal
TX enable signal
+5V
MDM address bus [16]
MDM address bus [8]
MDM address bus [6]
MDM address bus [4]
MDM address bus [2]
MDM address bus [0]
+5V
CEP1 reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
System clock signal
Signal ground
MDM data bus [0]
MDM data bus [2]
MDM data bus [4]
MDM data bus [6]
MDM data bus [8]
MDM data bus [10]
MDM data bus [12]
MDM data bus [14]
Signal ground
Modem 2 detection signal
Signal ground
Data request signal
Data acknowledge signal
Received data
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
Modem 2 interrupt signal
Modem 2 chip select signal
Modem 2 reset signal
Signal ground
RX enable signal
SRAM high byte write signal
SRAM low byte write signal
MDM address bus [9]
MDM address bus [7]
MDM address bus [5]
MDM address bus [3]
MDM address bus [1]
CPU reset signal
CEP2 interrupt signal
+5V
+5V
MDM data read signal
MDM data write signal
MDM data bus [1]
MDM data bus [3]
MDM data bus [5]
MDM data bus [7]
MDM data bus [9]
MDM data bus [11]
MDM data bus [13]
MDM data bus [15]
+5V
+5V
CEP2 chip select signal
Data request signal
CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
J600
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
5.1VB
LEDDL-0
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM address bus [0]
ROM address bus [2]
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
ROM address bus [1]
ROM address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
+5V
IPC (J600) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)

Symbol
RXD
SG
TXD
SG
NC
NC
NC
NC
F-CNT
CNT-GND
Name
Receiver serial data
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Finisher connection detection signal
Ground
Active
-
Active
L
L
Active
L
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J428
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J429
LDFC-1
LDFC-2
LDFC-4
LDFC-5
LDFC-6
LDFC-7
LDFC-8
LDFC-9
LDFC-10
LDFC-11
LDFC-12
LDFC-13
LDFC-15
LDON0
LDON1
SG
SCN15
SCN14
SCN13
SCN12
SCN11
RET0
RET1
RET2
RET3
RET8
RET9
FRAWE
LOAD
CP
SG
+5.1VA
SG
VEE
D.OFF
D0
D1
D2
D3
YD
XL
XR
YU
CCFL-
Scrambler board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J425
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J426
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J424
1
2
3
4
J422
1
2
3
J423
CCFL+
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PWA-F-DSP
Option
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
Coin controller /
Copy key card
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
RESERVED
SG
CLK
SG
REQ#
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE[3]#
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE[2]#
SG
IRDY#
+3.3VA
DEVSEL#
SG
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3VA
SERR#
+3.3VA
C/BE[1]#
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
SG
AD[08]
AD[07]
+3.3VA
AD[05]
AD[03]
SG
AD[01]
+3.3VA
ACK64#
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
B41
B42
B43
B44
B45
B46
B47
B48
B49
B50
B51
B52
B53
B54
B55
B56
B57
B58
B59
B60
B61
B62
J526 J527 J523
+3.3VAUX
RST#
+3.3VA
GNT#
SG
PME#
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
IDSEL
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME#
SG
TRDY#
SG
STOP#
+3.3VA
RESERVED
RESERVED
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[09]
SG
SG
C/BE[0]#
+3.3VA
AD[06]
AD[04]
SG
AD[02]
AD[00]
+3.3VA
REQ64#
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
-12VA
TCK
SG
TDO
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
INTB#
INTD#
PRSNT1#
RESERVED
PRSNT2#
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A41
A42
A43
A44
A45
A46
A47
A48
A49
A50
A51
A52
A53
A54
A55
A56
A57
A58
A59
A60
A61
A62
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
J427
To Slot [0]
TRST#
+12VA
TMS
TD1
+5.1VA
INTA#
INTC#
+5.1VA
RESERVED
+3.3VA
RESERVED
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
Slot [1] : CN803

Slot [0] : CN802
PCI slot
CN107
L/S
1
FULL-C
2
MONO-C
3
B/W
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
NC
7
CN104
XSCL-1A
1
LP-1A
2
WF-1A
3
YD-1A
4
INVGND
5
BZON-0A
6
CPPOW-1A
7
LDCLK-1A
8
LDDAT-1A
9
LDLTH-1A
10
LDON1-0A
11
LDON0-0A
12
SG
13
+5.1VA
14
+5.1VA
15
+5.1VA
16
+5.1VA
17
CPRST-0A
18
SG
19
RTS0-0A
20
CTS0-0A
21
SOUT[0]
22
SIN[0]
23
SG
24
UD3-1A
25
UD2-1A
26
UD1-1A
27
UD0-1A
28
SG
29
LCDEN-1A
30
CN801
CN121
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100 100
101 101
102 102
103 103
104 104
105 105
106 106
107 107
108 108
109 109
110 110
111 111
112 112
113 113
114 114
115 115
116 116
117 117
118 118
119 119
120 120
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
-12VA
-12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
IDSEL0
OPBINT(0)
SG
IDSEL1
SG
PCICLK(3)
SG
REQ(1)
REQ(0)
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE[3]
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE[2]
SG
IRDY
+3.3VA
DEVSEL
SG
LOCK
PERR
+3.3VA
SERR
+3.3VA
C/BE[1]
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
AD[8]
AD[7]
+3.3VA
AD[5]
AD[3]
SG
AD[1]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
+12VA
+12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(1)
+3.3VA
PCIRST
+3.3VA
PCICLK(4)
+3.3VA
GNT(1)
GNT(0)
SG
PME
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME
SG
TRDY
SG
STOP
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[9]
SG
C/BE[0]
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[4]
SG
AD[2]
AD[0]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
TIP
RING
BPMJ-3
BPMJ-1
BPMJ-6
BPMJ-2
BPMJ-7
BPMJ-4
BPMJ-8
BPMJ-5
LED1 GRNP
LED2 YELP
ENABLE/DISABLE
LED2 YELN
CHSCND
RSV
INTB
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
INTA
RSV
RSV
SG
+3.3VA
CLK
RST
SG
+3.3VA
REQ
GNT
+3.3VA
SG
AD[31]
PME
AD[29]
RSV
SG
AD[30]
AD[27]
+3.3VA
AD[25]
AD[28]
RSV
AD[26]
C/BE[3]
AD[24]
AD[23]
IDSEL
SG
SG
AD[21]
AD[22]
AD[19]
AD[20]
SG
PAR
AD[17]
AD[18]
C/BE[2]
AD[16]
IRDY
+3.3VA
VREF
DQ0
SG
DQ1
DQS0
DQ2
VDD
DQ3
NC
NC
SG
DQ8
DQ9
DQS1
VDD
CK1
/CK1
SG
DQ10
DQ11
CKE0
VDD
DQ16
DQ17
DQS2
SG
A9
DQ18
A7
VDD
DQ19
A5
DQ24
SG
DQ25
DQS3
A4
VDD
DQ26
DQ27
A2
SG
A1
CB0
CB1
VDD
DQS8
A0
CB2
SG
CB3
BA1
DQ32
VDD
DQ33
DQS4
DQ34
SG
BA0
DQ35
DQ40
VDD
/WE
DQ41
/CAS
SG
DQ55
DQ42
DQ43
VDD
NC
DQ48
DQ49
SG
/CK2
CK2
VDD
DQS6
DQ50
DQ51
SG
VDD-ID
DQ56
DQ57
VDD
DQS7
DQ58
DQ59
SG
NC
SDA
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Option
CN118
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
CN105
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
CN118
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
CN105
+3.3VA
FRAME
CLKRUN
TRDY
SERR
STOP
SG
+3.3VA
PERR
DEVSEL
C/BE[1]
SG
AD[14]
AD[15]
SG
AD[13]
AD[12]
AD[11]
AD[10]
SG
SG
AD[09]
AD[08]
C/BE[0]
AD[07]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[05]
AD[06]
AD[04]
RSV
AD[02]
AD[03]
AD[00]
+5.1VA
RSV WIP
AD[01]
RSV WIP
SG
SG
AC SYNC
M66EN
AC SDATA IN
AC SDATA OUT
AC BIT CLK
AC CODEC ID0
AC CODEC ID1
AC RESET
MOD AUDIO MON
RSV
AUDIO GND
SG
SYS AUDIO OUT
SYS AUDIO IN
SYS AUDIO OUT GND
SYS AUDIO IN GND
AUDIO GND
AUDIO GND
RSV
MPC1ACT
VCC5V
+3.3VA
SG
DQ4
DQ5
VDD
DM0
DQ6
DQ7
SG
NC
NC
NC
VDD
DQ14
DQ13
DM1
VDD
DQ14
DQ15
CKE1
VDD
NC
DQ20
A12
SG
DQ21
A11
DM2
VDD
DQ22
A8
DQ23
SG
A6
DQ28
DQ29
VDD
DM3
A3
DQ30
SG
DQ31
CB4
CB5
VDD
CK0
/CK0
SG
DMB
A10
CB6
VDD
CB7
SG
DQ36
DQ37
VDD
DM4
DQ38
DQ39
SG
DQ44
/RAS
DQ45
VDD
/CS0
/CS1
DMS
SG
DQ46
DQ47
NC
VDD
DQS2
DQS3
NC
VDD
DM6
DQS4
DQS5
VDD
NC
DQ60
DQ61
SG
DM7
DQ62
DQ63
VDD
SA0
SA1
SA2
VDD-SPD
CN115
1
2
3
4
CN114
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TXD+
TXDRXIN+
GND
GND
RXINGND
GND
VBUS
DD+
SG
VBUS0
D0D0+
SG
VBUS1
D1D1+
SG
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Internal
USB connector
(for Data overwrite kit)
USB connector
(Host)
USB connector
(Device)
LAN connector
(10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX)
CN122
+12VA
3
SG
2
NC
1
CN111
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN110
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VBUS0
D0D0+
SG
VBUS1
D1D1+
SG
Option
CN113
VDD
1
NC
2
NC
3
D4
D+
5
NC
6
NC
7
DETACH
8
NC
9
SG
10
NC
11
NC
12
/RESET
13
NC
14
NC
15
NC
16
NC
17
NC
18
NC
19
SG
20
JPD model only
CN810
+12VA
1
PG
2
NC
3
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN1
1
2
3
CN401
NC
1
+12VB
2
-12VB
3
NC
4
NC
5
NC
6
AG
7
SG
8
MAD
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD
MAD[8]
MAD
MAD[10]
MAD[10
MAD
10]
MAD[12]
MAD
MAD[12
12]
MAD[14]
MAD[14
MAD
14]
MAD[16]
MAD[16
MAD
16]
MAD[18]
MAD[18
MAD
18]
SG
SG
MDT
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT
MDT[5]
MDT
MDT[7]
MDT
PNLCS
PNLDT1
PNLDT3
MAD[5]
MAD
MAD[7]
MAD
MAD[9]
MAD
MAD[11]
MAD[11
MAD
11]
MAD[13]
MAD[13
MAD
13]
MAD[15]
MAD[15
MAD
15]
MAD[17]
MAD[17
MAD
17]
ROMDT
+5.1VB
LED
MDT
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT
MDT[4]
MDT
MDT[6]
MDT
MRD
PNLDT0
PNLDT2
CN702
+24V
1
PG
2
NC
NC
3
JPD model only
CN811
4
3
2
1
CN812
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
CCDRS
SG
CCDCP
SG
CCDSH
SG
CCDCK2B
SG
CCDCK2A
SG
CCDCK1A
SG
CCD-EVEN
SG
CCD-ODD
SG
AG
AG
AG
+12VB
+12VB
+12VB
FAX
power relay
board
A4
series
only
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
NC
NC
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
NC
CN9 or CN4
CN502
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
CN503
+
1
2
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHOOK
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
CN9 or CN4
CN501
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
Speaker
Option
NCU board [Line1]

NCU board [Line2]
Option
LCD back light
Touch panel
DDR DIMM
Wireless LAN module
Bluetooth module
J634
+12VA
3 1
PG
2 2
NC
1 3
NC
PWA-F-SYS
Download JIG (SLG)
Download jig (SYS)
LP-EXPO
1
2
3
4
5
6
PWA-F-SLG
INV-EXP
1
2
3
4
5
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J45
3
2
1
PG
PG
LMPON-A
+24VD4
+24VD4
SCNM-BB
+24VD4
SCNM-B
SCNM-AB
+24VD4
SCNM-A
SG
PLTN
+5.1VB
SG
HOME
+5.1VB
+5VAPS
APS1
SG
J29
3
2
1
3
2
1
J35
+5VAPS
APS2
SG
J30
3
2
1
PLTNSNR
+5VAPS
APS3
SG
J31
3
2
1
J36
+5VAPS
APSC
SG
J32
3
2
1
J33
3
2
1
J34
2
1
Option
RADF
1
2
3
4
5
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN19
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
B7
B8
B9
B4
B5
B6
B1
B2
B3
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
+5.1VB
LEDDL-0
FG
CN1
TXOUT2
+5VA
+12VB
+3.3VB
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS-0
+5.1VB
MEMRD2-0
CLKOE-1
TXEN2-1
+5.1VB
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5.1VB
CEP1RST-0
+5.1VB
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
SG
MOD2DET-0
SG
DREQC2-1
DACKC2-0
RXIN2
AG
-12VB
AG
MD2INT-1
MOD2CS-0
MOD2RST-0
SG
RXEN2-1
MEMWRH2-0
MEMWRL2-0
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CPURST-0
CEP2INT-1
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
IORD2-0
IOWR2-0
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
CEP2CS-0
DREQD2-1
DACKD2-0
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR
SG
CN401
CN600
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
FAX board
MODEM board
HOMESNR
APS1
APS2
APS3
APS-C
APS-R
Reserved
CN7
J37
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CN36
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J38
CN101
SYSRST
1
SCTS
2
STXD
3
SRXD
4
SRTS
5
SCNT
6
SG
7
SVDEN
8
SDCLK
9
SHDEN
10
SG
11
SG
12
SCD7
13
SCD6
14
SCD5
15
SCD4
16
SCD3
17
SCD2
18
SCD1
19
SCD0
20
CN102
+5.1VB
1
DA1
2
+5.1VB
3
DD0
4
+5.1VB
5
DD3
6
+5.1VB
7
DD6
8
+5.1VB
9
DD9
10
SG
11
DD12
12
SG
13
SG
14
SG
15
SG
16
SG
17
SG
18
+3.3VB
19
INTRQ
20
+3.3VB
21
+5.1VA
22
-12VB
23
SG
24
+12VB
25
DA0
26
DA2
27
IDECS
28
DD1
29
DD2
30
DD4
31
DD5
32
DD7
33
DD8
34
DD10
35
DD11
36
DD13
37
DD14
38
DD15
39
/DIOR
40
/DIOW
41
/DMACK
42
/DLDCS0
43
/RESET
44
DMARQ
45
NC
46
FXWUP
47
SG
48
SG
49
NC
50
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
AG
+12VB
PG
PG
+24VD4
+24VD4
NC
CN701
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN602
Download jig (FAX)
CN2
SCAN-MOT
PWA-F-CCD
CN2
LCD
PWA-F-KEY
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
J40
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN412
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN170
1
2
3
4
CN171
2 2
1 1
CN415
SG
24
SG
23
+5.1VB
22
+5.1VB
21
SG
20
SG
19
+3.3VB
18
+3.3VB
17
SG
16
+12VB
15
NC
14
NC
13
PG
12
PG
11
+24VD4
10
+24VD4
9
CN120
PWR-DN
26
PWR-EN
25
SG
24
Reserved(-12VB)
23
SG
22
+12VB
21
SG
20
+12VA
19
SG
18
Reserved(-12VA)
17
SG
16
SG
15
+3.3VA
14
+3.3VA
13
+3.3VA
12
+3.3VA
11
SG
10
SG
9
+3.3VB
8
+3.3VB
7
SG
6
SG
5
+5.1VA
4
SG
3
+5.1VA
2
+5.1VB
1
CN109
+5.1VB
A1
CBSY-0
A2
CMD-0
A3
SACK-0
A4
SERR-0
A5
SBSY-0
A6
STS-0
A7
CACK-0
A8
CERR-0
A9
SG
A10
SG
A11
SG
A12
IRCLK-1
A13
SG
A14
IHSYNC-0
A15
SG
A16
IVSYNC-0
A17
MCNT-1
B1
SYSRST-0
B2
IDATX[0]
B3
IDATX[1]
B4
IDATX[2]
B5
IDATX[3]
B6
IDATX[4]
B7
IDATX[5]
B8
IDATX[6]
B9
IDATX[7]
B10
SG
B11
IDCLK-1
B12
SG
B13
IHDEN-0
B14
SG
B15
IVDEN-0
B16
+3.3VB
B17
Standard
CN112
/RESET
1
SG
2
DD7
3
DD8
4
DD6
5
DD9
6
DD5
7
DD10
8
DD4
9
DD11
10
DD3
11
DD12
12
DD2
13
DD13
14
DD1
15
DD14
16
DD0
17
DD15
18
SG
19
NC(KEY)
20
MDARQ
21
SG
22
/DIOW
23
SG
24
/DIOR
25
SG
26
IORDY
27
SG
28
/DMACK
29
SG
30
INTRQ
31
RESERVED
32
DA1
33
/PDIAG
34
DA0
35
DA2
36
/CS0
37
/CS1
38
/DASP
39
SG
40
CN119
+12VA
1
SG
2
SG
3
+5.1VA
4
CN117
+12V
1
SG
2
PS-ACC
Download jig (LGC)
CN418
+24VD1
1
PWRFN-0A
2
CN416
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
+24VD5
3
PG
4
CN414
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
+24VD2
5
+24VD2
6
PG
7
PG
8
+5.1VD
9
SG
10
CN413
+3.3VB
1
SG
2
+5.1VB
3
+5.1VB
4
SG
5
SG
6
+12VB
7
SG
8
PDWN-1A
9
PWRFN-0A
10
+5.1VB
11
SG
12
NC
13
NC
14
HDD
HDD-FAN-MOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
+
-
J528
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10
A[10]
10]
A[12
12]
A[12]
A[14
14]
A[14]
A[16
16]
A[16]
A[18
18]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
CS2-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[11
11]
A[13]
A[13
13]
A[15]
A[15
15]
A[17]
A[17
17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
ROMLD-1
PS-FAN-MOT
+5.1VB
1 1
NC
NC
2 2
SG
3 3
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN307
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
CN321
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN312
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
RLHSW-0
RLTRS-0
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
OPCHK1
RLCSW-0
SG
JFSL2ON
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1A
1 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
J510
SG
J550
+5.1VB
1 6
CUFED-1
2 5
SG
3 4
MAMCK-1A
+5.1VB
SG
MAMON-0A
MAMCW-0A
MAMBK-0A
MAMPL-1
9 9
5 5
1 1
J582
CN301
PG
8
PG
7
PG
6
PG
5
+24VD2
4
+24VD2
3
+24VD2
2
+24VD2
1
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A9
A8
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
4
3
2
1
PWA-FFIL
CN431
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
PWA-F3
FUS
4
CN495
+5.1VB
1
2
SG
3
4
3
2
1
JPD, ASD, AUD, CND

models: standard
MJD model: option
NAD, SAD, TWD

models: standard
J527
POLFN-0A
2
LSU-FAN-MOT
+24VD1
1
J505
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
MAMON-0A
3
MAMCK-0A
4
MAMCW-0A
5
MAMPL-0A
6 MAIN-MOT
NC
7
PG
8
PG
9
+24VD2
10
+24VD2
11
MAMBK-0A
12
J549
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT1
J554
2
DEV-CLT
1
DEVCL-0A
A11
+24VD2
A10
J504
2
RGT-CLT
1
J507
1
2 RGST-SNR
3
J506
1
2 FED-U-SNR
3
+5.1VB
3 3
CLFED-1
4 2
SG
5 1
+5.1VB
4 3
PSTPC-1
5 2
SG
6 1
J509
1
2 FED-L-SNR
3
J533
1
TNR-MOT
2
+5.1VB
PSTPC-1
SG
NC
NC
RGTCL-0A
+24VD2
+5.1VB
CUFED-1
SG
+5.1VB
CLFED-1
SG
J508
1 SIDE-COVSW
2
TNR-SW
J542
SG
1 5
SDCSW-1
2 4
J553
BTLSW-1
1
2
SG
3
TNRMT-1A
A13
TNRMT-0A
A12
B3
B2
B1
A17
A16
A15
A14
B6
B5
B4
B9
B8
B7
SG
B11
SDCSW-1
B10
B12
BTLSW-1
J638
1
USD-TNR2
FLL-SNR1
3
CN318
NC
B17
+5.1VB
B16
TBFL-1
B15
SG
B14
J513
1
IHFAN-MOT
2
J565
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT2
B13
Option
EXITMOT
J640
1
FUSFAN-MOT
2
Job separator/
Offset tray/
Bridge unit
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+24VD2
THM-2
THMSS-HTR
THM-1
THMSC-HTR
PS-IH
J621
1
EXIT-SNR
2
3
CN456
IH1ON
1
SG
2
NC
3
H1ERR1
4
H1ERR2
5
CN455
IH2ON
1
+5VSW
2
H1PWR1
3
H1PWR2
4
H1PWR3
5
H2PWR1
6
H2PWR2
7
H2PWR3
8
CN320
DV2FN-0A
2
+24VD2
1
J548
+5.1VB
1 3
TBLF-1
2 2
SG
3 1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5VSW
SG
4 8
+24VD2
3 9
FUSFN-0A
2 10
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
J511
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
J520
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J512
J552
e-STUDIO352/353 only
CPSW2-0
B18
SG
B19
+24VD2
B16
IHFN-0A
B17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
+24VD2
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
CN302
FUSSW-1A
A1
MTH+-1A
A2
MTH--1A
A3
ETH+-1A
A4
ETH--1A
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
+5.1VB
A8
EXTSW-1
A9
SG
A10
+24VD2
A11
FUSFN-0A
A12
CN316
IH2ON-0A
A1
+5VSW
A2
H1PWR1-0
A3
H1PWR2-0
A4
H1PWR3-0
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
NC
A8
NC
A9
NC
B1
H2PWR1-0
B2
H2PWR2-0
B3
H2PWR3-0
B4
IH1ON-0A
B5
SG
B6
NC
B7
H1ERR1-0
B8
H1ERR2-0
B9
CN216
1
2
NC
3
4
5
J628
CLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J629
COLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J632
+5.1VB
1
SFBFED
2
SG
3
J619
SFSZ3-0
1
SFSZ2-0
2
SFSZ1-0
PWA-F-SFB 3
SFSZ0-0
4
SG
5
J630
SG
3
SFBSW
SFB-SNR
2
+5.1VB
1
SFBFEED-CLT
SFB-SOL
Option
Finisher
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
+24VD5
3
PG
4
CN215
1
2
3
4
5
CN214
1
2
3
CN213
1
2
3
CN526
1
2
3
4
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
24
27
29
CN525
Option
FG
FG
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
J507
J631
3 1
2 2
1 3
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
6
5
4
3
2
1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN545
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN501
J600
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
5
6
NC
7
8
F-CNT
9
CNT-GND
10
FG
CN211 CN562
ADCOV-1
1
ADTR1-1
2
ADCNT-1
3
SG
4
+5.1VB
PWA5
ADTR2-1
F-ADU
6
CRT-DOWNA
7
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
9
ADM2B-0A
10
ADM2D-0A
11
CN212 CN563
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
J599
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
FG
5
F-CNT
6
CNT-GND
7
+5.1VB
8
SG
9
NC
10
+24VD5
11
PG
12
CN311
CN217
SG
2
1
COVSW
1
2
SFBFED-SNR
Bypass unit
CN531
1
2
3
4
ADUSET-SW
ADU-MOT
+24VD1
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
CN328
SG
3
ADUADUFU
2
TRU-SNR
+5.1VB
1
Automatic duplexing unit
J564
ADUCL-0
2
+24VD1
1
PFP/LCF
Option
J312
SG
3
ADUADUFL
2
TRL-SNR
+5.1VB
1
ADU-CLT
PWA-F-LGC
Coin controller
Copy key card
CN108
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NC
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN314
B16
FG
24
23
22
21
20
19
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN313
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J1
SFSZ3
SFSZ2
SFSZ1
SFSZ0
SG
SG
NC
SFSSW
+5.1VB
SFBFED-1
SG
SOLSFB-0A
+24VD1
SFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SG
SWBSW-1
+5.1VB
CN304
NC
18
ADUCL-0
17
+24VD1
16
ADCOV-1
15
ADTR1-1
14
ADCNT-1
13
SG
12
+5.1VB
11
ADTR2-1
10
CRT-DOWNA
9
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
7
ADM2B-0A
6
ADM2D-0A
5
+24VD1
4
+24VD1
3
PG
2
PG
1
FG
LCCNT-0
CN303
CLKC-1A
A1
CLKB-1A
A2
SCSWC-0A
A3
DRV7-1A
A4
DRV6-1A
A5
DRV5-1A
A6
DRV4-1A
A7
DRV3-1A
A8
DRV2-1A
A9
DRV1-1A
A10
DRV0-1A
A11
PFRST-0
A12
+5.1VB
A13
SG
A14
+24VD1
A15
+24VD1
A16
PG
B1
PG
B2
SIZE0-0A
B3
SIZE1-0A
B4
SIZE2-0A
B5
SIZE3-0A
B6
RETS0-0A
B7
RETS1-0A
B8
RETS2-0A
B9
RETS3-0A
B10
RETS4-0A
B11
RETS5-0A
B12
RETS6-0A
B13
RETS7-0A
B14
SCSWB-0A
B15
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
TSIZE3
TSIZE2
TSIZE1
TSIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
+24VD2
CTRON-0A
CTRCNT-0
MCRUM-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/FO00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMVR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
+5.1VB
HMS-1A
SG
TEMP-1
NC
+24VD2
B7
SPFN-0A
B8
NC
B9
NC
B10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
CN317
ATSSW-0
A1
ATSVR-1A
A2
+24VD2
A3
ATS-1A
A4
SG
A5
SG
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
J557
J577
J576
J517
J516
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
PS-HVT
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CURGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
5
4
3
2
1
J203
PWAF-SNS
M/DC-POL
EMPU-SNR
EMPL-SNR
NEMPU-SNR
NEMPL-SNR
J515
1
TRY-MOT
2
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-LFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-L2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-UFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-U2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PWA-F-LDR
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN201
1
2
3
CN202
POMCK-0
POMPL-0
POMON-0
PG
+24VD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
3
2
1
6
5
8
7
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
B8
B9
B10
J556
B3
B2
B1
B4
B5
B6
B7
B1
B2
B3
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
NC
A9
NC
A10
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A2
A1
A4
A3
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
2
1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
J538
J535
3
4
1
2
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
THMSDRM
J540
+5.1VB
1
HMS-1A
2
TEMP/
SG
3 HUMI-SNR
TEMP-1
4
J541
RSTSW-0A
2
MAIN-SW
+24VD2
(RESET)
1
J543
FRDSW-0
2
FRNTSG
COV-SW
1
J534
+24VD2
2
LP-ERS
ERSLP-0A
1
J503
+24VD2
1
SPSPFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J504
+24VD2
1
EXTEXTFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J539
+24VD2
1
MIDMIDFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J562
SG
1
TBNFL-1
USD-TNR2
FLL-SNR2
+5.1VB
3
J547
DRTH-0A
2
SG
1
J546
ATSVR-1A
1
+24VD2
2
ATTNR-SNR
ATS-1A
3
SG
4
CHARGER CASE BIAS
1 SEPARATION BIAS
OUT6 1
FG
1 TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS
OUT5 1
1 DEVELOPER BIAS
1 TRANSFER BIAS
1 MAIN CHARGER GRID

OUT3 1
OUT4 1
1 MAIN CHARGER WIRE

OUT2 1
OUT1 1
J524
1
CST-L-SW
2
J514
1
CST-U-SW
2
J522
1
CST-TRH-CLT
2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
CN206
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
NC
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
NC
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN207
BDIN -1
3
SG
2
+5.1VB
1
1
2
3
4
5
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
CN551
NC
NC
NC
NC
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J529
Key copy counter
Option
J523
1
CST-TRL-CLT
2
SG
A11
CLSW-0
A12
NC
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
5
4
3
2
1
CN204
4
3
2
1
J532
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
SG
A9
CUSW-0
A10
A7
A8
A5
A6
CN306
NC
A1
NC
A2
CLTRM-0A
A3
CLTRM-1A
A4
SG
B9
CLFLS-0
B10
+5.1VB
B11
B7
B8
B4
B5
B6
B1
B1
B3
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
A9
CUFLS-1
A10
+5.1VB
A11
A7
A8
A4
A5
A6
CN305
SG
A1
CUEMP-1
A2
+5.1VB
A3
CN309
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
BDIN-1
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
+5.1VB
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN308
POMPL-0
1
POMON-0A
2
POMCK-0A
3
PG
4
+24VD1
5
CN315
NC
1
SG
2
KCTRC-0
3
+24VD2
4
KCTRO-0
5
NC
6
PWA-F-LRL
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
RDX
CS0-A
CS0-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
/CS
+3.3VA
RMSL
/WRX
SG
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
07/11
IPC board
1st drawer
2nd drawer
10.4 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
10.5 Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> MAIN-MOT, PS-ACC(CN414)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
PG
PG
Name
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
Active
-
CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> JOB SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET

TRAY (OPTION)/BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION), IH-FAN-MOT, EXITMOT, FUS-FAN-MOT, EXIT-SNR,THMS-S-HTR, THMS-C-HTR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
B1
B2
Symbol
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1
SG
+24VD2
FUSFN-0A
+24VD2
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
B3
RLHSW-0
B4
RLTRS-0
B5
B6
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
Name
Paper exit unit connection detection signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Exit sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Fuser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
+24V
+24V
Exit motor drive signal-A
Exit motor drive signal-B
Exit motor drive signal-C
Exit motor drive signal-D
+5V
Not used
+5V
Job separator: lower stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: stack sensor detection signal
Job separator: paper jam sensor detection signal
Offset tray: paper feed sensor detection signal
Job separator/offset tray connection detection signal
Not used
B7
OPCHK1
Job separator/offset tray judgment signal
B8
B9
RLCSW-0
SG
B10
JFSL2ON
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
+24VD2
IHFN-0A
Job separator/offset tray cover switch detection signal

Signal ground
Job separator: upper stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: separation sensor detection signal
Solenoid driving signal
+24V
Power ground
+24V
IH board cooling fan motor drive signal
B18
CPSW2-0
e-STUDIO350/450 judgment signal
B19
SG
Signal ground
Active
H
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
-
L
L: Offset tray
H: Job separator
L
L: e-STUDIO350
H: e-STUDIO450
-
CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
Symbol
CLKC-1A
CLKB-1A
SCSWC-0A
DRV7-1A
DRV6-1A
DRV5-1A
DRV4-1A
DRV3-1A
DRV2-1A
DRV1-1A
DRV0-1A
PFRST-0
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
SIZE0-0A
SIZE1-0A
SIZE2-0A
SIZE3-0A
RETS0-0A
RETS1-0A
RETS2-0A
RETS3-0A
RETS4-0A
RETS5-0A
RETS6-0A
RETS7-0A
SCSWB-0A
LCCNT-0
Name
Reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Size data bus-0
Size data bus-1
Size data bus-2
Size data bus-3
LCF connection signal
Active
L
CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWAF-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
Symbol
PG
PG
+24VD1
+24VD1
ADM2D-0A
ADM2B-0A
ADM2C-0A
ADM2A-0A
CRT-DOWN
ADTR2-1
+5.1VB
SG
ADCNT-1
ADTR1-1
ADCOV-1
+24VD1
ADUCL-0
NC
SG
SG
SFBZ0
SFBZ1
SFBZ2
SFBZ3
+5.1VB
SFBSW-1
SG
+24VD1
FFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SOLSFB-0A
SG
SFDFED-1
+5.1VB
SFBSW
NC
Name
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
ADU motor control signal
+5V
Signal ground
ADU connection detection signal
ADU opening/closing switch detection signal
+24V
ADU clutch drive signal
Not connected
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Bypass feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal
Signal ground
Bypass feed sensor detection signal
+5V
SFB connection detection signal
Not connected
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-UFEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-LFEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
Symbol
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUFLS-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
+5V
Active
-
CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> PS-HVT (CN551), TRY-MOT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-H-CLT, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
Symbol
NC
NC
CLTRM-0A
CLTRM-1A
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUSW-0
SG
CLSW-0
NC
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
Name
Not connected
Not connected
Tray-up motor drive signal +
Tray-up motor drive signal Transport clutch (low speed) drive signal
+24V
Transport clutch (high speed) drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer detection switch signal
Signal ground
Lower drawer detection switch signal
Not connected
Not connected
+24V
Power ground
Drum main charger grid voltage ON/OFF signal
Drum main charger grid output reference voltage
Developer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Developer bias high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer belt high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Transfer belt high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage output reference voltage
High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal
Active
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
-
CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> PS-ACC (CN413, 414), LSU-FAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWREN-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
+24VD1
POLFN-0A
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> M/DC-POL

Pin No
1
Symbol
POMPL-0
Name
Polygonal motor PLL signal
POMON-0A
Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal
3
4
5
POMCK-0A
PG
+24VD1
Polygonal motor reference clock signal

Power ground
+24V
CN309 PWA-F-LGC (CN309) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
BDIN-1
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
+5.1VB
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
APC write signal
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
CS2-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
ROMLD-1
Name
ROM data bus [0]

ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM address bus [0]
ROM address bus [2]
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
ROM address bus [1]
ROM address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
+5V
CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> IPC BOARD (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/O00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
System data bus [0]
System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
Signal ground
Write signal
Chip select signal to IP2
+5V
IPC connection detection signal
Signal ground
+5V
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
Signal ground
Output enable signal
IPC reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
Active
L
-
Active
L: Normal
L: ON
H: OFF
-
Active
-
Active
L
L
L
Active
L
-
CN314 PWA-F-LGC (CN314) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY

KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Symbol
+24VD2
CTRON-0
CTRCNT-0
MCRUN-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
Name
+24V
Total counter ON signal
Copy permitting signal
Copying operation signal
Exit sensor ON signal
Power ground
Black and white mode counter ON signal
Mono-color mode counter ON signal
Full color mode counter ON signal
Signal ground
Paper size signal-3
Paper size signal-2
Paper size signal-1
Paper size signal-0
+5V
Copy key card detection signal
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN315 PWA-F-LGC (CN315) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
NC
SG
KCTRC-0
+24VD2
KCTR0-0
NC
Name
Not connected
Signal ground
Key copy counter/Copy key card connection detection signal
+24V
Key copy counter ON signal
Not connected
CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> PS-IH

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Symbol
IH2ON-0A
+5V SW
H1PWR1-0
H1PWR2-0
H1PWR3-0
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
H2PWR1-0
H2PWR2-0
H2PWR3-0
IH1ON-0A
SG
IH DUTY
H1 ERR1-0
H1 ERR2-0
Name
IH2 ON/OFF signal
+5V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
IH1 ON/OFF signal
Signal ground
IH1/2 duty control signal
Active
L
-
Active
H
H
-
CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, USD-TNRFLL-SNR2, MID-FAN-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, SP-FAN-MOT, LPERS, FRNT-COV-SW, MAIN-SW, TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Symbol
ATSSW-0
ATSVR-1A
+24VD2
ATS-1A
SG
SG
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
+24VD2
SPFN0A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
HMS-1A
SG
TEMP-1
NC
Name
Auto toner sensor connection detection signal
Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage
+24V
Black auto-toner sensor detection signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Drum thermistor detection signal
Signal ground
Front cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Reset signal from the main switch
+24V
Signal ground
+5V
+24V
Exposure lamp drive signal
+24V
Middle fan motor drive signal
+24V
Exhaust fan motor drive signal
+24V
Sub-separation fan motor drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Humidity sensor signal
Signal ground
Temperature sensor signal
Not connected
Active
L
Analog
Analog
Analog
L
Analog
Analog
-
CN318 PWA-F-LGC (CN318) <-> MAIN-MOT, DEV-FAN-MOT1, DEV-CLT,

TNR-MOT, RGT-CLT, RGST-SNR, FED-U-SNR, FED-L-SNR, SIDECOV-SW, TNR-SW, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1
Pin No
A1
Symbol
MAMPL-1
Name
Main motor PLL signal
A2
MAMBK-0A
Main motor brake signal
A3
MAMCW-0A
Main motor rotational direction signal
A4
MAMON-0A
Main motor ON/OFF signal
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
SG
+5.1VB
MAMCK-1A
+24VD2
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
DEVCL-OA
TNRMT-0A
TNRMT-1A
+24VD2
RGTCL-0A
NC
NC
SG
PSTPC-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFED-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLFED-1
+5.1VB
SDCSW-1
SG
SG
BTLSW-1
SG
TBFL-1
+5.1VB
NC
Signal ground
+5V
Main motor reference clock signal
+24V
+24V
Developer drive clutch drive signal
+24V
Registration clutch drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Registration sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Side cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Toner cartridge switch signal
Signal ground
+5V
Not connected
CN320 PWA-F-LGC (CN320) <-> DEV-FAN-MOT2

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD2
DV2FN-0A
Name
+24V
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Symbol
SYSRST
SCTS
STXD
SRXD
SRTS
SCNT
SG
SVDEN
SDCLK
SHDEN
SG
SG
SCD7
SCD6
SCD5
SCD4
SCD3
SCD2
SCD1
SCD0
Name
System reset signal

Transmission enabled
Transmitted SLG data
Received SLG data
SLG board connection detection signal
Signal ground
Clock signal for scanning data transmission
Signal ground
Signal ground
Scanning data [7]
Scanning data [6]
Scanning data [5]
Scanning data [4]
Scanning data [3]
Scanning data [2]
Scanning data [1]
Scanning data [0]
Active
L: Normal
L: Braking
H: Normal
L: CW
H: CCW
L: ON
H: OFF
-
Active
-
Active
-
CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> FAX BOARD (CN701) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
+5.1VB
DA1
+5.1VB
DD0
+5.1VB
DD3
+5.1VB
DD6
+5.1VB
DD9
SG
DD12
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VB
INTRQ
+3.3VB
+5.1VA
-12VB
SG
+12VB
DA0
DA2
IDECS
DD1
DD2
DD4
DD5
DD7
DD8
DD10
DD11
DD13
DD14
DD15
/DIOR
/DIOW
/DMACK
/DLDCS0
/RESET
DMARQ
NC
FXWP
SG
SG
NC
Name
+5V
IDE Address [1]
+5V
FAX data bus [0]
+5V
FAX data bus [3]
+5V
FAX data bus [6]
+5V
FAX data bus [9]
Signal ground
FAX data bus [12]
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
IDE Interrupt request signal
+3.3V
+5V
-12V
Signal ground
+12V
IDE Address [0]
IDE Address [2]
IDE chip select signal
FAX data bus [1]
FAX data bus [2]
FAX data bus [4]
FAX data bus [5]
FAX data bus [7]
FAX data bus [8]
FAX data bus [10]
FAX data bus [11]
FAX data bus [13]
FAX data bus [14]
FAX data bus [15]
IDE I/O read signal
IDE I/O write signal
Chip select signal
Reset signal
DMA request signal
Not connected
FAX wake-up signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not connected
CN104 PWA-F-SYS (CN104) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WF-1A
YD-1A
INVGND
BZON-0A
CPPOW-1A
LDCLK-1A
LDDAT-1A
LDLTH-1A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
CPRST-0A
SG
RTS0-0A
CTS0-0A
SOUT(0)
SIN(0)
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
Name
LCD frame signal
Signal ground
Buzzer-ON signal
Panel connection detection signal
LED serial clock
LED serial data
LED data latch signal
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Reset signal
Signal ground
Key controller SIO Transmission request signal
Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal
Key controller SIO transmitted serial data
Key controller SIO received serial data
Signal ground
LCD display data-3
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-0
Signal ground
LCD enable signal
Active
L
-
Active
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
CN107 PWA-F-SYS (CN107) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY

KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Symbol
L/S
FULL-C
MONO-C
B/W
+5.1VA
SG
NC
Name
Paper size signal

Full-color mode signal
Mono-color mode signal
Black and white mode signal
+5V
Signal ground
Not connected
CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
RDX
CS0-A
CS0-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
/CS0
+3.3VA
RMSL
/WRX
SG
SG
Name
System data bus [0]

System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
System data bus [8]
System read signal
Chip select signal (0-A)
Chip select signal (0-B)
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
System data bus [9]
Chip select signal
+3.3V
System control signal
System write signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
CN105 PWA-F-SYS (CN105) <-> DDR DIMM

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
Symbol
VREF
DQ0
SG
DQ1
DQS0
DQ2
VDD
DQ3
NC
NC
SG
DQ8
DQ9
DQS1
VDD
CK1
/CK1
SG
DQ10
DQ11
CKE0
VDD
DQ16
DQ17
DQS2
SG
A9
DQ18
A7
VDD
DQ19
A5
DQ24
SG
DQ25
DQS3
A4
VDD
DQ26
DQ27
A2
SG
A1
CB0
CB1
VDD
DQS8
A0
CB2
SG
CB3
BA1
DQ32
VDD
DQ33
DQS4
DQ34
SG
BA0
DQ35
DQ40
VDD
/WE
DQ41
/CAS
SG
DQS5
DQ42
DQ43
VDD
NC
DQ48
DQ49
SG
/CK2
CK2
VDD
DQS6
DQ50
DQ51
SG
VDD-ID
DQ56
DQ57
VDD
DQS7
DQ58
DQ59
SG
WP
SDA
SCL
SG
DQ4
DQ5
VDD
DM0
DQ6
DQ7
SG
NC
NC
NC
VDD
DQ12
DQ13
DM1
VDD
DQ14
DQ15
CKE1
VDD
NC
DQ20
A12
SG
DQ21
A11
DM2
VDD
DQ22
A8
DQ23
SG
A6
DQ28
DQ29
VDD
DM3
A3
DQ30
SG
DQ31
CB4
CB5
VDD
CK0
/CK0
SG
DM8
A10
CB6
VDD
CB7
SG
DQ36
DQ37
VDD
DM4
DQ38
DQ39
SG
DQ44
/RAS
DQ45
VDD
/CS0
/CS1
DM5
SG
DQ46
DQ47
NC
VDD
DQ52
DQ53
NC
VDD
DM6
DQ54
DQ55
VDD
NC
DQ60
DQ61
SG
DM7
DQ62
DQ63
VDD
SA0
SA1
SA2
+3.3VA
Name
Reference voltage
Memory data bus [0]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [1]
Data strobe signal [0]
Memory data bus [2]
+2.5V
Memory data bus [3]
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory data bus [8]
Memory data bus [9]
+2.5V
Clock-1 input
Differential clock-1 input
Signal ground
Clock enable signal
+2.5V
Signal ground
+2.5V
Signal ground
+2.5V
Signal ground
Not used
Not used
+2.5V
Not used
Signal ground
Not used
Bank select-1
+2.5V
Signal ground
Bank select-0
+2.5V
Data write enable signal
Column address strobe signal
Signal ground
+2.5V
Not connected
Signal ground
Clock-2 input
+2.5V
Signal ground
Not used
+2.5V
Signal ground
Not connected
Presence-detect serial data
Presence-detect serial clock
Signal ground
Memory data bus [4]
Memory data bus [5]
+2.5V
Data write mask signal [0]
Memory data bus [6]
Memory data bus [7]
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
+2.5V
+2.5V
Clock enable signal
+2.5V
Not connected
Signal ground
+2.5V
Signal ground
+2.5V
Signal ground
Not used
Not used
+2.5V
Clock-0 input
Signal ground
Not used
+2.5V
Not used
Signal ground
+2.5V
Signal ground
Row address strobe signal
+2.5V
Signal ground
Not connected
+2.5V
Not connected
+2.5V
+2.5V
Not connected
Signal ground
+2.5V
Presence-detect address [0]
+3.3V
CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN321)

Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
Symbol
+5.1VB
CBSY-0
CMD-0
SACK-0
SERR-0
SBSY-0
STS-0
CACK-0
CERR-0
SG
SG
SG
IRCLK-1
SG
HSYNC-0
SG
VSYNC-0
MCNT-1
SYSRST-0
IDATX[0]
IDATX[1]
IDATX[2]
IDATX[3]
IDATX[4]
IDATX[5]
IDATX[6]
IDATX[7]
SG
IDCLK-1
SG
IHDEN-0
SG
IVDEN-0
+3.3VB
Name
+5V
System command busy
Command data
System status acknowledge signal
System status error signal
System status busy signal
Status data
System command acknowledge signal
System command error signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Clock signal input for image data transmission
Signal ground
Signal ground
LGC board connection detection signal
System reset signal
Signal ground
Clock signal output for image data transmission
Signal ground
Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction
Signal ground
Data enable of the vertical scanning direction
+3.3V
CN110 PWA-F-SYS (CN110) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
TXD+
TXDRXIN+
GND
GND
RXINGND
GND
Name
Transmitted data +
Transmitted data Received data +
Not used
Not used
Received data Not used
Not used
CN111 PWA-F-SYS (CN111) <-> INTERNAL USB CONNECTOR

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
VBUS
D0D0+
SG
VBUS
D1D1+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Symbol
/RESET
SG
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
SG
NC(KEY)
MDARQ
SG
/DIOW
SG
/DIOR
SG
IORDY
SG
/DMACK
SG
INTRQ
RESERVED
DA1
/PDIAG
DA0
DA2
/CS0
/CS1
/DASP
SG
Name
Reset signal
Signal ground
Data bus [7]
Data bus [8]
Data bus [6]
Data bus [9]
Data bus [5]
Data bus [10]
Data bus [4]
Data bus [11]
Data bus [3]
Data bus [12]
Data bus [2]
Data bus [13]
Data bus [1]
Data bus [14]
Data bus [0]
Data bus [15]
Signal ground
Not connected
DMA request signal
Signal ground
I/O write signal
Signal ground
I/O read signal
Signal ground
I/O ready signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Interrupt request signal
Reserve signal
Device address [1]
Passed diagnostics
Device address [0]
Device address [2]
Chip select-0
Chip select-1
Device active or slave present signal
Signal ground
CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> BLUETOOTH MODULE

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Symbol
VDD
NC
NC
DD+
NC
NC
DETACH
NC
SG
NC
NC
/RESET
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
Name
+5V
Not connected
Not connected
Serial data
Serial data
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
Reset signal
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
CN114 PWA-F-SYS (CN114) <-> USB CONNECTOR (HOST)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
VBUS
D0D0+
SG
VBUS
D1D1+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
-
CN115 PWA-F-SYS (CN115) <-> USB CONNECTOR (DEVICE)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
VBUS
DD+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> HDD-FAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+12V
SG
Name
+12V
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> WIRELESS LAN MODULE (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
Symbol
TIP
RING
8PMJ-3
8PMJ-1
8PMJ-6
8PMJ-2
8PMJ-7
8PMJ-4
8PMJ-8
8PMJ-5
LED1 GRNP
LED2 YELP
ENABLE/DISABLE
LED2 YELN
CHSGND
RSV
INTB#
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
INTA#
RSV
RSV
SG
+3.3VA
CLK
RST#
SG
+3.3VA
REQ#
GNT#
+3.3VA
SG
AD[31]
PME#
AD[29]
RSV
SG
AD[30]
AD[27]
+3.3VA
AD[25]
AD[28]
RSV
AD[26]
C/BE(3]#
AD[24]
AD[23]
IDSEL
SG
SG
AD[21]
AD[22]
AD[19]
AD[20]
SG
PAR
AD[17]
AD[18]
C/BE(2)#
AD[16]
IRDY#
SG
+3.3VA
FRAME#
CLKRUN#
TRDY#
SERR#
STOP#
SG
+3.3VA
PERR#
DEVSEL#
C/BE(1)#
SG
AD[14]
AD[15]
SG
AD[13]
AD[12]
AD[11]
AD[10]
SG
SG
AD[9]
AD[8]
C/BE(0)#
AD[7]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[5]
AD[4]
RSV
AD[2]
AD[3]
AD[0]
+5.1VA
RSV WIP
AD[1]
RSV WIP
SG
SG
AC SYNC
M66EN
AC SDATA IN
AC SDATA
OUT
AC BIT CLK
AC CODEC
ID0#
AC CODEC
ID1#
AC RESET#
MOD AUDIO
MON
RSV
AUDIO GND
SG
SYS AUDIO
OUT
SYS AUDIO
IN
SYS AUDIO
OUT GND
SYS AUDIO
IN GND
AUDIO GND
AUDIO GND
RSV
MPCIACT#
VCC5VA
+3.3VA
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Wireless LAN enable signal
Not used
Signal ground
Not used
Interrupt request-B
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-A
Not used
Not used
Signal ground
+3.3V
PCI clock
Reset signal
Signal ground
+3.3V
Data request signal
Grant
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
Not used
Signal ground
+3.3V
Not used
Wireless LNA IDselect sIgnal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Parity
Initiator ready
Signal ground
+3.3V
Cycle frame
Signal ground
Target ready
System Error
Stop
Signal ground
+3.3V
Data parity Error
Device select
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Not used
+5V
Not used
Not used
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not used
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
Symbol
+12VA
SG
SG
+5.1VA
Symbol
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
-12VA
-12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
IDSEL0
OPBINT(0)
SG
IDSEL0
SG
PCICLK(3)
SG
REQ(1)#
REQ(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE(3]#
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE(2)#
SG
IRDY#
+3.3VA
DEVSEL#
SG
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3VA
SERR#
+3.3VA
C/BE(1)#
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
AD[8]
AD[7]
+3.3VA
AD[5]
AD[3]
SG
AD[1]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
+12VA
+12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(1)
+3.3VA
PCIRST#
+3.3VA
PCICLK(4)
+3.3VA
GNT(1)#
GNT(0)#
SG
PME#
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME#
SG
TRDY#
SG
STOP#
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[9]
SG
C/BE(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[4]
SG
AD[2]
AD[0]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
Symbol
-12VA
SG
NC
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN7
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN9
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
+3.3V
Name
+12V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
Active
-
Name
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
-12V
-12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
PCI slot-0 IDselect sIgnal
Interrupt request-0
Signal ground
PCI slot-1 IDselect sIgnal
Signal ground
PCI clock-3
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Initiator ready
+3.3V
Device select
Signal ground
+3.3V
Data parity Error
+3.3V
System Error
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+5V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
+12V
+12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-1
+3.3V
PCI reset signal
+3.3V
PCI clock-4
+3.3V
Grant-1
Grant-0
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Ground
+3.3V
Cycle frame
Signal ground
Target ready
Signal ground
Stop
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Parity
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
Name
-12V
Signal ground
Not connected
Active
-
Name
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
CCD RS signal
Signal ground
CCD CP signal
Signal ground
CCD TG signal
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2B
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2A
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-1A
Signal ground
CCD even data
Signal ground
CCD odd data
Signal ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
+12V
+12V
+12V
PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR

Symbol
SG
PLTN-1A
+5V
SG
HOME-1A
+5V
Name
Signal ground
Platen sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Carriage home position sensor detection signal
+5V
PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)

Symbol
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
Name
RADF acknowledge signal
VARID signal from RADF
Signal ground
RADF transmitted serial data
Signal ground
Acknowledge signal from RADF
Request signal from RADF
RADF request signal
RADF connection detection signal
PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)

Symbol
PG
PG
LMPON-A
+24VD4
+24VD4
Name
Power ground
Power ground
Exposure lamp ON signal
+24V
+24V
Symbol
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APSC-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS3-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS2-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS1-0A
SG
Name
Not connected
+24V(Reserved)
Not connected
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
Symbol
SCNM-BB
+24VD4
SCNM-B
SCNM-AB
+24VD4
SCNM-A
Name
+24V
+24V
CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)
24
Not used
Not used
Signal ground
Symbol
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
CCDRS
SG
CCDCP
SG
CCDSH
SG
CCDCK2B
SG
CCDCK2A
SG
CCDCK1A
SG
CCD-EVEN
SG
CCD-ODD
SG
AG
AG
AG
+12VB
+12VB
+12VB
CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT
Not used
PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14)
CN2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD
(PNCNT)DLA
D[0]
(SSW)DLAD
[2]
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
CS02-0
(PNCNT)DLA
D[1]
(MER)DLAD
[3]
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
LED
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
Active
-
07/11
Active
-
Active
-
Active
H
-
Symbol
-
NC
NC
-
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
NC
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
NC
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
D/L address bus [1]
D/L address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]

ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
ROM select signal
+5V
LED drive signal
CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202)

Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
BDIN-1
Name
+5V
Signal ground
CN412 PS-ACC (CN412) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN120)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Symbol
PWR-EN
PWR-DN
Reserved
(-12VB)
SG
+12VB
SG
+12VA
SG
Reserved
(-12VA)
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VB
+5.1VA
Active
-
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not used
Signal ground
Signal ground
APC write signal
Not used
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Name
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
L
L
-12V (Reserved)
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
-12V (Reserved)
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
CN413 PS-ACC (CN413) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN307), PWA-F-FIL (CN495)/

PWA-F-FUS (CN431)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWRFN-0A
+5.1VB
SG
+24VB
PG
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
CN414 PS-ACC (CN414) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN301, CN307)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
Active
L
-
Active
-
CN415 PS-ACC (CN415) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN36), RADF (CN1) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Symbol
+24VD3
+24VD3
PG
PG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+24VD4
+24VD4
PG
PG
NC
NC
+12VB
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Not connected
Not connected
+12V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
CN416 PS-ACC (CN416) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD5
PG
Name
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
CN418 PS-ACC (CN418) <-> PS-FAN-MOT

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD1
PWRFN-0A
Name
+24V
OUT1 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> MAIN CHARGER WIRE

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to main charger wire
OUT2 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> MAIN CHARGER GRID

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to main charger grid
OUT3 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to developer charger bias
OUT4 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> TRANSFER BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer charger bias
Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer guide bias
OUT6 PS-HVT (OUT6) <-> SEPARATION BIAS

Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to separation charger bias
Symbol
YD
KL
XR
YU
Name
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (L)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (R)
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U)
J423
PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT
J424
J425
J426
Pin No
1
2
3
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Symbol
CCFL+
NC
CCFL-
Symbol
FRAME
LAOD
CP
SG
+5.1VA
SG
VEE
/D.OFF
D0
D1
D2
D3
Symbol
LDFC-1
LDFC-2
LDFC-4
LDFC-5
LDFC-6
LDFC-7
LDFC-8
LDFC-9
LDFC-10
LDFC-11
LDFC-12
LDFC-13
LDFC-15
LDON0
LDON1
SG
Symbol
SCN15
SCN14
SCN13
SCN12
SCN11
RET0
RET1
RET2
RET3
RET8
RET9
Name
High-voltage terminal (High)
Not connected
high-voltage terminal (Low)
Name
Ground
+5V
Signal ground
Ground
LCD enable signal
LCD display data-0
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-3
Name
Signal ground
Name
CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW
ROM address bus [4]

ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201)
Active
-
Name
Not connected
Not connected
Pin No
1
2
3
4
CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR
D/L address bus [2]
INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO
J422
Active
-
D/L address bus [0]
OUT5 PS-HVT (OUT5) <-> TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS

Active
-
Active
-
CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3,
APS4, APS5
CN122 PWA-F-SYS (CN122) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
CN2
Signal ground
CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN801)/SCRAMBLER BOARD

(OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Signal ground
CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> HDD (CN171)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
Active
-
CN1
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFL
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
+5V
CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR

Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFU
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
+5V
CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD2
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
+24VD2
Symbol
SG
COVSW
Name
+24V
+24V
Name
Signal ground
ADU opening/closing detection signal
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
Active
-
CN401 FAX BOARD (CN401) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (CN812)
(OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
NC
+12VB
-12VB
NC
NC
NC
AG
SG
Name
Not connected
+12V
-12V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Analog ground
Signal ground
CN501 FAX BOARD (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHO OK
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
Name
Received FAX data
RG relay drive signal
-3db ATT exchange signal
MODEM select signal
MODEM select signal
Not used
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detection
Internal telephone hook signal
External telephone hook signal
+5V
Anlog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Power ground
CN502 FAX BOARD (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
NC
NC
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
NC
Name
Received FAX data
Not used
-3 db ATT exchange signal
Modem select signal
Modem select signal
Not used
Signal ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detect
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Analog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not connected
Active
-
Active
L
L
-
Active
L
L
-
CN503 FAX BOARD (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
Symbol
SP+
SP-
Name
Speaker output (+)

Speaker output (-)
CN600 FAX BOARD (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Symbol
TXOUT2
+5VA
+12VB
+3.3VB
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS-0
+5.1VB
MEMRD2-0
CLKOE-1
TXEN2-1
+5.1VB
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5.1VB
CEP1RST-0
+5.1VB
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
SG
MOD2DET-0
SG
DREQC2-1
DACKC2-0
RXIN2
AG
-12VB
AG
MOD2INT-1
MOD2CS-0
MOD2RST-0
SG
RXEN2-1
MEMWRH2-0
MEMWRL2-0
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CPURST-0
CEP2INT-1
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
IORD2-0
IOWR2-0
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
CEP2CS-0
DREQD2-1
DACKD2-0
Name
Transmitted data
+5V
+12V
+3.3V
Modem 2 DMA signal
Signal ground
SRAM chip select signal
+5V
SRAM data read signal
Clock out enable signal
TX enable signal
+5V
MDM address bus [8]
MDM address bus [6]
MDM address bus [4]
MDM address bus [2]
MDM address bus [0]
+5V
CEP1 reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
System clock signal
Signal ground
MDM data bus [0]
MDM data bus [2]
MDM data bus [4]
MDM data bus [6]
MDM data bus [8]
MDM data bus [10]
MDM data bus [12]
MDM data bus [14]
Signal ground
Modem 2 detection signal
Signal ground
Data request signal
Received data
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
Modem 2 interrupt signal
Modem 2 chip select signal
Modem 2 reset signal
Signal ground
RX enable signal
SRAM high byte write signal
SRAM low byte write signal
MDM address bus [9]
MDM address bus [7]
MDM address bus [5]
MDM address bus [3]
MDM address bus [1]
CPU reset signal
CEP2 interrupt signal
+5V
+5V
MDM data read signal
MDM data write signal
MDM data bus [1]
MDM data bus [3]
MDM data bus [5]
MDM data bus [7]
MDM data bus [9]
MDM data bus [11]
MDM data bus [13]
MDM data bus [15]
+5V
+5V
CEP2 chip select signal
Data request signal
Active
-
CN602 FAX BOARD (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)

Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
+5.1VB
LEDDL-0
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM address bus [0]
ROM address bus [2]
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
ROM address bus [1]
ROM address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
+5V
Active
L
L
CN702 FAX BOARD (CN702) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (CN811)
(OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
J600
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
+24V
PG
NC
Name
+24V
Power ground
Not connected
IPC BOARD (J600) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)

Symbol
RXD
SG
TXD
SG
NC
NC
NC
NC
F-CNT
CNT-GND
Name
Receiver serial data
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Finisher connection detection signal
Ground
Active
-
Active
L
-

352 353 452 453 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

352 353 452 453 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SERVICE HANDBOOK

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION

1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES .................................. 1-1

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1

3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-28

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1

5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1

6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1

REMOTE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 8-1

9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .......... 9-1

AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)

Double - sided originals

Copy speed (Copies/min.)

means Not acceptable.

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

System copy speed

These special paper

y First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352/353: Approx. 3.9sec. or less

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

y Paper feeding ....................... Automatic feeding:

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

NONE: North America

NONE: North America

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2nd Line for

Hole Punch Unit

Data overwrite kit

Key Copy Counter

Hole Punch Unit

2nd Line for

Hole Punch Unit

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Error Code List

Other paper jam

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Paper transport jam

PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Paper transport jam

Cover open jam

Paper transport jam

Other paper jam

LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower

2003 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Finisher jam (Bridge

Job separator jam

Offset tray jam